Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 932

Low voltage

Control and protection components


Catalogue 2011/2012

Product reference index

80

504pp 490 NAD 911 pp 490 NTW 000 ppp A AB1 AB8ppp AB1 AC6BL AB1 BCppppp AB1 DV10235U AB1 DVM10235U AB1 Gp

6/88 1/97, 6/89 6/89 1/41, 1/49 2/12, 2/14 1/41, 1/49 1/211 1/211 1/211, 4/30, 4/33, 5/25, 6/51, 6/89, 7/7 5/25 1/211, 4/30, 4/33, 6/51, 6/89, 7/7 2/12, 2/14 1/79, 1/197 1/49 1/49 1/49, 5/186 1/41, 1/49 1/49, 5/186 1/207 1/211 1/210 1/66, 1/210 1/211 1/210 1/211 1/211 1/49, 1/210, 5/186 1/41 1/197 1/197 1/81 1/140 1/130 1/140 1/141 1/141 1/141 1/79 1/28 7/4 7/12 7/4 7/12 7/5 1/41, 1/47 5/241, 5/250 5/241, 5/250 5/250 5/250 5/241, 5/250

D DA1 TSppp DA1 TTppp DE1 DSpppp DE1 LT315 DF1p pppp DF2 pppppp DF22 pppp DF3 pppp DF4 pppppp DF8 ppp DFCC pp DK1 pppp DR2 SCpppp 6/51 6/51, 6/88 2/41 2/52, 2/60 4/29, 4/30 4/72 to 4/75 4/29, 4/30 4/72 and 4/74 4/73 and 4/75 4/29, 4/30 4/33 4/37 5/138, 5/139, 5/188, 5/189, 5/190, 5/191, 5/257 5/135 5/188, 5/189, 5/190, 5/191, 5/257 5/135 5/259 5/259 6/25, 7/7, 5/25 5/124 6/42 5/259 5/186, 5/251 5/279, 5/293 5/279, 5/293 5/279, 5/293 5/279, 5/293 1/41, 1/47, 3/94 3/94 3/95 3/94 5/278 5/286 1/30, 4/36, 4/37 3/57, 3/65 3/53, 3/65 4/59, 4/69 4/59 4/61 4/59, 4/69 4/59, 4/69 4/61 4/61

GS1 DDpp

1/24, 1/31, 1/32, 1/33, 4/53, 4/55, 4/57, 4/68, 6/96 4/68 4/55 4/55 4/55 4/55 4/55 4/55 4/55 4/53 4/59, 4/61, 4/69 4/60, 4/70 4/59 4/60, 4/61, 4/70, 4/71 4/61, 4/71 4/61 4/57 4/68 4/53 1/32, 1/33, 4/53, 4/57, 4/68 4/53, 4/57 4/53 1/32, 1/33, 4/53, 4/57, 1/32, 1/33, 4/57, 4/68 1/32, 1/33, 4/53, 4/57, 4/57 1/32, 1/33, 4/53, 4/57, 4/68 1/24, 1/25, 1/30, 1/31, 1/32, 1/33, 4/53, 4/55, 4/57, 4/68, 6/96, 6/99 4/57, 4/68 1/24, 1/31, 4/53, 4/55, 4/57, 6/96 1/24, 1/25, 1/31, 6/96, 6/99 6/99 1/24, 1/25, 1/31, 6/96, 6/99 1/30, 6/96 1/25, 6/99 1/24, 1/25, 1/30, 1/31, 6/96, 6/99 1/24, 1/25, 1/30, 1/31, 6/96, 6/99 1/24, 1/25, 1/30, 1/31, 6/96, 6/99 3/55, 3/61

GV AEppp GV AMppp GV Apppp GV APppp GV AXppp GV NGCpppp GV1 F03 GV1 Gpp GV1 L3 GV1 V02 GV2 AFpp GV2 AK00 GV2 AP03 GV2 APNpp GV2 Apppp GV2 AXppp GV2 CP21 GV2 DMppppp GV2 DPppppp GV2 Epp GV2 Gppp GV2 Kppp GV2 Lpp GV2 LCpppp GV2 LEpp GV2 MCppp GV2 MEpppppp

3/47, 3/55, 3/61, 4/37 3/47, 3/55, 3/61 3/55, 3/61 1/68, 3/58, 3/62, 3/55 2/18 3/57 1/66, 3/57, 5/85, 4/39, 3/55 3/65 1/7 to 1/11, 3/57, 4/39 3/55 3/51, 3/58 3/58 2/15 2/15 2/12 1/8, 1/9 1/10, 1/11 2/12, 2/14, 2/30 1/66, 3/57, 4/39, 5/85 2/12, 2/14, 2/15, 2/30 1/20, 1/29, 3/53, 6/97 2/18 1/20, 1/28, 3/52, 2/12, 2/14, 2/15 1/6, 1/7, 1/16, 1/17, 1/26, 3/46, 3/47 2/15 2/12 1/17, 1/27, 3/48 3/50, 3/51 2/12, 2/14, 2/30 3/58, 3/61, 4/39 3/65 3/62 3/65 3/65 3/61, 5/85 1/20, 1/21, 1/28, 1/29, 3/53, 6/65, 6/97 3/48, 1/16, 1/26 1/16, 1/17, 1/26, 1/27, 3/48 2/13 5/85 3/67 3/69, 5/84

GV7 ADppp GV7 AE11 GV7 APpp GV7 ASppp GV7 AUppp GV7 REppp GV7 RSppp GV7 V01 GW ppp GY pppppp K KAC 1BZ KAD 1PZ KAE 1BZ KAF ppp KBD 1PZ KBF ppp KCC ppp KCD 1PZ KCE ppp KCF ppp KDD 1PZ KDF ppp KZ ppp L LA1 DNpp LA1 DXpp LA1 DY20 LA1 DZpp LA1 KNppp LA1 LB021 LA1 LCpppp LA1 LDppppp LA1 SKpp LA1 VNppp LA2 KTpp LA4 DApp LA4 DBpp LA4 DBL LA4 DC3U LA4 DEpp LA4 DFB LA4 DTpp LA4 DWB LA4 FDp LA4 FRpp LA4 FSRE LA4 FTp LA4 KA1U LA4 Kpppp LA4 SKppp LA5 Dpppppp LA5 Fppp

3/67 3/67 3/69 3/67 3/67 1/16, 1/26, 3/49, 1/17, 1/27, 3/49 3/69 5/279, 5/293 5/292 4/19 4/11, 4/17 4/19 4/17 4/19 4/19 4/11, 4/17, 4/19 4/11, 4/17 4/17, 4/19 4/17 4/19 4/19 4/11, 4/20, 4/21 2/45, 2/49 5/79, 5/123, 7/21 5/79, 5/123, 7/21 5/79, 5/123, 7/21 5/23, 7/6 1/167 1/167, 2/59 1/171 5/34, 5/35, 7/13 5/235 5/23, 7/6 5/81 5/81 5/83 5/81 5/81 5/83 5/83 5/83 5/124 5/124 5/123 5/124 5/24, 7/7 5/24, 7/7 5/35, 5/43, 7/13 5/85 5/127, 5/177, 5/258

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

GS1 EERUpp GS1 Fpp GS1 Gpp GS1 Jpp GS1 Kppp GS1 Lppp GS1 Npp GS1 QQpp GS2 GS2 ADpp GS2 AEpp GS2 AFpp GS2 AHpppp GS2 APpp GS2 AX1 GS2 Dpp GS2 Eppp GS2 Fpp GS2 Gpp

AB1 Pp AB1 Rpp

AB1 VV635UBL ABF H20 ppp ACM GVpppp AE3 FX122 AF1 CDppp AF1 VAppp AF1 VC820 AK5 AK5 BT01 AK5 GF1 AK5 JBpppp AK5 PAppppppp AK5 PCppppp AK5 PEpp AK5 SB1 AM1 ppppp AM3 PA65 APE pppppp APP 2AH40H060 ASI TERV2 ATSppDpp ATSU 01NpppLT ATV21pppppp ATV31pppppp ATV61pppppp ATV71pppppp B BMX FCC pppp C C801p CA2 KNppppp CA2 SKppppp CA3 KNppppp CA3 SKpppp CA4 KNppppp CAD 32pp CR1 BLppppp CR1 BMppppp CR1 BPppppp CR1 BRppppp CR1 Fpppppp

DR5 TEpp

DR5 TF4V DV1 RCppp DV1 RT292 DX1 AP25 DZ3 ppp E ER1 XA2p ET1 KB50 EZ2 LB0601 G GA1 pp GAC pppp GAP 21 GAP 23 GB2 CBpp GB2 CDpp GB2 CSpp GB2 DBpp GC ppppppp GF pppppp GK1 pppp GK2 pppp GK3 pppp GS1 AD10 GS1 AFpp GS1 AHppp GS1 AMppp GS1 ANppp GS1 AVpp GS1 AWpp

GS2 Jpp GS2 Kpppp GS2 Lppp GS2 Mppp GS2 Npp GS2 PPpp GS2 QQpp

GS2 Spp

GV2 MEpp GV2 MPpp GV2 Ppp GV2 RTpp GV2 V01 GV2 V03 GV3 App GV3 APNpp GV3 Bpp GV3 Dpp GV3 Gppp GV3 Lpp

GS2 Tpp GS2 Vpp

GSp F

GSp G GSp J

GSp K GSp KK GSp L

GV3 ME80 GV3 Ppp

GSp N

GSp QQ

GV3 PCpp GV3 S GV7 AB11 GV7 ACpp

GV ADpppp

Product reference index

LA5 FFppp

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

5/127, 5/177, 5/258 5/127, 5/177, 5/258 5/127, 5/177, 5/258 5/80 6/25, 6/36, 6/37 1/47, 6/36, 6/37, 5/125 6/12 4/36 5/186, 5/251 2/44, 2/45, 2/48, 2/49 2/21, 2/25, 2/45 5/84 5/124 1/171 1/41, 5/76, 5/77, 5/84 1/39, 1/41, 2/44, 2/45, 5/76, 5/84 1/41 5/84 1/39, 5/76, 5/84 1/39, 5/76, 5/77 1/39, 5/76, 5/77, 5/85 5/76, 5/77 5/85 1/39, 5/76, 5/77, 5/84 1/41, 1/47, 2/45, 2/49, 3/47, 3/57, 5/25, 5/85, 6/25, 6/37, 7/7, 7/23 3/57, 4/39, 5/25 1/49 5/126, 5/176, 5/251, 6/25, 6/37 5/119, 5/121 1/47 5/125 1/47, 5/119, 5/121 5/116, 5/117, 5/126, 5/176, 5/251, 6/37

LA9 FFpppp

LA5 FGppp

5/119, 5/121, 5/124, 5/125, 5/128, 5/253 1/41, 1/47, 5/119, 5/121, 5/124, 5/125, 5/128, 5/176, 5/253 5/128, 5/129 and 5/253 1/47, 5/119, 5/121, 5/124, 5/253 1/47, 5/119, 5/121, 5/124, 5/253 5/119, 5/121, 5/124, 5/125, 5/253 5/119, 5/121, 5/124, 5/125, 5/253 5/119, 5/121, 5/153 5/25 1/66, 3/55 1/172, 2/52, 2/60 1/172 2/87 5/234 1/184, 1/185, 1/186, 1/187 5/85, 7/23 1/195, 3/57, 4/39, 5/76 5/76, 5/77, 5/81, 5/83, 7/22 5/80, 7/22 3/61, 5/85 6/25, 6/58 5/79, 7/21 1/66, 5/85, 6/25, 7/23 2/40 1/39, 5/76 2/40 5/84 1/39, 5/76 3/61, 5/84, 6/25 4/39 1/197 5/85, 7/23 5/84

LAD 9PVGV LAD 9Rpp LAD 9SD3 LAD 9T4 LAD 9Vpp LAD ALLEN4 LAD C22 LAD Nppp

5/76 5/76, 5/77 5/76 2/40 5/76, 5/77 3/61, 5/85, 6/25 5/79, 5/123, 7/21 1/41, 5/79, 5/123, 5/175, 5/251, 7/21 5/80, 5/123, 5/175, 7/22 5/80, 5/123, 5/175, 7/22 1/41, 1/47, 5/80, 5/123, 5/175, 7/22 5/77 5/71 5/156, 5/157 1/163, 1/165, 2/57, 2/58 1/163, 2/57 5/217 5/184, 5/214, 5/215 5/217 5/184, 5/185, 5/214, 5/215 5/217 5/184, 5/185, 5/214, 5/215 5/217 5/184, 5/185, 5/214, 5/215 5/185 1/16, 1/17, 1/20, 1/24 to 1/29, 1/31 to 1/33, 1/39, 1/47, 5/62 to 5/67, 5/71, 5/74, 5/75, 5/102, 5/156, 5/188, 5/190, 5/191, 5/214, 5/215, 5/217, 6/65, 6/96 to 6/99 5/102 5/156 5/188, 5/190, 5/191 5/102

LC1 Fpppppp

LA5 FHppp

LA9 FGpppppppp

LA6 DK20p LA7 Dpppp LA7 Fppp LA7 K0064 LA8 D324 LA9 B103 LA9 D0975 LA9 D09907 LA9 D09966 LA9 D09981 LA9 D09982 LA9 D11ppp LA9 D12ppp

LA9 Fp4p4p

1/16, 1/17, 1/21, 1/24, 1/25, 1/27, 1/29, 1/31 to 1/33, 1/47, 5/114, 5/115, 5/153, 5/163, 5/174, 5/214, 5/215, 5/217, 6/60, 6/65, 6/96, 6/98, 6/99 1/16, 2/28, 5/14, 5/16, 5/214 5/34, 5/42 5/234 5/116 and 5/117 5/18, 5/20 5/234 1/26, 1/28, 1/30, 1/37 1/28, 1/30, 1/45 1/26, 1/28, 1/30, 1/37 1/34 5/14, 5/16, 5/18, 5/20 1/165 1/162 2/56, 2/58, 1/162, 1/165 2/56, 1/162 1/20 2/20, 2/44 2/30 2/28 2/20, 2/24 2/20 2/32, 2/36 2/42 2/32 2/24, 2/48 2/24 2/24, 2/36 2/24 2/85 2/84 2/85 2/84 2/63 2/63 2/62 2/62 2/64 2/68 2/69 5/66, 5/214, 5/215 5/189

LP1 Kppppppp LP1 SKpppppp LP2 Kppppppp LP4 Kppppppp LP5 Kppppppp LR2 Dpppp LR2 F8383 LR2 Kpppp LR2 K0322 LR9 D5367

5/15, 5/17 5/34 5/19, 5/21 5/15, 5/17 5/19, 5/21 1/25, 2/44, 2/48, 6/22 5/241 1/28, 6/12, 1/30 6/12 1/21, 1/24, 1/25, 1/28, 1/29, 1/31, 1/32, 1/33, 5/219, 6/23 1/21, 1/24, 1/25, 1/28 to 1/33, 5/219, 5/241, 6/34 6/58 1/20, 1/24 and 1/25, 1/28 to 1/33, 5/219, 6/20 to 6/22 4/36, 4/37, 1/30 6/50 6/58 6/58 6/58 6/88, 6/96, 6/98, 6/99 6/87 6/87 6/87 6/86, 6/96 to 6/99 1/60, 1/63, 1/85, 1/91 1/85, 1/91 1/63 1/63 1/63 1/68, 1/69, 1/83, 3/62 1/84, 1/90 1/72, 1/81, 1/95, 1/97 1/79, 1/83, 1/95, 1/197 1/63, 1/85, 1/91 1/79, 1/83, 1/93, 1/197, 6/87 1/67 1/61, 1/62, 1/65, 1/79, 1/81, 1/83, 1/87, 1/89, 1/93, 1/95 1/65 1/63, 1/79, 1/81, 1/83, 1/87, 1/89, 1/93, 1/95 1/66

LAD Rp LAD S2 LAD Tp

LC1 Kppppppp

LA9 FHppp

LC1 SKpppppp LC1 Vppppp LC2 Fpppp LC2 Kpppppp LC2 Vpppppp LC3 Dppppppp LC3 Fpppppp LC3 Kpppp LC4 Dppppp LC7 Kppppppp LC8 Kppppppp LD1 LC030p LD1 LD030p LD4 LDpppp

LR9 Fpppp

LA9 FJppp

LC2 Dpppppppp 5/72 to 5/75 LR97 Dppppp LRD pppp

LAD T9Rpp LAD UL1 LAZ R9pp LB1 LD03ppp

LA9 FKppp

LA9 FLppp

LB6 LD03ppp LC1 BL LC1 BLppppp

LS1 Dppppp LT3 Spppppp LT47 06ppp LT47 30ppp LT47 60ppp LT6 CTpppp LTM 9TCS LTM Cpppp LTM EVpppp LTM Rppppp LU2B 12pp LU2B 32BL LU2B 32pp LU2B pppp LU6M B0pp LU9 Apppp LU9 BN11L LU9 CD1 LU9 Gpp LU9 M1 LU9 Rppppp

LA9 D15017 LA9 D2561 LA9 D32ppp LA9 D4pppp LA9 D5pppp LA9 D65App LA9 D730 LA9 D8pppp LA9 D9pp

LA9 FXppp

LC1 BM LC1 BMppppp

LA9 K09pp LA9 LB920 LA9 LCppp LA9 LDppp LA9 LFpppp LA9 V974 LA9 Zppppp

LC1 BP LC1 BPppppp

LD5 LDpppp LEpp LE1 Dpppppp LE1 GVppppppp LE1 M35pppp LE2 Dppppp LE2 Kppppp LE3 Dppppp LE3 Fppppp LE3 Kppppp LE4 Dppppp LE4 Kppppp LE6 Dpppp LE8 Kppppp LF3 Mppp LF3 Pppp LF4 Mppp LF4 Pppp LG1 D1pppppp LG1 Kppppppp LG7 Dpppppp LG7 Kpppppp LG8 Kpppppp LJ7 Kpppppp LJ8 Kpppppp LP1 Dppppppp LP1 DTpppppppp

LC1 BR LC1 BRppppp

LAD 2p LAD 3pppppp LAD 4pppp

LC1 BR34p40 LC1 Dppppppp

LA9 Epp LA9 F100 LA9 F103

8 9 10

LAD 6K10p LAD 7pppp LAD 8ppp LAD 90 LAD 90ppp LAD 912pp LAD 918pp LAD 92560 LAD 93217 LAD 96ppp LAD 99 LAD 9APppp LAD 9Andp LAD 9Pppp

LA9 F15ppp LA9 F18517 LA9 F2100 LA9 F22ppp LA9 F7pp

LU9 SP0 LU9B pppp

LC1 DpKpppp LC1 Dpppp LC1 DTpppppppp LC1 DWK12pp

LU9C p LU9M ppp

LUA Lpp

Product reference index

80

LUA1 pppp LUA8 E20 LUB ppp

1/65 1/65 1/137, 1/58, 1/61, 1/62, 1/84, 1/90, 1/137 1/84, 1/85, 1/90, 1/91 1/84, 1/85, 1/90, 1/91 1/84, 1/85, 1/90, 1/91 1/84, 1/85, 1/90, 1/91 1/71 1/58, 1/60, 1/71 1/59, 1/71, 6/64 1/71 1/71, 6/64 1/136, 1/137 1/61, 1/72, 6/60, 6/64, 6/65 1/59, 1/65, 1/73, 1/97 1/61, 1/83, 1/84, 1/85, 1/87, 1/89, 1/90, 1/91, 1/93, 1/95, 6/60 6/64, 6/65 1/187 5/254 and 5/255 5/254 and 5/255 5/254 and 5/255 5/254 and 5/255 5/254 and 5/255 5/254 and 5/255 5/88 5/89 5/130, 5/178 5/130, 5/178 5/131, 5/179 5/131, 5/179 5/132, 5/133, 5/179 5/132, 5/179 5/133 1/171, 1/173 5/235 5/139 5/90 and 5/91

LX4 D8pp LX4 F8pp LX4 FFppp

5/91 5/133, 5/137 5/134, 5/136, 5/139 5/134, 5/136, 5/139 5/134, 5/136, 5/139 5/135, 5/138, 5/136 5/135, 5/138, 5/137 5/135, 5/138, 5/137 5/137 5/139 5/86, 7/23 5/87 1/21, 1/28, 6/60, 6/65, 6/97, 6/98 5/186, 5/259 5/186, 5/259 5/186, 5/259 1/207 1/207 5/259 5/257, 5/259 5/259 6/51 6/41, 6/42 6/41 6/42 6/88 1/197 1/93 1/93 1/28 5/219 5/219 5/219 1/87, 6/89 1/87 1/79, 1/197 1/97 1/83, 6/89 2/5, 4/14 4/13 4/8 4/13

VBF ppGE VBF pGEp VBFX GEp VCp GUN VCCD pp VCCDN pp VCCF pp VCD pp VCDN pp VCF pp VCF ppGE VCF pGE VCF pGEN VCFN ppGE VCFX GEp VN pp VVD p VW3 A1 pppRpp VW3 A8 1pp

2/4 2/4 2/5 2/10 4/12 4/8 4/12 4/12 4/8 4/12 2/4 2/4 2/4 2/4 2/5 2/5, 4/9 4/13 6/87 1/76, 6/88

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

LUC Apppp LUC Bpppp LUC Dpppp LUC Mpppp LUCA pppp LUCA 12FU LUCB pppp LUCC pppp LUCD pppp LUCLpppp LUCM pppp

LX4 FGppp

LX4 FHppp

LX4 FJppp

LX4 FKppp

LX4 FLppp

LX4 FXppp LX5 FJWpp LXD 1ppp LXD 3ppp N NSpppppp

VW3 A8 306 ppp 1/61, 1/95, 1/97, 6/89 VW3 G4104 VZ pp VZN pp W WB1 KBppp 5/188 to 5/191, 5/256 6/25 6/87 1/72 1/72, 6/87 5/85, 7/23 1/76 1/81 1/81 2/99, 1/81 4/21 6/36 2/40 2/40 2/40 2/40 5/186, 5/188, 5/189, 5/190, 5/191, 5/257, 5/259 2/40 1/130 2/6, 2/10, 4/14, 4/20 2/7, 4/9, 4/11, 4/20

LUF pppp LUL pppp

P PA1 LBpp PA1 PB50 PA1 RB50 PA2pppp PA5ppp PN1 FB50 PR4 FBpppp PV1 FA80 R RHZ 66 RM1 XAppp RM1 ZG21 RM1 ZH21 S SR2 CBL06 STB EPI 2145 STB XBE1100 STB XBE1300 STR35ME T TC1pppp TC2pppp TCpppp TSX CAN ppppp TSX CANTD M4 TSX CDP ppp TSX FP ACC12 TSX PBSCAppp V Vpp VBD pp VBDN pp VBF pp

X XB5 Apppppp XBT N410 XBT NU400 XBT Z938 XBY 2U XGS Z24 XZ CG0142 XZ MCpp XZ MG12 Z Z01 ZA2 Bpppp ZB5 AAppp ZB5 ADp ZB5 AL432 ZBA 639 ZC4 GMp

LUT ppppp LV4ppppp LX0 FFppp LX0 FGppp LX0 FHppp LX0 FJppp LX0 FKppp LX0 FLppp LX1 D6pp LX1 D8pp LX1 FFpppp LX1 FGpppp LX1 FHpppp LX1 FJpppp LX1 FKpppp

ZEN L11pp

LX1 FLpppp LX1 FXppp LX1 LDpppp LX1 Vpppppp LX2 FJWpp LX4 D7pp

General contents

TeSys
Control and protection components

1 - TeSys motor starters: open version


Selection guide .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/4 b Combination automatic motor starters.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/6 b Combination starters for customer assembly.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/16 b D.O.L. starters, plate mounted, for motor control.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/36 b Star-delta starters for motor control.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/52 b TeSys U starter-controllers. b integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers.. . . . . page 1/142 b Adaptators for use with busbar sytem .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/180 b TeSys Quickfit, installation system for motor starter components. . . . . page 1/188 b AK5 pre-assembled panel busbar system.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/205

2 - TeSys motor starters: enclosed version


Selection guide .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/4 b VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors. b Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/12 b D.O.L. starters for motor control.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/18 b Star-delta starters for motor control.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/32 b D.O.L. starters for control in category AC-1 .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/44 b integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers.. . . . . . page 2/52 b Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control for use on a machine subject to the application of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/62 b Enclosed D.O.L starters for AS-Interface cabling system.. . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/72

3 - TeSys protection components: motor circuit-breakers


Selection guide .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/2 b TeSys GV thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/46 b TeSys GV magnetic motor circuit-breakers .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/52 b TeSys GB2 thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers for the protection of control circuits, solenoid valves and transformers .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/90

4 - TeSys protection components: fuse protection


Selection guide .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/2 b Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors for standard applications. . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/8 b VARIO switch disconnectors for high performance applications. . . . . . . . page 4/12 b TeSys DF fuse carriers for the protection of control circuits or transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/28 b TeSys GK1 fuse carriers for motor protection.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/32 b TeSys GS switch-disconnectors-fuses for motor or variable speed drive protection .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/34 b TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses provide on-load breaking and making, safe isolation and overcurrent protection.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/42 b Cartridge fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/74

5 - TeSys contactors and reversing contactors


b Definitions and comments .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/2 Selection guide .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/6 b TeSys K contactors and reversing contactors .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/8 b TeSys LC1 SK and LP1 SK mini-contators.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/30 b TeSys LC1 SKGC mini-contators.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/38 b TeSys D contactors and reversing contactors .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/50 b TeSys contactors for switching 3-phase capacitor banks.. . . . . . . . . . . page 5/104 b TeSys F contactors and reversing contactors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/106 b High power changeover contactor pairs for distribution.. . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/153 b Capacitive delayed opening devices.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/156 b TeSys FG shockproof contactors.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/158 b TeSys LC1 B contactors.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/182 b Variable composition contactors .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/228 b 3-pole vacuum contactors and reversing contactors .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/232 b Magnetic latching contactors CR1 F and CR1 B .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/240 b Modular equipment .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/268

6 - TeSys protection components: relays and controllers


Selection guide .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/2 b Motor and machine protection.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/4 b TeSys K thermal overload relays .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/10 b TeSys D, 3-pole thermal overload relays .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/14 b TeSys LR9 D, 3-pole electronic overload relays.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/18 b TeSys LR9 F, 3-pole electronic overload relays.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/30 b TeSys RM1 XA single-pole magnetic over current relays.. . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/40 b TeSys LT3 S thermistor protection units for use with PTC thermistor probes.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/44 b TeSys LR97D and LT47 electronic over current relays.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/54 b TeSys U controllers .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/60 b TeSys T, Motor Management System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/68

7 - TeSys control relays


b TeSys K control relays.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/2 b TeSys SK mini-control relays.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/10 b TeSys D control relays and add-on blocks.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/16

8 - Technical information
b Product standards and certifications, degrees of protection, etc .. . . . . . . page 8/2

Contents

1 - TeSys motor starters: open version

b Levels of service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/2

1 2

Selection guide .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/4

Combination automatic motor starters


b D.O.L starters, type 1 coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/6 b D.O.L starters, type 2 coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/10

Combination starters for customer assembly


b D.O.L starters v With circuit-breaker and overload protection built into the circuit-breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/16 v With circuit-breaker and overload protection by separate thermal overload relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/18 v With fuse protection (NF C or DIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/22 b Star-delta starters

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

v With circuit-breaker and overload protection built into the circuit-breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v With circuit-breaker and overload protection by separate thermal overload relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v With fuse protection (NF C or DIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v With fuse protection (BS fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 1/26 page 1/28 page 1/30 page 1/32

D.O.L. starters, plate mounted, for motor control


b 45 to 37 kW, without isolating device, pre-assembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/34

Star-delta starters for motor control


b 5.5 to 132 kW, without isolating device, pre-assembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/37 b 7.5 to 132 kW, without mechanical interlock,for customer assembly . . . page 1/39 b 90 to 375 kW, without isolating device, pre-assembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/45 b 90 to 375 kW, on chassis for customer assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/47

TeSys U starter-controllers
b Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/52 b Application examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/58 b Non-reversing and reversing power bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/62 b Add-on contact blocks and auxiliary contact modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/64 b Control units and function modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/70 b PowerSuite software workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/74 b Parallel wiring module and pre-wired coil connection components . . . . page 1/78 b AS-Interface communication modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/80 b Profibus DP communication module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/82 b CANopen communication module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/86 b DeviceNet communication module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/88 b Advantys STB communication module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/92 b Modbus communication module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/94 b Communication gateways LUF P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/96 b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/98 b Tripping curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/106

1/0

b Selection curves according to categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/110 b Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/112 b Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/114 b TeSys U starter-controllers, variable speed controllers and soft start/soft stop units v Altistart U01 and TeSys U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/126 v Magnetic control unit for the protection of variable speed controllers and soft start/soft stop units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/138

1 2

integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers


b General, terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/142 b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/152 b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/162 b Accessories and coils references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/167 b Dimensions, schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/176

Adaptators for use with busbar sytem


b With 40 mm and 60 mm pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/180

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

TeSys Quickfit, installation system for motor starter components


Selection guide .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/188 b Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/190 b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/195 b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/198 b Dimensions, schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/200

AK5 pre-assembled panel busbar system


b Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/205 b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/206 b Mounting (equipment possibilities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/208 b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/210 b Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/212

1/1

General

TeSys motor starters


Levels of service

1 2 3 4
t Overload zone Low-level short-circuit zone Short-circuit zone

The standard defines tests at different levels of current; the purpose of these tests is to place the equipment in extreme conditions. The standard defines 2 types of coordination, according to the condition of the components after testing: type 1, type 2. To determine the type of coordination, the standard requires that the behaviour of the equipment be tested under overload and short-circuit conditions for 3 fault current values, covering overload and short-circuit conditions. Type 1 coordination Type 1 coordination requires that in a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter must not present any danger to personnel or installations and must not be able to resume operation without repair or the replacement of parts. Type 2 coordination Type 2 coordination requires that In a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter must not present any danger to personnel or installations and must subsequently be able to resume operation. The risk of contact welding is permissible; in this case, the manufacturer must indicate measures to be taken regarding maintenance of the equipment. Type 2 coordination increases reliability of operation.

Type 1 and type 2 coordination according to the standard

5
1 2 5 4

Current Ico (overload I < 10 In) The thermal overload relay associated with the contactor provides protection against this type of fault, up to a value Ico (see curve) defined by the manufacturer. Standard IEC 60947-4-1 specifies the 2 current values to be used for checking coordination between the thermal overload relay and the short-circuit protection device: b at 0.75 Ico only the thermal overload relay must trip, b at 1.25 Ico the short-circuit protection device must operate. Current r (low level short-circuit 10 < I < 50 In) The main cause of this type of fault is the deterioration of insulating materials. Standard IEC 60947-4-1 defines an intermediate short-circuit current r. This test current makes it possible to check whether the protection device is providing protection against low-level short-circuits.
Operational current Ie (AC-3) (A) Ie y 16 16 < Ie y 63 63 < Ie y 125 125 < Ie y 315 315 < Ie y 630 630 < Ie y 1000 Current r (kA) 1 3 5 10 18 30

Current values

6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

7 3 6
Ir

1 In

10

0,75 Ico 1,25 Ico Ico

50 Iq

Thermal overload relay curve. Fuse. Tripping of thermal overload relay only. Thermal limit of the circuit-breaker. Thermal overload relay limit. Current broken by the SCPD (1). Circuit breaker magnetic trip.

Current Iq (short-circuit > current r) This type of fault corresponds to a dead short and is relatively rare. It can be caused by a connection error during maintenance work. Short-circuit protection is provided by fast operating devices. Standard IEC 60947-4-1 defines a current Iq. The coordination tables supplied by Schneider Electric are based on a current Iq that is generally u50 kA.
(1) SCPD: short-circuit protection device.

1/2

General (continued)

TeSys motor starters


Levels of service

Selection
No coordination Considerable risks to both persons and equipment. Not authorised by standards: v NF C 15-100 and IEC60364-1, article 133-1 (installation regulations), v EN/IEC 60204-1, article 7 (electrical equipment in machines), v IEC 60947-4-1, article 8.2.5. (starters) Type 1 coordination The most frequently used solution. b Equipment costs are lower. b Reliability of operation is not a requirement. b Before restarting, it may be necessary to repair the motor starter. Consequences: v significant amount of machine downtime, v skilled maintenance personnel required to repair, check, obtain supplies. Example: air conditioning in commercial premises. Type 2 coordination This solution ensures reliability of operation. Consequences: v reduced machine downtime, v reduced maintenance after a short-circuit. Example: escalators. Total coordination With this solution, no damage or misadjustment is permissible and reliability of operation is guaranteed. Consequences: v immediate return to service, v no special precautions required. Examples: smoke extraction, fire-fighting pumps.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1/3

Selection guide

TeSys motor starters - open version

Applications

Pre-assembled starters Small machines starting under full load: D.O.L. starters Machines starting under no-load: star-delta starters

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Level of service Starter type

D.O.L. or reversing starters with circuit-breaker

D.O.L. starters with fuse protection

Soft start units or star-delta starters to be used in association with a circuit-breaker or fuses

Type 1 coordination

Type 2 coordination

Power at 400 V

Up to 5.5 kW

Up to 37 kW

Up to 37 kW

Up to 132 kW

Type of components

Combination automatic motor starter with overload protection built into the circuit-breaker

Fuse carrier + plate-mounted contactor

3 contactors (line, star and delta, mounted on plate, rail or chassis)

Pages

1/6 and 1/7

1/8 and 1/9

1/10 and 1/11

1/34

1/37

1/4

Starters for customer assembly Small machines starting under full load: D.O.L. starters Machines starting under no-load: star-delta starters

1
D.O.L., reversoing or star-delta starters with fuses

D.O.L. or reversing starters D.O.L., reversing or star-delta starters with circuit-breakers

2 3 4 5

Total coordination

Type 1 and type 2 coordination

6 7 8 9 10

Up to 15 kW

Up to 110 kW

Up to 315 kW

Up to 355 kW

Starter-controller

Thermal magnetic circuit-breaker + contactor(s)

Magnetic circuit-breaker + contactor(s) + thermal overload relay

Fuse carrier + contactor(s) + thermal overload relay

Switch-disconnector-fuse + contactor(s) + thermal overload relay

1/62 and 1/63

1/16 and 1/17, 1/26 and 1/27

1/18 and 1/19, 1/28 and 1/29

1/22 1/30

1/23 and 1/31 1/32 and 1/33

1/5

References

TeSys motor starters - open version


Combination automatic motor starters with overload protection built into the circuit-breaker

D.O.L. starters, non-reversing, from 0.37 to 5.5 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

1
Characteristics

This pre-assembled combination comprises: b 1 motor circuit-breaker GV2 ME, b 1 3-pole contactor LC1 K, b 1 combination block GV2AF01.

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Starter type Breaking capacity (lq) (1)

Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1

GV2 400/415 V 440 V 500 V

kA kA kA

ME06K1 50 50 50

ME07K1 50 50 50

ME08K1 50 50 50

ME10K1 50 50 50

ME14K1 50 15 10 (4 kW) 6 (5.5 kW)

ME16K1 15 8 6

References

D.O.L. starters, non-reversing


Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in AC-3 440 V 500 V 400/ 415V Setting range of thermal trips Fixed magnetic tripping current 13 Irth For customer assembly Motor circuitbreaker Reference Contactor Reference to be completed (2) LC1K06 Pre-assembled Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (3) GV2ME06K1pp kg 0.460 Weight

kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 GV2ME10K1pp 3 4 5.5

kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5

kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5

A 11.6

A 22.5

GV2ME06

1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914

33.5 51 78 138 170

GV2ME07 GV2ME08 GV2ME10 GV2ME14 GV2ME16

LC1K06 LC1K06 LC1K06 LC1K09 LC1K12

GV2ME07K1pp GV2ME08K1pp GV2ME10K1pp GV2ME14K1pp GV2ME16K1pp

0.460 0.460 0.460 0.460 0.460

Add-on blocks
Description Combination block between circuit-breaker and contactor Sold in lots of 10 Unit reference GV2AF01 Weight kg 0.020

(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1L3, see page3/13. (2) Please consult your Regional Sales Office. (3) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 24 110 220/230 230 230/240 a 50/60 Hz B7 F7 M7 P7 U7 c (4) BW3 (4) Coil: low consumption (1.5 W), wide range (0.71.3 Uc) with integral suppression device as standard. 380/400 Q7

Dimensions : page 1/12

Schemes : page 1/14

1/6

References

TeSys motor starters - open version


Combination automatic motor starters with overload protection built into the circuit-breaker

D.O.L. starters, reversing, from 0.37 to 5.5 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination


This pre-assembled combination comprises: b 1 motor circuit-breaker GV2 ME, b 1 3-pole reversing contactor LC2 K, b 1 combination block GV2AF01.

1
ME14K2 50 15 10/4 kW 6/5.5 kW ME16K2 15 8 6

Characteristics
Starter type Breaking capacity (lq) (1) Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 GV2 400/415 V 440 V 500 V kA kA kA ME06K2 50 50 50 ME07K2 50 50 50 ME08K2 50 50 50 ME10K2 50 50 50

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

References

D.O.L. starters, reversing


Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in AC-3 440 V 500 V 400/ 415V Setting range of thermal trips Fixed magnetic tripping current 13 Irth For customer assembly Motor circuitbreaker Reference Contactor Reference to be completed (2) LC2K06 Pre-assembled Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (3) GV2ME06K2pp kg 0.460 Weight

kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5

kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5

kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5

A 11.6

A 22.5

GV2ME06

1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914

33.5 51 78 138 170

GV2ME07 GV2ME08 GV2ME10 GV2ME14 GV2ME16

LC2K06 LC2K06 LC2K06 LC2K09 LC2K12

GV2ME07K2pp GV2ME08K2pp GV2ME10K2pp GV2ME14K2pp GV2ME16K2pp

0.460 0.460 0.460 0.460 0.460

GV2ME10K2pp

Add-on blocks
Description Combination block between circuit-breaker and contactor Sold in lots of 10 Unit reference GV2AF01 Weight kg 0.020

(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1L3, see page3/13. (2) Please consult your Regional Sales Office. (3) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 24 110 220/230 230 230/240 a 50/60 Hz B7 F7 M7 P7 U7 c (4) BW3 (4) Coil: low consumption (1.5 W), wide range (0.71.3 Uc) with integral suppression device as standard. 380/400 Q7

Dimensions : page 1/12

Schemes : page 1/14

1/7

References

TeSys motor starters - open version


Combination automatic motor starters with overload protection built into the circuit-breaker

D.O.L. starters, non-reversing, from 0.06 to 30 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

1
Characteristics

This pre-assembled combination comprises: b 1 motor circuit-breaker GV2ME, b 1 3-pole contactor LC1 D, b 1 combination block GV2AF3.

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Starter type

GV2

DM 102 to DM 110 kA kA kA 50 50 50

DM 114

DM 116

DM 120

DM 121

DM 122

DM 132

Breaking capacity (lq) (1)

Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1

400/415 V 440 V 500 V

50 15 6

15 8 6

15 8 6

15 6 4

15 6 4

10 6 4

References

D.O.L. starters, non-reversing


Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in AC-3 440 V 500 V 400/ 415V Setting range of thermal trips Fixed magnetic tripping current 13 Irth For customer assembly Motor circuitbreaker Reference Contactor Reference to be completed (2) LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D12pp LC1D18pp LC1D25pp LC1D25pp LC1D32pp Pre-assembled Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) GV2DM102pp (3) GV2DM103pp (3) GV2DM104pp (3) GV2DM105pp (3) GV2DM106pp (3) GV2DM107pp (3) GV2DM108pp (3) GV2DM110pp (3) GV2DM114pp (3) GV2DM116pp GV2DM120pp GV2DM121pp GV2DM122pp GV2DM132pp kg 0.596 0.596 0.596 0.596 0.596 0.596 0.596 0.596 0.596 0.601 0.606 0.646 0.646 0.651 Weight

GV2DM102pp

kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15

kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15

kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5

A 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 2025 2432

A 2.4 5 8 13 22.5 33.5 51 78 138 170 223 327 327 416

GV2ME02 GV2ME03 GV2ME04 GV2ME05 GV2ME06 GV2ME07 GV2ME08 GV2ME10 GV2ME14 GV2ME16 GV2ME20 GV2ME21 GV2ME22 GV2ME32

Add-on blocks
Mounting of Sold in Unit Weight GV2 lots of reference kg Combination block between circuit-breaker and contactor 5 rail 10 GV2 - AF3 0.016 GV2 - AF4 0.016 Mounting plate 10 LAD 311 (1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1L3, see page3/13. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 24 220 a 50/60 Hz B7 M7 c (4) BD (3) Type 2 coordination also possible, see page 1/17. (4) Only available for GV2DM. Coil with integral suppression device as standard. 230 P7 Description

Dimensions : page 24536/2

Schemes : page 24536/4

1/8

References

TeSys motor starters - open version


Combination automatic motor starters with overload protection built into the circuit-breaker

D.O.L. starters, reversing, from 0.06 to 15 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination


This pre-assembled combination comprises: b 1 motor circuit-breaker GV2 ME, b 1 3-pole reversing contactor LC2 D, b 1 combination block GV2AF3.

1
DM221 15 6 4 DM222 15 6 4 DM232 10 6 4

Characteristics
Starter type Breaking capacity (lq) (1) Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 GV2 400/415 V 440 V 500 V kA kA kA DM202 to DM210 50 50 50 DM214 50 15 10 DM216 15 8 6 DM220 15 8 6

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

References

D.O.L. starters, reversing (2)


Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in AC-3 440 V 500 V 400/ 415V Setting range of thermal trips Fixed magnetic tripping current 13 Irth For customer assembly Motor circuitbreaker Reference GV2ME02 GV2ME03 GV2ME04 GV2ME05 GV2ME06 GV2ME07 GV2ME08 GV2ME10 GV2ME14 GV2ME16 GV2ME20 GV2ME21 GV2ME22 GV2ME32 Contactor Reference to be completed (3) LC2D09pp LC2D09pp LC2D09pp LC2D09pp LC2D09pp LC2D09pp LC2D09pp LC2D09pp LC2D09pp LC2D12pp LC2D18pp LC2D25pp LC2D25pp LC2D32pp Pre-assembled Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (4) GV2DM202pp GV2DM203pp GV2DM204pp GV2DM205pp GV2DM206pp GV2DM207pp GV2DM208pp GV2DM210pp GV2DM214pp GV2DM216pp GV2DM220pp GV2DM221pp GV2DM222pp GV2DM232pp kg 0.963 0.963 0.963 0.963 0.963 0.963 0.963 0.963 0.963 0.973 0.983 1.063 1.063 1.073 Weight

kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15

kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15

kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5

A 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 2025 2432

A 2.4 5 8 13 22.5 33.5 51 78 138 170 223 327 327 416

GV2DM202pp

Add-on blocks
Mounting of Sold in Unit Weight GV2 lots of reference kg Combination block between 5 rail 10 GV2 - AF3 0.016 circuit-breaker and contactor Mounting plate 10 GV2 - AF4 0.016 LAD 311 (1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1L3, see page 1/7. (2) Type 2 coordination also possible, see page 1/19. (3) See page 5/62. (4) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 24 220 230 a 50/60 Hz B7 M7 P7 c (5) BD (5) Coil with integral suppression device as standard. Description

Dimensions : page 1/12

Schemes : page 1/14

1/9

References

TeSys motor starters - open version


Combination automatic motor starters with overload protection built into the circuit-breaker

D.O.L. starters, non-reversing, from 0.06 to 30 kW at 400/415 V, type 2 coordination

1
Characteristics

This pre-assembled combination comprises: b 1 motor circuit-breaker GV2P, b 1 3-pole contactor LC1 D, b 1 combination block GV2AF3.

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Starter type Breaking capacity (lq) (1) Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1

GV2 400/415 V 440 V 500 V kA kA kA

DP102 to DP110 130 130 130

DP114 130 130 50

DP116 130 50 42

DP120 50 20 10

DP121 50 20 10

DP122 50 20 10

DP132 50 20 10

References

D.O.L. starters, non-reversing


Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in AC-3 440 V 500 V 400/ 415V Setting range of thermal trips Fixed magnetic tripping current 13 Irth For customer assembly Motor circuitbreaker Reference Contactor Reference to be completed (2) LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D25pp LC1D25pp LC1D25pp LC1D25pp LC1D32pp LC1D50App LC1D65App LC1D50App LC1D65App LC1D65App Pre-assembled Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (3) GV2DP102pp GV2DP103pp GV2DP104pp GV2DP105pp GV2DP106pp GV2DP107pp GV2DP108pp GV2DP110pp GV2DP114pp GV2DP116pp GV2DP120pp GV2DP121pp GV2DP122pp GV2DP132pp kg 0.686 0.686 0.686 0.686 0.686 0.686 0.696 0.736 0.736 0.741 0.736 0.741 0.741 0.741 1.725 1.730 1.725 1.730 1.730 Weight

kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30

kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 37

kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30

A 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 2025 2432 3040 3040 3750 3750 4865

A 2.4 5 8 13 22.5 33.5 51 78 138 170 223 327 327 416 560 560 700 700 910

GV2P02 GV2P03 GV2P04 GV2P05 GV2P06 GV2P07 GV2P08 GV2P10 GV2P14 GV2P16 GV2P20 GV2P21 GV2P22 GV2P32 GV3 P401 (4) GV3 P401 (4) GV3 P501 (4) GV3 P501 (4) GV3 P651 (4)

GV2DP102pp

Add-on blocks
Mounting of Sold in Unit Weight GV2 lots of reference kg Combination block between 5 rail 10 GV2 - AF3 0.016 circuit-breaker and contactor GV2 - AF4 0.016 Mounting plate 10 LAD 311 (1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2P can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1L3, see page3/13. (2) See page 5/62. (3) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 24 220 230 a 50/60 Hz B7 M7 P7 c (5) BD (4) Circuit-breaker supplied without downstream EverLink power terminal block, which is required for vertical mounting. For side by side mounting, use a GV3 P circuit-breaker with terminal blocks and the GV3S set of S-shape busbars (see page 5/85). (5) Coil with integral suppression device as standard. Dimensions : page 1/13 Schemes : page 1/15 Description

GV3P651 + LC1D65App

1/10

References

TeSys motor starters - open version


Combination automatic motor starters with overload protection built into the circuit-breaker

D.O.L. starters, reversing, from 0.06 to 30 kW at 400/415 V, type 2 coordination


This pre-assembled combination comprises: b 1 motor circuit-breaker GV2P, b 1 3-pole reversing contactor LC2 D, b 1 combination block GV2AF3.

1
DP221 50 20 10 DP222 50 20 10 DP232 50 20 10

Characteristics
Starter type Breaking capacity (lq) (1) Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 GV2 400/415 V 440 V 500 V kA kA kA DP202 to DP210 130 130 130 DP214 130 130 50 DP216 130 50 42 DP220 50 20 10

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

References

D.O.L. starters, reversing


Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in AC-3 440 V 500 V 400/ 415V Setting range of thermal trips Fixed magnetic tripping current 13 Irth For customer assembly Motor circuitbreaker Reference Contactor Reference to be completed (2) LC2D09pp LC2D09pp LC2D09pp LC2D09pp LC2D09pp LC2D09pp LC2D09pp LC2D09pp LC2D09pp LC2D25pp LC2D25pp LC2D25pp LC2D25pp LC2D32pp LC2D50App LC2D65App LC2D50App LC2D65App LC2D65App Pre-assembled Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (3) GV2DP202pp GV2DP203pp GV2DP204pp GV2DP205pp GV2DP206pp GV2DP207pp GV2DP208pp GV2DP210pp GV2DP214pp GV2DP216pp GV2DP220pp GV2DP221pp GV2DP222pp GV2DP232pp kg 1.053 1.053 1.053 1.053 1.053 1.053 1.073 1.153 1.153 1.163 1.153 1.163 1.163 1.163 2.750 2.760 2.750 2.760 2.760 Weight

kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30

kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 37

kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30

A 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 2025 2432 3040 3040 3750 3750 4865

A 2.4 5 8 13 22.5 33.5 51 78 138 170 223 327 327 416 560 560 700 700 910

GV2P02 GV2P03 GV2P04 GV2P05 GV2P06 GV2P07 GV2P08 GV2P10 GV2P14 GV2P16 GV2P20 GV2P21 GV2P22 GV2P32 GV3 P401 (4) GV3 P401 (4) GV3 P501 (4) GV3 P501 (4) GV3 P651 (4)

GV2DP202pp

Add-on blocks
Mounting of Sold in Unit Weight GV2 lots of reference kg Combination block between circuit-breaker and contactor 5 rail 10 GV2 - AF3 0.016 GV2 - AF4 0.016 Mounting plate 10 LAD 311 (1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2P can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1L3, see page3/13. (2) See page 5/62. (3) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 24 220 230 a 50/60 Hz B7 M7 P7 c (5) BD (4) Circuit-breaker supplied without downstream EverLink power terminal block, which is required for vertical mounting. For side by side mounting, use a GV3 P circuit-breaker with terminal blocks and the GV3S set of S-shape busbars (see page 5/85). (5) Coil with integral suppression device as standard. Schemes : page 1/15 Description

GV3P651 + LC2D65App

Dimensions : page 1/13

1/11

Dimensions, mounting

TeSys motor starters - open version


Combination automatic motor starters

GV2 MEppKppp

On mounting rail AM1DE200

GV2MEppK1pp

GV2MEppK2pp

152

11

66 87

45

90

GV2DMppppp
On mounting rail AM1DE200 With adapter plate LAD311 GV2DM1pppp GV2DM2pppp

125 3

152

c1 c
c1 c d1 d
GV2 b c c1

234

45
DMp02pp to DMp20pp 176.4 99.6 94.1

c DMp21pp to DMp32pp 186.8 105.9 100.4 GV2 c c1 d d1

90
DMp02pp to DMp20pp 135.6 130.1 112.5 107 DMp21pp to DMp32pp 141.9 136.4 112.5 107

GV2DPppppp
On mounting rail AM1DE200 With adapter plate LAD311 GV2DP1pppp GV2DP2pppp

125 3

c1 c d1 d

234

45
c1 c
GV2 b c c1 d d1 DPp02pp to DPp08pp 176.4 105.6 100.1 100.5 95 DPp10pp to DPp32pp 186.8 111.9 106.4 100.5 95 GV2 c c1

90
DPp02pp to DPp08pp 141.6 136.5 DPp10pp to DPp32pp 147.9 142.4

References: pages 1/6 to 1/11

1/12

Dimensions, mounting (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version


Combination automatic motor starters

GV3 Ppp1 + LC1 D40AD65A (for customer assembly)


Vertical mounting (1) Side by side mounting with S-shape busbar system GV3 S (2)

1
138

120

+3 0

231

136 141 120

119

136 141

55

GV3 Ppp1 + LC2 D40AD65A (for customer assembly)


Vertical mounting (1) Side by side mounting with S-shape busbar system GV3 S (2)

233

138

183

119 (1) For several side-by-side motor starters, the maximum current allowed is equal to the nominal current under 400 V. Example: 55 A for a 30 kW motor under 400 V, for a GV3 P65 circuit-breaker and a LC1 D65A contactor association. (2) The maximum current allowed is equal to 90 % of maximum current. Example: 45 A for a LC1 D50A contactor.

References: pages 1/6 to 1/11

1/13

A2 T1/2 T2/4 T3/6


14 22 21/NC 13/NO
14 13/NO

A1 1/L1 2/T1 3/L2 4/T2 5/L3 6/T3 5/L3


T3/6 5/L3 6/T3 5/L3

A2 T1/2 T2/4 3/L2 4/T2 3/L2 1/L1 2/T1 1/L1

A1

References: pages 1/6 to 1/11


1/L1 3/L2

Schemes

GV2DM1pppp

GV2MEppK1pp

1/14


A2 A1 1 3 5 L3 6/T3 13/NO 21/NC 1 3 5 13/NO 21/NC A1
5/L3

A2 T1/2 T2/4 T3/6 14 3/L2 5/L3 13/NO 1/L1

A1 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

2 L1 2/T1 L2 4/T2
3/L2

1/L1

4 6 14 22 2 4 6 14 22 A2

GV2MEppK2pp

GV2DM2pppp
1/L1 T1/2 T2/4 T3/6 14 A2 A1 3/L2 5/L3 13/NO

Combination automatic motor starters

TeSys motor starters - open version

GV2DM2-SCH-2-M

Schemes (continued) 

TeSys motor starters - open version


Combination automatic motor starters

GV2DP1pppp
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

GV2DP2pppp

1/L1

3/L2

1/L1 2/T1

3/L2 4/T2

5/L3 6/T3

L1 2/T1

L2 4/T2

13/NO

A2

A1

21/NC

L3 6/T3

5/L3

13/NO

21/NC

13/NO

A1

21/NC 22

T1/2

T2/4

T3/6

14

22

A2

14

22

Mechanical interlock with integral electrical contacts


Control circuit a Control circuit c

A1

01

A1

GV2DP2-SCH-2-M
A1

14

A2

A1

A1

02

01

01

KM1

KM2

A1

02

A1

01

02

KM1
02

KM2

KM1

A2

KM2

A2

A2

A2

References: pages 1/6 to 1/11

A2

A2

1/15

Combination starters for customer assembly

TeSys motor starters - open version

D.O.L. starters with circuit-breaker and overload protection built into the circuit-breaker

0.06 to 110 kW at 400/415 V: type 1 coordination

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 37 45 55 75 90 110 Ie A 0.2 0.3 0.44 0.6 0.85 1.1 1.5 1.9 2.7 3.6 4.9 6.5 8.5 11.5 15.5 18.1 22 29 35 41 55 66 66 80 97 132 160 195 Iq (1) kA 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 15 15 15 15 10 50 50 50 15 25 25 25 35 35 35 440 V P kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 37 37 45 45 50 75 90 110 132 Ie A 0.19 0.28 0.37 0.55 0.76 0.99 1.36 1.68 2.37 3.06 4.42 5.77 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 32.8 39 51.5 64 76 76 90 125 146 178 215

Circuit-breaker Reference Setting range of thermal trips A GV2 ME02 GV2 ME03 GV2 ME04 GV2 ME05 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 11.6 1.6.2.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 2025 2432 3040 3750 4865 4880 5680 4880 60100 60100 90150 90150 90150 132220 132220 132220

Contactor Reference (2)

500 V Iq (1) kA 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 15 8 8 8 6 6 50 50 50 25 10 25 25 35 35 35 35 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 55 75 90 110 132 160 0.88 1.2 1.5 2.2 2.9 3.9 5.2 6.8 9.2 12.4 13.9 17.6 23 28 33 44 53 64 78 78 106 128 156 184 224 50 50 50 50 5050 50 10 10 6 6 4 4 4 10 10 10 18 4 18 30 30 30 30 30 P kW Ie A Iq (1) kA

LC1 K06 or LC1 D09 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09 LC1 K09 or LC1 D09 LC1 K12 or LC1 D12 LC1 D18 LC1 D25 LC1 D25 LC1 D32 LC1 D40A LC1 D50A LC1 D65A LC1 D65A LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D95 LC1 D115 LC1 D115 LC1 D150 LC1 F185 LC1 F185 LC1 F265 LC1 F225

GV2 ME06 GV2 ME06 GV2 ME07 GV2 ME08 GV2 ME10 GV2 ME14 GV2 ME16 GV2 ME20 GV2 ME21 GV2 ME22 GV2 ME32 GV3 P40 GV3 P50 GV3 P65 GV7 RE80 GV3 ME80 GV7 RE80 GV7 RE100 GV7 RE100 GV7 RE150 GV7 RE150 GV7 RE150 GV7 RE220 GV7 RE220 GV7 RE220

(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/11. (2) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.

1/16

Combination starters for customer assembly

TeSys motor starters - open version

D.O.L. starters with circuit-breaker and overload protection built into the circuit-breaker

0.06 to 110 kW at 400/415 V: type 2 coordination


Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 Ie A 0.2 0.3 0.44 0.6 0.85 1.1 1.5 1.9 2.7 3.6 4.9 6.5 8.5 11.5 15.5 18.1 22 29 35 41 55 41 55 66 80 97 132 160 195 Iq (1) kA 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 50 50 50 35 50 50 50 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 440 V P kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 2.2 3 4 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 37 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 Ie A 0.19 0.28 0.37 0.55 0.76 0.99 1.36 1.68 2.37 3.06 4.42 5.77 4.42 5.77 7.9 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 32.8 39 51.5 39 51.5 64 76 90 125 146 178 215 Iq (1) kA 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 50 50 130 130 15 130 50 50 20 20 25 50 50 50 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 500 V P kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 3 4 5.5 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 30 37 45 55 90 110 132 160 Ie A 0.88 1.2 1.5 2.2 2.9 3.9 5.2 5.2 6.8 9.2 6.8 9.2 12.4 13.9 17.6 23 28 33 44 53 44 53 64 78 128 156 184 224 Iq (1) kA 130 130 130 130 130 130 50 130 10 10 50 50 42 42 10 10 10 10 10 10 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

Circuit-breaker Reference Setting range of thermal trips A GV2 P02 or GV2 ME02 GV2 P03 or GV2 ME03 GV2 P04 or GV2 ME04 GV2 P05 or GV2 ME05 GV2 P06 or GV2 ME06 GV2 P06 or GV2 ME06 GV2 P07 or GV2 ME07 GV2 P08 or GV2 ME08 GV2 P10 or GV2 ME10 GV2 ME10 GV2 P10 GV2 P14 or GV2 ME14 GV2 ME14 GV2 P14 GV2 P16 or GV2 ME16 GV2 P20 or GV2 ME20 GV2 P21 or GV2 ME21 GV2 P22 or GV2 ME22 GV2 P22 GV2 P32 or GV2 ME32 GV3 P40 GV3 P40 GV3 P50 GV3 P50 GV3 P65 GV3 P65 GV7 RS40 GV7 RS50 GV7 RS80 GV7 RS50 GV7 RS80 GV7 RS80 GV7 RS80 GV7 RS80 GV7 RS80 GV7 RS100 GV7 RS150 GV7 RS220 GV7 RS220 GV7 RS220 0.160.25 0.250.4 0.40.63 0.631 11.6 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 46.3 46.3 610 610 610 914 1318 1723 2025 2025 2540 3040 3040 3750 3750 4865 4865 2540 3050 4880 3050 4880 4880 4880 4880 4880 60100 90150 132220 132220 132220

Contactor Reference (2)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D12 LC1 D25 LC1 D25 LC1 D25 LC1 D25 LC1 D32 LC1 D32 LC1 D50A LC1 D65A LC1 D50A LC1 D65A LC1 D65A LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D115 LC1 D115 LC1 D115 LC1 D150 LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 F265

(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 P can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/11. (2) Combinations with circuit-breaker GV2 ME are type 2 coordinated only at 400/415 V and 440 V. (3) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.

1/17

Combination starters for customer assembly

TeSys motor starters - open version

D.O.L. starters with circuit-breaker and overload protection by separate thermal overload relay

0.06 to 250 kW at 400/415 V: type 1 coordination

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 Ie A 0.2 0.3 0.44 0.6 0.85 1.1 1.5 1.9 2.7 3.6 4.9 6.5 8.5 11.5 15.5 18.1 22 29 35 41 Iq kA 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 15 15 15 15 10 50 50 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 0.55 0.76 1 1.36 1.68 2.37 3.06 4.4 5.77 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 32.5 39 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 15 8 8 8 6 6 50 50 440 V P kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 Ie A 0.19 0.28 0.37 Iq kA 50 50 50

Circuit-breaker Reference Rating A GV2 LE03 GV2 LE03 GV2 LE03 GV2 LE04 GV2 LE04 GV2 LE05 GV2 LE05 GV2 LE06 GV2 LE07 GV2 LE07 GV2 LE08 GV2 LE08 GV2 LE10 GV2 LE10 GV2 LE14 GV2 LE14 GV2 LE14 GV2 LE16 GV2 LE16 GV2 LE20 GV2 LE22 GV2 LE22 GV2 LE32 GV3 L40 GV3 L50 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.63 0.63 1 1 1.6 2.5 2.5 4 4 6.3 6.3 10 10 10 14 14 18 25 25 32 40 50 Irm (1) A 5 5 5 8 8 13 13 22.5 33.5 33.5 51 51 78 78 138 138 138 170 170 223 327 327 416 560 700

Contactor

Thermal overload relay Setting range A 0.160.23 0.230.36 0.360.54 0.360.54 0.540.8 0.540.8 0.81.2 1.21.8 1.21.8 1.82.6 2.63.7 3.75.5 3.75.5 5.58 5.58 5.58 811.5 1014 1218 1218 1624 1624 2332 3040 3750

500 V P kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 Ie A 0.88 1.2 1.5 2.2 2.9 3.9 5.2 6.8 12.4 13.9 17.6 23 28 33 44 Iq kA 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 10 6 6 4 4 4 10 10

Reference (2) Reference

LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K09 LC1 K09 LC1 K09 LC1 K12 LC1 D18 LC1 D18 LC1 D25 LC1 D25 LC1 D32 LC1 D40A LC1 D50A

LR2 K0302 LR2 K0303 LR2 K0304 LR2 K0304 LR2 K0305 LR2 K0305 LR2 K0306 LR2 K0307 LR2 K0307 LR2 K0308 LR2 K0310 LR2 K0312 LR2 K0312 LR2 K0314 LR2 K0314 LR2 K0314 LR2 K0316 LR2 K0321 LRD 21 LRD 21 LRD 22 LRD 22 LRD 32 LRD 340 LRD 350

(1) Irm: setting current of the magnetic trip. (2) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.

1/18

Combination starters for customer assembly


(continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version

D.O.L. starters with circuit-breaker and overload protection by separate thermal overload relay

0.06 to 250 kW at 400/415 V: type 1 coordination (continued)


Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P kW 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 Ie A 55 66 80 97 132 160 195 230 280 350 388 430 Iq kA 50 70 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 440 V P kW 37 37 45 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 280 Ie A 51.5 64 76 125 146 178 215 256 321 353 401 470 Iq kA 50 50 65 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 500 V P kW 37 37 45 55 50 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 315 355 Ie A 53 53 64 78 90 106 128 156 184 224 280 310 344 432 488 Iq kA 10 10 50 25 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) GV3 L65 GV3 L65 GV3 L65

Circuit-breaker Reference Rating A 65 65 65 80 100 100 150 150 150 150 220 220 220 220 220 320 320 320 320 320 320 500 500 500 500 500 500 Irm (1) A 910 910 910 1040 1300 1200 1500 1350 1800 1950 2200 2640 2420 2640 2860 3200 2860 3520 4160 3840 4160 5000 5550 5000 5500 6000 6500

Contactor

Thermal overload relay Setting range A 4865 4865 4865 6380 80104 80104 95120 95120 110140 132220 132220 132220 132220 132220 132220 200330 200330 200330 200330 200330 300500 300500 300500 300500 300500 300500 380630

Reference (2) Reference

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

LC1 D65A LC1 D65A LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D95 LC1 D115 LC1 D115 LC1 D115 LC1 D150 LC1 F185 LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 F225 LC1 F265 LC1 F265 LC1 F265 LC1 F265 LC1 F330 LC1 F330 LC1 F330 LC1 F400 LC1 F400 LC1 F400 LC1 F400 LC1 F400 LC1 F500 LC1 F500

LRD 365 LRD 365 LRD 3361 LRD 3363 LRD 3365 LRD 4365 LRD 4367 LRD 4367 LRD 4369 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7381

NS80HMA NS100pMA (3) NS100pMA (3) NS160pMA (3) NS160pMA (3) NS160pMA (3) NS160pMA (3) NS250pMA (3) NS250pMA (3) NS250pMA (3) NS250pMA (3) NS250pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS630pMA (3) NS630pMA (3) NS630pMA (3) NS630pMA (3) NS630pMA (3) NS630pMA (3)

(1) Irm: setting current of the magnetic trip. (2) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2. (3) Reference to be completed by replacing the p with the breaking performance code: Breaking performance Iq (kA) 400/415 V 440 V 500 V 660/690 V Code NS100pMA 25 25 18 8 N 70 65 50 10 H NS160pMA and NS250pMA 36 35 30 8 N 70 65 50 10 H NS400pMA and NS630pMA 70 65 50 20 H 130 130 70 35 L

1/19

Combination starters for customer assembly


(continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version

D.O.L. starters with circuit-breaker and overload protection by separate thermal overload relay

0.06 to 250 kW at 400/415 V: type 2 coordination

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 Ie A 0.2 0.3 0.44 0.6 0.85 1.1 1.5 1.9 2.7 3.6 4.9 6.5 8.5 11.5 15.5 18.1 22 29 Iq kA 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 50 50 50 50 440 V P kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 2.2 3 4 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 Ie A 0.19 0.28 0.37 0.55 0.76 0.99 1.36 1.68 2.37 3.06 4.42 5.77 4.42 5.77 7.9 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 Iq kA

Circuit-breaker Reference Rating Irm (1) A GV2 L03 or LE03 GV2 L03 or LE03 GV2 L04 or LE04 GV2 L05 or LE05 GV2 L05 or LE05 GV2 L06 or LE06 GV2 L07 or LE07 GV2 L08 or LE08 GV2 L08 or LE08 GV2 L10 or LE10 GV2 LE10 GV2 L10 GV2 L14 or LE14 GV2 LE14 GV2 L14 GV2 L14 or LE14 GV2 LE14 GV2 L14 GV2 LE14 GV2 L14 GV2 L16 GV2 L16 GV2 L20 GV2 L22 GV2 L22 GV3 L32 GV3 L32 0.4 0.4 0.63 1 1 1.6 2.5 4 4 6.3 6.3 6.3 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 14 14 18 25 25 32 32 A 5 5 8 13 13 22.5 33.5 51 51 78 78 78 10 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 170 170 223 327 327 448 448

Contactor

Thermal overload relay Setting range A 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.40.63 0.631 11.7 11.7 1.62.5 2.54 46 46 46 46 5.58 5.58 5.58 710 710 710 710 710 913 1218 1218 1624 1624 2332 2332

500 V P kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 3 3 4 4 5.5 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 Ie A 0.88 1.2 1.5 2.2 2.9 3.9 5.2 5.2 5.2 6.8 6.8 9.2 9.2 12.4 13.9 17.6 23 28 Iq kA 130 130 130 130 130 130 13 50 130 10 50 10 50 42 42 10 10 10

Reference (2) Reference

130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 50 50 130 130 15 130 50 50 20 20 50

LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D12 LC1 D12 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D25 LC1 D25 LC1 D25 LC1 D25 LC1 D32 LC1 D40A LC1 D65A

LRD 02 LRD 03 LRD 04 LRD 05 LRD 06 LRD 06 LRD 07 LRD 08 LRD 10 LRD 10 LRD 10 LRD 10 LRD 12 LRD 12 LRD 12 LRD 14 LRD 14 LRD 14 LRD 14 LRD 14 LRD 16 LRD 21 LRD 21 LRD 22 LRD 22 LRD 332 LRD 332

(1) Irm: setting current of the magnetic trip. (2) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.

1/20

Combination starters for customer assembly


(continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version

D.O.L. starters with circuit-breaker and overload protection by separate thermal overload relay

0.06 to 250 kW at 400/415 V: type 2 coordination (continued)


Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P kW 18.5 22 Ie A 35 41 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 55 66 80 97 132 160 195 230 280 350 388 430 Iq kA 50 50 50 70 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 440 V P kW 18.5 22 37 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 Ie A 32.5 39 51.5 64 76 90 125 146 178 215 256 321 353 401 Iq kA 50 50 50 50 65 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 500 V P kW 30 37 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 315 355 Ie A 44 53 78 106 128 156 184 224 280 310 344 432 488 Iq kA 10 10 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) GV3 L40 GV3 L40 GV3 L50 GV3 L50 GV3 L65 GV3 L65

Circuit-breaker Rating Irm (1) A 40 40 50 50 65 65 80 100 100 150 150 150 150 150 220 220 220 220 320 320 320 320 320 320 500 500 500 500 A 560 560 700 700 910 910 1000 1040 1300 1500 1050 1950 1950 1200 2420 1540 2860 2200 3520 2200 4000 4000 3500 3500 5500 4500 6250 5000

Contactor Reference (2)

Thermal overload relay Reference Setting range A 3040 3040 3750 3750 4865 4865 6380 6380 60100 90150 90150 90150 90150 90150 132220 132220 132220 132220 200330 200330 200330 300500 200330 300500 300500 300500 300500 380630

Reference

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

LC1 D50A LC1 D65A LC1 D50A LC1 D65A LC1 D65A LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D115 LC1 D115 LC1 D115 LC1 D150 LC1 D150 LC1 D150 LC1 F185 LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 F265 LC1 F265 LC1 F265 LC1 F330 LC1 F330 LC1 F400 LC1 F400 LC1 F400 LC1 F500 LC1 F500 LC1 F630

LRD 340 LRD 340 LRD 350 LRD 350 LRD 365 LRD 3359 LRD 3363 LRD 3363 LR9 D5367 LR9 D5369 LR9 D5369 LR9 D5369 LR9 D5369 LR9 D5369 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7381

NS80HMA NS100pMA (3) NS100pMA (3) NS160pMA (3) NS160pMA (3) NS160pMA (3) NS160pMA (3) NS160pMA (3) NS250pMA (3) NS250pMA (3) NS250pMA (3) NS250pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS630pMA (3) NS630pMA (3) NS630pMA (3) NS630pMA (3)

(1) Irm: setting current of the magnetic trip. (2) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2. (3) Reference to be completed by replacing the p with the breaking performance code: Breaking performance Iq (kA) 400/415 V 440 V 500 V 660/690 V Code NS100pMA 25 25 18 8 N 70 65 50 10 H NS160pMA and NS250pMA 36 35 30 8 N 70 65 50 10 H NS400pMA and NS630pMA 70 65 50 20 H 130 130 70 35 L

1/21

Combination starters for customer assembly

TeSys motor starters - open version


D.O.L starters with fuse protection (NF C or DIN fuses, type aM)

0.06 to 55 kW at 400/415 V: type 1 coordination

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P kW 0.06 Ie A 0.2 440 V P kW 0.06 Ie A 0.19 500 V P kW

Fuse carrier (1) (basic block) Reference

aM fuses Size Rating A

Contactor Reference (2)

Thermal overload relay class 10 Reference Setting range A 0.160.23

Ie A LS1D32 10 x 38 2 LC1K06 LR2K0302

0.09

0.28

LS1D32

10 x 38

LC1K06

LR2K0303

0.230.36

0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4

0.3 0.44 0.6 0.85 1.1 1.5 1.9 2.7 3.6 4.9 6.5 8.5

0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4

0.37 0.55 0.76 1 1.36 1.68 2.37 3.06 4.42 5.77 7.9

0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5

0.88 1.2 1.5 2.2 2.9 3.9 5.2 6.8 9.2

LS1D32 LS1D32 LS1D32 LS1D32 LS1D32 LS1D32

10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38

2 2 2 2 4 4

LC1K06 LC1K06 LC1K06 LC1K06 LC1K06 LC1K06

LR2K0304 LR2K0305 LR2K0306 LR2K0307 LR2K0308 LR2K0310

0.360.54 0.540.8 0.81.2 1.21.8 1.82.6 2.63.7

LS1D32 LS1D32 LS1D32 LS1D32

10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38

6 8 8 12

LC1K06 LC1K06 LC1K09 LC1K09

LR2K0312 LR2K0312 LR2K0314 LR2K0316

3.75.5 3.75.5 5.58 811.5

(1)For breaking under load, add a rotary switch-disconnector. (2)For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.

1/22

Combination starters for customer assembly


(continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version


D.O.L starters with fuse protection (NF C or DIN fuses, type aM)

0.06 to 55 kW at 400/415 V: type 1 coordination (continued)


Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P kW 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 Ie A 11.5 15.5 18.1 22 29 35 440 V P kW 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 Ie A 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 32.8 500 V P kW 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 Ie A 12.4 13.9 17.6 23 28 33 LS1D32 LS1D32 LS1D32 Fuse carrier (1) (basic block) Reference

aM fuses Size Rating A 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 16 16 20

Contactor Reference (2)

Thermal overload relay classe 10 Reference Setting range A 1014 1218 1218

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

LC1K12 LC1D18 LC1D25

LR2K0321 LRD21 LRD21

GK1EK GK1EK GK1EK

14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51

25 32 40

LC1D25 LC1D32 LC1D40

LRD22 LRD32 LRD3355

1624 2332 3040

22 30 37 (3) 45 55

41 55 66 80 97

22 30 37 45 55

39 51.5 64 76 90

30 37 45 55 75

44 53 64 78 106

GK1FK GK1FK GK1FK GK1FK GK1FK GK1FK GK1FK GK1FK GK1FK

22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58

50 80 80 80 80 100 100 125 125

LC1D50 LC1D50 LC1D65 LC1D65 LC1D80 LC1D80 LC1D95 LC1D115 LC1D115

LRD3357 LRD3359 LRD3359 LRD3361 LRD3361 LRD3363 LRD3365 LRD4365 LRD4367

3750 4865 4865 5570 5570 6380 8093 80104 95120

(1)For breaking under load, add a rotary switch-disconnector. (2)For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2. (3)400 V maximum.

1/23

Combination starters for customer assembly


(continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version


D.O.L starters with fuse protection (NF C or DIN fuses, type aM)

0.06 to 315 kW at 400/415 V: type 2 coordination

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 315 Ie A 0.2 0.3 0.44 0.6 0.85 1.1 1.5 1.9 2.7 3.6 4.9 6.5 8.5 11.5 15.5 18.1 22 29 35 41 55 66 80 97 132 160 195 230 280 350 388 430 540 440 V P kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 315 355 400 Ie A 0.19 0.28 0.37 0.55 0.76 1 1.36 1.68 2.37 3.06 4.42 5.77 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 32.8 39 51.5 64 76 90 125 146 178 215 256 321 353 401 505 549 611 500 V P kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 315 355 400

Switchdisconnector Reference (1)

aM fuses Size Rating A

Contactor Reference (2)

Thermal overload relay classe 10 Reference Setting range A 0.160.25 0.250.4 0.40.63 0.631 11.7 1.62.5 2.54 46 5.58 710 913 1218 1218 1624 2332 3040 3750 4865 4865 4865 5570 6380 60100 8093 90150 90150 132220 132220 200330 200330 200330 200330 300500 300500 380630 380630 380630

Ie A 0.88 1.2 1.5 2.2 2.9 3.9 5.2 6.8 9.2 12.4 13.9 17.6 23 28 33 44 53 64 78 106 128 156 184 224 280 310 344 432 488 552 GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpJ GSpJ GSpJ GSpJ GSpJ GSpJ GSpJ GSpJ GSpL GSpL GSpN GSpN GSpQQ GSpQQ GSpQQ GSpQQ GS2S GS2S GS2S GS2S GS2V 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 T0 T0 T1 T1 T2 T2 T2 T2 T3 T3 T3 T3 T4 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 6 8 10 16 16 20 25 3 40 50 80 80 80 80 100 100 100 125 160 200 250 315 315 400 400 500 500 630 630 800 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D12 LC1D18 LC1D25 LC1D25 LC1D32 LC1D40A LC1D50A LC1D65A LC1D65A LC1D65A LC1D95 LC1D80 LC1D115 LC1D95 LC1D150 LC1D150 LC1F185 LC1F225 LC1F265 LC1F330 LC1F330 LC1F400 LC1F400 LC1F500 LC1F500 LC1F630 LC1F630 LRD02 LRD03 LRD04 LRD05 LRD06 LRD07 LRD08 LRD10 LRD12 LRD14 LRD16 LRD21 LRD21 LRD22 LRD32 LRD340 LRD350 LRD365 LRD365 LRD365 LRD3361 LRD3363 LR9D5367 LRD3365 LR9D5369 LR9D5369 LR9F5371 LR9F5371 LR9F7375 LR9F7375 LR9F7375 LR9F7375 LR9F7379 LR9F7379 LR9F7381 LR9F7381 LR9F7381

(1)GSp: GS1 for direct operator or GS2 for external operator. (2)For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.

1/24

Combination starters for customer assembly


(continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version


D.O.L starters with fuse protection (NF C or DIN fuses, type aM)

0.75 to 400 kW at 690 V: type 2 coordination


Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 P kW 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 315 355 400 Ie A 1.1 1.6 2.1 2.8 3.8 4.9 6.7 8.9 12.8 17 21 24 32 39 47 57 77 93 113 134 162 203 224 250 313 354 400 GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpJ GSpJ GSpKK GSpKK GSpKK GSpL GSpN GSpN GSpQQ GSpQQ GSpQQ GSpQQ GS2S Switchdisconnector

aM fuses Size 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 Rating A 2 2 4 4 6 6 8 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 125 160 200 250 250 315 355 400 500

Contactor Reference (2) LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D25 LC1D25 LC1D25 LC1D32 LC1D40A LC1D40A LC1D65A LC1D80 LC1D115 LC1D115 LC1D150 LC1F185 LC1F265 LC1F265 LC1F330 LC1F400 LC1F400 LC1F500 LC1F630 LC1F630

Thermal overload relay classe 10 Reference LRD06 LRD06 LRD07 LRD08 LRD08 LRD10 LRD12 LRD16 LRD16 LRD22 LRD22 LRD332 LRD340 LRD350 LR2 D3357 LR2 D3359 LR2 D3363 LR9 D5369 LR9 D5369 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 Setting range A 11.6 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 2.54 46 5.58 913 913 1624 1624 2332 3040 3750 3750 4865 6380 90150 90150 132220 132220 200330 200330 200330 300500 300500 300500

Reference (1)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 22 x 58 22 x 58 T00 T00 T00 T0 T1 T1 T2 T2 T2 T2 T3

(1)GSp: GS1 for direct operator or GS2 for external operator. (2)For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.

1/25

Combination starters for customer assembly

TeSys motor starters - open version

Star-delta starters with circuit-breaker and overload protection built into the circuit-breaker

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Maximum operating rate: LC3 K: 12 starts/hour; LC3 D: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P kW 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 37 45 55 75 90 110 Ie A 3.6 4.9 6.5 8.5 11.5 15.5 18.1 22 29 35 41 55 66 66 80 97 132 160 195 IrD (1) A 2 2.9 3.8 4.9 6.4 8.6 10 12 17 20 24 33 40 40 47 58 78 95 115 Iq (2) kA 50 50 50 50 15 15 15 15 10 50 50 50 50 25 25 25 35 35 35 440 V P kW 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 30 37 37 45 45 55 75 90 110 132 Ie A 3.06 4.42 5.77 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 32.8 39 51.5 51.5 64 64 76 76 90 125 146 178 215 IrD (1) A 1.8 2.6 3.3 4.6 6 7.9 9.8 12 15 19 23 30 30 37 37 44 44 52 72 84 103 124 Iq (2) kA 50 50 50 15 8 8 8 6 6 50 50 50 50 50 25 10 25 25 35 35 35 35 GV2 ME08 GV2 ME10 GV2 ME14 GV2 ME16 GV2 ME20 GV2 ME20 GV2 ME21 GV2 ME22 GV2 ME32 GV3 P40 GV3 P50 GV3 P50 GV3 P65 GV3 P65 GV7 RE80 GV3 ME80 GV7 RE80 GV7 RE100 GV7 RE150 GV7 RE150 GV7 RE220 GV7 RE220 Circuit-breaker Reference Setting range of thermal trips A 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1318 1723 2025 2432 3040 3750 3750 4865 4865 4880 5680 4880 60100 90150 90150 132220 132220 LC3 K06 LC3 K06 LC3 K06 LC3 K06 LC3 K09 LC3 D12A LC3 D12A LC3 D12A LC3 D18A LC3 D18A LC3 D32A LC3 D32A LC3 D32A 3 x LC1 D40A (3) 3 x LC1 D40A (3) 2 x LC1 D50A + 1 x LC1 D40A (3) 2 x LC1 D50A + 1 x LC1 D40A (3) 2 x LC1 D50A + 1 x LC1 D40A (3) LC3 D80 LC3 D115 LC3 D115 LC3 D150 Stardelta contactors Reference

1.5 to 110 kW at 400/415 V: type 1 coordination

(1) IrD: current in the motor windings in delta connection. (2) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/11. (3) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 DppA, star-delta starter kit LAD 9SD3 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76.

1/26

Combination starters or customer assembly


(continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version

Star-delta starters with circuit-breaker and overload protection built into the circuit-breaker

Maximum operating rate: LC1 D: 30 starts/hour; LC1 F: 12 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: LC1 D: 30 seconds; LC1 F: 20 seconds.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P kW 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 Ie A 3.6 4.9 6.5 8.5 11.5 15.5 18.1 22 29 35 41 55 66 80 97 132 160 195 Iq kA 130 130 130 130 130 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 70 70 70 70 70 70 440 V P kW 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 Ie A 3.06 4.42 5.77 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 32.8 39 51.5 64 76 90 125 146 178 215 Iq (1) kA 130 130 130 130 50 50 20 20 50 50 50 50 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 GV2 P08 GV2 P10 GV2 P10 GV2 P14 GV2 P14 GV2 P16 GV2 P16 GV2 P20 GV2 P21 GV2 P22 GV3 P32 GV3 P40 GV3 P40 GV3 P50 GV3 P50 GV3 P65 GV7 RS80 GV7 RS80 GV7 RS100 GV7 RS100 GV7 RS150 GV7 RS150 GV7 RS220 GV7 RS220 Circuit-breaker Reference Setting range of thermal trips A 2.54 46.3 4...6.3 610 610 914 914 1318 1723 2025 2332 3040 3040 3750 3750 4865 4880 4880 60100 60100 90150 90150 132220 132220 3 x LC1 D09 (2) 3 x LC1 D18 (3) 3 x LC1 D18 (3) 3 x LC1 D18 (3) 3 x LC1 D18 (3) 3 x LC1 D25 (3) 3 x LC1 D25 (3) 3 x LC1 D25 (3) 3 x LC1 D25 (3) 3 x LC1 D25 (3) 3 x LC1 D40A (4) 2 x LC1 D50A + 1 x LC1 D40A (3) 2 x LC1 D65A + 1 x LC1 D40A (4) 2 x LC1 D50A + 1 x LC1 D40A (3) 2 x LC1 D65A + 1 x LC1 D40A (4) 2 x LC1 D65A + 1 x LC1 D40A (4) 3 x LC1 D80 (5) 3 x LC1 D80 (5) 3 x LC1 D115 (6) 3 x LC1 D115 (6) 3 x LC1 D150 (6) 3 x LC1 D150 (6) 3 x LC1 F185 (7) 3 x LC1 F225 (7) Stardelta contactors Reference

1.5 to 110 kW at 400/415 V: type 2 coordination

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 P can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/11. (2) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 D09, star-delta starter kit LAD 91217 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76. (3) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 D18 or LC1 D25, star-delta starter kit LAD 93217 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76. (4) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 DppA, star-delta starter kit LAD 9SD3 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76. (5) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 D80, star-delta starter kit LA9 D8017 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76. (6) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 D115 or LC1 D150, see page 1/41. (7) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 F185 or LC1 F225, see pages 1/47 and 1/49.

1/27

Combination starters for customer assembly

TeSys motor starters - open version

Star-delta starters with circuit-breaker and overload protection by separate thermal overload relay

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Maximum operating rate: LC3 K and LC3 F: 12 starts/hour; LC3 D: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: LC3 K and LC3 D: 30 seconds; LC3 F: 20 seconds.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P kW 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 Ie A 3.6 4.9 6.5 8.5 11.5 15.5 18.1 22 29 35 41 55 66 80 97 132 160 195 230 280 350 388 480 540 IrD (1) A 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 12 16 20 24 33 40 47 58 78 96 116 139 165 204 225 278 322 Iq kA 50 50 50 50 15 15 15 15 10 50 50 50 70 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 440 V P kW 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 315 355 375 Ie A 3.06 4.42 5.77 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 32.8 39 51.5 64 76 90 125 146 178 215 256 321 353 401 505 518 575 IrD (1) Iq A 1.8 3 3 5 6 8 1 12 15 19 23 30 37 44 52 72 85 103 125 148 186 204 233 295 300 334 kA 50 50 50 50 15 8 8 8 6 50 50 50 50 65 65 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) GV2 LE08 GV2 LE10 GV2 LE14 GV2 LE10 GV2 LE14 GV2 LE14 GV2 LE16 GV2 LE16 GV2 LE20 GV2 LE16 GV2 LE22 GV2 LE20 GV2 LE22 GV2 LE22 GV2 LE32 GV3 L40 GV3 L50 GV3 L65 GV3 L65 GV3 L65 NS80HMA NS80HMA NS80HMA NS160pMA (3) NS100pMA (3) NS100pMA (3) NS160pMA (3) NS160pMA (3) NS250pMA (3) NS250pMA (3) NS250pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS630pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS630pMA (3) NS630pMA (3) NS630pMA (3) C801p+STR35ME C801p+STR35ME C801p+STR35ME A 4 6.3 10 6.3 10 10 14 14 18 14 25 18 25 25 32 40 50 65 65 65 80 80 80 150 100 100 150 150 220 220 220 320 500 320 320 500 500 500 800 800 800 A 51 78 138 78 138 138 170 170 223 170 327 223 327 327 384 560 700 910 910 910 640 800 640 1200 800 1200 1200 1200 1760 1760 1760 2240 3150 2240 2560 3150 3500 4000 4000 4500 5000 LC3 K06 LC3 K06 LC3 K06 LC3 K06 LC3 K06 LC3 K06 LC3 K06 LC3 K09 LC3 K09 LC3 D12A LC3 K12 LC3 K12 LC3 K12 LC3 D18A LC3 D18A LC3 D18A LC3 D32A LC3 D32A LC3 D32A 3 x LC1 D40A (4) 2 x LC1 D50A + 1 x LC1 D40A (4) 2 x LC1 D65A + 1 x LC1 D40A (4) 3 x LC1 D40A (4) LC3 D80 2 x LC1 D50A + 1 x LC1 D40A (4) 2 x LC1 D65A + 1 x LC1 D40A (4) LC3 D80 LC3 D115 LC3 D115 LC3 D150 LC3 D115 LC3 D150 LC3 F225 LC3 D150 LC3 F185 LC3 F225 LC3 F265 LC3 F330 LC3 F330 LC3 F330 LC3 F400 LR2 K0308 LR2 K0310 LR2 K0312 LR2 K0312 LR2 K0312 LR2 K0314 LR2 K0314 LR2 K0316 LR2 K0316 LRD 16 LR2 K0316 LR2 K0321 LR2 K0321 LRD 21 LRD 21 LRD 22 LRD 32 LRD 32 LRD 35 LRD 340 LRD 350 LRD 365 LRD 350 LRD 3363 LRD 350 LRD 365 LRD 3363 LRD 4365 LRD 4365 LRD 4369 LRD 4369 LR9 D5369 LR9 F5371 LRD 4369 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7379 Circuit-breaker Reference Rating Irm (2) Star-delta contactors Reference Thermal overload relay Reference Setting range A 1.82.6 2.63.7 3.75.5 3.75.5 3.75.5 5.58 5.58 811.5 811.5 913 811.5 1014 1014 1218 1218 1624 2332 2332 3038 3040 3750 4865 3750 6380 3750 4865 6380 80104 80104 110140 110140 90150 132220 110140 132220 132220 200330 200330 200330 200330 300500

1.5 to 315 kW at 400/415 V: type 1 coordination

(1) IrD: current in the motor windings in delta connection. (2) Irm: setting current of the magnetic trip. (3) Products marketed under the Merlin Gerin brand. Reference to be completed by replacing the p with the breaking performance code: Breaking performance Iq (kA) 400/415 V 440 V Code NS100pMA 25 25 E 70 65 S NS160pMA, NS250pMA 36 35 E 70 65 S NS400pMA, NS630pMA 70 65 H 130 130 L C801p+STR35ME 70 65 H 150 100 L

(4) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 DppA, star-delta starter kit LAD 9SD3 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76.

1/28

Combination starters for customer assembly


(continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version

Star-delta starters with circuit-breaker and overload protection by separate thermal overload relay

Maximum operating rate: LC3 D: 30 starts/hour; LC3 F: 12 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: LC3 D: 30 seconds; LC3 F: 20 seconds.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 440 V P Ie Iq P Ie kW A kA kW A 130 1.5 3.06 1.5 3.6 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 4.9 6.5 8.5 11.5 15.5 18.1 22 29 35 41 55 66 80 97 132 160 195 230 280 350 388 430 130 130 130 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 70 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 4.42 5.77 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 32.8 39 51.5 64 76 90 125 146 178 215 256 321 353 401 Circuit-breaker Reference Iq kA 130 130 130 20 20 20 20 20 50 50 50 50 50 65 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) Rating Irm (1) A 4 6.3 10 10 14 18 25 25 32 40 40 50 50 65 65 80 100 150 150 150 220 220 220 320 320 320 500 500 500 A 51 78 138 138 170 223 327 327 448 560 560 700 700 910 910 640 800 1200 1200 1200 1760 1760 1760 2240 2560 2880 3150 3500 4000 Star-delta contactors Reference Thermal overload relay Reference Setting range A 2.54 46 710 913 913 1218 1218 1624 2332 3040 3040 3750 3750 4865 4865 6380 60100 90150 90150 90150 132220 132220 200330 200330 200330 300500 300500 300500 300500

1.5 to 250 kW at 400/415 V: type 2 coordination

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

GV2 L08 GV2 L10 GV2 L14 GV2 L14 GV2 L16 GV2 L20 GV2 L22 GV2 L22 GV3 L32 GV3 L40 GV3 L40 GV3 L50 GV3 L50 GV3 L65 GV3 L65 NS80HMA NS100pMA (3) NS160pMA (3) NS160pMA (3) NS160pMA (3) NS250pMA (3) NS250pMA (3) NS250pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS630pMA (3) NS630pMA (3) NS630pMA (3)

3 x LC1 D18 3 x LC1 D18 3 x LC1 D18 3 x LC1 D18 3 x LC1 D25 3 x LC1 D25 3 x LC1 D25 3 x LC1 D25 3 x LC1 D40A (2) 2 x LC1 D50A + 1 x LC1 D40A (2) 2 x LC1 D65A + 1 x LC1 D40A (2) 2 x LC1 D50A + 1 x LC1 D40A (2) 2 x LC1 D65A + 1 x LC1 D40A (2) 2 x LC1 D65A + 1 x LC1 D40A (2) 3 x LC1 D80 3 x LC1 D80 3 x LC1 D115 3 x LC1 D115 3 x LC1 D150 3 x LC1 D150 3 x LC1 F185 3 x LC1 F225 3 x LC1 F225 3 x LC1 F265 3 x LC1 F330 3 x LC1 F330 3 x LC1 F400 3 x LC1 F400 3 x LC1 F500

LRD 08 LRD 10 LRD 14 LRD 16 LRD 16 LRD 21 LRD 21 LRD 22 LRD 332 LRD 340 LRD 340 LRD 350 LRD 350 LRD 365 LRD 3359 LRD 3363 LR9 D5367 LR9 D5369 LR9 D5369 LR9 D5369 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379

(1) Irm: setting current of the magnetic trip. (2) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 DppA, star-delta starter kit LAD 9SD3 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76. (3) Products marketed under the Merlin Gerin brand. Reference to be completed by replacing the p with the breaking performance code: Breaking performance Iq (kA) NS100pMA NS160pMA, NS250pMA NS400pMA, NS630pMA 400/415 V 25 70 36 70 70 130 440 V 25 65 35 65 65 130 Code E S E S H L

1/29

Combination starters for customer assembly

TeSys motor starters - open version


Star-delta starters with fuse protection (NF C or DIN fuses)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Maximum operating rate: LC3K and LC3F: 12 starts/hour; LC3D: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: LC3K and LC3D: 30 seconds; LC3F: 20 seconds.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P Ie IrD (1) Iq kW A A kA 2 50 1.5 3.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 220 280 315 5 6.5 8.4 11 14.8 18.1 21 28.5 35 42 57 69 81 100 135 165 200 240 285 388 480 555 3 4 5 6 9 10 12 16 20 24 33 40 47 58 78 95 115 139 165 225 278 322 50 50 50 50 50 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Fuse carrier (basic block) Reference Ie A 3.06 4.42 5.77 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 32.8 39 51.5 64 76 90 125 146 178 215 256 321 401 505 518 575 IrD (1) A 2 3 3 5 6 8 10 12 15 19 23 30 37 44 52 72 84 103 124 148 185 233 293 300 334 Iq kA 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 aM fuses Size Rating Star-delta contactors Reference Thermal overload relay Reference Setting range A 1.82.6 2.63.7 2.63.7 3.75.5 3.75.5 5.58 811.5 913 913 1218 1624 1624 2332 2332 3040 3750 3750 3750 4865 5570 6380 80104 95120 95120 110140 132220 132220 200330 200330 200330 200330 300500

1.5 to 315 kW at 400/415 V: type 1 coordination

440 V P kW 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 315 355 375

LS1D32 LS1D32 LS1D32 LS1D32 LS1D32 LS1D32 LS1D32 LS1D32 GK1EK GK1EK GK1EK GK1FK GK1FK GK1FK GK1FK GK1FK GK1FK GK1FK GSpK GSpK GSpL GSpL GSpN GSpN GSpQQ GSpQQ GSpQQ GSpQQ GS2S GS2S GS2S GS2S

A 10 x 38 4 10 x 38 6 10 x 38 8 10 x 38 8 10 x 38 12 10 x 38 16 10 x 38 16 10 x 38 20 14 x 51 25 14 x 51 32 14 x 51 40 22 x 58 50 22 x 58 50 22 x 58 63 22 x 58 80 22 x 58 80 22 x 58 80 22 x 58 100 22 x 58 100 22 x 58 125 T0 T0 T1 T1 T2 T2 T2 T2 T3 T3 T3 T3 160 160 200 200 250 315 400 400 500 500 630 630

LC3K06 LC3K06 LC3K06 LC3K06 LC3K06 LC3K06 LC3K09 LC3D12A LC3D12A LC3D18A LC3D18A LC3D18A LC3D32A LC3D32A LC3D40 LC3D40 LC3D50 LC3D50 LC3D50 LC3D50 LC3D80 LC3D115 LC3D115 LC3D115 LC3D150 LC3F185 LC3F225 LC3F265 LC3F265 LC3F330 LC3F330 LC3F400

LR2K0308 LR2K0310 LR2K0310 LR2K0312 LR2K0312 LR2K0314 LR2K0316 LRD16 LRD16 LRD21 LRD22 LRD22 LRD32 LRD32 LRD3355 LRD3357 LRD3357 LRD3357 LRD3359 LRD3361 LRD3363 LRD4365 LRD4367 LRD4367 LRD4369 LR9F5371 LR9F5369 LR9F7375 LR9F7375 LR9F7375 LR9F7375 LR9F7379

(1) IrD: current in the motor windings in delta connection.

1/30

Combination starters for customer assembly

TeSys motor starters - open version


Star-delta starters with fuse protection (NF C or DIN fuses)

Maximum operating rate: LC1D: 30 starts/hour; LC1F: 12 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: LC1D: 30 seconds; LC1F: 20 seconds.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 440 V P Ie Iq P kW A kA kW 50 1.5 1.5 3.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 315 355 5 6.5 8.4 11 14.8 18.1 21 28.5 35 42 57 69 81 100 135 165 200 240 285 352 388 437 555 605 50 50 50 50 50 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 315 355 400 SwitchaM fuses disconnector-fuse Reference Size Rating Ie A 3.06 4.42 5.77 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 32.8 39 51.5 64 76 90 125 146 178 215 256 321 353 401 505 549 611 Iq kA 50 50 50 50 50 50 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 A 4 6 8 10 16 16 25 32 40 50 80 80 80 100 125 125 160 160 200 250 315 315 400 500 500 630 800 800 Star-delta contactors Reference Thermal overload relay Reference Setting range A 2.54 46 5.58 710 913 1218 1624 2332 3040 3750 5570 6380 8093 60100 90150 90150 90150 90150 132220 132220 200330 200330 300500 300500 300500 380630 380630 380630

1.5 to 355 kW at 400/415 V: type 2 coordination

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpJ GSpJ GSpJ GSpJ GSpL GSpL GSpL GSpL GSpN GSpN GSpQQ GSpQQ GSpQQ GS2S GS2S GS2S GS2V GS2V

10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 T0 T0 T0 T0 T1 T1 T2 T2 T2 T3 T3 T3 T4 T4

3 x LC1D09 3 x LC1D09 3 x LC1D09 3 x LC1D09 3 x LC1D12 3 x LC1D18 3 x LC1D25 3 x LC1D32 3 x LC1D40 3 x LC1D50 3 x LC1D65 3 x LC1D80 3 x LC1D80 3 x LC1D115 3 x LC1D115 3 x LC1D150 3 x LC1D150 3 x LC1F185 3 x LC1F185 3 x LC1F225 3 x LC1F265 3 x LC1F330 3 x LC1F330 3 x LC1F400 3 x LC1F500 3 x LC1F630 3 x LC1F630 3 x LC1F780

LRD08 LRD10 LRD12 LRD14 LRD16 LRD21 LRD22 LRD32 LRD3355 LRD3357 LRD3361 LRD3363 LRD3365 LR9D5367 LR9D5369 LR9D5369 LR9D5369 LR9D5369 LR9F5371 LR9F5371 LR9F7375 LR9F7375 LR9F7379 LR9F7379 LR9F7379 LR9F7381 LR9F7381 LR9F7381

1/31

Combination starters for customer assembly

TeSys motor starters - open version


D.O.L. starters with fuse protection (BS fuses)

0.06 to 375 kW at 415 V: type 2 coordination

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 415 V P kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 22 30 45 55 80 100 110 140 160 220 257 270 375 Ie A 0.22 0.36 0.42 0.6 0.88 1 1.5 2 3.5 5 6.5 8.4 11 14 18.1 21 28.5 42 57 81 100 138 182 196 250 285 388 450 460 610 440 V P kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 22 30 45 55 80 100 110 140 160 220 257 270 375 Ie A 0.19 0.28 0.37 0.55 0.76 1 1.36 1.68 3.06 4.42 5.77 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20 26.5 39 51.5 76 90 132 162 178 226 256 353 412 433 577 500 V P A 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 22 30 45 55 80 100 110 140 160 220 257 270 375 425 Ie kA 1 1.2 1.5 2.6 3.8 5 6.5 9 12 13.9 18.4 23 33 45 65 80 116 143 156 200 220 310 362 380 508 556

Switchdisconnectorfuse Reference

BS fuses Size Rating A NIT 2 NIT 2 NIT 2 NIT 2 NIT 4 NIT 6 NIT 10 NIT 10 NIT 16 NIT 16 NIT 20 NIT 20 NIT 20M25 NIT 20M32 TIA 32M35 TIA 32M50 TIA 32M63 TIS 63M80 TIS 63M100 TIS 63M100 TIS 63M100

Contactor Reference (1)

Thermal overload relay Reference Setting range A 0.160.25 0.250.4 0.40.63 0.631 0.631 11.7 1.62.5 2.54 2.54 46 5.58 710 913 1218 1218 1624 2332 3040 3750 4865 4865 6380 8093 90150 60100 90150 90150 132220 132220 132220 132220 200330 200330 300500 300500 300500 380630 380630

GS1DDB GS1DDB GS1DDB GS1DDB GS1DDB GS1DDB GS1DDB GS1DDB GS1DDB GS1DDB GS1DDB GS1DDB GS1DDB GS1DDB GS2GB GS2GB GS2GB GS2GB GS2GB GS2GB GS2GB GS2LLB GS2LLB GS2LLB GS2LLB GS2LB GS2LB GS2LB GS2MMB GS2MMB GS2NB GS2NB GS2QQB GS2QQB GS2QQB GS2SB GS2SB GS2SB

A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A3 A3 A3 A3 A4 A4 A4 A4 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B3 B3 B4 B4 B4 C2 C2 C2

LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D12 LC1D18 LC1D18 LC1D25 LC1D32 LC1D40 LC1D50 LC1D50 LC1D65

LRD02 LRD03 LRD04 LRD05 LRD05 LRD06 LRD07 LRD08 LRD08 LRD10 LRD12 LRD14 LRD16 LRD21 LRD21 LRD22 LRD32 LRD3355 LRD3357 LRD3359 LRD3359 LRD3363 LRD3365 LR9D5369 LR9D5367 LR9D5369 LR9D5369 LR9F5371 LR9F5371 LR9F5371 LR9F5371 LR9F7375 LR9F7375 LR9F7379 LR9F7379 LR9F7379 LR9F7381 LR9F7381

TCP 100M125 LC1D80 TCP 100M125 LC1D95 TCP 100M160 LC1D115 TCP 100M160 LC1D115 TF 200 TF 200M250 TF 200M250 TF 200M250 TF 200M315 TKF 315M355 TKF 315M355 TKF 315M355 TMF 400 TTM 500 TTM 500 TTM 630 LC1D150 LC1D150 LC1F185 LC1F185 LC1F225 LC1F265 LC1F265 LC1F330 LC1F400 LC1F500 LC1F500 LC1F630

TMF 400M450 LC1F400

(1) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.

1/32

Combination starters for customer assembly


(continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version


Star-delta starters with fuse protection (BS fuses)

Maximum operating rate: LC1D: 30 starts/hour; LC1F: 12 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: LC1D: 30 seconds; LC1F: 20 seconds.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 415 V P kW 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 22 30 45 55 80 100 110 140 160 220 257 270 375 Ie A 3.5 5 6.5 8.4 11 14.8 18.1 21 28.5 42 57 81 100 138 182 196 250 285 388 450 460 610 Iq kA 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 440 V P kW 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 22 30 45 55 80 100 110 140 160 220 257 270 375 Ie A 3.06 4.42 5.77 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 39 51.5 76 90 132 162 178 226 256 353 412 433 577 Iq kA 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 GS1DDB GS1DDB GS1DDB GS1DDB GS1DDB GS1DDB GS2GB GS2GB GS2GB GS2GB GS2GB GS2GB GS2LLB GS2LLB GS2LB GS2MMB GS2MMB GS2NB GS2QQB GS2QQB GS2SB GS2SB A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A3 A3 A3 A4 A4 B2 B2 B2 B3 B3 B4 C2 C2 A NIT 16 NIT 16 NIT 20 NIT 20 NIT 20M25 NIT 20M32 TIA 32M35 TIA 32M50 TIA 32M63 TIS 63M80 TIS 63M100 TIS 63M100 3 x LC1D09 3 x LC1D09 3 x LC1D09 3 x LC1D09 3 x LC1D12 3 x LC1D18 3 x LC1D18 3 x LC1D25 3 x LC1D32 3 x LC1D40 3 x LC1D50 3 x LC1D65 LRD08 LRD10 LRD12 LRD14 LRD16 LRD21 LRD21 LRD22 LRD32 LRD3355 LRD3359 LRD3359 LRD3363 LR9D5369 LR9D5369 LR9F5371 LR9F5371 LR9F7375 LR9F7375 LR9F7379 LR9F7379 LR9F7381 Switchdisconnectorfuse Reference BS fuses Size Rating Contactor Reference Thermal overload relay Reference Setting range A 2.54 46 5.58 710 913 1218 1218 1624 2332 3040 4865 4865 6380 90150 90150 132220 132220 200330 200330 300500 300500 380630

1.5 to 375 kW at 415 V: type 2 coordination

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

TCP 100M125 3 x LC1D80 TCP 100M160 3 x LC1D115 TF 200M250 TF 200M250 TF 200M315 TFK 315M355 TFK 315M355 3 x LC1D150 3 x LC1F185 3 x LC1F225 3 x LC1F265 3 x LC1F330

TMF 400M450 3 x LC1F400 TTM 500 TTM 630 3 x LC1F500 3 x LC1F630

1/33

References

TeSys motor starters - open version


D.O.L. starters, plate mounted, for motor control 4 to 37 kW, (1), with isolating device, pre-assembled

References

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Dimensions : page 1/35
526459

Utilisation category AC-3 Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz 220 V 380 V 230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V kW kW kW kW 4 4 4 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 LC4D09App 15 18.5 22 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 5.5 9 11 15 22 25 37 45 5.5 9 11 15 22 30 37 45

500 V kW 5.5 7.5 10 15 18.5 22 30 37 55

660 V 690 V kW 18.5 30 33 37 45

Operational current 440 V up to A 9 12 18 25 32 40 50 65 80

Fuses to be fitted by the customer Type aM A 10 x 38 12 10 x 38 16 10 x 38 20 10 x 38 25 14 x 51 32 14 x 51 40 22 x 58 63 22 x 58 80 22 x 58 80 Size

Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2)

Weight

LC4D09App LC4D12App LC4D18App LC4D25App LC4D32App LC4D40pp LC4D50pp LC4D65pp LC4D80pp

kg 0.870 0.870 1.150 1.580 2.630 2.930 3.200 3.340 3.650

Specifications
Pre-wired power and control circuit connections. 3-pole isolating device

(1) Thermal overload relay to be ordered separately (see pages 6/20 and 6/21). (2) Standard control circuit voltages. Volts 24 50/60 Hz B7 42 D7 48 E7 110 F7 220 M7 230 P7 240 U7 380 Q7 400 V7 415 N7 440 R7

For other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office.

Schemes : page 1/35

1/34

Dimensions, schemes

TeSys motor starters - open version


1

D.O.L. starters, plate mounted, for motor control 4 to 37 kW, with isolating device, pre-assembled

Dimensions

D.O.L. starters, plate mounted, pre-assembled


LC4D09AD25A

1
LC4 b c1 without cover or add-on blocks with cover, without add-on blocks with LADN or C (2 or 4 contacts) with LA6DK10 with LADT, R, S with LADT, R, S and sealing cover D09AD18A 218 94 96 127 139 147 151 D25A 221 100 102 133 145 153 157

98 79
33

63

173

110

50

2 3 4 5 6

c1

= =

55 71 86

= =

LC4D32A LC4 c1 without cover or add-on blocks with cover, without add-on blocks with LADN or C (2 or 4 contacts) with LA6DK10 with LADT, R, S with LADT, R, S and sealing cover D32A 100 102 133 145 153 157

124

36

c1 =
LC4D40D80

88 90 165 =

110

c c1 c2

G a

LC4 a b b1 c c1 without cover or add-on blocks with cover, without add-on blocks with LA1DN (1 contact) with LADN or C (2 or 4 contacts) with LA6DK with LADT, R, S with LADT, R, S and sealing cover c2 G

D40D65 281 143 45 130 124 129 149 157 169 177 181 100 263

D80 311 143 48 140 135 140 160 168 180 188 192 178 293

= 100/110

7 8 9 10

60

Scheme

D.O.L. starters
LC4D09A to D80

1/L1

- Q1
4 2 6

3/L2

- KM1
2 4 6

References : page 1/34

5/L3

b1

1/35

Presentation

TeSys motor starters - open version


Start-delta starters for motor control

Star-delta starting

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Current 7

6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0,25 0,50 0,75 1 Speed

This method of starting is applicable to motors on which all 6 stator terminals are accessible and whose delta connection voltage corresponds to the mains voltage. Star-delta starting should be used for motors starting on no-load or having a low load torque and gradual build-up: - the starting torque in star connection is reduced to one third of the direct starting torque, i.e. about 50% of the rated torque. - the starting current in star connection is about 1.8 to 2.6 times the rated current. The transition from star to delta connection must occur when the machine has run up to speed. A too rapid build-up in load torque would cause the stabilised run-up speed to be too low and would therefore eliminate any advantage in this method of starting: this is the case with certain machines whose load torque depends on the machine speed (a characteristic of centrifugal machines, for example).
(1)

1 Starting in direct delta connection 2 Starting in star connection

Current 2,5

1
1,5

2
0,5

3
0 0 0,25 0,50 0,75 1 Speed

All star-delta starters are supplied with a special LADS2 or LA2KT2p time delay relay which imposes a delay on the delta contactor during the transition period in order to allow the star contactor sufficient breaking time. For ratings D115 and D150, this function is performed by a time delay auxiliary contact block LADT2 and a control relay.

1 Starting in direct delta connection 2 Starting in star connection 3 Resistive torque of the machine

(1) Motor manufacturers generally specify machine load torques. Example: maximum resistive torque on completion of star-delta start (expressed as a proportion of the rated torque).

1/36

References

TeSys motor starters - open version


Star-delta starters for motor control 5.5 to 132 kW, (1), without isolating device, pre-assembled

Plate mounted starters


Standard power ratings of squirrel cage motors Mains voltage delta connection 220/ 380/ 230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V

Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds.


Auxiliary contacts available on each contactor line KM2 delta KM3 star KM1 Star delta mechanical interlock Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) Weight

1 2 3 4 5 6

DF526460

kW 4 5.5 11 15 LC3 D32App 18.5

kW 7.5 11 18.5 25 37

kW 7.5 11 22 30 37

kW 7.5 11 22 30 37

(3) (3) (3) (3) (3)

1 1 1 1 1

With With With With Without With Without With Without With Without With Without With

LC3 D09App LC3 D12App LC3 D18App LC3 D32App LC3 D40pp LC3 D40ppA64 LC3 D50pp LC3 D50ppA64 LC3 D80pp LC3 D80ppA64 LC3 D115pp (4) LC3 D115ppA64 (4) LC3 D150pp (4) LC3 D150ppA64 (4)

kg 1.530 1.530 1.730 2.030 4.360 4.500 4.360 4.500 5.200 5.400 11.800 12.100 12.100 12.100

30

55

59

59

(3)

(3)

37

75

75

75

(3)

(3)

63

110

110

110

(3)

(3)

75

132

132

147

(3)

1 (3)

Rail mounted starters (35 mm 7 rail)


Standard power ratings of squirrel cage motors Mains voltage delta connection 220/ 380/ 230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V Auxiliary contacts available on each contactor line KM2 delta KM3 star KM1 Star delta mechanical interlock Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) Weight

kW 3 4

kW 5.5 7.5

kW 5.5 7.5

kW 5.5 7.5 1 1 With With LC3 K06pp LC3 K09pp

kg 0.740 0.740

Maximum operating rate: 12 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds.

7 8 9 10

Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds


4 5.5 11 15 7.5 11 18.5 25 7.5 11 22 30 7.5 11 22 30 (3) (3) (3) (3) 1 1 1 1 With With With With LC3 D090App LC3 D120App LC3 D180App LC3 D320App 1.530 1.530 1.730 2.030

(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current (see pages 6/20 and 6/21). (2) Standard control circuit voltages: Volts a 50/60 Hz 24 36 42 48 110 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 Star-delta starters LC3 K06 and K09 Code B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Star-delta starters LC3 D09A...D150, LC3 D090AD320A Code B7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 For other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office. (3) One auxiliary contact block type LAD N can also be fitted, see page 5/79. (4) These starters consist of contactors LC1 D115 or D150 without connectors. Dimensions : pages 1/42 and 1/43 Schemes : page 1/43

1/37

1 2 3

KM2

4 5
KM3

a 1b 1c

KM1

6 7
KM2

KM1 KM3

8
1b

9 10
a 2 1c 1a

1/38

References

Star-delta starters, for motor control, 7.5 to 132 kW (1), without mechanical interlock, for customer assembly
(on plate or on mounting rail) (2)

TeSys motor starters - open version

Starters for direct combination with a circuit-breaker


Standard power ratings of squirrel cage motors (3) Mains voltagedelta connection 400/ 440 V 415V kW kW 7.5 7.5 9 9 11 11 15 15 Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breaker

Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds


Contactors (basic references, to be completed by adding the voltage code) (4)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

GV2ME20 GV2ME20 GV2ME21 GV2ME22 GV2ME32

line KM2 LC1D09pp LC1D12pp LC1D12pp LC1D12pp LC1D18pp

delta KM3 LC1D09pp LC1D12pp LC1D12pp LC1D12pp LC1D18pp

star KM1 LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp

Separate component
Description Mounting kit comprising: power circuit connections and 1 time delay contact block LADS2 Illustration item no. a Reference LAD912GV Weight kg 0.130

Starters for mounting separately from upstream protection


Standard power ratings of squirrel cage motors (3) Mains voltage - delta connection 220/ 380/ 230V 400V 415V 440V kW kW kW kW Contactors (basic references, to be completed by adding the voltage code) (4) line KM2 LC1D09pp LC1D18pp (6) LC1D25pp (7) LC1D32pp LC1D40pp LC1D50pp LC1D80pp LC1D115pp LC1D150pp delta KM3 LC1D09pp LC1D12pp LC1D25pp (7) LC1D32pp LC1D40pp LC1D50pp LC1D80pp LC1D115pp LC1D150pp

Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds.


Separate components (see below) star KM1 LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D18pp LC1D40pp LC1D40pp LC1D50pp LC1D80pp LC1D115pp

4 5.5 11 15 18.5 30 37 63 75

7.5 11 18.5 25 37 55 75 110 132

7.5 11 22 30 37 59 75 110 132

7.5 11 22 30 37 59 75 110 147

Component types D09 D12 D18 D32 D40 D50 D80 D115 (5) D150 (5)

Separate components
Description Mounting kit comprising: - 1 time delay contact block LADS2 (D09D80) (3), - power circuit connections (D09D80), - screws and clamps for fixing contactors to the plate (D40D80). Illustration item no. 1a 1b 1c For components type (5) D09 and D12 D18 and D32 D40 and D50 D80 Equipment mounting plates 2 D09, D12, D18 D32 D40 and D50 D80 Reference LAD91217 LAD93217 LA9D5017 LA9D8017 LA9D12974 LA9D32974 LA9D40973 LA9D80973 Weight kg 0.180 0.310 0.380 0.680 0.150 0.180 0.300 0.300

(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/20 and 6/21. (2) For mounting, assembly and cabling: please refer to installation instructions supplied with the equipment. (3) See comments on page 1/36. (4) See page 5/62. (5) For D115 and D150 components, see illustration and separate parts on pages 1/40 and 1/41. (6) A D12 component is adequate for the application, but use of a D18 is recommended. (connection capacity, correct use of power connection kit and connections). (7) A D18 component is adequate for the application, but use of a D25 is recommended. (connection capacity, correct use of power connection kit and connections).

Illustrations : page 1/38

Dimensions : pages 1/42 and 1/43

Schemes : page 1/43

1/39

13

12

11

10

1 2
14 6

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1/40

References (continued)

Star-delta starters, for motor control, 7.5 to 132 kW (1), without mechanical interlock, for customer assembly
(on plate or mounting rail) (2)

TeSys motor starters - open version

Starters for mounting separately from upstream protection


Separate components (continued)
Description Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks 1 N/O Control relay Time delay auxiliary contact blocks Lead sealing kit for time delay auxiliary contact blocks Thermal magnetic circuit-breaker for control circuit (200415 V) Set of 3 connectors for wider terminations (optional) Set of power connections with fixing accessories Spare volt free terminals Illustration For item no. use on 1 D115 (star) 3 4 5 D115, D150 D115, D150 D115, D150 No. Sold in lots of 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Unit reference LADN10 CAD32pp (3) LADT2 LA9D901 Weight kg 0.020 0.320 0.060 0.005

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

D115, D150

GB2CB05

0.060

D115, D150

LA9FG980

0.200

D115 D150

1 1 1 2

1 1 10 10 10 100 10 1 100 100

LA9D11517 LA9D15017 DZ3HA3 DZ3GA3 AB1BC9535 AB1AB8M35 AM1ED021 AM3PA65 AF1VA618 AF1VA410

0.800 1.050 0.007 0.006 0.236 0.005 0.210 1.950 0.006 0.002

D115, D150

Lug-connector terminal block End stop Mounting rail 5 35 mm Pre-slotted mounting plate Screw with captive washer

10 11 12 13 14

D115, D150 D115, D150 D115, D150 D115, D150 D115, D150

1 3 1 1 12 2

(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/20 and 6/21. (2) For mounting, assembly and cabling: please refer to installation instructions supplied with the equipment. (3) See page 7/21.

Illustrations : page 1/38

Dimensions : pages 1/42 and 1/43

Schemes : page 1/43

1/41

Dimensions

TeSys motor starters - open version


Star-delta starters

Dimensions

1 2

Star-delta starters
Plate mounted, pre-assembled LC3K Pre-assembled: LC3D09AD32A For customer assembly: 3 x LC1D with components D09 to D32

124

KM2

110

94

150 175

90 a

3 4 5

On starters LC3D09A to D18A, a connection block is mounted on the upper part of contactor KM2, increasing the overall height of the product by 6.5 mm.

LC3 a b c with LADS with LADS and sealing cover

D09A 143 26.5 139 143

110
=

110
D12A 143 26.5 139 143

KM3

KM1

D18A 144 26.5 139 143

D32A 165 32.5 145 149

Pre-assembled: LC3D40, D50 For customer assembly: 3 x LC1D with components D09 or D50

Pre-assembled: LC3D80 For customer assembly: 3 x LC1D with components D80

100/110

175 (1)

45

263 281

183 (1)

47

293 311

6 7 8 9

(1) + 4 mm with sealing cover Pre-assembled: LC3D115, D150 For customer assembly: 3 x LC1D with components D115 or D150

(1) + 4 mm with sealing cover

G a
a 450 450 b 555 555 c 205 205 G 425 425 H 525 525

10

LC3D115 or 3 x LC1D with components LC3D150 or 3 x LC1D with components References: pages 1/37 to 1/41 Schemes: pages 1/43

D115 D150

1/42

100/110

143

143

60

60

Dimensions (continued), schemes

TeSys motor starters - open version


Star-delta starters

Dimensions (continued)

Star-delta starters (continued)


On mounting rail AM1DP, pre-assembled LC3D090A to D320A

1
2x7
KM3 KM1

KM2

160 175

Schemes
LC3K, LC3D09A to D80 LC3D090A to D320A
L1 L2 L3

LC3 b c with LADS with LADS and sealing cover LC3K


KM3/5
95

D090A to D180A 153 139 143

D320A 137 145 149

2 3

LC3D
KM3/5

21 96

O
96

95

KM2

KM3

KM1

KM2 KM1 54 53
13

U1

V1

W1

(1)
2 4 6

KM2

14

KM3
2 4 6

KM1
22

U1

V1

W1

21

KM1

13 14

22

21

13

(2)

13 22

4 5 6 7 8
171

14

55 14

W2

U2

V2

15

KM2

KM2

21 56

T
A1 16
W2 U2 V2

A1

A1

A1

KM3

KM1

A1 22

A2

A2

A2

KM2/1 (N)

A2

N KM3/1

A2

A2

Note: LC3D09A to D18A: Mechanical interlock between KM3 and KM1. LC3D115 and D150
L1 L2 L3 2 4 6

F1

U1

V1

W1

F1
21 96

W2

U2

V2

153

(2)
l

22

KM2

KM3

KM1

95

13

KM1
184 154

KM2
68

161 56

W2

U2

V2

Recommended cabling for reversal of motor rotation (standard motor, viewed from shaft end).

W1

14

67

KM1
55 183

KM1

172

U1

V1

A2

KM1

KM2

A1

KM1 Y

KM3

KM2

KM3

A1 22

21 67

68

KM2
153 13

9 10

KM3
A1 162 A1

KM2
A1154

KA1
A1 14

F2

KM1
A2

KM2
A2

KA1
A2

KM3
A2

(1) Recommended cabling for reversal of motor rotation (standard motor, viewed from shaft end). (2) Remote control. References: pages 1/37 to 1/41

1/43

Presentation

Motor starters - open version


Start-delta starters for motor control

Star-delta starting

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Current

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0,25 0,50 0,75 1 Speed

This method of starting is applicable to motors on which all 6 stator terminals are accessible and whose delta connection voltage corresponds to the mains voltage. Star-delta starting should be used for motors starting on no-load or having a low load torque and gradual build-up: - the starting torque in star connection is reduced to one third of the direct starting torque, i.e. about 50 % of the rated torque. - the starting current in star connection is about 1.8 to 2.6 times the rated current. The transition from star to delta connection must occur when the machine has run up to speed. A too rapid build-up in load torque would cause the stabilised run-up speed to be too low and would therefore eliminate any advantage in this method of starting: this is the case with certain machines whose load torque depends on the machine speed (a characteristic of centrifugal machines, for example).
(1)

1 Starting in direct delta connection 2 Starting in star connection

Current 2,5

1
1,5

2
0,5

3
0 0 0,25 0,50 0,75 1 Speed

Switching from star to delta connection must be completed within a minimum time. This function is performed by a control relay and a time delay auxiliary contact block.

1 Starting in direct delta connection 2 Starting in star connection 3 Resistive torque of the machine
(1) Motor manufacturers generally specify machine load torques. Example: maximum resistive torque on completion of star-delta start (expressed as a proportion of the rated torque).

1/44

References

Motor starters - open version


Star-delta starters for motor control, 90 to 375 kW (1), without isolating device, pre-assembled

Maximum operating rate: 12 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: LC3Fppppp: 20 seconds, LC3FpppppA64: 30 seconds (3 identical contactors). Composition of starters without mechanical interlock, see pages 1/47 and 1/49. Star-delta starters
Standard power ratings of squirrel cage motors Mains voltage delta connection 220/ 380/ 230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V Auxiliary contacts available on each contactor line KM2 delta KM3 star KM1 Star delta mechanical interlock Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) Weight

Pre-assembled starters

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

(3)
511080

kW 90

kW 160

kW 160

kW 185

Without With

LC3F185pp LC3F185ppA64 LC3F225pp LC3F225ppA64 LC3F265pp LC3F265ppA64 LC3F330pp LC3F330ppA64 LC3F400pp LC3F400ppA64

kg 16.500 16.625 16.500 16.625 27.300 27.425 37.000 37.125 37.000 37.125

100

200

200

220

Without With

110

220

220

250

Without With

LC3FpppppA64

160

280

280

315

Without With

185

315

355

375

Without With

(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/34 and 6/35. (2) Standard control circuit voltages: Volts a 50/60 Hz 48 110 115 Code E7 F7 FE7 For other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office. (3) One auxiliary contact block type LADN can be fitted. 220/230 M7 230 P7 240 U7 380/400 Q7 400 V7 415 N7

Presentation : page 1/44

Dimensions : page 1/50

Schemes : page 1/51

1/45

1 2 3 4

*
1 7

KM1

5 6 7 8 9 10
* *
1 3 4

KM3 KM2
1

* *
1

* See page 1/48


1/46

References

Star-delta starters for motor control, 90 to 375 kW, (1), for customer assembly (on chassis)
Contactors

Motor starters - open version

Maximum operating rate: 12 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 20 seconds (3)


Standard power ratings of squirrel cage motors 220/ 380/ 400V 415V 230V kW kW kW 90 160 160 100 110 160 185 200 220 280 315 200 220 280 355 Contactors (2) 440V kW 185 220 250 315 375 line KM2 LC1F185pp LC1F225pp LC1F265pp LC1F330pp LC1F400pp delta KM3 LC1F185pp LC1F225pp LC1F265pp LC1F330pp LC1F400pp star KM1 LC1D150pp LC1F185pp LC1F185pp LC1F265pp LC1F265pp Separate components (see below) Component types F185 F225 F265 F330 F400

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Separate components (4)


Description Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks 2 N/O + 2 N/C Control relay Time delay auxiliary contact blocks Sealing cover Illustration For item no. use on 1 F185 to F400 2 3 4 F185 to F400 F185 to F400 F185 to F400 F185 to F400 F185 F225 to F400 F185 F225 F265 F330 and F400 Set of 3 busbars for thermal overload connections 8 F185 to F400 No. 3 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Sold in lots of 1 1 1 1 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Unit reference LADN22 CAD32 LADT2 LA9D901 GB2CB10 LA9FG980 LA9FJ980 LA9F18517 LA9F22510 LA9FH610 LA9FJ610 Weight kg 0.050 0.580 0.060 0.005 0.050 0.200 0.490 0.800 1.400 1.400 1.500

Thermal magnetic circuit5 breaker for 5 A control circuit Sets of 3 connectors 6 for wider terminations (optional) Sets of power connections 7

LA7Fppp (Selected according to size of thermal overload relay) see pages 6/34 and 6/35.

(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/34 and 6/35. (2) Contactors supplied with coil. Complete the reference by adding the control circuit voltage code. Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): LC1D150 Volts 48 110 115 120 220 230 240 380 400 415 50/60 Hz E7 F7 FE7 G7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 LC1F185 and F225 Volts 50 Hz (coil LX1) 60 Hz (coil LX1)

48 E5 E6

110 F5 F6

115 FE5

120 G6

220 M5 M6

230 P5

240 U5 U6

380 Q5 Q6

400 V5

415 N5

LC1F185 to F400 Volts 48 110 115 120 220 40 400 Hz (5) E7 (6) F7 FE7 G7 M7 Standard voltages, see page 5/114. For other voltages between 24 and 660 V, see pages 5/130 to 5/139. (3) For longer starting times, please consult your Regional Sales Office. (4) Other separate components, see page 1/49. (5) Coil LX1: LC1F265, F330 and F400. Coil LX9: LC1F185 and F225. (6) Except for LC1F400.

230 P7

240 U7

380 Q7

400 V7

415 N7

Presentation : page 1/44

Illustrations : page 1/46

Dimensions : page 1/50

Schemes : page 1/51

1/47

14

12

10

17

1 2 3 4

15

*
9

* *
KM1 KM3 KM2

5 6 7 8 9 10
16 13

* *

* * *
17 11

* See page 25018/2


1/48

References (continued)

Motor starters - open version


Star-delta starters for motor control, 90 to 375 kW, (1), for customer assembly (on chassis)

Separate components (continued from page 1/47)


Description Spare volt free terminals Illustration item no. 9 For use on F185 F225F400 Neutral terminals with stop and spare volt free terminal (for control circuit) 10 F185 No. 3 3 1 2 1 F225 and F265 1 2 1 F330 and F400 1 2 1 Reducer bracket Mounting rails (2) 11 12 13 Uprights (2) 1/4 turn sliding clip nuts and corresponding bolts for rails AM1DE 1/4 turn sliding clip nuts and corresponding bolts for rails AM1DE 1/4 turn sliding clip nuts and corresponding bolts for equipment fixing 14 15 F400 F185F400 F185F400 F115F400 F185F400 2 1 1 2 2 Sold in lots of 10 10 10 100 10 10 100 10 10 100 10 1 10 4 4 10 100 16 F185F400 8 10 10 17 F185F330 15 10 100 F400 8 10 10 100 10 4 Enclosures: metal, grey RAL 7032 F185F225 F265 F330 and F400 Fixing lugs adjustable for enclosure ACM 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 4 Unit reference DZ3GA3 DZ3HA3 AB1BC9535 AB1AB8P35 DZ3HA3 AB1BC15035 AB1AB8M35 DZ3JA3 AB1BC24035 AB1AB8M35 DZ3JA3 LA9F100 AM1DE200 AM1EC200 AM1EC200 AF1CD061 AF1VA618 AF1CD081 AF1VC820 AF1CD061 AF1VA618 AF1CD061 AF1CD081 AF1VA618 AF1VC820 Weight kg 0.006 0.007 0.236 0.006 0.007 0.277 0.007 0.010 0.287 0.007 0.010 0.100 0.900 2.980 2.980 0.020 0.006 0.020 0.024 0.020 0.006 0.020 0.020 0.006 0.024

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

25 x H6 screws with washers ACMGV763 ACMGV973 ACMGV1084 AE3FX122 19.090 33.310 54.000 0.080

(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/34 and 6/35. (2) Supplied in 2 m lengths. See page 1/50 for cutting to length.

Presentation : page 1/44

Illustrations : page 1/48

Dimensions : page 1/50

Schemes : page 1/51

1/49

Dimensions

Motor starters - open version


Star-delta starters

Dimensions

1 2 3 4

Chassis mounted starters


Pre-assembled: LC3F185 to LC3F400 For customer assembly: 2xLC1Fppp and 1xLC1D150 or 3xLC1Fppp

G F1 F2

KM2

KM3

KM1

K3
K1 110 110 110 140 140 K2 80 80 100 100 100

K4
c

a
a 565 565 665 765 765 b 675 675 775 975 975 c 235 235 266 276 276 G 525 525 625 725 725 H 625 625 725 825 925 K 160 160 165 195 195 K3 110 110 110 110 180 K4 80 80 110 180 110

5 6 7 8 9 10

LC3F185 or 2 x LC1Fppp + 1 x LC1D with components F185 LC3F225 or 3 x LC1Fppp with components F225 LC3F265 or 3 x LC1Fppp with components F265 LC3F330 or 3 x LC1Fppp with components F330 LC3F400 or 3 x LC1Fppp with components F400

Presentation: page 1/44

References: pages 1/45, 1/47 and 1/49

1/50

K1

K2

Schemes

Motor starters - open version


Star-delta starters

Schemes

Star-delta starters
LC3F185 to F400 Recommended cabling for reversal of motor rotation (standard motor, viewed from shaft end).
L1 L2 L3 2 4 6

1 2

U1

KM2
6 2 4

KM3
6 2 4

KM1
W2 U2 V2 2 4 6

V1

W1

3 4

U1

V1

W1

3 4

F1

W2

U2

V2

F1
96

5 6
172

O
13 22
Remote control

21

95

153

l
14

KM1
184 154

KM2
68

KM1
183

67

KM1
171

7
KA1
14 13

56

KM2
54

KM3
62

61

53

KM2

55

A1

A1

A1

A2

A2

A2

A2

F2

KM1

KM2

KA1

KM3

A1

8 9 10

Presentation: page 1/44

References: pages 1/45, 1/47 and 1/49

1/51

Discover

TeSys U: starter-controller
Standard TeSys U

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

The Standard TeSys U replaces conventional components in a smaller space b The Standard TeSys U starter-controller incorporates all the conventionally associated functions: circuit breaker + contactor + thermal relay. b It considerably reduces wiring time. b The electrical coordination of the components is intrinsically ensured.

DB124011

equivalent to >

Space-saving Time-saving Safety

DB123408

L1 L2 L3 L1 S1 OFF S2 ON

The Standard TeSys U meets 80 % of protection motor control requirements The functions embedded in the Standard TeSys U unit are those which are commonly deployed in simple solutions: b Adjustable protection against overloads and short-circuits b ON/OFF control of one direction of rotation b The wiring diagram illustrates ON/OFF pushbutton control. TeSys U incorporates "coil" terminals A1-A2 and "self-holding auxiliary contacts" 13-14.

Conventional control diagram Preservation of know-how

A2

A1 13 14

8 9 10

1/52

Discover (continued)

Advanced TeSys U

Furthermore, this version significantly extends the control possibilities. Advanced TeSys U incorporates the basic functions (protection, motor control) to which one or more functions that are usually carried out with automation modules can be added: motor status remote indication, protection trip remote indication, remote reset, overload alarm, transmission over bus, alphanumeric display, etc.
1 2

DB124012

1 2 3 4

equivalent to >
3

Space-saving Economical optimisation

Input / output card Communication interface 3 LCD display unit

By also allowing variable speed control b Advanced TeSys U connected to the XYZ variable speed controller also constitutes a natural variable speed control solution. It makes it possible to maintain the homogeneity of a motor control panel already well equipped with TeSys U starter-controllers.

5 6 7 8 9 10

DB124016

Homogeneity Simplicity Performance

1/53

Discover (continued)

Standard TeSys U

1 2

Creating a motor feeder with TeSys U requires combination of at least a power base and a control unit. The plug and play principle of this product allows other modules to be added to provide access to additional functions.

DB124014

2 B

Standard TeSys U - non-reversing


This configuration consists of a power base, a control unit and possibly an auxiliary contact module. It is used to protect a motor and to switch it ON/OFF. A LUB12 or LUB32 power base This power base incorporates the power components: terminal blocks, switching mechanism and power contacts. It also includes a set of NO-NC auxiliary contacts and their terminal blocks. C D B LUCA, LUCL control unit These control units incorporate the detection and protection functions with respect to: b overload short circuit b phase failure phase imbalance b earth fault protection (equipment protection only). The LUCL control unit is exclusively used with the variable speed controller. C Additional auxiliary LUF signalling contacts D LUA signalling contacts b Indicate that the protective device has tripped.

3
1 2

4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DB124013

Power supply terminal block ON/OFF/Reset control handle 3 "Motor" terminal block 4 "Coil" power supply terminal 5 Built-in auxiliary contacts

LU2B 12 - LU2B 32 Reverser control assembly

Standard TeSys U - non-reversing and reversing


LU2B12 Reversing power base allowing a motor to be controlled in both directions of operation. It incorporates the power components and the auxiliary contacts used to remotely indicate the direction of rotation. The NO-NC auxiliary contacts used to remotely indicate the ON/OFF status are to be ordered separately, in the same way as the LUCA control module.

1/54

Discover (continued)

Advanced TeSys U

For advanced applications or applications incorporating communication

1 2

Power supply terminal block ON/OFF/Reset control handle 3 "Motor" terminal block

Advanced TeSys U - non-reversing


This version consists of a power base, an advanced control unit and possibly an information or communication module for the measurement and alarm functions. They complement the main ON/OFF control function. A LUB120, LUB320 power base

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

DB124032

B 1 A C 2

This power base incorporates the power components: terminal blocks, switching mechanism and power contacts. It also incorporates the auxiliary contacts (terminal block not included). B LUCB, LUCC, LUCD supervisable control units detection / tripping / measurement C LUCM control unit with display

detection / tripping / measurement load parameter, alarm, log display, etc.

3 E

D Thermal overload signalling LUF module, Motor load indication LUF module Motor overload alarm LUF module

E LUL communication modules F AS-Interface, Modbus, Profibus DP, CANopen, DeviceNet or Advantys STB

F LUA signalling contacts indicate that the protective device has tripped

Plug-in integrated auxiliary contact terminal block

DB124015

Advanced TeSys U - non-reversing and reversing


An LU2M reverser block is added according to the principle of the Standard TeSys U. No preassembled reverser assembly in the Advanced TeSys U version. A reverser assembly can be built by ordering the different parts separately. This makes it possible to modify the installation or to create assemblies that incorporate a communication module.

1/55

Choose

Help with choosing units and modules

DB124017

1 2

For assembling components, connecting to the process, ON / OFF operation, resetting.

Power base

Standard TeSys U
LUB12 LUB32

Control unit
This unit is essential for providing all the electrical protection functions. Some of these also provide advanced measurement, alarm and display functions.

Standard control unit


LUCA Class 10 - 3-phase (see page 1/71)
DB124019

Magnetic control unit


LUCL For use with a variable speed controller or a soft starter (see page 1/134)
DB124019 DB124024

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

b Protection against overloads and short-circuits. b Protection against phase failure and phase imbalance. b Earth fault protection (equipment protection only). b Manual reset.

b Short-circuit protection. b Manual reset. b Motor thermal overload protection must be provided by the variable speed controller or the soft starter.

Auxiliary contact module


DB124029

Indication of pole status or cause of tripping

Auxiliary contact module pole status LUFN (see page 1/65)

Auxiliary contact module protection status LUFA1C (depending on configuration) (see page 1/65)

DB124030

For additional remote indication contacts.

Auxiliary contact module (protection status, pole status) on RJ connector LUFC00 (see page 1/78)

Code showing the compatibility of modules with control units.

1/56

Choose (continued)

Help with choosing units and modules

DB124018

Advanced TeSys U
LUB120 LUB320

1 2

Control and diagnostic unit


LUCB Class 10 - 3-phase LUCC Class 10 - single-phase LUCD Class 20 - 3-phase (see page 1/71)
DB124019

Multi-function control unit


LUCM Classes 5 to 30 single-phase and three-phase (see page 1/72)
DB124020

3 4 5 6 7 8

Same functions as the standard control unit. In addition, in conjunction with a function module: b fault differentiation with manual reset, b fault differentiation with remote or automatic reset, b thermal overload alarm, b indication of motor load.

Same functions as the standard control unit. In addition, reset parameters can be set to manual or automatic. b protection function alarm. b indication on front panel or on remote terminal. b "log" function. b main motor parameter "monitoring" function. b differentiation of thermal overload and magnetic fault. b overload, no-load running.

Fault signalling module


For indicating the cause of tripping and allowing a reset.
DB124021 DB124022

Thermal overload signalling module and manual reset. LUFDH11 (see page 1/73)

Thermal overload signalling module and automatic or remote reset LUGDA01 and LUFDA10 (see page 1/73)

Load level module


For indicating the load level, alerting a threshold overshoot.
DB124021 DB124023

Motor load indication module. LUFV2 (see page 1/73)

Thermal overload alarm module LUFW10 (see page 1/73)

Communication module
For monitoring the status of the starter-controller from a centralised automation system.
DB124026 DB124026 DB124027 DB124028

CANopen communication module LUFV2 (see page 1/86)


DB124026

DeviceNet communication module LULC09 (see page 1/92)


DB124025

Advantys stb communication module LULC15 (see page 1/92)


DB124026

Modbus communication module LULC033 (see page 1/94)


DB124028

9 10

BECKHOFF communication module LUFC14 (contact us)

AS-Interface communication module ASILUFC51 (see page 1/80)

Profibus DP communication module LULC07 (see page 1/82)

Module for Ethernet communication LULC033 + TeSys port (contact us)

1/57

Application examples

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers

525971

1 2 3 4 5 6
510901

Starting and protection of a pump. b Power: 4 kW at 400 V. b In: 9 A. b Maximum of 10 class 10 starts per hour. b Duty class S3. b 3-wire control: v Start button (S2), v Stop button (S1), b Control circuit voltage: a 230 V.

Application

Operating conditions

Products used

Description Power base 12 A with screw clamp connections Standard control unit

Item 1 2

Quantity Reference 1 LUB12 1 LUCA12FU

Page 1/62 1/71

b Short-circuit protection with level of protection of 50 kA at 400V. b Total coordination of protection devices conforming to EN 60947-6-2 (continuity of service) in case of a short-circuit. b Electronic protection against thermal overloads with an adjustment range of 4. b Load switching (2 million operating cycles in category AC-43 at In). b Indication of motor status by N/C or N/O contact. b Interlock between the motor starter control and the position of the rotary knob; not possible to start the motor when the knob is in the OFF position.

Functions performed

Scheme
1/L1

3/L2

5/L3

230 V

C.U.

7
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 W1 U1 V1

A2

8 9 10

M 3

1/58

A1

14

13

Application examples

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers

510902

Expansion of an existing installation for improved control of its operation. Monitor the status of the motor and obtain alarm signalling by a digital contact in order to improve operation of the pump and anticipate a complete stoppage due to thermal overload.

Application

Operating conditions

1 2 3 4 5

Additional products used


Description

Item

Quantity Reference

Page

Replace the standard control unit with an advanced control unit and insert a thermal overload alarm function module.
Advanced control unit Alarm function module 2 3 1 1 LUCB12FU LUF W10 1/71 1/73

b Alarm information is generated by the advanced control unit and is processed by the thermal overload alarm function module to make it usable. b The advanced control unit includes a thermal trip Test button on its front panel.

Functions performed

Scheme
1/L1

3/L2

5/L3

a 230 V

C.U.

14

13

LUF W10

Alarms Module

07

08
To application

6 7 8 9 10

2/T1

4/T2

6/T3

W1

U1

V1

A2

M 3a

Other versions

The advanced control unit can provide other functions, depending on the type of function modules used (instead of the LUF W module described above): - thermal fault signalling with function modules LUFDA01, LUFDA10 or LUFDH11, - indication of motor load with function module LUFV2. This module delivers a 4-20 mA analogue signal, which is proportional to the average 3-phase current drawn by the motor. This allows the load current to be monitored and provides access to other application functions using this value, or to predictive or preventive maintenance possibilities (replacement of the motor before it breaks down).

A1

1/59

Application examples

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers

520971

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Manual control of a 2-position turntable. b Power: 2.2 kW at 400 V. b In: 6 A. b 30 starts per hour b Duty class S4. b 3-wire control: v Pushbutton for Position 1 (S1), v Pushbutton for Position 2 (S2), v Stop button (S5), b Stopping at the positions is achieved by limit switches S3 and S4. b Control circuit voltage: a 115 V.

Application

Operating conditions

Products used

Description Power base, reversing, 12 A with screw clamp connections Standard control unit

Item 1 2

Quantity Reference 1 LU2B12FU 1 LUCA12FU

Page 1/63 1/71

523761

b Short-circuit protection with level of protection of 50 kA at 400V. b Total coordination of protection devices conforming to EN 60947-6-2 (continuity of service) in case of a short-circuit. b Electronic protection against thermal overloads with an adjustment range of 4. b Load switching (2 million operating cycles in category AC-43 at In). b Interlock between the motor starter control and the position of the rotary knob; not possible to start the motor when the knob is in the OFF position. Electrical interlocking is ensured by pre-wired connector LU9MR1C included on base LU2B12. The design of the reversing power block makes mechanical interlocking unnecessary.

Functions performed

Scheme (manual control)


1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

LU2B
A3 B3 A1

Reverser Motor Controller

B1

C.U.

2/T1

4/T2

M 3

W1

U1

V1

6/T3

115 V

1/60

A2

Application examples

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers

520969

Monitoring operation of a surface pump in a water treatment plant to avoid dry running, which could lead to destruction of the pump. b b b b b

Application

Operating conditions

1 2
Page 1/62 1/72 1/95 1/95 1/95 1/95

Power: 15 kW at 400 V. In: 28.5 A. Duty class S1. Control circuit voltage: c 24 V. Control-command by PLC and serial link using the Modbus protocol.
Item 1 2 3 4 Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 Reference LUB320 LUCM 32BL LUL C033 LU9B N11C VW3A8306Rpp VW3 A8 306 TF03

Products used
Description Power base 32 A without connections Multifunction control unit Modbus communication module Pre-wired coil connection Connection of communication module output terminals to the coil terminals Connection cable for connecting the communication module to the serial bus T-junction

3 4 5 6 7 8

510903

3 4

b Short-circuit protection with level of protection of 50 kA at 400V. b Total coordination of protection devices conforming to EN 60947-6-2 (continuity of service) in case of a short-circuit. b Electronic protection against thermal overloads with an adjustment range of 4. b Load switching (1.5 million operating cycles in category AC-43 at In). b Measurement of load current and detection of no-load running by the multifunction control unit. b Interlock between the motor starter control and the position of the rotary knob; not possible to start the motor when the knob is in the OFF position. b No-load running or operation under load. To use this function, the following parameters must be entered: v trip: the answer yes/no enables or disables the function, v time before tripping: the time period during which the value of the current must be below the tripping threshold in order to cause tripping (adjustable from 1 to 200 s), v tripping threshold: value as a % of the load current ratio in relation to the setting current. If the ratio remains below this threshold for the time specified in the previous parameter, the product trips (adjustable from 30 to 100 %). b Indication of the various motor starter statuses and currents.

Functions performed

Schemes
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

LUCM

Multifunction Control Unit

LUL C033

Modbus Module

D (B) D (A) Gnd

Modbus profile IEC 64915 Commands (Register 704) Forward running Reverse running Reserved Reset Reserved Connection test Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 3-phase control Reserved Reserved Reserved

Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15

Status (Register 455) Ready (available) Poles closed Fault Alarms Tripped Reserved reset enabled A1-A2 powered Motor running Motor current % (bit 0) Motor current % (bit 1) Motor current % (bit 2) Motor current % (bit 3) Motor current % (bit 4) Motor current % (bit 5) Reserved Motor starting

24 V Aux

4 5 8

LU9B N11C Pre wired coil

LO1 LI1 LI2

C.U.

U1 2/T1

V1 4/T2

W1 6/T3

c 24 V

M 3a

Modbus
VW3 A8 306 TF03

D (B) D (A) Gnd

24 V 24 V c Aux COM

4 5 8

9 10

The multifunction control unit incorporates other control and protection functions, such as: monitoring and control of phase current, alarm, Module LUL C033 also provides a programmable output and two configurable discrete inputs.

Other functions

1/61

Discover

TeSys U motor starters open version


Starter-controller
Non-reversing power bases

LUB 12, LUB 32

Two types of bases are available, each in two versions: b LUB12, LUB32 Standard power bases: 12 A and 32 A versions. b Advanced power bases for use in conjunction with LUB120, LUB320 function or communication module: 12 A and 32 A versions.

DB124035

Common characteristics
b Breaking capacity: 50 kA at 400 V. b Ratings: 12 A or 32 A at 400 V. b Built-in auxiliary contacts: max. operating voltage (Up): 690 V AC, 250 V DC. Max. current (Ith): 5 A 1 NO, 1 NC. b Guaranteed continuity of service (complete coordination) between the protection and control functions to EN 60947-6-2. b Connection by screw clamp terminal.
Voltage (V) Rating (A) Breaking capacity (kA) Rating (A) Breaking capacity (kA)

References for Standard power bases


y 440 V 12 50 500 V 12 10

690 V 9 4 21 9

Reference LUB12

Weight (kg) 0.900

32 50

23 10

LUB32

1.270

The Standard bases are fitted with auxiliary contacts and a fixed terminal block.

LUB 120, LUB 320


DB124034

Voltage (V) Rating (A) Breaking capacity (kA) Rating (A) Breaking capacity (kA)

References for Advanced power bases


y 440 V 12 50 32 50 500 V 12 10 23 10

690 V 9 4 21 9

Reference LUB2B120

Weight (kg) 0.865

LUB2B320

0.865

b 3 types of terminal blocks are available, providing different types of pole status remote indication and coil control. b A cover is always supplied for each terminal block so that the top cavity of the base designed to receive the function modules (communication, alarm, etc.) can be closed off, if necessary. Terminal block for built-in auxiliary contacts
df510904

Terminal blocks for Advanced power bases

Description
1

Single terminal block for wire remote indication and local coil control
2 Terminal block with status remote indication cable to communication module LUF C00, LUL C033, ASILUF C51, local coil control

Reference LU9BN11 LU9BN11C

2
df510920

3 Terminal block with a cable for controlling the coil via communication module LUL C07, LUL C08, LUL C09, LUL C15, wire remote indication

LU9BN11L

3
df510922

1/62

Discover

TeSys U motor starters open version


Starter-controller
Non-reversing and reversing power bases

DB124037

"Reverser" power bases


The reverser power bases (non-reversing and reversing) consist of a combined power base and reverser block and are supplied as an assembled unit. They can also be assembled by the customer from units ordered separately.

Common characteristics
b Ratings: 12 A or 32 A at 400 V. b Built-in auxiliary contacts: max. operating voltage (Up): 690 V AC, 250 V DC Max. current. (Ith): 5 A 1 NO, 1 NC. b Guaranteed continuity of service (complete coordination) between the protection and control functions to EN 60947-6-2. b Connection by screw clamp terminal. References for Reverser power bases
y 440V 12 50 32 50 500 V 12 10 23 10

Voltage (V) Rating (A) Breaking capacity (kA) Rating (A) Breaking capacity (kA)

690 V 9 4 21 9

Reference LU2 B12

Weight (kg) 1.270

LU2 B32

1.270

Reverser to be assembled: 3 solutions


DB124036 DB124038

Vertical mounting

Side mounting

1 1 1

5 2 3 4

5 4

3 4

DF124033

Assembly components
Description
1 1 2 3 4 5 9 6 7 8

12 A and 32 A bases 120 A and 320 A bases Prewired reverse control link Reverser block for vertical mounting Single terminal block for built-in auxiliary contacts Terminal block for wired control connection Reverser block for side mounting Terminal block with contact status remote indication cable to LULC communication module 9 Terminal block with jumper for controlling the coil via LULC communication module 9

Reference LUB 12, 32 LUB 120, 320 LU9M R1C LU2M B0 LU9 M1 LU9M R1 LU6M B0 LU9M RC LU9M RL

7 8

Full power base references


One or two letters must be added to the power base reference to identify the control voltage of its coil. Example: LUB12B = 12 A power base with 24 V AC coil control Volts c a 24 BL B 4872 ES (1) 110240 FU (2)

c or a (1) c : 4872 V, a : 48 V. (2) c : 110220 V, a : 110...240 V.

1/63

References

Signalling contacts
Non-reversing power base

Reminder: TeSys U is similar to a motor protection circuit breaker and a contactor sharing the same power contacts (poles).
DB123009

Monitoring TeSys U protection status


Auxiliary contacts are used to identify the operating mode: OPERATION ALLOWED / FAULT-TRIGGERED STOP / OFF They reproduce the status of the rotary handle: (Operation allowed) / TRIP / OFF They can be similar to the contacts of a conventional circuit breaker: v open / closed circuit breaker v OK / tripped. 2 locations for installing the contacts b in the function module cavity: plug-in box 1 b on the side of the power base: side-mounting box
Item
1 1 4 1

2 5 3 6

.
Weight (kg) 0.03 0.03 0.048

Composition 1 SD contact (NC / 95-96) 1 OF contact (NO / 17-18) 1 SD contact (NO / 97-98) 1 OF contact (NO / 17-18) 2 OF contacts (NO)

Reference LUA1C11 LUA1C20 LUA8E20

Covers 3 and 4 for empty cavities are supplied with the basic module.

Monitoring the pole status of the TeSys U


The auxiliary contacts are used to find the status of the load: b ON / OFF b They reproduce the status of the common power contacts (NO contacts) or the reverse status (NC contacts). Auxiliary contacts 6 built into the TeSys U power base Generally used for self-holding
1 NO contact (13-14) 1 NF contact (21-22) built-in built-in

b Module with two additional plug-in contacts Used as an extension to the built-in contacts, for automations, signalling.
Item
2 2 2

Composition 2 NO contacts (33-34 and 43-44) 1 NC contact (31-32) and 1 NO contact (43-44) 2 NF contacts (31-32 and 41-42)

Reference LUFN20 LUFN11 LUFN02

Weight (kg) 0.05 0.05 0.05

Electrical characteristics of the contacts Use of add-on and auxiliary contacts: ~ or = 24 250 V, Ith: 5 A.

1/64

References

Signalling contacts

Non-reversing and reversing power base

Monitoring TeSys U protection status


The auxiliary contacts are used to identify the load running mode: b OPERATION ALLOWED / FAULT-TRIGGERED STOP / OFF. They reproduce the status of the rotary handle: (Operation allowed) / TRIP / OFF. They may be similar to the OF (Open/Closed) and SD (Fault indicating) contacts of a conventional circuit breaker. v OF contact: open / closed circuit breaker v SD contact: circuit breaker OK / tripped 2 locations for installing contacts b in a function module cavity: plug-in box 1 b on the side of the power base: side-mounting box
Item
6 1 4 1
DB124010

2 5 3

Composition 1 SD contact (NC / 95-96) 1 OF contact (NO / 17-18) 1 SD contact (NO / 97-98) 1 OF contact (NO / 17-18) 2 OF contacts (NO)

Reference LUA1C11 LUA1C20 LUA8E20

Weight (kg) 0.03 0.03 0.048

Covers 3 and 4 for empty cavities are supplied with the basic module

b The auxiliary contacts are used to find the status of the load: ON / OFF. They reproduce the status of the common power contacts (NO contacts) or the reverse status (NC contacts). Additional plug-in module with 2 auxiliary contacts The contacts built into the power base are used to control the reverser block. To remotely indicate the status of the power poles, one of the following accessories must be used.
Item
2 2 2

Monitoring the pole status of TeSys U: by auxiliary contacts

Composition 2 NO contact (33-34) 1 NO contact (43-44) 1 NF contact (31-32) 2 NF contacts (31-32 and 41-42)

Reference LUFN20 LUFN11 LUFN02

Weight (kg) 0.05 0.05 0.05

Monitoring the direction of rotation


Auxiliary contacts are used to find the direction of the load control: FORWARD / REVERSED. They reproduce the status of the reverser block power contacts. Auxiliary contact 6 built into the reverser block Generally used to indicate the direction of rotation of a motor. 1 reversing contact (82 - 81 - 84). Electrical characteristics of the contacts Use of add-on and auxiliary contacts: ~or = 24 250 V, Ith: 5 A.

1/65

References

TeSys motor starters open version


TeSys U starter-controllers
Pre-wired system for power connections

Pre-wired system for power connections up to 63 A


Description Sets of 3-pole 63 A busbars Application 2 tap-offs 3 tap-offs 4 tap-offs Pitch mm 45 54 45 54 45 Item
2

1
DB123405

1 8 4

Sold in lots of 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 1

Unit reference GV2G245 GV2G254 GV2G345 GV2G354 GV2G445 GV2G454 GV2G554 GV1G10 GV1G09

Weight kg 0.036 0.038 0.058 0.060 0.77 0.085 0.100 0.005 0.040

Protective end cover Terminal block for supply to one or more busbar sets

54 54 5 tap-offs For unused busbar outlet


4 3

Pre-wired system for power connections up to 160 A The busbar can be screw-mounted onto any support.
Set of 4-pole busbars: 3-phase + neutral or 3-phase + common Item Length Mounting in Number of tap-off mm enclosure width units at 18 mm mm intervals 18 5 452 800 Reference Weight kg 0.900

DB123401

AK5JB144

Removable 3-phase power sockets


Thermal Number of points used on the busbar current system 16 2 32 Item Cable length 200 250 1000 Sold in lots of 6 6 6 Unit reference Weight kg AK5PC13 (1) AK5PC33 (1) 0.040 0.045

6 6

AK5PC33L (1) 0.060

1/66

References

TeSys U starter-controllers
Limiter blocks and accessories

TeSys motor starters open version

Limiter blocks and accessories


DB123400

Application

Item

9 8

Limiter7 + 9 disconnector (3) (5) Limiter (3) 8 Limiter cartridge Clip-in marker holder
9

Breaking capacity Iq y 440 V 690 V kA kA 130 70 100 130 35 70

Mounting

Unit reference Weight kg

Direct on power base Separate

LUALB1 (2) LA9LB920

0.310 0.320 0.135 0.001

Limiter-disconnector LUALF1 On power bases, on LAD90 (4) reverser block, on parallel link splitter box

(1) The rated peak current for the power sockets AK5 PC is 6 kA. When used in association with power bases LUB, the prospective short-circuit current must not exceed 7 kA. (2) Supplied with limiter cartridge. (3) These devices make it possible to increase the breaking capacity of the power base. (4) Sold in lots of 100. (5) The limiter must be mounted on an LUB or LU2B power base. The limiter can therefore not be common to several motor starters.

DB123999

Sparateur de phases
Phase barrier LU9 SP0 must be used: b to build a UL 508 Type E certified starter (Self Protected Starter) b without the phase barrier, the starter-controller is certified UL 508 b if the starter-controller is to be used at an operational voltage of 690 V.
Description Phase barrier Item
1

Application

Mounting

Reference LU9SP0

Weight kg 0.030

LUB or LU2B 12 Direct on or 120 terminals LUB or LUB2B 32 L1, L2, L3 or 320 LUA LB1

1/67

References

TeSys motor starters open version


TeSys U starter-controllers

Extended rotary handle

DB123407

Allows a circuit-breaker or a TeSys U starter-controller installed in back of an enclosure to be operated from the front of the enclosure. The rotary handle can be black or red/yellow, IP 54 or IP 65. It includes a function for locking the circuit breaker or the starter in the O (OFF) or | (ON) position (depending on the type of rotary handle) by means of up to 3 padlocks with a shank diameter of 4 to 8 mm. The extended shaft must be adjusted to the depth of the enclosure. The IP54 rotary handle is fixed with a nut ( 22) to make it easier to assemble.

Padlockable external controls


Description
1 2 3 4 5 6
DB123403

Handle + mounting system kit Universal handle Shaft Shaft support plate for deep enclosure Retrofit accessory Laser Square accessory

Padlockable external controls


Handle + mounting system kit Description Black handle, with error status, IP 54
3 2

Item
1 1 1 2 2 2

Reference LU9APN21 LU9APN22 LU9APN24 GVAPB54 GVAPR54 GVAPR65 GVAPA1 GVAPK12 GVAPP01 GVAPSFR GVAPSEN GVAPSDE GVAPSES GVAPSCN GVAPSPT GVAPSRU GVAPSIT

Weight kg 0.820 0.820 0.820 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.110 0.030 0.160

Red handle, with error status, IP 54 Red handle, without error status, IP 65 Black handle, IP 54 Red handle, IP 54 Red handle, IP 65 Shaft L = 315 mm

4 5

Shaft support plate for deep enclosure Depth u 300 mm Retrofit accessory

Sticker (vendu par lot de 10) French Warning label English German Spanish Chinese Portuguese Russian Italian

DB123402

1/68

References

TeSys motor starters open version


TeSys U starter-controllers

Remote controls - small handle


Description
DB124404

Item
1

Reference
2

Weight kg 0.586

Handle for mounting in the MCC drawer with fixing kit


1

LU9 AP20

RESET

TEST

1/69

Selection

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers
Control units

Operating characteristics

1 2 3 4

Control units Thermal overload protection Overcurrent protection Short-circuit protection Protection against phase loss Protection against phase imbalance Earth fault protection (equipment protection only) Tripping class Motor type Thermal overload test function Overtorque No-load running Long starting time Reset method Manual Automatic or remote

Standard LUCA

Advanced LUCB LUCC

LUCD

Multifunction LUCM 3 to 17 x the setting current

14.2 x the setting current 14.2 x the max. current

10 3-phase

10 20 Single-phase 3-phase

530 Single-phase and 3-phase

With function module, or parameters can be set via the bus with a communication module, see chart below. Thermal overload alarm only with function module or communication module, see below.

Parameters can be set Parameters can be set Parameters can be set via the bus with a communication module (see below). Possible for each type of fault. Indication on front panel of the control unit, via remote terminal, via PC or via PDA (1). With communication modules to make use of these alarms via a bus, see below. Log of the last 5 trips. Number of starts, number of trips, number of operating hours.

Alarm

5
Log function

6 7 8 9 10

Monitoring function

Display of main motor parameters on front panel of the control unit, via remote terminal, via PC or via PDA (1).

With function modules (2)


Thermal overload alarm Thermal overload signalling and manual reset Thermal overload signalling and automatic or remote reset Indication of motor load (analogue) With module LUFW With module LUFDH11 With modules LUFDA01 and LUFDA10 With module LUFV

With communication module or via Modbus port on control unit LUCM (2)
Starter status (ready, running, fault) Reset method Alarm Remote reset via the bus Indication of motor load Fault signalling and differentiation Remote programming and monitoring of all functions Log function Monitoring function Built-in function (1) PDA: Personal Digital Assistant. (2) Mounting possibilities: 1 function module or 1 communication module. Function provided with accessory With any communication module Parameters can be set via the bus With modules LULC031, LULC033, LULC15, LULC07, LULC08 and LULC09 (thermal overload alarm only). With module LULC031, LULC033, LULC15, LULC07, LULC08 and LULC09 and Modbus port on the control unit (alarm possible for all types of fault). With modules LULC031, LULC033, LULC15, LULC07, LULC08 and LULC09 and Modbus port on the control unit.

1/70

References

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers
Standard and advanced control units

510913

1 5 2

1 2 3 4 5

Description

Extraction and locking handle Test button (on advanced control unit only) Ir adjustment dial Locking of settings by sealing the transparent cover Sealing of locking handle
Setting range Clip-in mounting on power base Rating A 12 and 32 12 and 32 12 and 32 12 and 32 32 32 LUCA X6pp LUCA 1Xpp LUCA 05pp LUCA 12pp LUCA 18pp LUCA 32pp Reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (1) Weight

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Standard control units


Maximum standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz 400/440 V 500 V 690 V kW kW kW

A 0.150.6 0.351.4 1.255 312 4.518 832

kg 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135

LUCApppp LUCBpppp

Class 10 for 3-phase motors


0.09 0.25 1.5 5.5 7.5 15 2.2 5.5 9 15 3 9 15 18.5

520735

Pressing the Test button on the front panel simulates tripping on thermal overload. Class 10 for 3-phase motors
0.09 0.25 1.5 5.5 7.5 15 2.2 5.5 9 15 3 9 15 18.5 0.150.6 0.351.4 1.255 312 4.518 832 12 and 32 12 and 32 12 and 32 12 and 32 32 32 LUCBX6pp LUCB1Xpp LUCB05pp LUCB12pp LUCB18pp LUCB32pp 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140

Advanced control units

Class 10 for single-phase motors


0.09 0.55 2.2 4 7.5 0.150.6 0.351.4 1.255 312 4.518 832 12 and 32 12 and 32 12 and 32 12 and 32 32 32 LUCCX6pp LUCC1Xpp LUCC05pp LUCC12pp LUCC18pp LUCC32pp 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140

LUBp2 + LUCA pppp

520736

Class 20 for 3-phase motors


0.09 0.25 1.5 5.5 7.5 15 2.2 5.5 9 15 3 9 15 18.5 0.150.6 0.351.4 1.255 312 4.518 832 12 and 32 12 and 32 12 and 32 12 and 32 32 32 LUCDX6pp LUCD1Xpp LUCD05pp LUCD12pp LUCD18pp LUCD32pp 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140

(1) Standard control circuit voltages: Volts 24 4872 110240 c BL (2), (3) a B ES (4) FU (5) c or a (2) Voltage code to be used for a starter-controller with communication module. (3) d.c. voltage with maximum ripple of 10 %. (4) c : 4872 V, a : 48 V. (5) c : 110220 V, a : 110...240 V. LUBp2 + LUCB pppp

Characteristics: pages 1/98 and 1/101

Schemes: page 1/115

1/71

References

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers
Multifunction control units

510914

1 2
LUCMppBL

6 1 2 3 5

1 2 3 4 5 6

Description

Extraction and locking handle Built-in display window (2 lines, 12 characters) 4-button keypad c 24 V auxiliary power supply Modbus RS485 communication port. Connection by RJ45 connector. Sealing of locking handle

The display window 2 and keypad 3 allow: b in configuration mode: local configuration of protection functions and alarms, b in run mode: display of parameter values and events. The Modbus communication port 5 is used to connect: b an operator terminal, b a PC, b a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA). Parameter entry, monitoring of parameter values and consultation of logs are carried out: b either on the front panel, using the built-in display window/keypad, b or via an operator terminal, b or via a PC or a PDA with PowerSuite software, b or remotely, via a Modbus communication bus. Programming of the product via the keypad requires a c 24 V auxiliary power supply.
Maximum standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz 400/415 V 500 V 690 V kW kW kW 0.09 0.25 1.5 2.2 3 5.5 7.5 15 5.5 9 15 9 15 18.5 Setting range Clip-in mounting on power base Rating A 12 and 32 12 and 32 12 and 32 12 and 32 32 32 Reference (1) Weight

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Characteristics: pages 1/98 and 1/101 Schemes: pages 1/114 and 1/117
520737

Multifunction control units

A 0.150.6 0.351.4 1.255 312 4.518 832

LUCM X6BL LUCM 1XBL LUCM 05BL LUCM 12BL LUCM 18BL LUCM 32BL

kg 0.175 0.175 0.175 0.175 0.175 0.175

LUBp2 + LUCM ppBL

TeSys U users manual (2)


Application On CD-Rom Language Multi-language (3) Reference LU9 CD1 Weight kg 0.022

This compact Magelis terminal enables the parameters of multifunction control unit LUCM to be read and modified. It is supplied pre-configured to provide dialogue with 8 TeSys U starter-controllers (Modbus protocol, application pages and alarm pages loaded). Starter-controller alarm and fault management takes priority.
Language Multi-language (3) XBTNU400 Display window 4lines of 20 characters Length 2.5 m Supply voltage c 24 V Reference XBTNU400 Weight kg 0.150

HMI terminal

521335

Connecting cable (4)


Function

Type SUB-D 25-way female - RJ45

Reference XBTZ938

Connects terminal XBTNU400 to a multifunction control unit.

Weight kg 0.200

(1) Input voltage c 24 V with maximum ripple of 10 %. (2) The CD-Rom contains users manuals for the AS-Interface and Modbus communication modules, multifunction control units and gateway modules, as well as the gateway programming software. (3) English, French, German, Italian, Spanish (4) If a terminal is used with several control units, this cable can be connected to a Modbus hub or to T-junctions (see page 1/95).

1/72

References

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers
Function modules
Function modules
Output Item Application Reference Weight kg

Thermal overload signalling and manual reset Module LUFDH11 makes it possible to differentiate thermal overload and shortcircuit faults. (The short-circuit fault can then be signalled via add-on contact blocks LUA1C). The module includes two contacts for thermal overload signalling, as well as an LED on the front panel. To reset the motor starter, the operator must use the rotary knob on the power base. The module can only be used with an advanced control unit and requires an a/c 24240 V external power supply.
510915

1 2 3 4 5

1 N/O + 1 N/C

a or c 24250 V

LUF DH11

0.060

Thermal overload signalling and automatic or remote reset These modules make it possible to differentiate thermal overload and short-circuit faults. (The short-circuit fault can then be signalled via add-on contact blocks LUA1C). The modules include one contact for thermal overload signalling, as well as an LED on the front panel. A second contact (terminals Z1-Z2) must be wired in series with terminal A1 of the motor starter. In the event of a thermal overload fault, this wiring allows motor control to be switched off. The rotary knob on the power base will then stay in the ready position . Resetting of the motor starter is automatic after the required motor cooling time if terminals X1-X2 are linked by a strap, or remote by pulsed closing of a volt-free contact connected to terminals X1-X2. These modules can only be used with an advanced control unit and require an a/c 24240 V external power supply.

LUBp2 + LUCBpppp + LUFW10 or LUFVp

Note: Terminals X1-X2 are not isolated from the signalling module power supply. For remote resetting, use a volt-free contact specific to each module to be reset. 1 N/C 1 N/O 4 4 a or c 24250 V a or c 24250 V LUF DA01 LUF DA10 0.055 0.055

% 200

100

Thermal overload alarm Through load shedding, this module makes it possible to avoid stoppages in operation due to overload tripping. Imminent thermal overload tripping is displayed as soon as the thermal state exceeds the threshold of 105 % (hysteresis = 5 %). Signalling is possible via an LED on the front panel of the module and externally by an N/O relay output. It can only be used with an advanced control unit, from which it takes its power.
1 2 3
1 N/O 1 2.2 kW 2 4 kW 3 7.5 kW
12 mA 20 mA

6 7 8

510445

a or c 24250 V

LUF W10

0.055

Indication of motor load This module provides a signal which is representative of the motor load status (Iaverage/Ir). b I average = average value of the rms currents in the 3 phases, b Ir = value of the setting current. The value of the signal (4-20 mA) corresponds to a load status of 0 to 200 % (0 to 300 % for a single-phase load). It can be used with an advanced or multifunction control unit. Module LUFV2 requires a c 24 V external power supply.
4 - 20 mA 2 LUF V2 0.050

9 10
Characteristics: pages 1/98 and 1/103 Schemes: page 1/116

1/73

Presentation, functions

PowerSuite software workshop

1 2 3 4 5 6

The PowerSuite software workshop for PC is a user-friendly tool designed for setting up the Schneider Electric control device motors: b TeSysU starter-controllers b TeSysT motor management systems b Altistart soft start/soft stop units b Altivar variable speed drives b Lexium 05 servo drives It includes various functions designed for setup phases such as: b Preparing configurations b Start-up b Maintenance To facilitate start-up and maintenance, the PowerSuite software workshop is compatible with the Bluetooth wireless link.

Presentation

534513

PowerSuite screen on PC

Functions (1) Preparing configurations The PowerSuite software workshop can be used on its own to generate the device configuration, which can be saved, printed and exported to office automation software.
The PowerSuite software workshop can also be used to convert an Altivar 58 or Altivar58F drive configuration into one that is compatible with an Altivar71. Start-up When the PC is connected to the device, the PowerSuite software workshop can be used to: b Transfer the generated configuration b Adjust b Monitor. This option has been enhanced with new functions such as: v The oscilloscope v The high-speed oscilloscope (minimum time base: 2 ms) v The FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) oscilloscope v Display of communication parameters b Control b Save the final configuration

533181

PowerSuite screen on PC View of PI regulator function parameters

7 8 9 10
View of the FTT oscilloscope References: page 1/76

Maintenance To facilitate maintenance operations, the PowerSuite software workshop can be used to: b Compare the configuration of a device currently being used with a saved configuration b Manage the users installed equipment base, in particular: v Organize the installed base into folders (electrical equipment, machinery, workshops, etc.) v Store maintenance messages v Facilitate Modbus TCP connection by storing the IP address User interface The PowerSuite software workshop can be used to: b Present the device parameters (arranged by function) in the form of illustrated views of diagrams or simple tables b Customize the parameter names b Create: v A user menu (choice of particular parameters) v Monitoring control panels with graphic elements (cursors, gauges, bar charts) b Perform sort operations on the parameters b Display text in five languages (English, French, German, Italian and Spanish). The language changes immediately and there is no need to restart the program. It also features online contextual help: b On the PowerSuite tool b On the device functions by direct access to the user manuals
(1) Certain functions are not available for all devices. See the table of available functions, page 1/75.

572706

1/74

Functions (continued)

PowerSuite software workshop

Functions available for the PowerSuite software workshop Functions not listed in the table are available for all devices.
Function available with devices Controller TeSys T Monitoring Oscilloscope High-speed oscilloscope FFT oscilloscope Display of communication parameters Control Customization of parameter names Creation of a user menu Creation of monitoring control panels Sort operation on parameters Custom logic editor Functions available Functions not available Startercontroller TeSys U Soft start/ soft stop unit ATS48 Drives ATV11 ATV31 ATV61 ATV71 Servo drive LXM05

1 2 3

PowerSuite

Modbus serial link The PowerSuite software workshop can be connected directly to the device terminal port or Modbus network port via the serial port on the PC. Two types of connection are possible: b With a single device (point-to-point connection), use a VW3A8106 PC serial port connection kit. b With a number of devices (multidrop connection), use the XGSZ24 interface. ModbusTCP communication network The PowerSuite software workshop can be connected to a ModbusTCP network. In this case, the devices can be accessed: b Using a VW3A3310 communication card for the Altivar 61 and 71 drives b Using a TSXETG100 Modbus TCP/Modbus gateway Bluetooth wireless link The PowerSuite software workshop can communicate via a Bluetooth radio link if the device is equipped with a Bluetooth Modbus VW3A8114. The adapter plugs into the device connector terminal port or Modbus network port and has a range of 10 m (class2). If the PC does not feature Bluetooth technology, use the VW3A8115 USB Bluetooth adapter. Remote maintenance A simple Modbus TCP connection is all that is required for the PowerSuite software workshop to support remote monitoring and diagnostics. When devices are not connected to the Modbus TCP network, or it is not directly accessible, various remote transmission solutions may be used instead (modem, teleprocessing gateway, etc.). Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
ATV61 ATV71

Connections (1)

536845

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

RS 232 XGS Z24 RS 485

Modbus serial link

ATV31 or Lexium05

ATV61

ATV71

TeSysU

ATS48

Modbus multidrop connection

PLC (2)
536846

PowerSuite

Modbus TCP network

Bridge Modbus serial link

ATV31 or Lexium05

ATS 48

(1) Please refer to the compatibility table on page 1/77. (2) Please refer to our specialist "Automation platform Modicon Premium and Unity - PL7 software" and "Automation platform Modicon M340" catalogues.

Modbus TCP connection

Presentation: page 1/74

References: page 1/76

1/75

References

PowerSuite software workshop

PowerSuite software workshop


536848

1 2

Description

Composition

Reference

PowerSuite CD-ROM

VW3A8104 b 1 program for PC in English, French, German, Italian and Spanish b Variable speed drive, starter and servo drive technical manuals b 1 program for PC in English, French, German, Italian and Spanish b Variable speed drive and starter technical manuals VW3A8105

Weight kg 0.100

PowerSuite update CD-ROM (1) PC serial port connection kit for point-to-point Modbus connection

0.100

VW3 A8104

VW3A8106 b 1 x 3 m cable with 1 RJ45 connector on starter-controller or drive side and 1 RS232/RS485 converter with 19-way female SUB-D connector on PC side b For the ATV 11 drive: 1 converter with one 4-way male SUB-D connector and 1 RJ45 connector b For ATV38/58/58F drives: 1 RJ45/9-way male SUB-D adapter XGSZ24 b 1 Modbus multidrop converter for connection to screw terminals. Requires a 24 V c(20...30V), 20mA power supply (2) VW3A8114 b 1 Bluetooth adapter (10m range, class 2) with 1 RJ45 connector b For PowerSuite: 1 x 0.1 m cable with 2 RJ45 connectors b For TwidoSoft: 1 x 0.1 m cable with 1 RJ45 connector and 1 mini DIN connector b For ATV 38/58/58F drives: 1 RJ45/9-way male SUB-D adapter This adapter is required in the case of a PC that does not feature Bluetooth technology. It is connected to a USB port on the PC. 10 m range (class 2) VW3A8115

0.350

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Presentation: page 1/74
536847

RS 232/RS 485 interface for multidrop Modbus connection Modbus-Bluetooth adapter (3)

0.105 0.155

VW3 A8114

USB - Bluetooth adapter for PC

0.290

(1) Updates a version u V1.40 with the latest available version. For versions < V1.40, you should order the PowerSuite CD-Rom, VW3A8104. (2) Please refer to the "Interfaces, I/O splitter boxes and power supplies" catalogue. (3) Can also be used to communicate between a Twido PLC and the TwidoSoft software workshop.

Fonctions: page 1/74

1/76

Compatibility

PowerSuite software workshop

Compatibility of PowerSuite software workshop with the following devices (1)


Connexion Controller TeSysT Modbus Modbus TCP (device equipped with Modbus TCP card) Modbus TCP via Modbus TCP/Modbus gateway Bluetooth Compatible software versions Incompatible software versions V1.50 V2.2 V2.0 V2.2 V2.5 Startercontroller Soft start/ soft stop unit ATS48 V1.30 Drives

Servo drives LXM05A LXM05B LXM05C V2.2 V2.4 V2.5

TeSysU (2) V1.40

ATV11 V1.40

ATV31 V2.0

ATV61 V2.3 V2.3 V2.3 V2.3

ATV71 V2.2 V2.2 V2.2 V2.2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

V2.2 V2.2

V2.4 V2.4

V2.5 V2.5

The PowerSuite software workshop can operate in the following PC environments and configurations: b Microsoft Windows XP SP1, SP2, b Pentium III, 800 MHz, hard disk with 300 MB available, 128 MB RAM b SVGA or higher definition monitor
(1) Minimum software version. (2) TeSys U starter-controllerwithout communication module or with Modbus LULC031 or C033 communication module.

Hardware and software environments

Presentation: page 1/74

Fonctions: page 1/74

References: page 1/76

1/77

Presentation, references

TeSys motor starters - open version


1

TeSys U starter-controllers

Parallel wiring module and pre-wired coil connection components

1 2

1 2

Outputs for starter commands RJ45 connector for connecting to splitter box

The parallel wiring system makes it possible to connect starter-controllers to the PLC I/O modules quickly and without any need for tools. It replaces traditional screw terminal and single wire connections. It is used with the Telefast pre-wired system (1). The parallel wiring module provides the status and command information for each starter-controller. It must be used with an LUB12 or LU2BA0BL power base and a c 24 V control unit LUCpppBL. Splitter boxes LU9G02 and LU9G03 distribute information from the PLC I/O modules to each of the starter-controllers connected to it. Splitter box LU9G02 (maximum of 4 reversing starters) is optimised for use with card TSXDMZ28DTK and splitter box LU9G03 (maximum of 8 reversing starters) for use with cards TSXDMZ64DTK and BMXDDM3202K. When used in conjunction with the Advantys STB distributed I/O solution, the TeSysU starter-controller is ideal in decentralised automation architectures (2). The use of dedicated parallel interface module STBEPI2145 allows remote connection of 4 starter-controllers. Parallel wiring module LUFC00 has: b 2 outputs: control of starter forward and reverse running, b 3 inputs: position of the rotary knob, fault indication and position of the poles.

Presentation

511528

4
LU9G02 LU9 G03

511529

510916

Each of the channels of LU9 G0p splitter boxes has: b 2 outputs: control of starter forward and reverse running, in the case of a reversing starter. b 2 inputs: fault indication and position of poles. Connection to the dedicated module is by means of the following cables: b RJ45LU9Rpp, for lengths less than 3 metres, b 490NTW000pp, for lengths greater than 3 metres. Parallel type connection
Architecture

5 6 7 8 9 10
Dedicated parallel interface module (STBEPI2145) 9 Power base 10 c 24 V control unit (LUCB/D/C/M pp BL) 11 Parallel wiring module (LUFC00) 12 Options: add-on contact blocks, reverser blocks 8
510917

4
9 10
To PLC

4 3

11 12 12

3 Parallel wiring module LUFC00 4 Pre-wired coil connection LU9BN11C 5 Connection cable LU9Rp with one RJ45 connector at each end 6 Splitter box LU9G02 or LU9G03 for 8 motor starters with channel connections on the PLC side by two HE 10 connectors and on the startercontroller side by 8 RJ45 connectors. 7 Connection cable TSXCDPppp with one HE 10 connector at each end.

References
Description Item Reference LUF C00

Parallel wiring module

Weight kg 0.045

(1) Please consult our "Power Control and connection components catalogue. (2) Please consult our "IP20 distributed inputs/outputs Advantys STB" catalogue

1/78

References (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers
Parallel wiring module and pre-wired coil connection components
Pre-wired components simplify wiring and reduce wiring errors.

566964

By pre-wired connector or wire link.

Connection of communication module output terminals to the coil terminals

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

b Pre-wired connector: pre-wired coil connection The use of a power base without pre-wired connections is recommended.
Description Pre-wired coil connection For use with power base LUBpp LU2Bpp Item Reference LU9B N11C LU9M RC Weight kg 0.045 0.030

4 13

4
LUB + LUF C00 + LU9B

b Wire link: Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency Stop control or a voltage interface. This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled using an LU6M reverser block for separate mounting. When reverser block LU6M and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC may by used.

Connection of parallel wiring module to the PLC


No tools are required to connect the parallel wiring module to the PLC. Connection is via a splitter box which allows up to 8 starter-controllers to be connected; a maximum of 4 reversing starters per splitter box is allowed. The splitter box requires a c 24 V power supply. Splitter boxes
Connectors PLC side 2 x HE 10 20-way For use with Starter-controller side 8 x RJ45 Reference Weight kg 4 reversing starters maximum 8 reversing starters maximum LU9 G02 (1) LU9 G03 (1) 0.260 0.260
510918

Connection cables to the splitter box


Connectors Item 2 x RJ45 connectors

3 13

Length m 0.3 1 3

Reference LU9 R03 LU9 R10 LU9 R30 Length Reference

Weight kg 0.045 0.065 0.125

Connection cables from splitter box to PLC


Type of connection Gauge PLC side Splitter box side AWG HE 10 HE 10 22 20-way 20-way LU2B + LUF C00 + LU9M 28 0.080 C.s.a. Weight

mm2 0.324

m 0.5 1 2 3 5 1 2 3 0.5 1 2 3 5 10

TSX CDP 053 TSX CDP 103 TSX CDP 203 TSX CDP 303 TSX CDP 503 ABFH20H100 ABFH20H200 ABFH20H300 BMX FCC 053 BMX FCC 103 BMX FCC 203 BMX FCC 303 BMX FCC 503 BMX FCC 1003 TSX CDP 301 TSX CDP 501

kg 0.085 0.150 0.280 0.410 0.670 0.080 0.140 0.210 0.210 0.350 0.630 0.940 1.530 3.000 0.400 0.660

HE 10 40-way

2 x HE 10 20-way

0.324

Bare wires

HE 10 20-way

22

0.324

3 5

(1) Allows "run" and "fault" status of each starter-controller to be fed back to the PLC and transmits commands.

Characteristics : pages 1/98 and 1/103

1/79

Presentation, references

TeSys motor starters - open version


1

TeSys U starter-controllers

AS-Interface communication modules

1
510919

Presentation
AS-Interface communication modules ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51 make it easy to connect starter-controllers to the AS-Interface cabling system, and therefore allow remote control and command of these starter-controllers. Module ASILUFC51 features extended addresing.

2 3 4 5 6
3
1 2 3 4

The various operating states of the modules (AS-Interface voltage present, communication fault, addressing fault,) are indicated on the front panel by a green LED 1 and a red LED 2. Operation of the modules is continuously monitored by auto-testing, in a way that is totally transparent to the user.

Green LED: AS-Interface voltage present Red LED: AS-Interface or module fault Outputs for starter commands Black connector for connection to c 24 V auxiliary power supply 5 Yellow connector for connection to the AS-Interface system

The incorporation of AS-Interface V.2.1 functions allows diagnostics to be performed on the modules, either remotely via the line or locally via the ASI TERV2 addressing terminal. The communication modules must be connected to a c 24 V auxiliary supply and must be used in conjunction with a c 24 V control unit, LUCpppBL. The product is supplied with a yellow connector 4 for connection to the AS-Interface system, a black connector 5 for connection to the c 24 V auxiliary supply and a black connector 3 for connection of the outputs. Series type connection
Architecture

6 Communication modules ASILUFC5 or ASILUF C51 7 Tap-off TCS ATV01N2 8 Pre-wired coil connection LU9BN11C

7 8

c 24 V AS-Interface

Information transmitted by the AS-Interface system


AS-Interface profiles Data bits (command) Bit value Command D0 (O) Command D1 (O) Command D2 (O) Command D3 (O) Bit value Status D0 (I) Status D1 (I) Status D2 (I) Status D3 (I) 7.D.F.0 profile and 7.A.7.E profile =0 =1 Stop forward Forward running Stop reverse Reverse running Not used Not used Not used Not used =0 Not ready or fault Stopped Not used Not used =1 Ready Running Not used Not used

Data bits (status)

9
References
Description

Addressing Single 31 slaves Extended 62 slaves

Item

Reference ASI LUF C5 ASI LUF C51

10

Communication modules

6 6

Weight kg 0.065 0.065

1/80

References (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers
AS-Interface communication modules

510920

Pre-wired components simplify wiring and reduce wiring errors.

By pre-wired connector or wire link.

Connection of communication module output terminals to the coil terminals

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

b Pre-wired connector: pre-wired coil connection The use of a power base without pre-wired control circuit connections is recommended.
1
Description Pre-wired coil connection For use with power base LUBpp LU2Bpp Item Reference LU9BN11C LU9MRC

3 5

Weight kg 0.045 0.030

LUB + ASILUF C5 + LU9B


531122

b Wire link Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency Stop control or a voltage interface. This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled using an LU6M reverser block for separate mounting. When reverser block LU6M and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC may be used. This is achieved by using a tap-off for connection to 2 ribbon cables: b 1 for AS-Interface (yellow). b 1 for separate c 24 V supply (black).
1 5
Description Tap-off Length m 2 Reference XZCG0142 Weight kg 0.265

Connection of the communication module (1)

Consoles and cable adapter


Description Addressing terminal Battery operated. Battery charger supplied AS-InterfaceV.1 and V.2.1 compatible Adjustment and diagnostics console Runs on LR6 batteries Allows addressing of AS-Interface V.2.1 slaves and diagnostics Cable adapter For console XZMC11 Reference XZMC11 ASITERV2 Weight kg 0.550 0.500

LU2B + ASILUF C5 + LU9M

520898

520899

XZMG12

0.070

Software set-up
AS-Interface configuration is carried out using PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software. From the module declaration screen, it is possible to configure all the slave devices corresponding to all the AS-Interface I/O. Configuration is carried out by following the instructions on the screen.

XZ MC11

ASI TERV2

TeSys U users manual (2)


Application

Language

Reference

On CD-Rom

Multi-language LU9CD1 (3) (1) Degree of protection IP 54. Connection by 4 x 0.34 mm2 wires. Black wire: + 24 V. White wire: 0 V. Blue wire: AS-Interface (). Brown wire: AS-Interface (+). (2) The CD-Rom contains users manuals for the AS-Interface and Modbus communication modules, multifunction control units and gateway modules, as well as the gateway programming software. (3) English, French, German, Italian, Spanish

Weight kg 0.022

1/81

Presentation

TeSys motor starters - open version


ProfibusDP communication module and pre-wired coil connection components

TeSys U starter-controllers

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

567139

10

When used in conjunction with the power base and control unit, communication module LULC07 allows TeSys U starter-controllers to be controlled via Profibus DP (Deported Periphery). Communication module LULC07 is of the slave type and uses the TeSys U systems internal registers (which can be accessed via the Profibus DP bus) in cyclic or acyclic mode. This module has a 24 V (0.5 A) discrete output and two configurable discrete inputs.

Presentation

Connections
11

Serial bus topology

8 7 6

5
15 13 13 14 16 18 17 12
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

1 LED indicating module status 2 Fault signalling LED 3 LED indicating c 24 V supply ON for outputs OA1, OA3 and LO1 4 SUB-D connector for bus link 5 c 24 V supply connection 6 Discrete input 7 Discrete input 8 Discrete output 9 Outputs for starter-controller commands (nonreversing and reversing) 10 Pin for connection to control unit (advanced or multifunction)

15

18

18

18

17 c 24 V

12

c 24 V

Programmable controller with Profibus DP master card Other slave (not powered via the bus) Profibus DP 2-wire cable (TSXPBSCA100 = 100 m, TSXPBSCA400 = 400 m) Standard Profibus DP connector (490NAD91103 or 490NAD91104) Profibus DP power supply module for c 24 V-Aux supply to LULC07 modules (LU9GC7) Profibus DP connector, TeSys U dedicated (LU9AD7) Profibus DP 4-wire cable (LU9RPBppp) Profibus DP communication module (LULC07)

Profibus DP: general information The TeSys U communication module supports 2 Profibus application profiles based on DP V0 and DP V1 services: motor starter (MS), motor management starter (MMS). Cyclic/Acyclic services In general, data is exchanged via cyclic services and via acyclic services. The application profiles define, for the cyclic data: b manufacturer independent data, b manufacturer specific data. DP V1 Read/Write services DP V1 read and write services allow access to all data that cannot be accessed by cyclic data exchange. PKW feature In order to make data which is not cyclically exchanged accessible for DP V0 masters, a function called PKW (Periodically Kept in acyclic Words) is implemented. The cyclic data carries a dedicated zone of 4 input words and 4 output words, called PKW, which makes it possible to access all the registers en bloc. Electronic device description The TeSys U system is described by a GS*- file (1). This file will be used by any Profibus configuration tool to get information about the device. The GS*- files and associated icon, dedicated to the TeSys U system, can be downloaded from the www.schneider-electric.com website (Library/Software Tools).
(1) Replace the asterisk with the letter corresponding to the required language.

1/82

Presentation (continued) references

TeSys motor starters - open version


1

ProfibusDP communication module and pre-wired coil connection components


TeSys U starter-controllers

Information carried by the bus Depends on the type of control unit used with module LUL C07. Compatibility of Profibus DP communication module LULC07 with c 24 V control units
Information accessible via Profibus DP LULC07 in conjunction with: LUCB/C/DppBL LUCMppBL LUCAppBL Standard Advanced Multifunction control unit control unit control unit
106949

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

LUL C07

Starter status (ready, running, fault) Start and Stop commands Thermal overload alarm Remote reset via the bus Indication of motor load Fault signalling and differentiation Remote programming and monitoring of all functions Log function Monitoring function Alarms (overcurrent, ...) Functions performed

References
Description ProfibusDP communication module Item Reference LULC07

18

Weight kg 0.108

By pre-wired connector or wire link. b Pre-wired connector: pre-wired coil connection The use of a power base without pre-wired control circuit connections is recommended.
OA3 OA1 COM

Connection of communication module output terminals to the coil terminals

510951

Description Pre-wired coil connection

For use with power base LUBpp LU2Bpp

Item

Reference LU9BN11L LU9MRL

4 6

Weight kg 0.050 0.450

b Wire link: Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency Stop control or a voltage interface. This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled using an LU6M reverser block. When this reverser block and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RL may be used.

LI2 c 24 V

c 24 V

LO1

LI1

COM

Components for connection to the bus and to the installation

The c 24 V-Aux supply to Profibus DP modules LULC07 must pass through power supply module LU9GC7. LULC07 modules must be connected to the LU9GC7 splitter box in order to be powered. The number of TeSys U starter-controllers that can be powered by an LU9GC7 module is limited by the maximum current (1.5 A) which it can deliver. The c 24 V supply for the inputs/outputs must be provided separately.
Description Profibus DP power supply module Profibus DP connector Profibus DP cables 2-wire
A1 A2 L1 On power base c 24 V

Length m 100 400 10 100 400

Item (1)

Reference LU9 GC7 LU9 AD7 TSXPBSCA100 TSXPBSCA400 LU9RPB010 LU9RPB100 LU9RPB400

15 16 13 13 17 17 17

Weight kg

Profibus DP cables 4-wire

0V

(1) See connection diagram on page 1/82. Connection of power supplies

1/83

Compatibility

TeSys motor starters - open version


ProfibusDP communication module and pre-wired coil connection components

TeSys U starter-controllers

567122

1 2 3

Compatibility of Profibus DP communication module LULC07 with starter-controller LUB12/LUB32 Maximum 1 or or 2


power ratings 50/60 Hz 400/415 V Power base Standard control unit Class 10 Advanced control unit Class 10 Class 20 Multifunction control unit Classes 530 LUCM6XBL

3
Profibus DP module

4
Pre-wired coil connection, nonreversing

Nonreversing kW 0.09 LUB12 or LUB32 LUB12 or LUB32 LUB12 or LUB32 LUB12 or LUB32 LUB32

LUCA6XBL

LUCB6XBL LUCD6XBL

LULC07

LU9BN11L

0.25

LUCA1XBL

LUCB1XBL LUCD1XBL

LUCM1XBL

LULC07

LU9BN11L

1.5

LUCA05BL

LUCB05BL LUCD05BL

LUCM05BL

LULC07

LU9BN11L

4
LUB + LUCpppBL + LUL C07 + LU9BN11L 5.5

LUCA12BL

LUCB12BL LUCD12BL

LUCM12BL

LULC07

LU9BN11L

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

7.5

LUCA18BL

LUCB18BL LUCD18BL

LUCM18BL

LULC07

LU9BN11L

15

LUB32

LUCA32BL

LUCB32BL LUCD32BL

LUCM32BL

LULC07

LU9BN11L

Note: Profibus DP module LULC07 is not compatible with LUTM controllers.

1/84

Compatibility (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version


ProfibusDP communication module and pre-wired coil connection components

TeSys U starter-controllers

5
567123

Compatibility of Profibus DP communication module LULC07 with starter-controller LU2B12 / LU2B32 Maximum 5 or or 2
power ratings 50/60 Hz 400/415 V Power base Reversing Standard control unit Class 10 LUCA6XBL Advanced control unit Class 10 Class 20 Multifunction control unit Classes 530 LUCM6XBL

3
Profibus DP module

6
Pre-wired coil connection, reversing

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

kW 0.09

LU2B12BL or LU2B32BL or LU2B12BL LU2B32BL LU2B12BL or LU2B32BL LU2B12BL or LU2B32BL LU2B32BL

LUCB6XBL LUCD6XBL

LULC07

LU9MRL

0.25

LUCA1XBL

LUCB1XBL LUCD1XBL

LUCM1XBL

LULC07

LU9MRL

1.5

LUCA05BL

LUCB05BL LUCD05BL

LUCM05BL

LULC07

LU9MRL

6
LU2B + LUCpppBL + LUL C07 + LU9MRL

5.5

LUCA12BL

LUCB12BL LUCD12BL

LUCM12BL

LULC07

LU9MRL

7.5

LUCA18BL

LUCB18BL LUCD18BL

LUCM18BL

LULC07

LU9MRL

15

LU2B32BL

LUCA32BL

LUCB32BL LUCD32BL

LUCM32BL

LULC07

LU9MRL

Note: Profibus DP module LULC07 is not compatible with LUTM controllers.

1/85

Presentation

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers
CANopen communication module and pre-wired coil connection components

1 2 3
and LO1

Communication module LUL C08 allows direct connection of TeSys U startercontrollers and controllers on a CANopen bus. Module LULC08 is of the slave type. When used in conjunction with an LUCpppBL or LUCpT1BL control unit, module LUL C08 provides control and command of the starter-controller and of the controller. 9 4 For local control requirements, the module is equipped with a configurable, c24V. 0.5 V discrete output and two configurable discrete inputs. LULC08 communication modules can be connected to Advantys STB module : XBE2100K. 8 7 6 5

Presentation

Connections
Star topology Bus topology

1 LED indicating module status 2 Fault signalling LED 3 LED indicating c 24 V supply ON for outputs OA1, OA3

10

12

12

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

4 5 6 7 8 9

SUB-D connector for bus link c 24 V supply connection Discrete input Discrete input Discrete output Outputs for starter commands or

16 11
c 24 V

16 11 17 16 17

13 17 14 19 11 14 17 16
c 24 V

15

10 CANopen master module TSX CPP110 (PMCIA card with


junction box).

11 Cable TSXCANCpp equipped with a TSX CANKCDF90T


connector (to be assembled)

12 Terminal block TSX CANTDM4 with 4 SUB D type

18

15

connectors for connection of slaves and screw terminal blocks (connection of bus and dedicated 24 V supply to modules LUL C08).

13 Connection between junction boxes TSX CANTDM4 by 14 The slaves are connected by means of cables
TSXCANCADDpp

cable TSXCANCADDpp or cable TSXCANCpp fitted with TSXCANKCDF90T connectors.

Connection of power supplies The c 24 V power supply for modules LUL C08 is distributed via the bus and must be connected to the first TSX CANTDM4 junction box. The cable c.s.a. allows connection of up to 25 LUL C08 modules . Above this number, another power supply must be connected to the next junction box. A c 24 V supply must be connected to module LUL C08 for outputs OA1, OA3 and LO1. Information carried by the bus Depends on the type of control unit used.
Control unit Standard Advanced Multifunction Starter status (ready, running, fault) Start and Stop commands Thermal overload alarm Remote reset via the bus Indication of motor load Fault signalling and differentiation Remote programming and monitoring of all functions "Log" function "Monitoring" function Alarms (overcurrent, ...) Functions performed For more detailed information, please refer to User's Manual LU9 CD1, see page opposite.

15 Connections are made by means of cables TSXCANCpp


fitted with TSXCANKCDF180T connectors for the slaves and with TSXCANKCDF90T connectors for the junction boxes. 16 Starter-controller 17 CANopen communication module LUL C08

18 Advantys STB island (NIM: Network Interface Modules


+ I/O modules)

19 CANopen extension module STB XBE 2100K

Compatibility of CANopen communication module with control units

LUCAppBL / BppBL / C ppBL / D ppBL All versions marketed after 2T04081 (1) LUCMppBL All versions u V3.2 LUCMT1BL All versions u V3.2 (1) This date code is made up as follows: 2T or 2C factory code. 04,05,06 and so on: year of manufacture. 08: week. 1: 1st day of the week.

1/86

References

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers

CANopen communication module and pre-wired coil connection components

Communication module LUL C08 uses PDO, SDO and PKW type objects for data exchange (Process Data Objects, Service Data Objects, Periodically Kept in Acyclic Words). Transmit and Receive PDO
PDO 1 Real time command-control Preconfigured and enabled To be defined by configuration PDO 2, PDO 3 Unused PDO 4

Communication services

1 2 3 4

Adjustment, diagnostics and acyclic exchanges Preconfigured and enabled

510922

References
Description CANopen communication module Item Reference LULC08

16

Weight kg 0.108

Note: The Electronic Data Sheets (EDS), and users manuals are available on the website www.schneider-electric.com.

Pre-wired components simplify wiring and reduce wiring errors.

16

By pre-wired connector or wire link. b Pre-wired connector: pre-wired coil connection The use of a power base without pre-wired control circuit connections is recommended.
Description Pre-wired coil connection For use with power base LUBpp LU2Bpp Item Reference LU9BN11L LU9MRL

Connection of communication module output terminals to the coil terminals

17
LUB + LUL C08 + LU9BN11L
566988

17 18

Weight kg 0.050 0.450

5 6 7 8 9 10

b Wire link: Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency stop control or a voltage interface. This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled using an LU6M reverser block for separate mounting. When reverser block LU6M and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RL may be used.

Cables for connection to the bus


Description Length m 0.3 1.0 3 5

Item

Reference

Weight kg 0.045 0.065 0.125 1.500

16

Standard
Cables equipped with SUB-D connectors

18
LU2B + LUL C08 + LU9MRL

Reel of cable

50 100

14 14 14 14 11 11 14 14 14 14 11 11

TSXCANCADD03 TSXCANCADD1 TSXCANCADD3 TSXCANCADD5 TSXCANCA50 TSXCANCA100

UL approved
Cables equipped with SUB-D connectors 0.3 1 3 5 Reel of cable 50 100

TSXCANCBDD03 TSXCANCBDD1 TSXCANCBDD3 TSXCANCBDD5 TSXCANCB50 TSXCANCB100

0.045 0.065 0.125 1.500

Separate components
Description Elbowed connector Straight connector Junction box Weight kg TSXCANKCDF90T TSXCANKCDF180T TSXCANTDM4 Reference

1/87

Presentation

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers
DeviceNet communication module and pre-wired coil connection components

1
567225

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

10

When used in conjunction with the power base and control unit, communication module LULC09 allows TeSysU starter-controllers and controllers to be controlled via DeviceNet. Communication module LULC09 is of the slave type and uses the TeSys U systems internal registers which can be accessed via DeviceNet. Module LULC09 has a configurable 24 V (0.5 A) discrete output and two configurable discrete inputs.

Presentation

Connections
Serial bus topology

8 7 6

11
63 starter-controllers max. with modules LULC09

1 LED indicating module status 2 Fault signalling LED 3 LED indicating c 24 V supply ON for outputs OA1, OA3 and LO1 and 24 V bus 4 DeviceNet connector for bus link 5 c 24 V supply connection 6 Discrete input 7 Discrete input 8 Discrete output 9 Outputs for starter-controller commands (nonreversing and reversing) 10 Pin for connection to control unit (advanced or multifunction)

c 24 V 12

13 14

13 14

13 14

11 12 13 14

Industrial PLC: Industrial Programmable Controller equipped with a DeviceNet Master. Connection and power distribution box for supply to DeviceNet communication modules. Starter-controller. DeviceNet communication module LUL C09.

1/88

Presentation (continued), references

TeSys motor starters - open version


1

TeSys U starter-controllers

DeviceNet communication module and pre-wired coil connection components

Information carried by the bus Depends on the type of control unit used with module LUL C09.
567228

Compatibility of DeviceNet LULC09 communication module with c 24 V control units


Information accessible via DeviceNet LULC09 in conjunction with: LUCB/C/DppBL LUCMppBL LUCAppBL Standard Advanced Multifunction control unit control unit control unit

1 2 3 4 5
Weight kg 0.050 0.450

LUL C09

Starter status (ready, running, fault) Start and Stop commands Thermal overload alarm Remote reset via the bus Indication of motor load Fault signalling and differentiation Remote programming and monitoring of all functions Log function Monitoring function Alarms (overcurrent, ...) Functions performed

567226

OA3 OA1 COM

References
V Can_L S Can_H

Description
V+

Item

Reference LULC09

DeviceNet communication module

14

Weight kg 0.108

Connection of communication module output terminals to the coil terminals


By pre-wired connector or wire link. b Pre-wired connector: pre-wired coil connection The use of a power base without pre-wired control circuit connections is recommended.
Description Pre-wired coil connection For use with power base LUBpp LU2Bpppp Reference LU9BN11L LU9MRL
LO1 LI1 LI2

+ c 24 V + c 24 V

c 24 V

6 7 8 9 10

b Wire link: Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency Stop control or a voltage interface. This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled using an LU6M reverser block. When this reverser block and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RL may be used.

Supply
Connection of power supplies

The 24 V supply to DeviceNet LULC09 modules is provided via the (V+ , V-) terminals. The 24 V supply for the inputs/outputs must be provided separately from the supply to the LULC09 modules. The 24 V Aux terminal is for supply to the LUCM control unit or the LUTM controller.

1/89

Compatibility

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers

DeviceNet communication module and pre-wired coil connection components

1
567122

Compatibility of DeviceNet communication module LULC09 with starter-controller LUB12/LUB32 Maximum 1 or or 2


power ratings 50/60 Hz 400/415 V Power base Standard control unit Advanced control unit Multifunction control unit

3
DeviceNet module

4
Pre-wired coil connection, nonreversing

2 3

Nonreversing kW 0.09 LUB12 or LUB32 LUB12 or LUB32 LUB12 or LUB32 LUB12 or LUB32 LUB32

Class 10

Class 10

Class 20

Classes 530 LUCM6XBL LULC09 LU9BN11L

LUCA6XBL

LUCB6XBL LUCD6XBL

0.25

LUCA1XBL

LUCB1XBL LUCD1XBL

LUCM1XBL

LULC09

LU9BN11L

1.5

LUCA05BL

LUCB05BL LUCD05BL

LUCM05BL

LULC09

LU9BN11L

4
LUB + LUCpppBL + LUL C09 + LU9BN11L 5.5

LUCA12BL

LUCB12BL LUCD12BL

LUCM12BL

LULC09

LU9BN11L

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

7.5

LUCA18BL

LUCB18BL LUCD18BL

LUCM18BL

LULC09

LU9BN11L

15

LUB32

LUCA32BL

LUCB32BL LUCD32BL

LUCM32BL

LULC09

LU9BN11L

Note: DeviceNet communication module LUL C09 is compatible with LUTM controllers.

1/90

Compatibility (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers

DeviceNet communication module and pre-wired coil connection components

5
567123

Compatibility of DeviceNet communication module LULC09 with starter-controller LU2B12 / LU2B32 Maximum 5 or or 2
power ratings 50/60 Hz 400/415 V Power base Reversing Standard control unit Class 10 LUCA6XBL Advanced control unit Class 10 Class 20 Multifunction control unit Classes 530 LUCM6XBL

3
DeviceNet module

6
Pre-wired coil connection, reversing

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

kW 0.09

LU2B12BL or LU2B32BL or LU2B12BL LU2B32BL LU2B12BL or LU2B32BL LU2B12BL or LU2B32BL LU2B32BL

LUCB6XBL LUCD6XBL

LULC09

LU9MRL

0.25

LUCA1XBL

LUCB1XBL LUCD1XBL

LUCM1XBL

LULC09

LU9MRL

1.5

LUCA05BL

LUCB05BL LUCD05BL

LUCM05BL

LULC09

LU9MRL

6
LU2B + LUCpppBL + LUL C09 + LU9MRL

5.5

LUCA12BL

LUCB12BL LUCD12BL

LUCM12BL

LULC09

LU9MRL

7.5

LUCA18BL

LUCB18BL LUCD18BL

LUCM18BL

LULC09

LU9MRL

15

LU2B32BL

LUCA32BL

LUCB32BL LUCD32BL

LUCM32BL

LULC09

LU9MRL

Note: DeviceNet communication module LUL C09 is compatible with LUTM controllers.

1/91

Presentation

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers
Advantys STB communication module and pre-wired coil connection components

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Communication module LUL C15 allows direct connection of TeSys U startercontrollers and controllers on an Advantys STB island, between two segments or at the end of a segment. In the latter case, the segment must be equipped with an EOS (End of segment) extension module STBXBE1100. The starter-controller will then be able to make use of the services provided by Advantys STB: self-addressing, autobaud, fallback positions. When used in conjunction with an LUCpppBL or LUCpT1BL control unit, module LUL C15 provides control and command of the starter-controller and of the controller. For local control requirements, the module is equipped with a configurable, c24V, 0.5 A discrete output and two configurable discrete inputs.

Presentation

Connections
10 11

8 7 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

13

14

Two-colour LED indicating module status Fault signalling LED LED indicating that c 24 V supply is ON Bus connectors c 24 V supply connection Discrete input Discrete input Discrete output Outputs for starter commands

12 13 14 12 13 14 12 17 13 14 + 16 17

15 16

18 13 14 12

10 Advantys STB island (NIM: Network Interface Module + I/O modules). 11 Extension module (EOS/End of segment) STBXBE1100. 12 Bus connecting cable LU9RCDpp, elbowed/straight, for connection of the first TeSys U 13 Starter-controller. 14 Communication module LUL C15. 15 Connector for connection of product either by wire link or using coil connection modules 16 Line end adapter LU9RFL15. 17 Bus connection cable LU9RDDpp, straight/straight, for connections between LUL C15 modules. 18 Beginning of segment (BOS). Connection of power supply for the outputs A c 24 V supply must be connected to module LUL C15 for outputs OA1, OA3 and LO1. Information carried by the bus Depends on the type of control unit used.
Control unit Standard Advanced Multifunction Starter status (ready, running, fault) Start and Stop commands Thermal overload alarm Remote reset via the bus Indication of motor load Fault signalling and differentiation Remote programming and monitoring of all functions "Log" function "Monitoring" function Alarms (overcurrent, ...) Functions performed For more detailed information, please refer to User's Manual LU9 CD1, see page opposite. LU9BN11L or LU9MRL. communication module.

Compatibility of Advantys STB communication module with control units

LUCAppBL / BppBL / C ppBL / D ppBL All versions marketed after 2T04081 (1) LUCMppBL All versions u V3.2 LUCMT1BL All versions u V3.2 (1) This date code is made up as follows: 2T or 2C: factory code. 04,05,06 and so on: year of manufacture. 08: week. 1: 1st day of the week.

1/92

References

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers

Advantys STB communication module and pre-wired coil connection components

The maximum number of starter-controllers and controllers that can be connected to an Advantys STB island depends on the Network Interface Module (NIM) used and the associated control units.
NIM (Network Interface Module) CANopen Standard Basic DeviceNet Standard Basic Profibus DP Standard Basic Interbus Standard Basic Fipio Standard Modbus plus Standard Ethernet Standard Number of starter-controllers LUCAppBL LUCBppBL LUCMppBL LUCCppBL LUCD ppBL 17 17 15 12 12 12 18 18 16 12 12 12 9 8 8 9 8 8 2 2 1 2 2 1 4 4 4 17 17 15 32 32 32 Number of controllers LUCBpp LUCDpp LUCMpp 15 12 16 12 8 8 1 1 4 15 32

Possible architectures

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

References
Description Advantys STB communication module Line end adapter Item Reference LULC15 14 LU9RFL15 16 End of segment (EOS) STBXBE1100 11 STBXBE1300 Beginning of segment (BOS) 18 Pre-wired components simplify wiring and reduce wiring errors. Weight kg 0.108 0.012

14

By pre-wired connector or wire link. b Pre-wired connector: pre-wired coil connection. The use of a power base without pre-wired control circuit connections is recommended.
Description For use with power base LUBpp LU2Bpp Item Reference LU9BN11L LU9MRL

Connection of communication module output terminals to the coil terminals

19
LUB + LUL C15 + LU9BN11L Pre-wired coil connection

19 20

Weight kg 0.050 0.450

b Wire link: Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency Stop control or a voltage interface. This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled using an LU6M reverser block for separate mounting. When reverser block LU6M and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RL may be used.

Cables

Description

14

Cables fitted with connectors, one straight and one elbowed Cables fitted with two straight connectors

Length m 0.3 1 3 5 0.3 1 3

Item

Reference LU9RCD03 LU9RCD10 LU9RCD30 LU9RCD50 LU9RDD03 LU9RDD10 LU9RDD30

20
LU2B + LUL C15 + LU9MRL

12 12 12 12 17 17

Weight kg 0.045 0.065 0.125 1.500 0.045 0.065 0.125

Note: User manuals are available on the website www.schneider-electric.com.

1/93

Presentation

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers

Modbus communication modules and pre-wired coil connection components

1
566970

LULC031 1
510624

LULC033 1

Communication modules LULC031 and LUL C033 enable the TeSys U startercontroller to be connected to the Modbus network. They must have a c 24 V supply and must be used in conjunction with a c 24 V control unit, LUCpppBL. They incorporate a 0.5 A, c 24 V discrete output for local command requirements. The module LUL C033 also has two configurable discrete inputs.

Presentation

2
6 3 5 2 6 35 4 2

Series type connection


Architecture
Star topology

Bus topology

10

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5 6

Module status signalling LED 24 V supply connection RJ45 connector for RS485 Modbus link 2 discrete inputs 1 discrete output Outputs for starter commands

12

8 7

8 7

8 7
9

8 7

To PLC

11

11 12

Communication module LULC031 or LULC033 Pre-wired coil connection LU9BN11C Connection cable VW3A8306Rpp with one RJ45 connector at each end Modbus hub LU9GC3 with channel connections to PLC and to starter-controller with RJ45 connectors 11 T-junction VW3A8306TFpp 12 Line terminator VW3A8306R Information carried by the bus Depends on the type of control unit used.
Control unit Starter status (ready, running, fault) Start and Stop commands Thermal overload alarm Remote reset via the bus Indication of motor load Fault signalling and differentiation Remote programming and monitoring of all functions Log function Monitoring function Alarms (overcurrent, ...) Functions performed Standard Advanced Multifunction

7 8 9 10

For more detailed information, please refer to Users Manual LU9CD1, see page opposite.

Compatibility of Modbus communication modules


With starter-controllers and controllers
Starter-controllers and controllers LUB pp / LU2Bp2 LUTM ppBL Possible combinations. LUL C031 LUL C033

1/94

References

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers

Modbus communication modules and pre-wired coil connection components

Compatibility of Modbus communication modules (continued)


With power bases
Control unit software versions LUCA ppBL LUCB ppBL, LUCC ppBL and LUCD ppBL LUCM ppBL V1.04 V1.05 V1.06 V1.10 (1) LUL C031 V2.3 (1) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes LUL C031 V2.3 (1) No No LUL C033 V2.2 (1) Yes Yes No Yes No Yes LUL C033 V2.1 (1) Yes Yes

1 2 3 4 5

With base controllers, version 1.200 (1)


Control unit software versions LUCB TppBL and LUCD TppBL LUCM TppBL (1) And higher versions Combinations not permitted.
511527

V2.11 (1)

References
Description Modbus communication modules Item Reference LULC031 7 LULC033 7 Pre-wired components simplify wiring and reduce wiring errors. Weight kg 0.080 0.080

Connection of communication module output terminals to the coil terminals


7 8
LUB + LUL C03p + LU9B

By pre-wired connector or wire link. b Pre-wired connector: pre-wired coil connection The use of a power base without pre-wired control circuit connections is recommended.
Description Pre-wired coil connection For use with power base LUBpp LU2Bpp Item Reference LU9BN11C LU9MRC Weight kg 0.045 0.030

566967

b Wire link: Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency Stop control or a voltage interface. This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled using an LU6M reverser block for separate mounting. When reverser block LU6M and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC may be used.

8 13

6 7 8 9 10

Connection of communication modules on the serial bus


Achieved either by means of a Modbus hub or using T-junctions.
Description Modbus hub 8 slaves Cables fitted with 2 x RJ45 connectors Length m 0.3 1 3 0.3 1 RS 485 line terminator Item Reference LU9GC3 VW3A8306R03 VW3A8306R10 VW3A8306R30 VW3A8306TF03 VW3A8306TF10 VW3A8306R Weight kg 0.260 0.045 0.065 0.125 0.032 0.032 0.012

10 9 9 9 11 11 12

13
LU2B + LUL C03p + LU9M

T-junctions (1)

TeSys U users manual (2)


Application On CD-Rom Language Multi-language (3) Reference LU9CD1 Weight kg 0.022

(1) Fitted with 2 x RJ45 female connectors (bus side) and a 0.3 m or 1 m length cable supplied with an RJ45 male connector (station side). (2) The CD-Rom contains users manuals for the AS-Interface and Modbus communication modules, multifunction control units and gateway modules, as well as the gateway programming software. (3) English, French, German, Italian, Spanish

1/95

Presentation, description, setting-up

TeSys motor starters - open version


Communication gateways LUFP
0


Presentation

1 2 3 4 5 6
2
524177

Communication gateways LUFP allow connection between the Modbus serial link and Fipio, ProfibusDP or DeviceNet field buses. After configuration, these gateways manage information which can be accessed by the Modbus serial link and make this information available for read/write functions (command, monitoring, configuration and adjustment) on the field buses. An LUFP communication gateway consists of a box which can be clipped onto a 35mm omega rail, allowing connection of up to 8 Slaves connected on the Modbus serial link. Example of architecture
Configuration of gateway by PC TeSys U starter-controllers

LUFP

Fipio Profibus DP DeviceNet

(1) Modbus

ATS 48 ATV 312

Description

Front panel of the product 1 LED indicating: - communication status of the Modbus serial links, - gateway status, - communication status of the Fipio, ProfibusDP or DeviceNet bus. 2 Connectors for connection to Fipio, ProfibusDP or DeviceNet buses.

7 8 9 10
Characteristics, references: page 1/97 Dimensions: page 1/97

Underside of product
561512

3 RJ45 connector for connection of the Modbus serial link 4 RJ45 connector for link to a PC 5 c 24 V power supply 3 4 5

For the Fipio bus, software set-up of the gateway is performed using either PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software or ABC Configurator software. For the ProfibusDP and DeviceNet buses, software set-up is performed using ABCConfigurator. This software is included in the TeSysU users manual.
(1) Connection kit for PowerSuite software workshop (see page 1/76).

Software set-up

Schemes: page 1/120

1/96

Characteristics, references, dimensions


Characteristics
Bus type Environment Ambient air temperature Degree of protection Electromagnetic compatibility Conforming to IEC 60664 Around the device

TeSys motor starters - open version


Communication gateways LUFP
0

Emission Immunity Number of Modbus slaves which can be connected Connection Modbus To a PC Field bus V mA mA

Supply Consumption Indication/diagnostics Services

Max. Typical Profile Command Monitoring Configuration and adjustment

Fipio ProfibusDP DeviceNet Degree of pollution: 2 + 5+ 50 IP 20 Conforming to IEC 50081-2: 1993 Conforming to IEC 61000-6-2: 1999 y8 By RJ45 connector conforming to Schneider Electric RS485 standard By RJ45 connector, with PowerSuite connection kit By SUBD9 female By 5-way removable By SUBD9 female connector screw connector connector External supply, c 24 10 % 280 100 By LED on front panel FEDC32 or FEDC32P 256 configurable words 26 configurable words (1) 122 configurable words 256 configurable words 26 configurable words (1) 122 configurable words By gateway mini messaging facility (PKW)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

References
Description Communication gateways For use with TeSysU starter-controllers, Altistart48, Altivar31, Altivar312 For use with Modbus Length m 3 0.3 1 3 With bus/ serial link Fipio/Modbus ProfibusDP/Modbus DeviceNet/Modbus Reference LUFP1 LUFP7 LUFP9 Weight kg 0.245 0.245 0.245

Connection accessories
822631

Description Connection cables TSXFPACC12

Connectors 1 RJ45 type connector and one end with stripped wires 2 RJ45 type connectors 2 RJ45 type connectors 2 RJ45 type connectors 1 SUB-D 9 male connector 1 SUB-D 9 male connector 1 SUB-D 9 male connector

Weight kg VW3 A8 306 D30 0.150 VW3 A8 306 R03 VW3 A8 306 R10 VW3 A8 306 R30 TSX FP ACC12 490 NAD 911 04 490 NAD 911 03 0.050 0.050 0.150 0.040

Reference

822713

Connectors

Fipio Profibus mid line Profibus line end

490NAD91103

Documentation
Description Users manual for TeSysU range (2) Medium CD-Rom Language Multilingual: English, French, German, Italian, Spanish Reference LU9 CD1 Weight kg 0.022

Dimensions

= 120

9
27
(1) If the gateway is configured using PL7 and not ABC Configurator, the I/O capacity is limited to a total of 26 words. (2) This CD-Rom contains users manuals for AS-Interface and Modbus communication modules, multifunction control units and gateways, as well as for the gateway programming software, ABC Configurator.

75

10

Presentation, description: page 1/96

Setting-up: page 1/96

Schemes: page 1/120

1/97

Characteristics

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers

Environment

1 2 3 4 5 6

Product certifications

Conforming to standards Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1, overvoltage category III, degree of pollution: 3 Conforming to UL508, CSA C22-2 n14 Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-6-2 Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 appendix N V V kV V

UL, CSA, CCC, GOST, ASEFA. ABS, BV, DNV, GL, LROS. ATEX. IEC/EN 60947-6-2, CSA C22-2 N 14, Type E UL 508 type E: with phase barrier LU9 SP0 690 600 6 Between the control or auxiliary circuit and the main circuit: 400 Between the control and auxiliary circuits: 400 IP 40 IP 20 IP 20

Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Safety separation of circuits SELV

Degree of protection Front panel outside connection Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 zone (protection against Front panel and wired terminals direct finger contact) Other faces Protective treatment Conforming to IEC/EN 60068 Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-30 Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-11 Storage Operation

Ambient air temperature around the device

Maximum operating altitude Operating positions In relation to normal vertical mounting plane

TH Cycles 12 h 48 C - 40+ 85 C Power bases and standard and advanced control units: - 25 + 70. (At temperatures above 60C and up to 70C, for starter-controller LUB32, leave a minimum gap of 9 mm between products). Power bases and multifunction control units: - 25+ 60. (At temperatures above 45 C, leave a minimum gap of 9 mm between products. At temperatures above 55 C and up to 60 C, leave a gap of 20 mm between products.) m 2000

30
90 90

30
Flame resistance Conforming to UL 94 Conforming to IEC/EN 60695-2-12 C C V2 960 (parts supporting live components) 650 Cadmium and silicone-free, recyclable Power poles open: 10 gn Power poles closed: 15 gn Power poles open: 2 gn Power poles closed: 4 gn (2) In open air: 8 - Level 3 On contact: 8 - Level 4 10 - Level 3 All circuits except for serial link: 4 - Level 4 Serial link: 2 - Level 3 Common mode Serial mode 2 1 Not applicable 10 Class A

7 8 9 10

Environmental restrictions Shock resistance 1/2 sine wave = 11 ms Vibration resistance 5300 Hz Resistance to electrostatic discharge Immunity to radiated highfrequency disturbance Immunity to fast transient currents Immunity to dissipated shock waves

Conforming to IEC/EN60068-2-27 (1) Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 (1) Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-2 Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-3 Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-4 kV kV V/m kV kV

Immunity to conducted high-frequency disturbance Radiated emission and conducted

Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-6-2 Uc a 24240 V, kV Uc c 48220 V Uc = 24 V c Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-6 V Conforming to CISPR 11 and EN 55011

(1) Without modifying the contact states, in the most unfavourable direction. (2) 2 gn with Advantys STB or CANopen communication modules.

References : pages 1/62 to 1/78

Dimensions : pages 1/112 and 1/113

Schemes : pages 1/114 to 1/125

1/98

Characteristics

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers
Power bases and control units

Power base, control unit or reverser block type

Power circuit connection characteristics


Connection to 4 mm screw clamp terminals
Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Solid cable without cable end Screwdriver Tightening torque 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m

LUB 12 + LUCA or LUCB or LUCC or LUCD

LUB 32 + LUCA or LUCB or LUCC or LUCD

LUB 12 + LUCM

LUB 32 + LUCM

LU2M LU6M

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Control circuit connection characteristics


Connection to 3 mm screw clamp terminals
1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors

2.510 2.510 1.56 1.56 16 16 16 16 110 110 16 16 Philips n 2 or flat screwdriver: 6 mm 1.92.5 1.92.5

2.510 1.56 16 16 110 16 1.92.5

2.510 1.56 16 16 110 16 1.92.5

2.510 1.56 16 16 110 16 1.92.5

Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Solid cable without cable end Screwdriver Tightening torque Rated voltage of control circuit Voltage limits Operation

mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m V V V V V V V V V V V mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA W ms ms ms

Control circuit characteristics


a 50/60 Hz c c 24 V (1) a 24 V a or c 4872 V a 110240 V c 110220 V c 24 V a 24 V a or c 4872 V a 110240 V, c 110220 V c 24 V a 24 V a or c 4872 V a 110240 V, c 110220 V c 24 V a 24 V a or c 4872 V a 110240 V, c 110220 V Closing Opening

0.751.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.341.5 0.341.5 0.341.5 0.341.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 Philips n 1 or flat screwdriver: 5 mm 0.81.2 0.81.2 24240 24240 24220 24220 2027 2027 2026.5 2026.5 a 38.572. c 38.593 a 88264 a 88264 c 88242 c 88242 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 29 29 55 55 130 220 140 220 280 280 280 280 60 80 70 90 35 45 35 25 2 3 24 V: 70; 48 V: 60; u 72 V: 50 35 35 3 3 At least 70 % of Uc for 500 ms 15 15 3600 3600 3 3 Yes Yes 1 padlock with 6.9 mm shank 12 32 q y 70C: 12A q y 70C: 32A q y 70C: 12A q y 70C: 32A 690 (3) 690 (3) 4060 4060 3 6 9 12 18 25 32 0.1 0.3 0.6 1.1 2.4 4.6 7.5

0.751.5 0.751.5 0.341.5 0.341.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.81.2 24 2028 14.5 150 70 1.7 75 35 3 15 3600 3 Yes

0.751.5 0.751.5 0.341.5 0.341.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.81.2 24 2028 14.5 200 75 1.8 65 35 3 15 3600 3 Yes

0.751.5 0.751.5 0.341.5 0.341.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.81.2 120 2360 2300 1000 120 (2) (2) (2)

Drop-out

Typical consumption I max while closing

I rms sealed

Heat dissipation Operating time

Resistance to micro-breaks Resistance to voltage dips IEC/EN 61000-4-11 Mechanical durability In millions of operating cycles Maximum operating rate In operating cycles per hour

Main pole characteristics

Number of poles Possible Isolation conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 Padlocking Rated thermal current Category AC-41 Rated operational current To IEC/ EN 60947-6-2 Category AC-43 (Ue y 440V) Rated operational voltage Frequency limits Of the operating current Power dissipated Operational current in the power circuits Power dissipated in all three poles Rated breaking capacity on short-circuit Total breaking time Thermal limit

V Hz A W

12 32 q y 55C: 12A q y 55C: 32A q y 55C: 12A q y 55C: 32A 690 (3) 690 (3) 4060 4060

With Isc max on 440 V

V 230 440 500 690 kA 50 50 10 4 ms 2 2 2 kAs 90 120 90 120 (1) Voltage with maximum ripple of 10 %. (2) No consumption sealed. (3) For 690 V, use phase barrier LU9SP0.

1/99

Characteristics

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers
Reversing power bases and auxiliary contacts

Specific characteristics of power bases LU2B and reverser blocks LU2M or LU6M

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Duration of inrush phase Maximum operating time

General characteristics of auxiliary contacts


Conventional For ambient temperature q < 70 C thermal current (Ith) Frequency of the operational current U min Minimum switching capacityl = 10-8 I min Short-circuit Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 protection Short-time rating Permissible for 1s 500 ms 100 ms Insulation resistance Non-overlap time Guaranteed between N/C and N/O contacts Linked contacts Mirror contact Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1

a 50/60 Hz ms c ms ms Without change of direction With change of direction ms A Hz V mA A A A A mW ms

25 15 75 150 5 Up to 400 17 5 gG fuse: 4 30 40 50 10 2 (on energisation and on de-energisation)

Specific characteristics of auxiliary contacts built-into the power base


Each power base has 1 N/O contact and 1 N/C contact which are mechanically linked The N/C contact fitted in each power base reliably represents the state of the power contacts (safety scheme) Up to a 690; c 250 690 600

Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 voltage (Ui) Conforming to UL, CSA

Specific characteristics of auxiliary contacts in modules LUF N, of auxiliary contacts LUA1 and of reverser blocks LU2M and LU6M
V V V Up to a 250; c 250 250 250

V V V

Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation Conforming to IEC/EN60947-5-1 voltage (Ui) Conforming to UL, CSA Rated operational power of contacts Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1

a.c. supply, categories AC-14 and AC-15 Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current (cos j 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos j = 0.4) V VA VA VA 24 60 16 4 48 120 32 8 115 280 80 20 230 560 160 40 400 960 280 70 440 600 1050 1440 300 80 420 100

d.c. supply, category DC-13 Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the load. V W W W 24 120 70 25 48 90 50 18 125 75 38 14 250 68 33 12

1 million operating cycles 3 million operating cycles 10 million operating cycles


10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

Millions of operating cycles

Millions of operating cycles

10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 250 V

24 V 48 V 125 V

1 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2

1 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2

0,1 0,1

0,2

0,3 0,4

0,6 0,8 1 0,5 0,7 0,9

6 8 10 5 7 9 Current broken in A

0,1 0,1

0,2

0,3 0,4

0,6 0,8 1 0,5 0,7 0,9

3 4 6 8 10 5 7 9 Current broken in A

References : pages 1/62 to 1/78

Dimensions : pages 1/112 and 1/113

Schemes : pages 1/114 to 1/125

1/100

Characteristics

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers
Control units

Characteristics of standard control units LUCA


Protection Overload protection Motor type Conforming to standard Tripping class conforming to UL 508, IEC/EN 60947-6-2 Frequency limits of the operational current Temperature compensation Protection against phase imbalance Tripping threshold Tripping tolerance 3-phase IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n14 10 Hz C 4060 - 25+ 70 Yes 14.2 x Ir (setting current) 20 %

1 2

Short-circuit protection

Characteristics of advanced control units LUCB, LUCC and LUCD


Control unit type Protection Motor type Conforming to standard Overload protection Tripping class conforming to UL 508, IEC/EN 60947-6-2 Frequency limits of the operational current Temperature compensation Protection against phase imbalance Tripping threshold Tripping tolerance LUCB 3-phase IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n14 10 Hz C 4060 - 25+ 70 Yes 14.2 x Ir max. 20 % LUCC Single-phase IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n14 10 4060 - 25+ 55 14.2 x Ir max. 20 % LUCD 3-phase IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n14 20 4060 - 25+ 70 Yes 14.2 x Ir max. 20 %

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Short-circuit protection

Characteristics of multifunction control units LUCM


Protection Overload protection Motor type Conforming to standard Tripping class conforming to UL 508, IEC/EN 60947-6-2 Frequency limits of the operational current Temperature compensation Physical interface Connections Protocol Maximum transmission speed Maximum return time Type Language version Precision Resolution External type Heat dissipation Parameters can be set: single-phase or 3-phase IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 (selectable) Hz C 5060 - 25+ 55 RS 485 multi-drop RJ45 on front panel Modbus RTU 19 200 (self-configuration up to this value) 200 LCD, 2 lines of 12 characters Multilanguage (English, French, German, Italian, Spanish) 5% 1 % of Ir c 24, with maximum ripple of 10 %. 0.8

Communication interface for terminal on enclosure door Display

bit/s ms

Auxiliary supply

V W

Configuration table for protection devices and alarms on multifunction control units LUCM
Tripping Alarm Factory setting Factory setting Overcurrent Overload Earth fault Phase imbalance Torque limitation No-load running Long starting time Activated (1) Activated (1) Activated Activated Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated Activated Activated Activated Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated Adjustment of tripping Adjustment of time before Adjustment of alarm threshold tripping threshold Range Default value Range Default value Range Default value 317 Ir 0.532 A (2) 0.25 Ir min 1030 % 18 Ir 0.31 Ir 18 Ir 14.2 Ir min 0.3 Ir min 10 % 2 Ir 0.5 Ir Ir Class: 530 0.11.2 s 0.220 s 130 s 1200 s 1200 s 5 0.1 s 5s 5s 10 s 10 s 10100 % of 85 % the thermal state 0.25 Ir min 0.3 Ir min 1030 % 10 % 18 Ir 2 Ir 0.31 Ir 0.5 Ir 18 Ir Ir

Configuration of additional functions on multifunction control units LUCM


Factory setting Manual 120 s 3-phase motor Self-cooled English Average current

Reset Time before reset Type of load Language Display

Setting range Manual, automatic or remote 11000 s 3-phase motor, single-phase motor Self-cooled, force cooled English, French, German, Italian, Spanish Average current, thermal state of motor, current in phase 1 / 2 / 3, earth leakage current, phase imbalance, cause of last 5 faults (1) This function cannot be deactivated. (2) The setting range depends on the rating of the control unit used.


References : pages 1/62 to 1/78 Dimensions : pages 1/112 and 1/113 Schemes : pages 1/114 to 1/125

1/101

Characteristics

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers
Limiter-disconnector, current limiter, thermal overload alarm function module and thermal overload fault signalling modules

Characteristics of limiter-disconnector LUA LB1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) conforming to standard IEC/EN 60947-1 Conventional thermal current (Ith) conforming to standard IEC/EN 60947-1 Operating threshold Breaking capacity Mounting Cabling Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Screwdriver Tightening torque I rms

V A kA V kA

690 32 50 440 690 130 70 Directly on the upstream terminals of the starter-controller

1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors

mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m

1.510 1.5...6 110 16 1...6 1...6 Phillips n2 or flat screwdriver 6 mm 1.92.5

Characteristics of current limiter LA9 LB920


Rated insulation voltage (Ui) conforming to standard IEC/EN 60947-1 Conventional thermal current (Ith) conforming to standard IEC/EN 60947-1 Operating threshold Breaking capacity Mounting Cabling Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Screwdriver Tightening torque V A I rms A V kA 690 63 1000 440 100 Separate

690 35

1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors

mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m

1.525 1.5...10 1.525 2.510 1.516 1.54 Phillips n2 or flat screwdriver 6 mm 2.2

Characteristics of thermal overload alarm function modules LUF W10


Activation threshold Hysteresis between activation and switching off Display Supply Type Discrete output characteristics AC-15 DC-13 A Conventional thermal current (Ith) For ambient temperature q < 70 C Short-circuit protection Conforming to A IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Module type Fault signalling External power supply Module consumption Discrete outputs Type AC-15 DC-13 For ambient temperature q < 70 C Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Conductor c.s.a. Length A A mm2 m Fixed at 88% of the thermal tripping state 5% By LED on front panel Powered by the control unit N/O contact 230 V max; 400 VA 100 000 operating cycles 24 V; 50 W 100 000 operating cycles 2 gG fuse: 2

Characteristics of thermal overload fault signalling and reset modules


V mA LUF DH11 LUF DA01 By LED on front panel a/c 24 240 7 at c 24 1.1 at a 240 1 N/C 1 N/C+ 1 N/O 230 V max; 400 VA 100 000 operating cycles 24 V; 50 W 100 000 operating cycles 2 gG fuse: 2 0.2 min 500 (R = 50 W , L = 52.8 mH, Cp = 93 pF) LUF DA10

1 N/O

Conventional thermal current (Ith) Short-circuit protection Reset input

References : pages 1/62 to 1/78

Dimensions : pages 1/112 and 1/113

Schemes : pages 1/114 to 1/125

1/102

Characteristics

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers
Function modules and communication modules

Characteristics of motor load indication function module LUF V2


Analogue output Signal delivered Load impedance Minimum Maximum Typical Precision Precision Resolution kW W W 4 - 20 mA Value of I average/Ir ratio within the range of 0 to 2 for LUCB and LUCD Value of I average/Ir ratio within the range of 0 to 3 for LUCC 500 100 6% 10 % 1 % of Ir External c 24 V

1 2

Signal characteristics with advanced control unit Signal characteristics with multifunction control unit Supply

Characteristics of AS-Interface communication modules ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51


Module type Product certification AS-Interface profile Ambient air temperature Cycle time Addressing AS-Interface supply Current consumption ASILUF C5 AS-Interface V2.1 n 52901 7.D.F.0 Operation - 25+ 70 5 31 slaves 29.5...31.5 Normal operation: 25 Fault condition: 30 200 ASILUF C51 AS-Interface V2.1 n 52303 7.A.7.E 10 62 slaves

C ms V mA mA mA V

3 4 5 6

On the AS-Interface bus On 24 V supply for the outputs

Auxiliary supply Number of outputs Switching capacity of the solid state outputs Indication/diagnostics

c 24 30 % 2 dedicated to starter-controller coil operation 0.5 A/24 V (outputs protected against short-circuits) By 2 LEDs on front panel

Characteristics of Modbus communication module LULC03p


Module type Physical interface Connections Protocol Maximum transmission speed Maximum return time Addressing Ambient air temperature Discrete inputs LUL C031 RS 485 multi-drop RJ45 on front panel Modbus RTU 19 200 (self-configuration up to this value) 30 By switches: from 0...31 Operation - 25+ 55 c 24 (positive logic) 7 10 ( 30 %) 10 ( 30 %) Resistive LUL C033

bit/s ms C V mA V mA ms ms

Number Supply Input current Nominal input values Voltage Current Response time Change to state 1 Change to state 0 Input type Number Supply Max. current gI fuse

2 (to be assigned according to the configuration) c 24 7

7 8 9 10

Solid state outputs Protection Switching capacity Indication/diagnostics

V mA A

3, of which 2 dedicated to starter-controller coil operation c 24 500 1 0.5 A/24 V By 3 LEDs on front panel

1/103

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers
Function modules and communication modules

Characteristics of CANopen, Profibus DP and DeviceNet communication modules

1 2

Communication module Services Conformity class Standard Profile

Profibus DP LULC07 NA Profibus DP LVSG V1.0 MS (Motor Starter) and MMS (Motor Management Starter) Profibus DP 1125 9-way SUB-D male 9600 Kbits/s12 Mbits/s 2 shielded twisted pairs V A A C 2028 1.5 (max) 2 Operation -25+55

CANopen LULC08 S 20 (Schneider Electric) CIADS-301 V4.02 DR 303-2

DeviceNet LULC09 NA IEC 62026-1, overvoltage category III, degree of pollution: 3 ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association) MS (Motor Starter) CAN 2.0A (2B passive) 063 Open Style connector 125500kbaud

Protocol Address Structure Physical interface Binary rate Cables Supply for the discrete outputs and control c 24 V Current consumption Protection by gl fuse

CAN 2.0A (2B passive) 0127 (by switches) 9-way SUB-D female 10, 20, 50, 125, 250, 500 and 1000 Kbits/s (by switches)

3 4 5
Discrete outputs

Ambient air temperature Logic inputs Number Supply Input current Nominal input values Voltage Current Response time Change to state 1 Change to state 0 Input type Number Max. current Short-circuit protection Switching capacity

V mA V mA ms ms

2 (to be assigned according to the configuration) c 24 7 c 24 (positive logic) 7 10 ( 30%) 10 ( 30%) Resistive 3, of which 2 dedicated to starter-controller coil operation 500 Yes 0.5 A / c 24 V By 3 LEDs on front panel

mA

6 7 8 9

Indication/diagnostics

Characteristics of Advantys STB communication module LUL C15


Physical interface Connections Protocol Transmission speed Addressing Supply for the c 24 V discrete outputs Current consumption and control Protection by gl fuse Ambient air temperature Discrete inputs Number Supply Input current Nominal input values Voltage Current Response time Change to state 1 Change to state 0 Input type CAN Fire Wire CAN 2.0 and CAN 2.B (passive mode) kbit/s 800 Self-addressing V 2028 A 1.5 (max) A 2 C Operation - 25+ 55 2 ( to be assigned according to configuration) c 24 7 c 24 (positive logic) 7 10 ( 30%) 10 ( 30%) Resistive 3, of which 2 dedicated to starter-controller coil operation 500 Yes 0.5 A / c 24 V By 3 LEDs on front panel

V mA V mA ms ms

10

Number Max. current Short-circuit protection Switching capacity Indication/diagnostics

Discrete outputs

mA

1/104

Characteristics(continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers
Function modules and communication modules

Connection characteristics
Module type LUFW10, LUFDH11, LUFDA01 and LUFDA10 Pitch 1 conductor 2 identical conductors Flexible cable Without with cable end insulated ferrule With insulated ferrule 1 conductor 2 identical conductors 1 conductor 2 identical conductors (Use a double cable end) 1 conductor 2 identical conductors Conductor size Tightening torque Flat screwdriver Module type 1 conductor N.m mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm 5.08 0.21.5 0.21 0.251.5 0.251 0.251.5 0.51 0.21.5 0.21 AWG24 AWG16 0.50.6 3.5 LULC031, LULC033, LULC08 and LULC15 Pitch 1 conductor 2 identical conductors Flexible cable Without with cable end insulated ferrule With insulated ferrule 1 conductor 2 identical conductors 1 conductor 2 identical conductors (Use a double cable end) 1 conductor 2 identical conductors Conductor size Tightening torque Flat screwdriver 1 conductor N.m mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm 3.81 0.141 0.140.75 0.251 0.250.34 0.250.5 0.5 0.141 0.140.5 AWG26 AWG16 0.200.25 2.5 LUF V2 ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51 Inputs and 24 V auxiliary supply 5.08 0.21.5 0.21 0.251.5 0.251 0.251.5 0.51 0.21.5 0.21 AWG24 AWG16 0.50.6 3.5 LUL C09 Inputs and 24 V auxiliary supply 3.81 0.141 0.140.75 0.251 0.250.34 0.250.5 0.75 0.141 0.140.5 AWG26 AWG16 0.200.25 2.5 Connection on the bus 5 (Open Style) DeviceNet 0.22.5 0.51.5 0.252.5 0.251 0.252.5 0.51.5 0.22.5 0.140.5 AWG24 AWG16 0.50.6 3.5 Outputs 3.81 0.141 0.140.75 0.251 0.250.34 0.250.5 0.5 0.141 0.140.5 AWG26 AWG16 0.200.25 2.5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Connectors Flexible cable without cable end

3.81 0.141 0.140.75 0.251 0.250.34 0.250.5 0.5 0.141 0.140.5 AWG26 AWG16 0.200.25 2.5 LUFC00

Solid cable without cable end

Connectors Flexible cable without cable end

3.81 0.141 0.140.75 0.251 0.250.34 0.250.5 0.5 0.141 0.140.5 AWG26 AWG16 0.200.25 2.5

Solid cable without cable end

1/105

Curves

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers

Tripping curves for control units LUCA, LUCB, LUCD


Time (s)

1 2 3

Average operating times at 20 C according to multiples of the setting current, tolerance : 20 %.


1000

100

2 3
10

4
0,1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 14 20 30 x the setting current (Ir)

5 6 7

1 LUCD, 3 poles from cold state, class 20. 2 LUCA, LUCB, 3 poles from cold state, class 10. 3 LUCA, LUCB, LUCD, 3 poles from hot state.

Tripping curves for control units LUCC


Average operating times at 20 C according to multiples of the setting current, tolerance : 20 %.
Time (s)

1000

100

2
10

8 9 10

0,1

10

12

14

20 30 x the setting current (Ir)

1 LUCC, single-phase, cold state. 2 LUCC, single-phase, hot state.

References : page 1/71

1/106

Curves (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers

Tripping curves for control units LUCM


Cold state curves
10000

Average operating times at 20 C according to multiples of the setting current, tolerance : 20 %.


Time (s)

1 2 3 4 5

1000

100

10
Class 30 Class 25 Class 20 Class 15 Class 10 Class 5

0,1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 18 20 30 15 17 19 x the setting current (Ir)

6 7 8 9 10
References : page 1/72

1/107

Curves (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers

Tripping curves for control units LUCM

1 2 3 4

Hot state curves


10000

Average operating times at 20 C according to multiples of the setting current, tolerance : 20 %


Time (s)

1000

100

10

5
0,1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Class 30 Class 25 Class 20 Class 15 Class 10 Class 5

14 16 18 20 30 15 17 19 x the setting current (Ir)

6 7 8 9 10
References : page 1/72

1/108

Curves (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers

Current limitation on short-circuit


Ue = 460 V
peak current (kA)

100

1
1

10

2 3

2 3 4

0,1 0,1

0,2

0,4

0,6 0,8 1

8 10

20

30

40 60 80 100 Prospective Isc (kA)

1 Maximum peak current 2 32 A power base 3 12 A power base

Thermal limit on short-circuit


Ue = 460 V
Sum of Idt (As) 103

5 6

1000

100

7 8 9 10

10

1 0,1

0,2

0,4

0,6 0,8 1

8 10

20

30

40 60 80 100 Prospective Isc (kA)

1 32 A power base 2 12 A power base

References : pages 1/62 to 1/72

1/109

Selection

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers

LUB 12

Millions of operating cycles

10 8 6 5 4 3 2

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 0,8 0,6 0,5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 32 40 Current broken in A

Ue y 440 V

Use in category AC-43


LUB 12 LUB 32

LUB 32

Use in category AC-41

Ue = 690 V
LUB 12 LUB 32

Millions of operating cycles

6 5 4 3 2

Millions of operating cycles

10 8

10 8 6 5 4 3 2

1 0,8 0,6 0,5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 32 40 Current broken in A

1 0,8 0,6 0,5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 32 40 21 Current broken in A

0,55

0,75

2,2

5,5

1,5

7,5 15 15

230 V

kW

0,55

0,75

1,5

2,2

5,5

7,5

11

400 V

kW

0,55

0,75

2,2

5,5

1,5

7,5

11

440 V

kW

References: pages 1/62 to 1/72

1/110

Selection

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers

Ue y 440 V

Use in category AC-44


LUB 12 LUB 32

Ue = 690 V
LUB 12 LUB 32

1 2 3

Millions of operating cycles

0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2

Millions of operating cycles

1 0,8

1 0,8 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2

0,1 0,08 0,06 0,05 0,04 0,03 0,02

0,1 0,08 0,06 0,05 0,04 0,03 0,02

0,01 1 2 3 5 10 20 30 40 50 66 100 200 60 80 170 Current broken in A

0,01 1 2 3 5 10 20 30 200 50 60 100 40 54 80 126 Current broken in A

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

References: pages 1/62 to 1/72

1/111

Dimensions

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers

Dimensions

1 2

Starter-controllers
LUB: non-reversing Rail mounting X1 126 X2 73 163167 154 126 Screw fixing 30 4 (2) LU2B: reversing Rail mounting Screw fixing 29 4 (2)

a (1)

X1

45

X2

135 (1) a

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

With Modbus module With Advantys STB, CANopen, Profibus DP or DeviceNet modules Minimum electrical clearance: X1 = 50 mm for Ue = 440 V and 70 mm for Ue = 500 and 690 V, X2 = 0

135 147

45

Reverser block for mounting separately from power base


Rail mounting Screw fixing

115

113

45

113

36

Sets of busbars and plug-in power sockets


GV2G445 and GV2G454 GV2Gppp with terminal block GV1G09 GV2G245 and G254

18

a l

104

GV1 G09 38

95

120/125

233237 I 89 98 I 134 152

224

GV2G245 (2 x 45) GV2G254 (2 x 54) I GV2G445 (2 x 45) GV2G454 (2 x 54) 179 206 P 45 54 GV2G554 260 GV2G345 and G354 l

a Number of tap-offs GV2G445 (2 x 45) GV2G454 (2 x 54) AK5JB144 5 224 260 6 269 314 7 314 368 8 359 422 GV2G345 (2 x 45) GV2G354 (2 x 54) AK5PC13, PC33, PC33L 45,5 79 438 452 (1) Depth with communication module. (2) Retractable fixing lugs.
45 30

82

38

35,5

81

1/112

Dimensions (continued), mounting

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers

Dimensions, mounting

Limiter-disconnector LUALB1 Disconnector LUALB10

Current limiter LA9LB920

1 2 3 4

93

2M4

146

103 51

154

a (1)

45
a

6 53,5

With Modbus module With Advantys STB, CANopen, Profibus DP or DeviceNet modules

135 147

Door interlock mechanisms


LU9APN21, LU9 APN22, LU9 APN24 Door cut-out

115

3,5

16

43,5 (1)
LU9 APNpp LU9 APNpp + GV APK12

16

60

237,4

0,5...4

22

= 48

48

a Mini 191 300

Maxi 300 483

5 6 7

43

= = 79,5

(1) For IP65 only. ASI TERV2

Addressing consoles
XZMC11

209

195

80

30

84

35

Splitter boxes
LU9GC3 (Modbus) LU9G02 and LU9G03 Rail mounting Screw fixing 4 (2) LU9GC7 (ProfibusDP) Rail mounting Screw fixing 4 (2)

8 9 10

163167

128

45

128

30

65

45

65

30

(1) Depth with communication module. (2) Retractable fixing lugs.

163167

154

170

1/113

Schemes

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers

Starter-controllers, 12 or 32 A
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

1/L1

3/L2
4/T2

13/NO

14/NO

21/NC

Control Unit

22/NC

2
2/T1

Control Unit

4/T2

6/T3

2/T1

6/T3

A1

A2

5/L3

With standard, advanced or multifunction control unit


Non-reversing Non-reversing

Pre-wired

3 4

With control unit LUCC or LUCM


Connection of a single-phase motor
1 L1 5 L2
Reverser

2/T1

4/T2

6/T3

A3

B3

A1

B1

A2

81

84

13/NO

14/NO

21/NC

Control Unit

22/NC

Control terminal block

LU2B

Reverser Motor Controller

U 2

V 6

A1

A2

A3

B3

A1

B1

5
LU2M

Reverser blocks

LU6M
Control terminal blocks
S3

6 7 8 9 10

1/L1

3/L2

5/L3

S1

S2

S1

S2

LU6M

Reverser Block

A3

B3

A1

B1

Reverser

With pre-wired connector LU9MRC


S1 S2 S3

LU6M 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 LU9M RC Pre-wired coil 81 84 A3 B3 A1 B1 A2 82

Reverser Block

Control terminal block

Basic scheme
A2 13 21

A3

B3

A1

B1

A2

14

22

LU2M

A1

Reverser Motor Controller

A2

S3

A2

S2

S1

S3

LU6M

(1)
B3 Reverse A3 Reverse B1 Forward A1 Forward

S1 Start next stage S2 Electrical interlocking S3 Maintaining contact B1 Maintain forward running B3 Maintain reverse running A1 Pulse forward running A2 Common A3 Pulse reverse running (1) Electronically operated bistable electromagnet.

Add-on contact blocks


LUA1 C11
17/NO 95/NC

LUA1 C20

LUA8E20
57 I O 67

Add-on contact modules


LUFN20
33/NO 43/NO 34/NO 44/NO

LUFN11
44/NO 32/NC

A2

LUFN02
31/NC 41/NC 32/NC 42/NC

18/NO 96/NC

17/NO 97/NO

18/NO 98/NO

43/NO 31/NC

58

1/114

68

82

Schemes (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers

Control units
Standard control units LUCA
Basic scheme
1 2 3 4 5 6 LUCA Sensor L1 Sensor L2 Sensor L3 Supply and Detection of start sequence A1 A2 Thermal overload memory Supply and Detection of start sequence A1 A2 Therm. overload memory Test Interface module 7 8 9 10 11 12

Advanced control units LUCB, LUCC, LUCD


Basic schemehd
1 2 3 4 5 6 LUCp

1 2 3 4 5 6

Sensor L1 Sensor L2 Sensor L3

Power Base Interface

Power Base Interface

Control A.S.I.C.

tr

Control A.S.I.C.

tr

1 and 2 Trips 3 and 4 Electromagnet 5 Power base rating 6 N/C

1 and 2 Trips 3 and 4 Electromagnet 5 Power base rating 6 N/C 7 Earth 8 Thermal status/Set 9 Reset mode/Reset 10 (lm/Ir) 11 Vc2 12 Vc1

Multifunction control units LUCM


Control terminal block

LUCM 24 V Aux

Multifunction Control Unit D(B) D(A) +5V 0V 4 5 7 6 8 1 2 3

Basic scheme
4 5 6 LUCM Display and Parameter Entry
ESC ENT

Sensor L1 Sensor L2 Sensor L3

Power Base Interface

7 8 9 10

Control A.S.I.C.

RS485 Supply and detection of start sequence Thermal overload memory Supply A1 A2 Interface module 7 8 9 10 11 12 24 V Aux

D(B) D(A) +5V 0V

4 5 RJ45 7 8

1 and 2 Trips 3 and 4 Electromagnet 5 Power base rating 6 N/C 7 Earth 8 N/C 9 Earth 10 (lm/Ir) 11 Rx/Tx 12 Vc1

1/115

Schemes (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers

Function modules

1 2 3

Alarm

Indication of motor load LUF V2


4-20 mA output

LUF W10

LUFW 10 07

Alarms Module 08

LUFV 2 4...20 mA

Analogue output Module 24 V Aux 24 V Aux NC

Basic scheme
Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit

Basic scheme
Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit

LUFW 10 Input interface LED Supply Input interface P - Analogue/Digital converter Supply

LUFV 2

4 5

Relais bistable

Isolation Digital/Analogue converter

07

08

Voltage/Current converter

4...20 mA

100 W < load < 500 W c 30 V max and 40 mA min

Communication modules

Communication modules ASILUFC5 and ASILUFC51

6 7 8 9 10

Without pre-wired coil connection

With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C

ASILUF C5 or ASILUF C51 Com OA1 OA3

AS-Interface Module AS-i

ASILUF C5 or ASILUF C51 LU9B N11C Pre-wired coil

AS-Interface Module AS-i

With pre-wired coil connection LU9MRC

ASILUF C5 or ASILUF C51 LU9M RC Pre-wired coil

AS-Interface Module AS-i

Basic scheme
ASILUF C5 or DEL Ready-Fault-Pole ASILUF C51

Output interface Com OA1 OA3

A2SI AS-i

1/116

Schemes (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers

Communication modules (continued)


Modbus communication module LULC031
Without pre-wired coil connection

Modbus communication module LULC033


Without pre-wired coil connection

1
Modbus Module COM D(B) D(A) 0V

LUL C031 Com Com OA1 OA3 LO1 24 V Aux

Modbus Module D(B) D(A) 0V

LUL C033 Com OA1 OA3 LO1 LI1 LI2 24 V c 24 V Aux

4 5 8 6

4 5 8 6

2 3 4

With pre-wired coil connection LU9BN11C

With pre-wired coil connection LU9BN11C

LUL C031 Com LO1 LU9B N11C Pre-wired coil 24 V Aux

Modbus Module D(B) D(A) 0V

LUL C033 LU9B N11C Pre-wired coil LO1 LI1 LI2 24 V c 24 V Aux

Modbus Module COM D(B) D(A) 0V 4 5 8 6 D(B) D(A) 0V

4 5 8 6

With pre-wired coil connection LU9MRC

With pre-wired coil connection LU9MRC

LUL C031 Com LO1 24 V Aux LU9M RC Pre-wired coil

Modbus Module D(B) D(A) 0V

LUL C033 LO1 LI1 LU9M RC Pre-wired coil LI2 24 V c 24 V Aux

Modbus Module COM

4 5 8

4 5 8

5 6 7 8 9 10

Basic scheme
Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit LUL C031

Basic scheme
Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit Controller x6 Input interface Control unit interface Ready-Fault-Pole D(B) RS485 D(A) 0V 4 5 Modbus RJ45 8 AL1 AL2 Output interface Com OA1 OA3 LO1 I/O interface LI1 LI2 24 V c 24 V Aux RS485 LED Address LUL C033 Controller interface Ready-Fault-Pole D(B) D(A) 0V 4 5 Modbus RJ45 8

LED

Address

AL1 Output interface Com Com OA1 OA3 LO1 24 V

Supply

Supply

AL2

24 V Aux

COM

1/117

Schemes (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers

Communication modules (continued)

1 2 3 4 5 6

Profibus DP communication module LUL C07

CANopen communication module LUL C08


Without pre-wired coil connection

Without pre-wired coil connection

LUL C07 Com OA3 OA1 LO1 LI1 LI2

Profibus DP Module Bus

LUL C08 Com OA3 OA1 LO1 LI1 LI2

Canopen Module Bus

With pre-wired coil connection LU9BN11LC

With pre-wired coil connection LU9BN11LC

LUL C07 LO1 LI1 LU9B N11L Pre-wired coil LI2

Profibus DP Module Bus

LUL C08 LO1 LI1 LU9B N11L Pre-wired coil LI2

Canopen Module Bus

With pre-wired coil connection LU9MRC

With pre-wired coil connection LU9MRC

LUL C07 LO1 LI1 LI2 LU9M RL Pre-wired coil

Profibus DP Module Bus

LUL C08 LO1 LI1 LU9M RL Pre-wired coil LI2

Canopen Module Bus

Basic scheme
Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit Controller x6 LUL C07 Control unit interface LED Address Controller interface Ready-Fault-Pole

Basic scheme
Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit Controller x6 LUL C08 Control unit interface LED Address Controller interface Ready-Fault-Pole

AL1 I/O interface Com OA3 OA1 LO1 LI1 LI2

Supply

AL1 AL2 OA3 OA1 Com I/O interface LO1 LI1 LI2

Supply

AL2

7 8 9 10

DeviceNet communication module LUL C09


Without pre-wired coil connection Basic scheme
Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit LUL C09 Com OA3 OA1 LO1 LI1 LI2 DeviceNet Module Bus Control unit interface LED Address Controller interface Ready-Fault-Pole Controller x6 LUL C09

With pre-wired coil connection LU9BN11LC

LUL C09 LO1 LI1 LU9B N11L Pre-wired coil LI2

DeviceNet Module Bus I/O interface 24 V c OA3 OA1 Com LO1 LI1 LI2 AL1 Supply

AL2

With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RL

LUL C09 LO1 LI1 LU9M RL Pre-wired coil LI2

DeviceNet Module Bus

1/118

Schemes (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers

Communication modules (continued)


Without pre-wired coil connection

Advantys STB communication module LUL C15

Parallel wiring modules


Without pre-wired coil connection

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

LUL C15 Com OA3 OA1 LO1 LI1 LI2

Advantys STB Module Bus

LUF C00 Com OA1 OA3

Parallel bus Module Link // RJ45 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

In Out

With pre-wired coil connection LU9BN11LC

With pre-wired coil connection LU9BN11LC

LUL C15 LO1 LI1 LU9B N11L Pre-wired coil LI2

Advantys STB Module Bus In Out

LUF C00 LU9B N11C Pre-wired coil

Parallel bus Module Link // RJ45 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

With pre-wired coil connection LU9MRC

With pre-wired coil connection LU9MRC

LUL C15 LO1 LI1 LU9M RL Pre-wired coil LI2

Advantys STB Module Bus In Out

LUF C00 LU9M RC Pre-wired coil

Parallel bus Module Link // RJ45 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Basic scheme
Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit Controller x6 LUL C15 Control unit interface LED Address Controller interface

Basic scheme
LUF C00 ReayFaultPole Com OA3 OA1 RJ45 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Ready-Fault-Pole OUT IN AL1 Supply

I/O interface OA3 OA1 Com LO1 LI1 LI2

AL2

1 Forward running 2 Reverse running 3 Output common 4 Selector in position 5 Pole state 6 Reserved 7 Fault 8 Input common

Profibus DP power supply module LU9GC7


LU9 GC7 IN OUT

Filter

24 V Aux.

1/119

Schemes (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers

Communication modules (continued)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Wiring hub and splitter boxes

Modbus hub LU9GC3


X1 N/C N/C N/C D (B) D (A) + RJ45 N/C N/C 0V X2 RJ45 X3 RJ45 X4 RJ45 X5 RJ45 X6 RJ45 X7 RJ45 X8 RJ45 Shielding LU9 GC3

Parallel wiring splitter box LU9G02


X1 Forward running Reverse running Output common N/C Pole state RJ45 N/C Fault +24 V Aux X2 X9 N/C N/C N/C D (B) RJ45 D (A) + N/C 24 V (1) 0V RJ45 LU9 G02

Parallel wiring splitter box LU9G03


X1 Forward running Reverse running Output common N/C Pole state RJ45 + 24 V Fault + 24 V Aux X2 RJ45 LU9 G03

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

X9 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

X3 RJ45 X4 RJ45

(2)

X3 RJ45 X4 RJ45

(2)

20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

RJ45

RJ45

X6 RJ45

(3)

Colours of TSXCDPppp connection cable wires (4)


1 White 2 Brown 3 Green 4 Yellow 5 Grey 6 Pink 7 Blue 8 Red 9 Black 10 Violet 11 Grey-pink 12 Red-blue 13 White-green 14 Brown-green 15 White-yellow 16 Yellow-brown 17 White-grey 18 Grey-brown 19 White-pink 20 Pink-brown

X6 RJ45

(3)

X7 RJ45 X8 RJ45

X7 RJ45 X8 RJ45

Shielding

D (B)

D (A) +

Shielding

24 V Aux Outputs Inputs Com Com

24 V Aux Outputs Inputs Com Com DeviceNet - Modbus Gateway X2 DeviceNet 1 2 3 4 5 X1 D(B) D(A) 0V 4 5 8

0V

8 9 10

(1) Not connected on connectors X1 to X8. Only present on RJ45 IN and OUT connectors. (2) 20-way HE10 input connector. (3) 20-way HE10 output connector. (4) Wire colours and corresponding HE10 connector pin numbers.

Gateways
LUF P1

0V

LUF P7

LUF P9

LUF P1 24 V Aux X2 Fip I/O

Fip I/O - Modbus Gateway D(B) D(A) 0V X1

LUF P7 24 V Aux

Profibus - Modbus Gateway X2 Profibus 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 X1 D(B) D(A) 0v

LUF P9 24 V Aux

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

4 5 8

4 5 8

1/120

20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

X10

X5 Forward running N/C Commun des sorties N/C Pole state RJ45 N/C Fault + 24 V Aux

X5 X10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 X10

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Forward running X1 Forward running X2 Forward running X3 Forward running X4 Forward running X5 Forward running X6 Forward running X7 Forward running X8 Reverse running X1 Reverse running X2 Reverse running X3 Reverse running X4 N/C N/C N/C N/C + c 24 V Com + c 24 V Com

20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Fault X1 Fault X2 Fault X3 Fault X4 Fault X5 Fault X6 Fault X7 Fault X8 Pole state X1 Pole state X2 Pole state X3 Pole state X4 Pole state X5 Pole state X6 Pole state X7 Pole state X8 + 24 V Aux Com + 24 V Aux Com

X9

Fault X1 Fault X2 Fault X3 Fault X4 Fault X5 Fault X6 Fault X7 Fault X8 Pole state X1 Pole state X2 Pole state X3 Pole state X4 Pole state X5 Pole state X6 Pole state X7 Pole state X8 + 24 V Aux Com + 24 V Aux Com

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Forward running X1 Forward running X2 Forward running X3 Forward running X4 Forward running X5 Forward running X6 Forward running X7 Forward running X8 Reverse running X1 Reverse running X2 Reverse running X3 Reverse running X4 Reverse running X5 Reverse running X6 Reverse running X7 Reverse running X8 + c 24 V Com + c 24 V Com

Schemes (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers

Data profile under AS-Interface


Control unit present in the product Status Commands D0 D1 D0 D1 Ready (available) Poles closed (running) Start - forward running Start - reverse running Standard LUCA Advanced LUCB, CC, CD Multifunction LUCM

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Main registers accessible with Modbus, CANopen, AdvantysSTB, Profibus DP and DeviceNet communication modules.
For other registers and for further information, please consult the User's Manual Communication variables on the website www.schneider-electric.com Control unit present in the product Standard Advanced Multifunction Marking Register 0Register 99 WordsBits Commercial reference, serial number, software version Log Register 100Register 450 WordsBits Fault log, Operating log, Log of last 5 trips Status Register 451Register 464 WordsBits Alarm signalling (bits), Fault signalling (bits) Values Register 465Register 473 Words Irms phase 1, phase 2, phase 3. Motor load, thermal status Earth leakage current. Phase imbalance and phase failure Register 474Register 599 WordsBits Reserved Configuration Register 600Register 699 WordsBits Protection and alarm thresholds, fallback mode and reset mode Commands Register 700Register 714 WordsBits Commands Status and values Register 452 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 Bit 3 Word Word Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Value 0 Value 1 Value 2 Value 3 Value 4 Value 5 Commands Register 700 Register 704 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 615 Short-circuit fault Overcurrent fault Thermal overload fault Ready (available) Poles closed Fault Alarms Tripped ("TRIP" position) Fault acknowledgement allowed Reserved Motor running Motor current % (bit 0) Motor current % (bit 1) Motor current % (bit 2) Motor current % (bit 3) Motor current % (bit 4) Motor current % (bit 5) Reserved Motor starting Thermal overload alarm Thermal status value Motor load value (Im/Ir) Manual reset on thermal overload fault Remote reset on thermal overload fault Automatic reset on thermal overload fault Fallback mode validation Outputs OA1 and OA3 unchanged Outputs OA1 and OA3 forced to 0 Outputs OA1 and OA3 unchanged, signalling existence of communication failure Outputs OA1 forced to 1 and OA3 unchanged Outputs OA3 forced to 1 and OA1 unchanged LO1 output command OA1 output command OA3 output command Reserved Fault acknowledgement Reserved Trip test Reserved

Register 455

Register 461 Register 465 Register 466 Configuration Register 602

Register 682

Data accessible

1/121

Basic schemes

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers
Non-reversing

Non-reversing starter-controllers LUB

1 2

1/L1

3/L2 V1 4/T2
M 3a

Control Unit

U1 2/T1

3 4 5

2-wire control via 2-position switch



A1
Start Stop

W1 6/T3

5/L3

3-wire control, pulsed start with maintaining contact


Connection of a motor load indicator module LUFV 2


A2

A1

A2

LUFV 2 4...20 mA
24 V Aux

Analogue output Module 24 V Aux

13

14
NC

Connection of thermal overload fault signalling modules LUF DA10


Automatic reset Remote reset
V1

6 7

V1

Reversed

07

08

07
24230 V

LUF DA10

Automatic or remote reset

LUF DA10 Automatic or remote reset

08

X1

X2

Z1

Z2

X1

A2

A1

A2

A1
S2

QF1

QF1

8 9 10

S1

X2

Z1

Z2

24230 V

S1

Without pre-wired coil connection


LUL C031

Control via Modbus communication module LULC031

Control via Modbus communication module LULC033


Without pre-wired coil connection
Modbus Module

Modbus Module

LUL C033

D(B) D(A) GND

Com

Com

Com

OA1

OA3

OA1

OA3

LO1

LO1

LI1

4 5 8 6

LI2

COM

S1
Modbus
A2 A1

S2 Modbus

A2

A1

1/122

D(B) D(A) GND


4 5 8 6

24 V Aux

24 V 24 V c Aux

Basic schemes (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers
Non-reversing

Non-reversing starter controllers LUB (continued)


Without pre-wired coil connection

Control by communication modules ASILUFC5 and ASILUFC51


Without pre-wired coil connection With local control

1
AS-Interface Module

ASILUF C5 or ASILUF C51


Com OA1 OA3

AS-Interface Module

ASILUF C5 or ASILUF C51


Com OA1 OA3

AS-Interface

AS-Interface

2 3 4 5 6 7

A2

A1

A2

A1

Adjustment

AS-Interface line Normal

AS-Interface line

With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C

Without pre-wired coil connection With local control

AS-i Module

ASILUF C5 or ASILUF C51


LU9B N11C Pre wired coil

AS-Interface Module

ASILUF C5 or ASILUF C51


Com OA1 OA3

AS-Interface Module

AS-Interface

AS-Interface

AS-Interface line

AS-Interface line

A2

A1
Adjustment

Without pre-wired coil connection With multifunction control unit LUCM

or ASILUF C51

AS-Interface Module

Normal

8
AS-Interface line

9
Multifunction Control Unit 24 V Aux

10

1/123

Basic schemes (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers
Reversing

Reversing starter-controllers LUB

1
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

2-wire control via 3-position switch

3-wire control, pulsed start with maintaining contact

LU2B

Reverser Motor Controller

LU2B

Reverser Motor Controller

A3

B3

A1

B1

A2

A3

B3

A1

B1

2 3 4 5 6

Start forward running Control Unit Stop forward running and reverse running Stop forward running

2/T1

4/T2

6/T3

forward running Stop reverse running

Start reverse running

U1 2/T1

V1 4/T2

M 3

Control by communication modules ASILUFC5 and ASILUFC51


With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC With multifunction control unit LUCM

W1 6/T3

Stop reverse running

3-wire control, pulsed start with maintaining contact and limit switches

ASILUF C5 or ASILUFC51
LU9M RC Pre wired coil

AS-Interface Module

LU2B

Reverser Motor Controller

AS-Interface
A3 B3 A1 B1 A2

AS-Interface line

Stop Limit switch forward running forward running

Start forward running

LUCM
24 V Aux

Multifunction Control Unit

7 8 9 10

D(B) D(A) GND

Stop forward running and reverse running

Stop Limit switch reverse running reverse running

Start reverse running

4 5 8 6 Bus Modbus RS 485

Control by communication modules ASILUFC5 and ASILUFC51


Without pre-wired coil connection With running direction pilot lights and limit switches

LU2B

Com

OA1

OA3

Reverser Motor Controller

ASILUF C5/C51 AS-Interface Module AS-Interface

A3

B3

A1

B1

A2

AS-Interface line

53

54

81

84 82

1/124

A2

Basic schemes (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers
Reversing

Reversing starter controllers LU2B (continued) Control via Modbus communication module LULC031
Without pre-wired coil connection. With local control

Control via Modbus communication module LULC033


Without pre-wired coil connection. With local control

1
D(B) D(A) GND

LU2B
A3 B3 A1

Com

Com

Com

OA1

OA3

OA1

OA3

LO1

LO1 LI1

24 V Aux

D(B) D(A) GND

Reverser Motor Controller

LUL C031

Modbus Module

LU2B
A3 B3 A1

Reverser Motor Controller

LULC 033
LI2
24 V c

Modbus Module 24 V Aux COM

4 5 8 6

4 5 8 6

2 3 4 5 6 7

B1 A2

B1

Modbus

A2

Modbus

Adjustment

Adjustment

Normal

Start forward running Start reverse running

Start reverse running

Reversing starter-controllers LUB + LU6M


1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

Control Unit

2/T1

4/T2

1/L1

3/L2

U1 2/T1

4/T2

M 3

3-wire control, pulsed start with maintaining contact


A1 13 21 14 22 A2

W1 6/T3

V1

5/L3

6/T3

2-wire control via 3-position switch

Normal

Start forward running

A1

A2

8 9 10

21

22

S1

S2 B3

S1

S2

S3

LU6M
Stop forward running and reverse Stop Start running forward running forward running S5 S6 S8

Reverser Block

LU6M

A3

A1

S3
Reverser Block

B1

A3

B3

A1

B1

Stop Start reverse running reverse running S7 S9

A2

forward running Stop reverse running

A2

1/125

Presentation

Soft starters for asynchronous motors


Altistart U01 and TeSys U

536566

Presentation
1 The Altistart U01 is a soft start/soft stop unit for asynchronous motors. It is designed primarily for combinations with TeSys U controller-starters. When combined with a TeSys U 1 controller by means of a connector 2 , the AltistartU01 3 is a power option which provides the Soft start/soft stop function. The result is a unique, innovative motor starter.

1 2 3

Using the Altistart U01 starter enhances the starting performance of asynchronous motors by allowing them to start gradually, smoothly and in a controlled manner. It prevents mechanical shocks, which lead to wear and tear, and limits the amount of maintenance work and production downtime. The Altistart U01 limits the starting torque and current peaks on starting, on machines which do not require a high starting torque. The Altistart U01 is designed for the following simple applications: b Conveyors b Conveyor belts b Pumps b Fans b Compressors b Automatic doors and gates b Small cranes b Belt-driven machines, etc. The Altistart U01 is compact and easy to install. It complies with standards IEC/EN 60947-4-2, carries UL, CSA, C-Tick, CCC certifications and e marking. b ATSU01N2ppLT soft start/soft stop units v Control two phases of the motor power supply to limit the starting current and for deceleration v Internal bypass relay v Motor power ratings ranging from 0.75 kW to 15 kW v Motor supply voltages ranging from 200 V to 480 V, 50/60 Hz. An external power supply is required for controlling the starter.

4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Characteristics: pages 1/128 and 1/129 References: page 1/130

4 5 6 7 3 8

Description
b Altistart U01 soft start/soft stop units are equipped with: v A potentiometer for setting the starting time 6 v A potentiometer for setting the deceleration time 8 v A potentiometer for adjusting the start voltage threshold according to the motor load 7 v 1 green LED 4 to indicate that the unit is switched on v 1 yellow LED 5 to indicate that the motor is powered at nominal voltage, if it is connected to the starter v A connector 9: - 2 logic inputs for Run/Stop commands - 1 logic input for the BOOST function - 1 logic output to indicate the end of starting - 1 relay output to indicate the starter has a power supply fault or the motor has reached a standstill at the end of the deceleration stage

Dimensions: page 1/131

Schemes: pages 1/132 to 1/135

1/126

Presentation (continued)

Soft starters for asynchronous motors


Altistart U01 and TeSys U

Description of a TeSys U controller-starter


Please consult the TeSys U starters - open version catalogue.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

ATSU01N2pppLT soft start unit functions


b 2-wire control The run and stop commands are controlled by a single logic input. State 1 of logic input LI2 controls starting and state 0 controls stopping.
Altistart U01 control terminals LI1 LI2 + 24 V

Wiring diagram for 2-wire control

b 3-wire control The run and stop commands are controlled by 2 different logic inputs. Stopping is achieved when logic input LI1 opens (state 0). The pulse on input LI2 is stored until input LI1 opens.
Altistart U01 control terminals

+ 24 V

LI1

LI2

Wiring diagram for 3-wire control

b Starting time Controlling the starting time means that the time of the voltage ramp applied to the motor can be adjusted to obtain a gradual starting time, dependent on the motor load. b Voltage boost function via logic input Activating the BOOST logic input enables the function for supplying a starting overtorque capable of overcoming any mechanical friction. When the input is at state 1, the function is active (input connected to the + 24 V) and the starter applies a fixed voltage to the motor for a limited time before starting.
U 100% Un Voltage ramp

50% Un Initial voltage

200 ms
Application of a voltage boost equal to 100% of the nominal motor voltage

b End of starting v Application function for logic output LO1 ATSU 01N2ppLT soft start/soft stop units are equipped with an open collector logic output LO, which indicates the end of starting when the motor has reached nominal speed.

8 9 10

Characteristics: pages 1/128 and 1/129

References: page 1/130

Dimensions: page 1/131

Schemes: pages 1/132 to 1/135

1/127

Characteristics

Soft starters for asynchronous motors


Altistart U01 and TeSys U

Environmental characteristics

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Type of starter Conformity to standards Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Conducted and radiated emissions Harmonics EMC immunity Electrostatic discharge Immunity to radiated radioelectrical interference Immunity to electrical transients Voltage/current impulse Conducted and radiated emissions Immunity to conducted interference caused by radioelectrical fields Damped oscillating waves e marking Product certifications Degree of protection Degree of pollution Vibration resistance Shock resistance Relative humidity Ambient temperature around the unit

ATSU01N2ppLT Altistart U01 electronic starters have been developed to conform to the strictest international standards and the recommendations relating to electrical industrial control devices (IEC, EN), in particular standard IEC/EN 60947-4-2. CISPR 11 level B, IEC 60947-4-2, level B IEC 1000-3-2, IEC 1000-3-4 EN 50082-2, EN 50082-1 IEC 61000-4-2 level 3 IEC 61000-4-3 level 3 IEC 61000-4-4 level 4 IEC 61000-4-5 level 3 IEC 61000-4-6 level 3 IEC 61000-4-11 IEC 61000-4-12 level 3 The starters carry e marking in accordance with the European low voltage directives IEC/EN 60947-4-2. UL, CSA, C-Tick and CCC IP 20 2 conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-2 1.5 mm peak to peak from 3 to 13 Hz, 1 gn from 13 to 150 Hz, conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 15 gn for 11 ms conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-27 595% without condensation or dripping water conforming to IEC 60068-2-3 -25+70 conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-2 -10+40 without derating, up to 50C with current derating of 2% per C above 40C 1000 without derating (above this, derate the current by 2.2% per additional 100 m)
10 10

Storage Operation

Maximum operating altitude Operating position Maximum permanent angle in relation to the normal vertical mounting position

C C m

Electrical characteristics
Type of starter Category of use Conforming to IEC 60947-4-2 3-phase a voltage Rated operating voltage Frequency Output voltage Control supply voltage Rated operating current Adjustable starting time Adjustable deceleration time Starting torque Type of starter ATSU Control power supply consumption Power dissipated At full load at end of starting In transient state at 5 times the rated operating current Type of starter Use I Starting time Starting time Maximum number of cycles per hour
Full voltage state or starter at standstill

V Hz

A s s %

W W

ATSU01N2ppLT Ac-53b 200 -10% to 480 +10% 50 -5% to 60 +5% Maximum 3-phase voltage equal to line supply voltage 24 V c, 100 mA 10% 6...32 1...10 1...10 30.... 80% of DOL motor starting torque 01N206LT 01N209LT 01N212LT 01N222LT 01N232LT 24 V c, 100 mA 24 V c, 65 mA 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 222.5 322.5 61.5 91.5 121.5 ATSU01N206LT to ATSU01N222LT ATSU01N232LT 1 50 5 10 10 5

1 100

5 20

10 10

t Operating cycle

Characteristics: pages 1/126 and 1/127

References: page 1/130

Dimensions: page 1/131

Schemes: pages 1/132 to 1/135

1/128

Characteristics (continued)

Soft starters for asynchronous motors


Altistart U01 and TeSys U

Electrical characteristics (continued)


Logic input power supply (electrically isolated between power and control) + 24 V, COM Logic inputs LI1, LI2, BOOST Stop, run and boost on start-up functions Logic output LO1 End of starting signal Relay output R1A R1C 24 V 10 % Isolated Max. current 100 mA Logic inputs with impedance 27kW; 24 V power supply (U max 40 V) Max. current 8 mA State 0 if U < 5 V and I < 0.2 mA State 1 if U > 13 V and I > 0.5 mA Open collector logic output: External 24 V power supply (minimum 6 V, maximum 30 V) Max. current 200 mA Normally open (N/O) contact Minimum switching capacity: 10 mA for 6 V c Maximum switching capacity on inductive load (cos j = 0.5 and L/R = 20 ms): 2 A for 250 V a or 30 V c (AC-15) Maximum operating voltage 440 V Starter powered up Nominal voltage reached

1 2 3 4 5 6

LED signalling

Green LED Yellow LED

Power circuit

Connections (maximum connection capacity and tightening torque)


Connection to 4 mm screw clamps 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m 1.510 1.56 16 16 110 16 1.92.5 8 AWG 10 AWG 10 AWG 10 AWG 8 AWG 10 AWG

Flexible wire without cable end Flexible wire with cable end Rigid wire Tightening torque

Control circuit
Flexible wire without cable end Flexible wire with cable end Rigid wire Tightening torque 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m

Screw connector 0.52.5 0.51.5 0.51.5 0.51.5 0.52.5 0.51 0.5 14 AWG 16 AWG 16 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG 17 AWG

Torque characteristics (typical curves)


T 3 Tn 2 Tn Tn

U 0,85 U 0,6 U
Tr

The diagram opposite shows the torque/speed characteristic of a cage motor in relation to the supply voltage. The torque varies in line with the square of the voltage at a fixed frequency. The gradual increase in the voltage prevents the instantaneous current peak on power-up.

7 8 9 10

0,25

0,5

0,75

N/Ns

Characteristics: pages 1/126 and 1/127

References: page 1/130

Dimensions: page 1/131

Schemes: pages 1/132 to 1/135

1/129

References

Soft starters for asynchronous motors


Altistart U01 and TeSys U

Soft start/soft stop units for 0.75 to 15 kW motors


DF531714

1 2 3

(can be combined with the TeSys U starter)


Motor Motor power (1) 230 V 230 V kW HP 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 ATSU01N222LT 7.5 1 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 Starter Nominal current A 6 9 12 22 32 ATSU01N206LT ATSU01N209LT ATSU01N212LT ATSU01N222LT ATSU01N232LT Reference Weight kg 0.340 0.340 0.340 0.490 0.490

3-phase supply voltage: 200480 V 50/60 Hz


1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20

400 V kW

460 V HP

4
DF510362

1
LUBp2BL

Accessorie
Description Power connector between ATSU01N2ppLT and TeSys U Used for starter ATSU01N2ppLT Reference VW3 G4104 Weight kg 0.020

5 6
3
LUCM ppBL

Numerous possibilities for combinations and options are offered. Please consult the TeSys U Starters-open version specialist catalogue. Motor power Voltage 230 V 400 V kW/HP kW 1.5 0.75/1 1.1/1.5 2.2/3 1.5/2 4 2.2/3 3/ 5.5 4/5 7.5 5.5/7.5 11 7.5/10 15 Soft starter 460 V HP 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 TeSys U Power base

TeSys U starter and soft start unit combinations

Control unit (2)

7 8
ATSU 01N2ppLT

ATSU01N206LT ATSU01N206LT ATSU01N209LT ATSU01N209LT ATSU01N212LT ATSU01N212LT ATSU01N222LT ATSU01N222LT ATSU01N232LT

LUB12 LUB12 LUB12 LUB12 LUB12 LUB32 LUB32 LUB32 LUB32

LUCp05BL LUCp12BL LUCp12BL LUCp12BL LUCp12BL LUCp18BL LUCp18BL LUCp32BL LUCp32BL

Example of a starter-motor combination with: 1 non-reversing power base for DOL starting (LUBp2BL) 2 control unit (LUCMppBL) 3 power connector (VW3G4104) 4 Altistart U01soft start/soft stop unit (ATSU01N2ppLT)

(1) Standard motor power ratings, HP power ratings indicated according to standard UL508. (2) Depending on the configuration of the chosen TeSys U starter, replace the p with A for standard, B for expandable, and M for multifunction.

9 10
Presentation: pages 1/126 and 1/127 Characteristics: pages 1/128 and 1/129 Dimensions: page 1/131 Schemes: pages 1/132 to 1/135

1/130

Dimensions

Soft starters for asynchronous motors


Altistart U01 and TeSys U

TeSys U combination (non-reversing power base) and ATSU01N206LT to ATSU01N212LT


Mounting on 5 (35 mm) rail with VW3G4104 connector

TeSys U combination (non-reversing or reversing power base) and ATSU01N206LT to ATSU01N212LT


Side by side mounting

45

135

1 2 3 4

99
72,2 154

284

150

TeSys U combination (non-reversing power base) and ATSU01N222LT to ATSU01N232LT


Mounting on 5 (35 mm) rail with VW3G4104 connector

TeSys U combination (non-reversing or reversing power base) and ATSU01N222LT to ATSU01N232LT


Side by side mounting

124

45

135

99

5 6

72,2

314

170

154

7 8 9 10
References: page 1/130 Schemes: pages 1/132 to 1/135

VW3G4104 connector

20

44,8

46,6
Presentation: pages 1/126 and 1/127 Characteristics: pages 1/128 and 1/129

28

1/131

Schemes

Soft starters for asynchronous motors


Altistart U01 and TeSys U
For 0.75 to 15 kW motors

ATSU01N2ppLT soft start/soft stop units


1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

1/L1

3/L2

QF1

5/L3
QF1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Power wiring

Power wiring with reversing unit

TeSys U

CU

CU

TeSysU

TeSysU

TeSys U with reversing unit

2/T1

4/T2

1/L1

3/L2

5/L3

6/T3

A1

2/T1

4/T2 3/L2

ATSU 01N2ppLT
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3

1/L1

5/L3

6/T3

A1

M1 3

ATSU 01N2ppLT
2/T1 4/T2
M1 3

Compatible components (For full references refer to our catalogue: Motor starter solutions - Control and protection components) Code A1 QF1 CU Description Soft start/soft stop unit TeSys U controller-starter TeSys U control unit

Presentation: pages 1/126 and 1/127

Characteristics: pages 1/128 and 1/129

References: page 1/130

6/T3

Dimensions: page 1/131

1/132

Schemes (continued)

Soft starters for asynchronous motors


Altistart U01 and TeSys U
For 0.75 to 15 kW motors

Automatic 2-wire control


Without deceleration

ATSU01N2ppLT soft start/soft stop units (continued)


With and without deceleration
A1

1
A1

c 24 V

ATSU 01N2ppLT
BOOST

c 24 V
LUA1 C20

R1C

+ 24 V

BOOST

+ 24 V

LUA1 C20
18 COM R1C R1A LI1 LI2

ATSU 01N2ppLT
COM R1A LO1

17

LO1

18

17

S1

S1
Stop Run

2 3 4

LI1

A1

QF1

S2
A1

A2

Functional diagrams
Power supply voltage Green LED Logic input LI2 Pushbutton S1 Logic output LO1 Yellow LED

Stop Run

QF1
A2

Power supply voltage Green LED Logic input LI2 Pushbutton S2 Pushbutton S1 Logic output LO1

U1

U1

10 s t1

Yellow LED Motor voltage

10 s t1 t2

LI2

Motor voltage

5 6

Automatic 3-wire control


Without deceleration With deceleration
A1

c 24 V
17

BOOST

+ 24 V

BOOST

LUA1 C20
18 R1A

LUA1 C20
18
LO1

+ 24 V

COM

17

ATSU 01N2ppLT
R1C LI1 LI2

c 24 V

A1

ATSU 01N2ppLT
COM R1C R1A LI1 LI2 LO1

S1 S2
A1

14

13

13

S2

A2

A1

QF1

14

QF1

QF1 S1

7 8 9
t

QF1

Functional diagrams
Power supply voltage Green LED Pushbutton S1 Pushbutton S2 Logic input LI2 Logic output LO1 Yellow LED Motor voltage Logic output LO1 Power supply voltage

500 ms

Green LED Logic input LI2 Pushbutton S2 Logic input LI1 Pushbutton S1

U1

10 s t1

Yellow LED Motor voltage

A2

10 s t1

A1: Soft start/soft stop unit S1, S2: XB4B or XB5B pushbuttons QF1: TeSys U controller-starter t1: Acceleration time can be controlled by a potentiometer t2: Deceleration time can be controlled by a potentiometer U1: Starting time can be controlled by a potentiometer Presentation: pages 1/126 and 1/127 Characteristics: pages 1/128 and 1/129

10

References: page 1/130 Dimensions: page 1/131

1/133

Schemes (continued)

Soft starters for asynchronous motors


Altistart U01 and TeSys U
For 0.75 to 15 kW motors

ATSU01N2ppLT soft start/soft stop units (continued)

1 2

Automatic 3-wire control, with reversing unit


Without deceleration
QF1

With deceleration
A1

QF1

A1

LU2B p2BL
R1A A3 B3 A1 B1 A2

ATSU 01N2ppLT
LI2 + 24 V BOOST LO1 COM R1C LI1

LU2B p2BL
R1A A3 B3 A1 B1 A2

ATSU 01N2ppLT
R1C BOOST COM

+ 24 V

Run direction 2

Run direction 1 S1

S2

Run direction 2 S2

Run direction 1 S1

3 4 5 6 7

Stop S3
17
17

Stop S3

LUA1 C20
18

LUA1 C20

c 24 V

c 24 V

QF1: TeSys U controller-starter with reversing unit A1: Soft start/soft stop unit S1, S2, S3: XB4B or XB5B pushbuttons S3: minimum depression time 500 ms

QF1: TeSys U controller-starter with reversing unit A1: Soft start/soft stop unit S1, S2, S3: XB4B or XB5B pushbuttons

Boost on starting and end of starting signal


A1

ATSU 01N2ppLT

+ 24 V

BOOST

COM

R1C

R1A

LI1

LI2

To PLC

A1: Soft start/soft stop unit

8 9 10
Presentation: pages 1/126 and 1/127 Characteristics: pages 1/128 and 1/129 References: page 1/130 Dimensions: page 1/131

1/134

LO1

18

LO1

LI1

LI2

Schemes (continued)

Soft starters for asynchronous motors


Altistart U01 and TeSys U
For 0.75 to 15 kW motors

ATSU01N2ppLT soft start/soft stop units (continued) Automatic control with Modbus communication module, with and without deceleration
Without reversing unit
A1 A1

With reversing unit


A1 A1

1
LUL C031
BOOST COM OA1 LO1 COM OA3 LO1

ATSU 01N2ppLT
BOOST

LUL C031
LO1 COM

Modbus Module
D(B) D(A) Gnd R1A

ATSU 01N2ppLT

Modbus Module
c 24 V 24 V Aux.
D(B) D(A) Gnd

+ 24 V

COM

LU9B N11C Pre-wired coil

R1C

R1A

LO1

R1C

LI1

LI1

LI2

LI2

c 24 V 24 V Aux.

+ 24 V

COM

4 5 8

4 5 8

13

2 3

+
c 24 V

14

c 24 V

QF1

LU2B p2BL
A3 B3 A1 B1 A2

Function Register Bit Powering down TeSys U and ATSU 704 0 Automatic control without deceleration Run 700 0 Stop 704 0 Automatic control with deceleration Run 700 0 700 0 Soft stop

Value 0

1 0 1 0

A1: Soft start/soft stop unit

Function Register Bit Value Powering up TeSys U and ATSU Forward 704 0 1 Reverse 704 1 1 Powering down TeSys U and ATSU Forward 704 0 0 Reverse 704 1 0 Automatic control without deceleration Run 700 0 1 704 0 0 Stop forward Stop reverse 704 1 0 Automatic control with deceleration (forward or reverse) Run 700 0 1 700 0 0 Soft stop A1: Soft start/soft stop unit QF1: TeSys U controller-starter with reversing unit With reversing unit

4 5 6
A1

Automatic control with AS-Interface communication module, without deceleration


Without reversing unit
A1

ATSU 01N2ppLT
BOOST

ATSU 01N2ppLT
BOOST

+ 24 V

+ 24 V

7 8

COM

COM

R1C

LO1

R1C

R1A

R1A

13

QF1

c 24 V AS-Interface LU9B N11C + Pre-wired coil +

14

ASI LUFC5

LU2B p2BL
COM OA1 OA3 A3 B3 A1 B1

ASI LUFC5
A2

c 24 V AS-Interface

+
c 24 V

LO1

LI1

LI2

LI1

LI2

+
c 24 V

Function Bit Value Power-up and automatic control without deceleration Run D0 1 Stop D0 0

A1: Soft start/soft stop unit

Function Bit Value Power-up and automatic control without deceleration Run forward D0 1 Stop D0 0 1 Run reverse D1 Stop D1 0 A1: Soft start/soft stop unit QF1: TeSys U controller-starter with reversing unit References: page 1/130 Dimensions: page 1/131

9 10

Presentation: pages 1/126 and 1/127

Characteristics: pages 1/128 and 1/129

1/135

Presentation, description, references

TeSys motor starters - open version


Magnetic control unit for the protection of variable speed controllers and soft start units

1 2

S1 (mm2 / AWG)

When installed upstream of a variable speed controller or soft start unit, control unit LUCLpp, used in conjunction with an LUB12 or LUB32 power base, provides: v isolation, v short-circuit protection of the motor starter. (variable speed controller-based or soft start unit-based motor starters).

Presentation

Note: control unit LUCL, when used in conjunction with power base LUB 12 or LUB32, conforms to standard IEC 60947-2.
S2 (mm2 / AWG) LUB pp LUCLpp

3
Altivar or Altistart

Installation regulations When the length of the cable between the TeSysU starter and the variable speed controller is more than 1.5 m, the c.s.a. of the cable between the variable speed controller and the TeSysU starter (S2) must be equal to the c.s.a. of the cable upstream of TeSysU (S1).

4
568027

Description
1 2 3 1 Extraction and locking handle 2 Sealing of locking handle 3 Dial for magnetic adjustment of motor In 4 Locking of settings by sealing the transparent cover

5 6 7

References
Description

Line current of the variable speed controller or soft start unit A 0.150.6 0.351.4 1.255 312 4.518 832

Reference

Weight kg

(1)
LUCLX6pp LUCL1Xpp LUCL05pp LUCL12pp LUCL18pp LUCL32pp 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135

Magnetic control unit

(1) Standard control circuit voltage: Volts 24 BL (2), (3) B 4872 ES (4) 110240 FU (5)

8 9 10

c a c or a

(2) Voltage code to be used for a starter-controller with communication module. (3) d.c. voltage with maximum ripple of 10 %. (4) c: 4872 V, a: 48 V. (5) c: 110220 V, a: 110240 V.

1/136

Selection

TeSys motor starters - open version


Magnetic control unit for the protection of variable speed controllers and soft start stop units

Control unit and associated power base selection


Functions provided Maximum motor power ratings 50/60 Hz < 400/415 V KW 500 V KW 2.2 5.5 9 15 690 V KW 3 9 15 18.5

Power base reference

Control unit reference

Line current

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A LUB12 or LUB32 LUB 12 or LUB32 LUB12 or LUB32 LUB12 or LUB32 LUB32 LUB32 LUCLX6pp LUCL1Xpp LUCL05pp LUCL12pp LUCL18pp LUCL32pp 0.150.6 0.351.4 1.255 312 4.518 832

b Short-circuit protection b Manual reset

0.09 0.25 1.5 5.5 7.5 15

Operating characteristics
Control units Thermal overload protection Over current protection Short-circuit protection Protection against phase loss Protection against phase imbalance Earth fault protection (equipment protection only) Tripping class Motor type Thermal overload test function Overtorque No-load running Long starting time Reset method Manual Automatic or remote

Standard LUCA

Advanced LUCB LUCC LUCD LUCL

Multifunction LUCM 3 to 17 x the setting current

14.2 x the setting current 14.2 x the max. current

10 3-phase

10 Single-phase

20 3-phase

530 Single-phase and 3-phase

Parameters can be set With function module, or parameters can be set via the bus with a communication module (see page 1/70). Parameters can be set Parameters can be set via the bus with a communication module (see page 1/70).

Integrated function

Function provided with accessory

Compatibility

Compatibility of control unit LUCLpp with The starter-controller The starter The controller Add-on contact blocks with fault signalling and auxiliary contacts Yes No No Yes

References

Functions

LUB12/LUB32 Starter-controller (magnetic protection) LUS12/LUS32 Starter without either magnetic or thermal overload protection) LUT M LUA1C11 LUA1C20 LUF N20 LUF N11 LUF N02 Controller (without thermal overload protection) Add-on contact blocks with fault signalling (1 N/O + 1 N/C) Add-on contact blocks with fault signalling (2 N/O) Auxiliary contacts (2 N/O) Auxiliary contacts (1 N/O + 1 N/C) Auxiliary contacts (2 N/C)

Communication modules

Yes

ASILUFC5 and AS-Interface communication modules ASILUFC51 LUF C00 LUL C07 LULC08 LUL C09 LULC15 LUL C031 LUL C033 Parallel wiring module Profibus DP communication module (1 output/2 inputs) CANopen communication module (1 output/2 inputs) DeviceNet communication module (1 output/2 inputs) Advantys STB communication module (1 output/2 inputs) Modbus communication module (1 output) Modbus communication module (1 output/2 inputs) Alarm function module Thermal overload signalling module with manual reset Thermal overload signalling module with automatic or remote reset (1 N/C) Thermal overload signalling module with automatic or remote reset (1 N/O) Motor load indication module

Function modules

No

LUF W10 LUF DH11 LUF DA01 LUF DA10 LUF V2

1/137

Characteristics

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers

Characteristics of magnetic control unit LUCL

1 2 3 4 5

Protection

Motor type Conforming to standard

3-phase When used in conjunction with an LUB 12 or LUB 32 power base, magnetic control unit LUCL conforms to standard IEC 60947-2. 14.2 x In (max. setting current) 20 %

Short-circuit protection

Tripping threshold Tripping tolerance

Product certifications Conforming to standards Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Safety separation of circuits SELV Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1, overvoltage category III, degree of pollution: 3 Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 appendix N V kV V

Environment

CE When used in conjunction an LUB power base, control unit LUCL conforms to standard 60947-2. 690 6 Between the control or auxiliary circuit and the main circuit: 400 Between the control and auxiliary circuits: 40 IP 40 IP 20 IP 20 TH Cycles 12 48 - 40+ 85 Power bases and standard and advanced control units: - 25 + 70. (At temperatures above 60 C and up to 70 C, for Ie = 32 A, leave a minimum gap of 9mm between products). Power bases and multifunction control units: - 25+ 60. (At temperatures above 45 C, leave a minimum gap of 9 mm between products. At temperatures above 55 C up to 60 C, leave a gap of 20 mm between products.) C C

Front panel outside connection Degree of protection Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 zone (protection against Front panel and wired terminals direct finger contact) Other faces Protective treatment Conforming to IEC/EN 60068 Conforming to/EN 60068-2-30 Ambient air temperature around the device Storage Operation Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-11 h

Maximum operating altitude Operating positions In relation to normal vertical mounting plane

2000

6 7 8 9 10

Flame resistance

Conforming to UL 94 Conforming to IEC/EN 60695-2-12 C C

V2 960 (parts supporting live components) 650 Cadmium and silicone-free, recyclable Power poles open: 10 gn Power poles closed: 15 gn Power poles open: 2 gn Power poles closed: 4 gn (2) kV kV V/m kV kV In open air: 8 - Level 3 On contact: 8 - Level 4 10 - Level 3 All circuits except for serial link: 4 - Level 4 Serial link: 2 - Level 3 Common mode kV 2 Not applicable V 10 Serial mode 1

Environmental restrictions Shock resistance 1/2 sine wave = 11 ms Vibration resistance 5300 Hz Resistance to electrostatic discharge Immunity to radiated highfrequency disturbance Immunity to fast transient currents Immunity to dissipated shock waves Conforming to IEC/EN60068-2-27 (1) Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 (1) Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-2 Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-3 Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-4 Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 Uc a 24240 V, Uc c 48220 V Uc = 24 V c Immunity to conducted high-frequency disturbance Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-6

(1) Without modifying the contact states, in the most unfavourable direction. (2) 2 gn with Advantys STB or CANopen communication modules.

1/138

Characteristics

TeSys U starter-controllers Power bases and LUCL magnetic control unit

TeSys motor starters - open version

Power base and control unit type

LUB12 + LUCL

LUB32 + LUCL

Power circuit connection characteristics


Connection to 4 mm screw clamp terminals
Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Flexible cable without cable end Screwdriver Tightening torque 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m 2.510 1.56 16 16 110 16 Philips n 2 or flat screwdriver: 6 mm 1.92.5 2.510 1.56 16 16 110 16 1.92.5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Control circuit connection characteristics


Connection to 3 mm screw clamp terminals
Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Flexible cable without cable end Screwdriver Tightening torque Rated control circuit voltage Voltage limits Operation 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m a 50/60 Hz c c 24 V (1) a 24 V a or c 4872 V a 110240 V c 110240 V c 24 V a 24 V a or c 4872 V a 110240 V, c 110220 V c 24 V a 24 V a or c 4872 V a 110240 V, c 110220 V c 24 V a 24 V a or c 4872 V a 110240 V, c 110220 V Closing Opening IEC/EN 61000-4-11 In millions of operating cycles In operating cycles per hour V V V V V V V V V V V mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA W ms ms ms 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.341.5 0.341.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 Philips n 2 or flat screwdriver: 5 mm 0.81.2 24240 24220 2027 2026.5 a 38.572. c 38.593 a 88264 c 88242 14.5 14.5 29 55 130 140 280 280 60 70 35 35 2 24 V: 70; 48 V: 60; u 72 V: 50 35 3 At least 70 % of Uc for 500 ms 15 3600 3 Yes 1 padlock with 6.9 mm shank 12 y 70 C: 12 A y 70 C: 12 A 690 (3) 4060 3 6 0.1 0.3 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.341.5 0.341.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.81.2 24240 24220 2027 2026.5 a 38.572. c 38.593 a 88264 c 88242 14.5 14.5 29 55 220 220 280 280 80 90 45 25 3 24 V: 70; 48 V: 60; u 72 V: 50 35 3 15 3600 3 Yes 1 padlock with 6.9 mm shank 32 y 70 C: 32 A y 70 C: 32 A 690 (3) 4060 9 0.6 12 1.1 18 2.4 25 4.6 32 7.5

Control circuit characteristics

Drop-out

Typical consumption I max while closing

I rms sealed

Heat dissipation Operating time Resistance to micro-breaks Resistance to voltage dips Mechanical durability Maximum operating rate Number of poles Isolation conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 Rated thermal current Rated operational current (Ue y 440 V) Rated operational voltage Frequency limits Power dissipated in the power circuits

Main pole characteristics


Possible Padlocking A Conforming to IEC/ EN 60947-2 Category AC-41 Category AC-43 V Hz A W

Of the operating current Operational current Power dissipated in all three poles Rated breaking capacity on short-circuit

Total breaking time Thermal limit

With Isc max on 440 V

V 230 440 500 600 kA 50 50 10 4 ms 2 2 2 kA2s 90 (1) d.c. voltage with maximum ripple of 10 %. (2) No consumption sealed. (3) For 690 V, use phase barrier LU9SP0.

120

1/139

Combinations

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers

Coordination

1 2
526112 526113

The standard defines tests at different levels of current; the purpose of these tests is to place the equipment in extreme conditions. The standard defines 2 types of coordination, according to the condition of the components after testing: type 1 and type 2 Type 1 coordination requires that in a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter must not present any danger to personnel or installations and must not be able to resume operation without repair or the replacement of parts. The product combinations given below provide type 1 coordination .

Soft start-soft stop unit/TeSys U starter controller combination with magnetic protection
TeSys U / Altistart 48: type 1 coordination
Power 400 V (kW) TeSys U references (protection + power switching) LUB32 + LUCL32 or LUCL18 LUB32 + LUCL32 LUB32 + LUCL32 LUB32 + LUCL32 Soft start unit reference Class 10 ATS48D17 ATS48D22 ATS48D32 Class 20 ATS48D17 ATS48D22 ATS48D32 ATS48D38

3 4

5.5

7.5 11 15

Variable speed controller/TeSys U starter controller combination with magnetic protection


TeSys U / Altivar 21 UL Type 1/IP 20: type 1 coordination
526112 526114

5 6 7

Power 400 V (kW) 0.75

TeSys U references (protection + power switching) LUB12 + LUCL05

Variable speed controller reference ATV21H075N4 ATV21HU15N4

2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15

LUB12 + LUCL12 LUB12 + LUCL12 LUB12 + LUCL12 LUB32 + LUCL32 or LUCL18 LUB32 + LUCL32 or LUCL18 LUB32 + LUCL32 LUB32 + LUCL32

ATV21HU22N4 ATV21HU30N4 ATV21HU40N4 ATV21HU55N4 ATV21HU75N4 ATV21HD11N4 ATV21HD15N4

TeSys U / Altivar 21 IP 54: type 1 coordination


526112 526115

Power 400 V (kW) 0.75 1.5 2.2 3

TeSys U references (protection + power switching) LUB12 + LUCL05 LUB12 + LUCL12 or LUCL05 LUB12 + LUCL12 LUB12 + LUCL12 LUB12 + LUCL12 LUB32 + LUCL32 or LUCL18 LUB32 + LUCL32 or LUCL18 LUB32 + LUCL32 LUB32 + LUCL32

Variable speed controller reference ATV21W075N4/N4C ATV21WU15N4/N4C ATV21WU22N4/N4C ATV21WU30N4/N4C ATV21WU40N4/N4C ATV21WU55N4/N4C ATV21WU75N4/N4C ATV21WD11N4/N4C ATV21WD15N4/N4C

8 9 10

4 5.5 7.5 11 15

1/140

Combinations

TeSys motor starters - open version


TeSys U starter-controllers

526112

526116

TeSys U / Altistart 31: type 1 coordination


Power 400 V (kW) 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 TeSys U references (protection + power switching) LUB12 + LUCL05 LUB12 + LUCL05 LUB12 + LUCL05 LUB12 + LUCL12 LUB12 + LUCL12 LUB12 + LUCL12 LUB32 + LUCL18 LUB32 + LUCL18 LUB32 + LUCL32 LUB32 + LUCL32

Variable speed controller/TeSys U starter controller combination with magnetic protection (continued)
Variable speed controller reference ATV31H037N4 ATV31H055N4 ATV31H075N4 ATV31HU11N4 ATV31HU15N4 ATV31HU22N4 ATV31HU30N4 ATV31HU40N4 ATV31HU55N4 ATV31HU75N4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

526112

526117

TeSys U / Altistart 61: type 1 coordination


Power 400V (kW) 0.75 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 TeSys U references (protection + power switching) LUB12 + LUCL05 LUB12 + LUCL12 LUB12 + LUCL12 LUB32 + LUCL18 LUB32 + LUCL18 LUB32 + LUCL32 LUB32 + LUCL32 Variable speed controller reference ATV61H075N4 ATV61HU15N4 ATV61HU22N4 ATV61HU30N4 ATV61HU40N4 ATV61HU55N4 ATV61HU75N4

526112

526118

TeSys U / Altistart 71: type 1 coordination


Power 400V (kW) 0.75 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 TeSys U references (protection + power switching) LUB12 + LUCL05 LUB12 + LUCL12 LUB12 + LUCL12 LUB32 + LUCL18 LUB32 + LUCL18 LUB32 + LUCL32 Variable speed controller reference ATV71H075N4 ATV71HU15N4 ATV71HU22N4 ATV71HU30N4 ATV71HU40N4 ATV71HU55N4

1/141

General

Motor starters - open version


integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers

1

526454

integral 63 contactor breakers combine all the functions of a power switching assembly up to 63 A in a single compact device, with performance equivalent to that of the best separate specialist devices. They conform to the main standards currently in force, in particular IEC60947-1, IEC60947-2, IEC60947-3, IEC60947-4-1 and IEC60947-6-2 (welding of power poles impossible), as well as to international approvals UL, CSA, and the European directives. The integral range ensures reliability of operation up to 63 A. In addition to safety of operation, integral has numerous other functions: increased protection, communication, remote control, fault identification, isolation, padlocking.

Integral 63: a high performance concept for reliability of operation

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
References: pages 1/162 to 1/173 Dimensions, schemes: pages 1/176 to 1/179
526324

Functions performed by integral 63 units


The equipment in a power switching circuit must perform 4 main functions: b power switching, b isolation, b overload protection, b short-circuit protection. These functions are traditionally performed by separate devices which must be combined to form a motor starter assembly, the most common being: v fuses + contactor + thermal overload relay, v circuit breaker + contactor + thermal overload relay.

Power switching
Contactor (for automatic and remote control)

b Operational power for use in category AC-43: v up to 30 kW at 400/415 V 50 Hz, v up to 33 kW at 440/415 V 50 Hz. b Electrical life in number of operating cycles, in category AC-43, at 415 V and at rated power: 1.2 million. b Mechanical life in number of operating cycles: 5 million.


526325

Reversing pairs

Two 3-pole contactors, horizontally mounted: b mechanically interlocked. Can be fitted with the same protection modules as integral 63 contactor breaker.

1/142

General (continued)

Motor starters - open version


integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers

Functions performed by integral 63 units (continued)


Isolation
Isolation conforming to IEC 60947

integral 63 contactor breakers provide isolation and padlocking functions conforming to standards IEC 60947. In addition, integral 63 LD4 contactor breakers and LD5 reversing contactor breakers incorporate specific poles for control testing and padlocking. Overload protection
534529

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Thermal-magnetic protection module (for protection against overload and overcurrent)

A range of interchangeable modules allows the equipment to be adapted to suit: b the rated operational current (rating and settings), b the application: v motors, v frequent starting motors, v distribution circuits. Short-circuit protection


526327

High breaking capacity current limiting circuit breaker

For short-circuit protection. High breaking capacity with short-circuit limited by ultra-fast tripping. Possibility of increasing the breaking capacity of the integral unit by adding a current limiter (LA9 LB920). The current limiter is fitted upstream of the integral unit. Several integral units may be fitted downstream of the current limiter (Ith = 63 A, Ie = 32 A).

Signalling and attachments


These devices provide comprehensive local signalling: b pole position indicator, b different signalling for overload and short-circuit. They also allow dialogue with the automated control system by means of numerous add-on blocks: b auxiliary contact and signalling blocks, b remote electrical reset device, b undervoltage and shunt trips, b control circuit switching, b etc.
526328

Simple fixing and cabling methods


integral 63 contractor breakers and reversing contactor breakers fit onto 75 mm 7 rails using a separate mounting plate. integral units can also be mounted on: b panels, b pre-slotted mounting plates type AM1 P, b 2 x 35 mm 7 rails using sliding clip nuts, b CMD prefabricated plug-in busbar trunking (providing an economical assembly, combining safety and simplicity of use), b AK5 panel busbar systems.

9 10

References: pages 1/162 to 1/173

Dimensions, schemes: pages 1/176 to 1/179

1/143

Terminology

Motor starters - open version


integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers

Terminology

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
References: pages 1/162 to 1/173 Dimensions, schemes: pages 1/176 to 1/179

Altitude The rarefied atmosphere at high altitude reduces the dielectric strength of the air and hence the rated operational voltage of the contactor breaker. It also reduces the cooling effect of the air and hence the rated operational current of the contactor breaker (unless the temperature drops at the same time). No derating is necessary up to 3000 m. Derating factors to be applied above this altitude for main pole operational voltage and current (a.c. supply) are as follows:
Altitude Rated operational voltage Rated operational current 3500 m 0.90 0.92 4000 m 0.80 0.90 4500 m 0.70 0.88 5000 m 0.60 0.86

Ambient air temperature The temperature of the air surrounding the device, measured near to the device. The operating characteristics are given: b with no restriction for temperatures between - 5 and + 55 C. b with restrictions, if necessary, for temperatures between - 50 and + 70 C. Rated operational current (Ie) This is defined taking into account the rated operational voltage, operating rate and duty, utilisation category and air temperature around the device. Conventional rated thermal current (Ith) (1) The current Ith which a closed contactor breaker can sustain for a minimum of 8 hours without its temperature rise exceeding the limits given in the standards. Short time rating The current which a closed contactor breaker can sustain for a short time, after a period of no load, without dangerous overheating. Rated operational voltage (Ue) This is the voltage value which, in conjunction with the rated operational current, determines the use of the contactor breaker or starter, and on which the corresponding tests and the utilisation category are based. For 3-phase circuits, it is expressed as the voltage between phases. Apart from exceptional cases such as rotor short-circuiting, the rated operational voltage Ue is less than or equal to the rated insulation voltage Ui. Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) The rated value of the control circuit voltage, on which the operating characteristics are based. For a.c. applications, the values are given for a near sinusoidal wave form (less than 5% total harmonic distortion). Rated insulation voltage (Ui) This is the voltage value used to define the insulation characteristics of a device and referred to in dielectric tests determining leakage paths and creepage distances. As the specifications are not identical for all standards, the rated values given for each of them are not necessarily the same. Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) This is the highest peak value of an impulse voltage, of prescribed form and polarity, which the device is able to withstand without failure under specified test conditions, and to which isolation clearance values are referred. The rated impulse withstand voltage of a device must be equal to or higher than the values stated for the transient overvoltages appearing in the circuit in which the device is fitted.
Note: these definitions are based on extracts from standard IEC 60947. (1) Conventional free air thermal current, conforming to IEC standards.

1/144

Terminology (continued)

Motor starters - open version


integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers

Terminology (continued)
Rated operational power (expressed in kW) The rated power of the standard motor which can be switched by the contactor breaker, at the stated operational voltage. Rated breaking capacity (Iq) (1) This is the current value which the contactor breaker can break in accordance with the breaking conditions specified in the IEC standard. Rated making capacity (1) This is the current value which the contactor breaker can make in accordance with the making conditions specified in the IEC standard.
t

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

On-load factor (m) This is the ratio between the time the current flows (t) and the duration of the cycle (T):
t m = -T
T

Cycle duration: duration of current flow + time at zero current. Pole impedance The impedance of one pole is the sum of the impedance of all the circuit components between the input terminal and the output terminal. The impedance comprises a resistive component (R) and an inductive component X=Lw). The total impedance therefore depends on the frequency and is normally given for 50 Hz. The average value is given for the pole at its rated operational current. Electrical durability This is the average number of on-load operating cycles which the main pole contacts can perform without maintenance. The electrical durability depends on the utilisation category, the rated operational current and the rated operational voltage. Mechanical durability This is the average number of no-load operating cycles (i.e. with zero current flow through the main poles) which the contactor breaker can perform without mechanical failure. Coordination The coordination of protection devices involves combining, in a selective way, a short-circuit protection device (fuses or magnetic circuit-breakers) with a contactor and an overload protection device. Its objective is to break any abnormal current, in plenty of time, without any danger to personnel, whilst providing adequate protection of the equipment against an overload or short-circuit current.
Type 1 - IEC 60947-4-1

In a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter must not present any danger to personnel or installations and may not be able to resume operation without repair or the replacement of parts.
Type 2 - IEC 60947-4-1

In a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter must not present any danger to personnel or installations and must be able to resume operation. The risk of contact welding is permissible if they can be easily separated.
Total, ensuring reliability of operation - IEC 60947-6-2

In the event of a short-circuit, no damage or risk of welding is permissible on the equipment constituting the motor starter. Operation can be resumed without any maintenance.
Note: these definitions are based on extracts from standard IEC 60947. (1) For a.c. applications, the breaking and making capacities are expressed by the rms value of the symmetrical component of the short-circuit current. Taking into account the maximum asymmetry which may exist in the circuit, the contacts therefore have to withstand a peak asymmetrical current which may be twice the rms symmetrical component.

References: pages 1/162 to 1/173

Dimensions, schemes: pages 1/176 to 1/179

1/145

Terminology (continued)

Motor starters - open version


integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
References: pages 1/162 to 1/173 Dimensions, schemes: pages 1/176 to 1/179

The standard utilisation categories define the current values which the contactor breaker must be able to make or break. These values depend on: b the type of load being switched: squirrel cage or slip ring motor, resistors, b the conditions under which making or breaking takes place: motor stalled, starting or running, reversing, plugging.

Definition

Reminder of standards IEC 60947

b b b b b b

Standards for contactor breakers

IEC 60947-1: general rules, IEC 60947-2: circuit breakers, IEC 60947-3: isolating devices, IEC 60947-4-1: contactors and motor starters, IEC 60947-5-1: control and signalling units, IEC 60947-6-2: control and protection devices,

IEC 60947-4-1 Standard IEC 60947-4-1: covers contactors and electromechanical motor starters. It concerns: b types of equipment with main contacts designed for connection to circuits whose rated operational voltage does not exceed 1000 V for a.c. applications or 1500 V for d.c. applications, b contactors used in conjunction with overload and/or short-circuit protection devices, b motor starters used in conjunction with separate short-circuit protection devices and/or with separate short-circuit protection devices and built-in overload protection devices, b contactors and combination motor starters which incorporate their own shortcircuit protection device. IEC 60947-6-2 Standard IEC 60947-6: covers multi-function equipment. It concerns connection, power switching and protection devices (or equipment) with main contacts designed for connection to circuits whose rated operational voltage is less than or equal to 1000 V for a.c. applications, or 1500 V for d.c. applications. Such devices are designed to perform both the power switching function and the protection of remotely controlled circuits function; they can also perform other functions, such as isolation. After short-circuit (Isc) tests, the products must be able to make and break the currents corresponding to the specified utilisation categories, and to the number of operating cycles specified in the standard, without failing. This series of tests is completed by temperature rise tests. Standard IEC 947-6-2 specifies that, in the event of a short-circuit, no damage or risk of contact welding is permissible on the devices constituting the motor starter. The integral contactor breaker, through its design, ensures reliability of operation. After eliminating the fault, operation can be resumed instantly without any maintenance work on the product, other than resetting. Utilisation categories for a.c. applications
Category AC-1

This category applies to all types of a.c. device (load) with a power factor equal to or greater than 0.95 (cos j y 0.95). Non inductive or slightly inductive loads.
Application examples: heating, distribution. Category AC-2

This category applies to starting, plugging and inching of slip ring motors. b On closing, the contactor breaker makes the starting current, which is about 2.5 times the rated current of the motor. b On opening, it must break the starting current, at a voltage less than or equal to the mains supply voltage.
Category AC-3

This category applies to squirrel cage motors with breaking while motor running. b On closing the contactor breaker makes the starting current, which is about 5 to 7 times the rated current of the motor. b On opening, it breaks the rated current drawn by the motor; at this point, the voltage at the contactor breaker terminals is about 20% of the mains supply voltage. Breaking is light.
Application examples: all standard squirrel cage motors (lifts, escalators, conveyor belts, bucket elevators, compressors, pumps, mixers, air conditioning units, etc.).

1/146

Terminology (continued)

Motor starters - open version


integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers

Standards for contactor breakers (continued)


Utilisation categories for a.c. applications (continued)
Category AC-4

This category covers starting, plug braking and inching of squirrel cage motors. On closing, the contactor breaker makes a current peak which may be as high as 5 to 7 times the rated motor current. On opening, it breaks this same current at a voltage which is higher, the lower the motor speed. This voltage can be the same as the mains voltage. Breaking is severe.
Application examples: printing machines, wire drawing machines, hoisting equipment, metallurgy industry. Category AC-41

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

This category applies to all types of a.c. device (load) with a power factor equal to or greater than 0.95 (cos j y 0.95). Non inductive or slightly inductive loads.
Application examples: heating, distribution. Category AC-42

This category applies to starting, plugging and inching of slip ring motors. b On closing, the contactor breaker makes the starting current, which is about 2.5 times the rated current of the motor. b On opening, it must break the starting current, at a voltage less than or equal to the mains supply voltage.
Category AC-43

This category applies to squirrel cage motors with breaking while motor running; inching or occasional reversing of limited duration are permissible if the number of operating cycles does not exceed 5 per minute, or 10 within a 10 minute period. b On closing the contactor breaker makes the starting current, which is about 5 to 7 times the rated current of the motor. b On opening, it breaks the rated current drawn by the motor; at this point, the voltage at the contactor breaker terminals is about 20% of the mains supply voltage. Breaking is light.
Application examples: all standard squirrel cage motors: lifts, escalators, conveyor belts, bucket elevators, compressors, pumps, mixers, air conditioning units, etc.). Category AC-44

This category covers applications with plug braking and inching of squirrel cage or slip ring motors. On closing, the contactor breaker makes a current peak which may be as high as 5 to 7 times the rated motor current. On opening, it breaks this same current at a voltage which is higher, the lower the motor speed. This voltage can be the same as the mains voltage. Breaking is severe.
Application examples: printing machines, wire drawing machines, hoisting equipment, metallurgy industry.

Tripping classes of protection modules The creation of thermal tripping classes allows better adaptation of the thermal protection to suit different motor and application technologies (short or long starting times). Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC 60947-6-2.
Class Tripping time at 7.2 Ir (1)

IEC 60947-5 Standard IEC 60947-5-1: covers switching devices and components for control circuits. It concerns electromechanical devices for control circuits. Utilisation categories for a.c. applications
Category AC-14 (2)

Standards for auxiliary contacts

10 A 210 s

10 410 s

20 620 s

30 930 s

This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads whose power drawn with the electromagnet closed is less than 72 VA.
Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors and relays. Category AC-15 (2)

This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads whose power drawn with the electromagnet closed is greater than 72 VA.
Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors.

Utilisation categories for d.c. applications


Category DC-13 (3)

This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads for which the time taken to reach 95 % of the steady state current (T = 0.95) is equal to 6 times the power P drawn by the load (with P y 50 W). Application example: switching the operating coil of contactor breakers.
(1) Ir = protection module setting current. (2) Replaces category AC-11. (3) Replaces category DC-11. References: pages 1/162 to 1/173 Dimensions, schemes: pages 1/176 to 1/179

1/147

Equipment selection for starters

Motor starters - open version


integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
General : pages 1/142 to 1/147 References: pages 1/162 to 1/173

When designing an installation, it is essential to take into account precise criteria for determining the conductor c.s.a. and selecting equipment. In particular: b permissible currents for the conductors, b maximum voltage drops, b short-circuit protection, b protection against indirect contact. The latter three criteria must be taken into account when selecting the integral unit. The principle behind the rules described below is, on the whole, common to all European publications. However, the calculations and values concerning protection against indirect contact are based on French standard NF C 15-100, and it is up to the user to check the regulations in force in the country concerned. To achieve this, the thermal setting value Irth selected must be greater than the current drawn IB and less than or equal to the permissible current Iz in the cable to be protected. IB < Irth y Iz Breaking capacity rule Check that the breaking capacity (BC) of the integral unit is equal to or greater than the prospective short-circuit current (Isc max) at the point where it is to be installed. BC u Isc max Breaking time rule 2 conditions must be fulfilled: b The short-circuit current at the end of the circuit, Isc min, must be greater than or equal to the minimum current required for magnetic tripping of the device, b The short-circuit current at the start of the circuit, Isc max, must be such that: I2oto = permissible thermal stress limit for the circuit, I2sc max tm y I2oto tm = operating time of the integral unit or of the short-circuit protection device. These 2 checks need only be made when modules with a low rating are used. Example: for a 6.3/10 A module, a cable c.s.a. u 2.5 mm2 is required to withstand Isc max = 50 kA. TN multiple earthed neutral scheme
A

Cable protection against overload

Short-circuit protection

Protection against indirect contact in TN schemes

PEN

B'

C'

TNC scheme

b Neutral is connected to earth. b The earths are connected to neutral. b Any phase/earth insulation fault causes a short-circuit. b As contact voltage is dangerous, breaking must occur at the first fault. b The PE conductor and the neutral conductor may be: v combined (TNC scheme), v separate (TNS scheme).

Dimensions, schemes : pages 1/176 to 1/179

1/148

Equipment selection for starters

Motor starters - open version


integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers

Protection against indirect contact in TN schemes (continued) b Protection against indirect contact (TN schemes), for dead shorts only, requires that the following 2 conditions be fulfilled simultaneously: v The fault current Id must be greater than or equal to the minimum current required for magnetic tripping of the integral unit, i.e. 1.12 Irth max. c = coefficient taking into account the upstream part of the Uo Id = c.q.___ fault loop impedance assumed to be equal to 0.8, unless Zb otherwise indicated. q = coefficient dependent on the earth connection scheme and equal to 1 in the TN scheme. Uo = phase-neutral voltage in volts. Zb = fault loop impedance in mW/m such that: Zb R (fault loop resistance). L = length of the fault loop equal to twice the length Lc of the L Lc circuit. R = r __ = 2 r ___ S S S = Sph, c.s.a of the phase conductors = SPE = c.s.a. of the protective conductors. r = resistivity of the copper = 0.0225. = ratio between the magnetic tripping current and the maximum setting current of the instantaneous thermal tripping device.
v The contact voltage (UL) for a dead short is at most equal to the value determined by the safety curve for the operating time tm of the integral unit in its magnetic tripping zone. This condition is generally fulfilled for power supplies of 230/415 V. (In fact, for UL = 50 V, a tm y 500 ms would be required and for UL = 25 V, a tm y 110ms would be required). The first condition allows us to calculate the maximum length of the circuit to provide protection against indirect contact in the TN scheme. For the TN scheme: c.q.Uo.Sph L y __________ 2r.1. Irth 0.8 x Uo x Sph i.e. L max = _______________________ 2 x 0.0225 x 1.2 Irth max

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Maximum length of 230/415 V circuits with TN scheme


C.s.a. mm2 1.5 2.5 Irth max. A 10 16 10 16 25 32 16 25 32 40 25 32 40 50 32 40 50 63 32 40 50 63 32 40 50 63 =3 m 180 112 298 186 118 92 296 190 148 118 284 222 178 142 370 296 236 188 590 472 378 300 922 738 590 468 =6 m 90 56 149 93 59 46 148 95 74 59 142 111 89 71 185 148 118 94 295 236 189 150 461 369 295 234 = 12 m 45 28 75 47 32 23 74 48 37 30 71 56 45 36 93 74 59 47 148 118 95 75 281 185 148 117 = 15 m 36 22 60 37 60

10

16

25


General : pages 1/142 to 1/147 References: pages 1/162 to 1/173

Dimensions, schemes : pages 1/176 to 1/179

1/149

Selection according to utilisation category and required electrical durability

Motor starters - open version


integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers

Selection for a temperature q y 40 C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Rated operational voltage integral 63

220/240

400/415

440 63

480/525 63

600/690 63

Rated operational currents (according to the rated operational voltage)


A 63 63

Rated operational powers (for standard motors)


integral 63 kW 15 33 33 37 55

Electrical durability
Control and protection of motors at Ue y 415 V

b in utilisation categories AC2, AC3 conforming to IEC 60947-4-1, b in utilisation categories AC2, AC3 conforming to IEC 60947-6-2.
Millions of operating cycles 20

10 8 6 5 4 2 1,5 1 0,8 0,6 0,4 0,2 0,1 0,08 0,06 0,04 0,02 0,01 1 1,5

(63 A)

2 3 45 79 20 6 8 10

40 60 80 150 200 63 100160 300 Current broken in A

1 Not having previously broken a short-circuit current 2 Having broken a short-circuit current 10 times at 30 Ie (most common values of short-circuit current during operation)

Current breaking limit

AC-3 AC-43

AC-2 AC-42

9 10
General : pages 1/142 to 1/147 References: pages 1/162 to 1/173 Dimensions, schemes : pages 1/176 to 1/179

1/150

Selection according to utilisation category and required electrical durability

Motor starters - open version


integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers

a.c. supply, utilisation categories AC-1, AC-3, AC-41, AC-43


Rated operational currents (according to ambient temperature)
integral 63 With cable c.s.a. 16 mm2 A q y 40 C 63 q y 55 C 55 q y 70 C 50

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

a.c. supply, utilisation categories AC-1, AC-41


Maximum operating rates in operating cycles/hour
On-load factor 85 % Operation at Ie max 1200 On-load factor 25 % Operation at Ie max 1800

integral 63

Operating cycles/h

Operation at 0.5 Ie 2400

Electrical durability Ue y 415 V


Millions of operating cycles 20

10 8 6 5 4 2 1,5 1 0,8 0,6 0,4 0,2 0,1 0,08 0,06 0,04 0,02 0,01 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20

(63 A)

63 80 100 60 Current broken in A

40

Note: for use in category AC-44, please consult your Regional Sales Office.

General : pages 1/142 to 1/147

References: pages 1/162 to 1/173

Dimensions, schemes : pages 1/176 to 1/179

1/151

Characteristics

Motor starters - open version

Contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers integral 63

Type

integral 63
A V 3 63 690 1.2 million operating cycles 5 million operating cycles 3600 operating cycles/hour 600 operating cycles/hour

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Number of poles Rated operational current (Ie) In AC-3 Rated operational voltage (Ue) In AC-3 at 400 V Electrical durability Mechanical durability at Uc a Maximum operating rate at ambient temperature y 55 C c with converter

Environment
Conforming to standards IEC: 158-1, 204-1, 204-2, 364, 947-1/2 and 4 UTE: NF C 63-110, C 63-120, C 63-130, C 63-650, C 79-100, C 20-040 VDE: 0100, 0110, 0113, 0170, 0171, 471, 0660 BS: 5424, 4752, 4941 NEN, NBN ASE, ASEFA, ASTA, BV, CSA, DEMKO, DNV, GL NEMKO, NKK, VE, RINA, SCC, SETI, UL, USSR, LROS TH - 20+ 60 - 40+ 80 - 25+ 50 - 25+ 70 Energised state: 3 gn De-energised state: 3 gn Energised state: 8 gn De-energised state: 8 gn IP 20B Protection against direct finger contact Conforming to IEC60295-2-1, NFC20-455 and decree of 22-12-81 (JO 27 NC of 1st and 2/2/1982) Conforming to UL 94 - V0 and NF T 51-072 3000 From main axis (left-right tilt)

Product certifications Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device a

Vibration resistance Permissible acceleration Shock resistance Permissible acceleration Degree of protection Flame resistance Maximum operating altitude Operating positions (without derating)

Operation Storage c Operation (1) Storage 5100 Hz

C C C C

Impulse duration: 11 ms Conforming to IEC 60144 & 60529 Conforming to VDE 0106

Without derating In relation to normal vertical mounting plane

Control circuit characteristics


Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Voltage limits at q y 55 C Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc a 50Hz a 60Hz c with converter Operation Drop-out a Inrush Sealed c (1) Inrush Sealed a 50/60 Hz c with converter C O C O V V V 24660 24600 24, 48, 110 0.851.1 Uc 0.250.7 Uc 375 (50 Hz), 450 (60 Hz) 25 (50 Hz or 60 Hz) 300 for 50 ms 8 8 (50 Hz), 11 (60 Hz) 1235 720 2540 1525

Heat dissipation Operating time (2) at 20 C and at Uc

VA VA W W W ms ms ms ms

(1) With converter. (2) The closing time C is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time O is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.

General : pages 1/142 to 1/147

Selection : pages 1/148 to 1/151

References : pages 1/162 to 1/173

Dimensions and schemes : pages 1/176 to 1/179

1/152

Characteristics

Motor starters - open version

Contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers integral 63

Type

Pole characteristics
Conventional thermal current (Ith) Frequency limits of the operational current Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Heat dissipation in the power circuits of the contactor breaker and its protection module Rated making capacity I rms I peak Rated breaking capacity conforming to IEC 60947-2

integral 63 q y 40 C A Hz 63 4060 8 690 25 4.4

1
32 5 40 5.8 50 7 63 9

Conforming to IEC 60947-4 kV Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V Operational current A W Power per pole, hot state Conforming to IEC 60947-4 A Conforming to IEC 60947-2 kA Operational voltage Value of cos j Cycle P1 (O-t-CO) Icu (1) Cycle P2 (O-t CO-t-CO) Ics (1) Icu = Ics V

2 3 4 5

12 or 15 x Ith (above this value. the breaker trips) 105 380/415 0.25 50 50 50 440 0.25 50 50 50 480/525 0.25 35 35 30 600/690 0.5 10 10 10

conforming to IEC 60947-6-2 ensuring reliability of operation Total breaking time Electrical durability in AC-3 at Ie max and at 415V after 1 cycle O-CO-r-CO at Isc Thermal limit Cabling

220/240 0.25 kA rms 50 kA rms 50 kA rms 50 ms kA 4 3 1 300 x 103 Maximum c.s.a. 1 x 50 or 2 x 35 2 x 25 1 x 50 6 LB1LD03P Standard motors NFC63-650 3 3 690 1363 10/1345/63 - 20+ 60 With

Prospective rms short-circuit current at terminals of a new device Millions of operating cycles With Isc max. at 415 V, 50 Hz Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Solid cable

10 0.9

25 0.6

35 0.5

50 0.2

A2s

mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m

Minimum c.s.a. 1x6 1x6 1x6

Tightening torque Module type Protection

Characteristics of thermal-magnetic or magnetic only protection modules


Conforming to standards Number of poles Number of protected poles Rated operational voltage Max. continuous current Setting range (Irth min./Irth max.) Temperature compensation Protection against phase imbalance Tripping class Instantaneous trip current setting range Tripping tolerance LB1LD03M Standard motors NFC63-650 3 3 690 1363 10/1345/63 20+ 60 With LB6LD03M Frequent starting NFC63-650 3 3 690 1363 20+ 60 Without LB1LD03L Distribution circuits NFC63-120 3 3 690 1363 10/1345/63 20+ 60 Without 36 Irth max 20 %

6 7 8 9 10

Thermal protection

V A A C

Magnetic protection conforming to IEC 60947-1/2/4/6-2

Characteristics of versions without control test function, with padlocking facility


Conforming to standards Rated operational voltage Mechanical durability Padlocking Conforming to standards Rated operational voltage Mechanical durability Padlocking V Operating cycles IEC 60947 690 10000 By 1, 2 or 3 padlocks, 8mm shank

20 20 Fixed at 15 Irth max 612 Irth max (usual 612 Irth max setting 910 Irth maxi) 20 % 20 % 20 %

Characteristics of versions with control test function and padlocking facility


Operating cycles IEC 60947, NFC63-130, VDE0660, VDE0113 V 690 10000 1, 2 or 3 padlocks, shank 8mm max and 5mm min. When flush mounting, interlocking of the enclosure or cabinet door is possible. (1) O: breaking short-circuit current (open), t: time CO: closing on short-circuit, breaking short-circuit current (closed-open)

General : pages 1/142 to 1/147

Selection : pages 1/148 to 1/151

References : pages 1/162 to 1/173

Dimensions and schemes : pages 1/176 to 1/179

1/153

Characteristics (continued)

Motor starters - open version


Add-on current limiter and auxiliary contacts

Contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers integral 63

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts LA1Lpp

1 2 3 4 5

Conventional thermal current (Ith) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Switching capacity Rated a category operational AC-15 (1) power Making capacity Rated c category operational DC-13 (2) power Making capacity Cabling

Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 With U u 17 V and I u 10 mA Voltage 1 million operating cycles 1.5 million operating cycles a category AC-15 Voltage 1 million operating cycles 1.5 million operating cycles c category DC-13

A V mVA V VA VA VA V W W W mm2

6 690 600 48 110/127 300 500 160 300 1500 3500 24 48 120 90 70 50 800 700 Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 2.5 Minimum c.s.a.: 2 x 1

220/240 600 330 6000 110 75 38 400

380/415 520 300 7500 220 68 33 260

440 500 280 7000 440 61 28 220

Isolating auxiliary contacts LA1LC03p


Conventional thermal current (Ith) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947 and NFC63-130 Cabling a.c. supply d.c. supply A V V mm2 6 690 125 Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 1.5 or 1 x 2.5

Signalling contacts LA1LC001


Conventional thermal current (Ith) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Operational power for 200 000 operating cycles a Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Voltage Resistive load Lamp load (3) Inductive load (4) Motor (5) Voltage Resistive load Lamp load (3) Inductive load (4) Motor (5) A V V VA VA VA VA V W W W W mm2 3 250 24 48 100 100 50 50 75 75 75 75 Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 2.5 Minimum c.s.a.: 2 x 1 110/127 600 90 875 160 110/125 50 6 50 6 220 750 125 500 200 200 50 7.5 50 7.5

6 7 8 9 10

Cabling

(1) Electrical durability on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current (cos j 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos j 0.4). (2) Electrical durability on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, the time constant increasing with the load. (3) Lamp load: peak current = 10 times the rated current. (4) Inductive load: cos j 0.4 for a.c. operation; time constant 7 ms for d.c. operation. (5) Motor: peak current = 6 times the rated current.

General : pages 1/142 to 1/147

Selection : pages 1/148 to 1/151

References : pages 1/162 to 1/173

Dimensions and schemes : pages 1/176 to 1/179

1/154

Characteristics

Motor starters - open version


Interface modules and converters

Contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers integral 63

Type Used for control of the integral 32 Ambient air temperature around the device Storage Operation Isolation Cabling Min. Max. Operating limits Protection Module or converter type

Interface modules By a programmable controller, with a.c. control of the electromagnet

Converters By a programmable controller, with d.c. control of the electromagnet Control on d.c. supply

1 2
080FD

C C kV mm2 mm2

- 25+ 70 - 25+ 50 rms voltage between inputs and outputs: 2.5 1x1 2 x 2.5 0.85...10.1 Uc Against reverse polarity (by diode) and against overvoltage LA1LC 580BD

- 25+ 70 - 25+ 50 Common negative terminal 1x1 2 x 2.5 0.8...1.1 Uc (2) Against reverse polarity (by diode) and against overvoltage LA1LC 080BD

Control circuit characteristics


Schemes

580ED

180BD

080ED

3
A1 A2

LA1LCp580pD

LA1Lp180BD
A1

LA1Lp080BD LA1Lp080ED
A1

LA1Lp080FD

+ E1
E2
Indication of input state Input signals Voltage (logic side) Current State 0 guaranteed State 1 guaranteed Supply voltage For U For I For U By LED c 48 c 24 (E1-E2) (E1-E2) 30 20 < 2.4 <2 > 20.4 < 4.8 <2 > 40.8

+ E1
E2

E1

A1 A2

(0V)

E1

A2

(0V) E3 A2 E2

E2

V mA V mA V V

c 524 c 24 (E1-E2) (E1-E2) 1524V 50 8.55V < 2.5 < 2.4 <2 <2 >4 > 20.4

c 48 (E1-E2) 25 < 4.8 <2 >4

c 524 c 24 (1) c 48 (1) (E1-E2) (E3-E2) (E3-E2) 1524V 20 10 8.55V < 2.5 <7 < 14 <2 <5 < 2.5 >4 > 14 > 28 c 48 (2) (E1-E2)

4 5 6

c 110 (2) (E1-E2)

c 24 (1) c 48 (1) (E3-E2) (E3-E2) 20 10 <7 <5 > 14 c 24 (2) (E1-E2) <14 < 2.5 > 28 c 48 (2) (E1-E2) c 110 (2) (E1-E2)

a a a a a a c 24240 24240 24240 24240 24240 24240 24 (2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (E1-E2)

Operating characteristics
VA VA W Sealed 50/60Hz VA c W ms Operating time Pull-in at 20 C Drop-out ms and at Uc Electrical durability in millions of operating cycles Average Inrush 50Hz consumption 60Hz c 5 160 185 12 1530 2235 160 185 12 1530 2235 160 185 12 1035 830 375 450 25 2040 2545 375 450 25 2040 2545 375 450 25 1045 830 1 250 4 30 15 250 4 30 15 250 4 30 15 300 8 35 20 300 8 35 20 300 8 35 20

7 8 9 10

(1) For direct control by external contact: connect E1-E3. (2) Warning: for supply from rectified a.c., the 2 following conditions must be met: the power supply must exceed 300 VA and the maximum ripple must be y14%.

General : pages 1/142 to 1/147

Selection : pages 1/148 to 1/151

References : pages 1/162 to 1/173

Dimensions and schemes : pages 1/176 to 1/179

1/155

Characteristics

Motor starters - open version

Contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers integral 63

Tripping and reset devices, coil suppressor module

Environment

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Conforming to standards Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device

Storage Operation Permissible for operation at Uc

C C C

IEC 60337-1 TH - 40+ 80 - 25+ 55 - 25+ 70 Conforming to VDE0106

Protection against direct finger contact

Tripping devices
Uc Uc Inrush Sealed LA1LC070p, LC072p 0.81.1 0.350.7 8 4 LA1LC071p 0.71.1 8 4 10

Type Pull-in voltage Drop-out voltage Average consumption Minimum pulse time

VA VA ms

Reset devices
Type Consumption Duration of a reset cycle Minimum pulse duration VA s s LA1LC052p 9 9 0.5

Suppressor module LA9D09982


Type of protection Connection scheme Operational voltage V RC (resistor-capacitor)

y 250

General : pages 1/142 to 1/147

Selection : pages 1/148 to 1/151

References : pages 1/162 to 1/173

Dimensions and schemes : pages 1/176 to 1/179

1/156

Characteristics

Motor starters - open version

Contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers integral 63

Breaking capacity of integral 63 contactor breakers, according to the operational voltage and protection module fitted.

Breaking capacity
Protection module Reference Irth min A 10 LBpLD03p16 LBpLD03p21 LBpLD03p22 LBpLD03p53 LBpLD03p55 LBpLD03p57 LBpLD03p61 13 18 23 28 35 45 Operational voltage 220/240V 400/415V 440V max A 13 18 25 32 40 50 63 kA kA kA 500V kA 600/690V kA 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

u130 u130 u130 u130 u130 u130 u130

u130 u130 u130 50 50 50 50

u130 u130 50

u130 u130

35 35 30 30 30

50 50 50 50

General : pages 1/142 to 1/147

Selection : pages 1/148 to 1/151

References : pages 1/162 to 1/173

Dimensions and schemes : pages 1/176 to 1/179

1/157

Selection of protection module according to the tripping characteristics

Motor starters - open version

Contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers integral 63

1 2 3 4

Motor protection (normal starting)


Time

By thermal-magnetic modules LB1 LD03P (1)


300 min 100 min 10 13 18

23 28 35 45 63 25 32 40 50 irth P16 P21 P22 P53 P55 P57 P61

10 min 40 s 1 min

10 s

1s 195 375 270 0,1 s 600 480 750 945

5 6 7 8

0,01 s 6 10 15 20 30 40 54 60 100 200 400 600 1000 2000 Current in A

By thermal-magnetic modules LB1 LD03M (1)


Time

300 min 100 min 10 13 18

23 28 35 45 63 25 32 40 50 irth M16 M21 M22 M53 M55 M57 M61

Thermal zone

10 min

1 min

10 s

Magnetic zone

1s

78

156 108 190

240 300 380

480 600 760

0,1 s

150 216

9
0,01 s 6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 600 1000 2000 Current in A

10
General : pages 1/142 to 1/147 Selection : pages 1/148 to 1/151

(1) Thermal protection: the average operating times shown in the above curves are for an ambient air temperature of 20 C, without prior current flow (cold state). The average operating times after prolonged current flow (hot state) can be calculated by applying the coefficient 0.5.

References : pages 1/162 to 1/173

Dimensions and schemes : pages 1/176 to 1/179

1/158

Selection of protection module according to the tripping characteristics

Motor starters - open version

Contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers integral 63

Motor protection (frequent starting)


By magnetic modules LB6 LD03M
Time

1 2 3
78 156 108 190 150 216 240 300 380 480 600 760

300 min 100 min

Thermal zone

10 min

1 min

10 s

Magnetic zone

1s

0,1 s

4
1000 2000
Current in A

0,01 s 6 10 20 40 60 80 100 110 200 400 600

Distribution circuit protection

5 6

By thermal-magnetic modules LB1 LD03L


Time

300 min 100 min

25 32 40 50 18 23 28 35 45 63 irth L22 L53 L55 L57 L61

10 min

7 8

1 min

10 s

1s

75

95

0,1 s

150 190 120 240 150 300 190 380

9
0,01 s 6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 600 1000 2000 Current in A

10
General : pages 1/142 to 1/147 Selection : pages 1/148 to 1/151 References : pages 1/162 to 1/173 Dimensions and schemes : pages 1/176 to 1/179

1/159

Selection of protection module according to the tripping characteristics

Motor starters - open version

Contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers integral 63

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
General : pages 1/142 to 1/147 Selection : pages 1/148 to 1/151

3-phase 400/415V, 50Hz Current limitation on short-circuit


Maximum peak current in kA

Current limitation and thermal limit on short-circuit

100 80 60 40
= 0, 3

0,

25

20
=

0,

1 (1)

10 8 6 4 3 2 1 0,8 0,6 0,4 0,2 0,1 0,1


c os =

0,

0,2

0,4 0,3

4 6 8 10 15 20 50 100 200 Prospective rms short-circuit current in kA

1 18 to 25A up to 45 to 63A

Maximum thermal limit on short-circuit


Thermal limit I2t in kA2s in the short-circuit protection zone

1000 800 600 400

200

(1)

100 80 60 40

20

10

8 10

15 20

50 100 200 Prospective rms short-circuit current in kA

1 18 to 25A up to 45 to 63A
(1) LB1LD03p22 to LD06p61: rating of associated thermal overload module.

References : pages 1/162 to 1/173

Dimensions and schemes : pages 1/176 to 1/179

1/160

Selection of protection module according to the tripping characteristics

Motor starters - open version


Contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers integral 63

3-phase 480/500V, 50Hz Current limitation on short-circuit


Maximum peak current in kA

Current limitation and thermal limit on short-circuit (continued)

1
= = 0, 3 0, 25

100 80 60 40 20
=

5 0,

1 (1)

2 3 4

10 8 6 4 3 2 1 0,8 0,6 0,4 0,2 0,1 0,1


c os

0,

0,2

0,4 0,3

6 8 10 15 20

35 50

100

200

Prospective rms short-circuit current in kA

1 18 to 25A up to 45 to 63A Current limitation on short-circuit


Thermal limit I2t in kA2s in the short-circuit protection zone

5 6
1 (1)

1000 800 600 400

200

100 80 60 40

7 8
1 2 4 6 8 10 15 20 35 50 100 200 Prospective rms short-circuit current in kA

20

10

1 18 to 25A up to 45 to 63A
(1) LB1LD03p22 to LD03p61: rating of associated thermal overload module.

9 10

General : pages 1/142 to 1/147

Selection : pages 1/148 to 1/151

References : pages 1/162 to 1/173

Dimensions and schemes : pages 1/176 to 1/179

1/161

References

Motor starters - open version


Contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers integral 63 for control and protection of motors
(for customer assembly)

1 2
LD1LD030p

Without control test function, with padlocking facility


Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60Hz in AC-43 220V 400V 240V 415V 440V 500V 660V kW kW kW kW kW Black knob 15 30 33 37 55 33

3-pole contactor breakers without protection module (1)


Operational Breaking Basic reference (3) current capacity (Iq) To be completed by adding the control circuit voltage code (2) for Ue y 415V A 63 kA 50 LD1LD030p Weight

kg 3.700

With control test function and padlocking facility


Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60Hz in AC-43 220V 400V 240V 415V 440V 500V 660V kW kW kW kW kW Black knob (CNOMO, VDE0113) 15 30 33 37 55 33 Operational Breaking Basic reference (3) current capacity (Iq) To be completed by adding the control circuit voltage code (2) for Ue y 415V A 63 kA 50 LD4LD130p Weight

3 4 5 6 7
LD5LC030p

kg 3.800

Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO) Emergency Stop 15 30 33 37 55 63 50 33

LD4LD030p

3.800

With control test function and padlocking facility


Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60Hz in AC-43 220V 400V 240V 415V 440V 500V 660V kW kW kW kW kW Black knob (CNOMO, VDE0113) 15 30 33 37 55 33

3-pole reversing contactor breakers without protection module (1)


Operational Breaking Basic reference (3) current capacity (Iq) To be completed by adding the control circuit voltage code (2) for Ue y 415V A 63 kA 50 LD5LD130p Weight

kg 7.600

Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO) Emergency Stop 15 30 33 37 55 63 50 33

LD5LD030p

7.600

(1) For the unit to function, it must be fitted with a protection module, to be ordered separately, see page opposite. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 24 36 42 48 110 120 220 230 240 380 415 440 480 500 400 50Hz B D E F M M U Q N N S 60Hz BC BD CC CE ED K FD FC LC MC MC UX Q

600 S

660 Y

8 9 10
General : pages 1/142 to 1/147

c (4)

(3) Variant: UL508 type E approved version (SPCD) at 347/600V; to order, add suffix H5 to the reference. Example: LD1LD030MH5. (4) For use on d.c., the unit is supplied with 1 or 2 converters, including coil suppression devices (2 converters for reversing contactor breakers).

Selection : pages 1/148 to 1/151

Characteristics : pages 1/152 to 1/161

Dimensions and schemes : pages 1/176 to 1/179

1/162

References

Motor starters - open version


Contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers integral 63 for control and protection of motors
(for customer assembly)

Thermal-magnetic protection modules (compensated and differential for normal starting motors) (1)
Fixed magnetic protection, set at 15 Irth max, for mounting on integral 63
Thermal Magnetic setting range protection (Irth min to Irth max) 600V 690V kW 10 15 18.5 22 33 45 55 Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-43 220V 400V 480V 240V 415V 440V 525V kW kW kW kW 5.5 7.5 3 5.5 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 9 11 15 22 25 33 9 11 15 22 25 33 11 15 18.5 25 33 40 Reference Weight

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

LB1LD03Mpp

A 1013 1318 1825 2332 2840 3550 4563

LB1LD03P16 LB1LD03P21 LB1LD03P22 LB1LD03P53 LB1LD03P55 LB1LD03P57 LB1LD03P61

kg 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780

Adjustable magnetic protection from 6 to 12 Irth max, for mounting on integral 63


Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-43 220V 400V 480V 240V 415V 440V 525V kW kW kW kW 5.5 7.5 3 5.5 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 9 11 22 22 25 33 9 11 22 22 25 33 11 15 25 25 33 40 Thermal Magnetic setting range protection (Irth min to Irth max) 600V 690V kW 10 15 18.5 33 33 45 55 Reference Weight

A 1013 1318 1825 2332 2840 3550 4563

A 78156 108216 150300 190380 240480 300600 380760

LB1LD03M16 LB1LD03M21 LB1LD03M22 LB1LD03M53 LB1LD03M55 LB1LD03M57 LB1LD03M61

kg 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780

Magnetic only protection modules (for frequent starting motors)


Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-43 220V 400V 480V 240V 415V 440V 525V kW kW kW kW 5.5 7.5 3 5.5 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 9 11 22 22 25 33 9 11 22 22 25 33 11 15 25 25 33 40 Magnetic protection 600V 690V kW 10 15 18.5 33 33 45 55 Reference Weight

LB6LD03Mpp

A 78156 108216 150300 190380 240480 300600 380760

LB6LD03M16 LB6LD03M21 LB6LD03M22 LB6LD03M53 LB6LD03M55 LB6LD03M57 LB6LD03M61

kg 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780

8 9 10

(1) Protection modules UL and CSA approved.

General : pages 1/142 to 1/147

Selection : pages 1/148 to 1/151

Characteristics : pages 1/152 to 1/161

Dimensions and schemes : pages 1/176 to 1/179

1/163

Selection

Motor starters - open version


Contactor breakers integral 63
for control and protection of resistive circuits in category AC-1

Selecting the type of contactor breaker and protection module

1 2

Neutral point connection Neutral connection TNC (neutral and PE combined)

Type of circuit 3-pole + PEN

Equipment scheme

Combination contactor breaker + protection module LD1LD030p + LB1LD03Lpp LD4LD130p + LB1LD03Lpp LD4LD030p + LB1LD03Lpp

PEN

Note: the PEN conductor must not be isolated, Neutral point Type of connection circuit

Equipment scheme

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
General : pages 1/142 to 1/147

Neutral connection

TNS 3-pole (neutral and PE separated)

Combination contactor breaker + protection module LD1LC030p + LB1LC03Lpp LD4LC130p + LB1LC03Lpp LD4LC030p + LB1LC03Lpp

Note: all live conductors must be isolated. Neutral protection optional.

Selection : pages 1/148 to 1/151

Characteristics : pages 1/152 to 1/161

Dimensions and schemes : pages 1/176 to 1/179

1/164

References

Motor starters - open version


Contactor breakers integral 63
for control and protection of resistive circuits in category AC-1

Without control test function, with padlocking facility


Rated thermal current I th qy40C A Black knob 63 Maximum operational current AC-1 qy40C A 63

3-pole contactor breakers without protection module (1)


Maximum Breaking Number operational capacity (Iq) of poles voltage for Ue y 415V V kA 690 50 3 Basic reference. To be completed by adding the control voltage code (2) Weight

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

kg LD1LC030p 3.700

With control test function and padlocking facility


Maximum Rated Maximum operational thermal operational current I th current AC-1 voltage qy40C qy40C A A V Black knob (CNOMO. VDE0113) 63 63 690 Breaking Number capacity (Iq) of poles for Ue y 415V kA 50 3 Basic reference. To be completed by adding the control voltage code (2) Weight

kg LD4LD130p 3.800

LD1LD030p

Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO. VDE0113) Emergency Stop 63 63 690 50 3 LD4LD030p

3.800

Protection modules (for customer assembly)


Thermal-magnetic (compensated)
Thermal setting range (Irth min./Irth max.) A 1013 1318 1825 LB1LD03Lpp 2332 2840 3550 4563 Magnetic setting range (36 Irth max) A 3978 54108 75150 95190 120240 150300 190380 Number of poles Number of protected poles 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Reference Weight kg 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780

3 3 3 3 3 3 3

LB1LD03L16 LB1LD03L21 LB1LD03L22 LB1LD03L53 LB1LD03L55 LB1LD03L57 LB1LD03L61

(1) For the unit to function, it must be fitted with a protection module, to be ordered separately. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 24 36 42 48 110 120 220 230 240 380 415 440 400 50Hz B D E F M M U Q N N 60Hz BC CC CE K FC LC MC MC UX c (3) BD ED FD (3) For use on d.c., the unit is supplied with a converter, including coil suppression device.

480 Q

500 S

600 S

660 Y

General : pages 1/142 to 1/147

Selection : pages 1/148 to 1/151

Characteristics : pages 1/152 to 1/161

Dimensions and schemes : pages 1/176 to 1/179

1/165

1 2
O AUT
TRIP. +

O O

3 4 5

T RESE

O AUT
TRIP. +

6 7 8 9
O AUT
TRIP. +

T RESE

O O

T RESE

10

1/166

References

Motor starters - open version


Contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers integral 63
Add-on blocks

Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks (IP20) (1)


For use on Type and number of blocks per unit Composition Reference Weight kg

1 2

N/O N/C C/O LD1, LD4 1 block of 6 contacts comprising: b 3 signalling contacts or LD5 contactor state Mounted on RH side b 1 signalling contact control knob in any position other than Auto b 1 signalling contact tripped on short-circuit b 1 signalling contact tripped 1 block of 5 contacts comprising: b 3 signalling contacts contactor state b 1 signalling contact tripped on short-circuit b 1 signalling contact tripped 1 block of 4 contacts comprising: b 3 signalling contacts contactor state b 1 signalling contact tripped, selectable by the user 1 block of 3 signalling contacts contactor state LD4 1 control circuit isolating block Mounted (1 or 2 blocks per unit) on LH side LD5 1 block of 3 signalling contacts Mounted contactor state on LH side 1 control circuit isolating block comprising 2 contacts 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LA1LC025 0.170 LA1LC012 0.220 LA1LC010 0.280

3 4

2 1

1 1

2 1 2 2

1 1

LA1LC020 LA1LC030 LA1LB021 LA1LC031

0.100 0.035 0.100 0.100

5 6 7 8 9 10

Signalling contact block (IP10) (1)


For use on LD1, LD4 or LD5 Type and number of blocks per unit 1 block comprising 1 signalling contact contactor state Mounted on LH or RH side Composition Reference Weight kg 0.035 N/O N/C C/O 1 LA1LC001

(1) UL and CSA approved.

General : pages 1/142 to 1/147

Selection : pages 1/148 to 1/151

Characteristics : pages 1/152 to 1/161

Dimensions and schemes : pages 1/176 to 1/179

1/167

1 2
AUTO
TRIP. +

Off O

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

RESE

1/168

References

Motor starters - open version


Contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers integral 63
Accessories

Electrical tripping and reset devices


For use on LD1, LD4 or LD5 fitted with an LA1LC010 or LA1LC012 block LD1, LD4 or LD5 fitted with an LA1LC010 or LA1LC012 add-on block Type and number of devices per unit 1 undervoltage trip Time delay 0.2s Instantaneous or 1 shunt trip 1 remote electrical reset device Instantaneous 24V 50/60Hz 42V 50Hz 48V 50/60Hz 100/127V 50/60Hz 200/240V 50/60Hz Basic reference. To be completed by adding the control voltage code (1) LA1LC070p LA1LC072p LA1LC071p LA1LC052B LA1LC052E LA1LC052F LA1LC052M Weight kg 0.150 0.150 0.150 0.320 0.320 0.320 0.320

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office). Volts 24 48 110 120 220/230 240 380/400 50Hz B E F M U Q F M M Q 60Hz B E F

415 N

440 N N

General : pages 1/142 to 1/147

Selection : pages 1/148 to 1/151

Characteristics : pages 1/152 to 1/161

Dimensions and schemes : pages 1/176 to 1/179

1/169

1 2
O AUT
TRIP. +

O O

3 4 5 6 7

T RESE

AUTO
TRIP. +

8 9 10

T RESE

AUTO
TRIP. +

Off O

RESE

1/170

References

Motor starters - open version


Accessories and spare parts

Contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers integral 63

Interface modules (1)


Mounting Type Control voltage c V 524 24 48 Operational voltage 50/60Hz V 24240 24240 24240 Reference Weight kg 0.110 0.110 0.110

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

On top of the integral unit

Solid state Relay output

LA1LD180BD LA1LD580BD LA1LD580ED

Replacement coils and voltage converters (1)


For c control circuit operation
Mounting For use on integral Operational voltage c (2) V 24 (4) Consumption Inrush Sealed W 300 W 8 Description Reference (3) Weight kg 0.300 0.150 0.300 0.150 0.300 0.150

On top of the integral unit

LDpLDpppBD

Coil Converter

LX1LD0249 LA1LD080BD LX1LD0489 LA1LD080ED LX1LD01109 LA1LD080FD

LDpLDpppED

48 (4)

300

Coil Converter

LDpLDpppFD

110

300

Coil Converter

Suppressor module
Mounting Type Operational voltage 50/60Hz V y 250 Reference Weight kg 0.010

Clip-on

RC circuit (Resistor-Capacitor) (5)

LA9D09982

(1) For reversing contactor breakers, order 2 interface modules or 2 voltage converters. (2) When used on rectified single-phase or 3-phase supply, the peak to peak ripple voltage must be equal to or less than 0.14 of the average voltage. Operating limits 0.8 to 1.1 Uc for an ambient temperature y 40 C. (3) It is essential that the voltage converter be associated with the specific coil indicated. (4) 24 V and 48 V converters can be operated by Low level input. In this case, the control circuit voltage must be the same as the supply voltage (24 or 48 V). (5) An RC circuit provides effective protection for circuits highly sensitive to high frequency interference. Voltage limited to 3 Uc max. and oscillating frequency limited to 400 Hz max. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.2 to 2 times the normal time).

General : pages 1/142 to 1/147

Selection : pages 1/148 to 1/151

Characteristics : pages 1/152 to 1/161

Dimensions and schemes : pages 1/176 to 1/179

1/171

References

Motor starters - open version


Contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers integral 63
Accessories

Protection accessories

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
General : pages 1/142 to 1/147 Selection : pages 1/148 to 1/151

Description Power terminal protection shroud Sealing cover

For use on Upstream power terminals (L1, L2, L3) Protection module

Sold in lots of 5 1

Unit reference LA9LD701 LA1LC090

Weight kg 0.050 0.010

Mounting accessories
Description LA1LC090 Mounting plate For use on LD1, LD4, LD5 Mounting on 1 x 75 mm 7 rail or 2 x 32 mm 4 rails Reference LA9LD010 Weight kg 0.450

Door interlock mechanisms (IP54)


Type Adjustable from 0 to 185mm with extension (control knob mounted on plate or door) For use on LD1 Colour of knob Red Black LD4, LD5 Red Black Unit reference LA9LC330 LA9LC331 LA9LC530 LA9LC531 Weight kg 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400

LA9LD010

Characteristics : pages 1/152 to 1/161

Dimensions and schemes : pages 1/176 to 1/179

1/172

References

Motor starters - open version


Contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers integral 63
Coils (replacement parts)

a.c. operation
Rated control circuit voltages Uc 50Hz Uc 60Hz V V 24 24 42 48 LX1LDppp 110 127 220/230 240 380/400 415/440 500 660 36 48 110 115/120 220 230/240 440 460/480 575/600 Inductance Voltage Average code (1) resistance at of closed 20 C 10% circuit W 0.213 0.323 0.503 0.845 0.987 1.26 4.88 5.89 6.48 9.80 19.82 23.24 30.51 37.66 80.46 93.63 116.46 152.18 290.80 H 0.045 0.071 0.106 0.19 0.22 0.29 1 1.18 1.48 2.13 4.2 4.5 6.7 7.9 16.7 20 23.7 31 60 BC B CC CE D E K FC F G LC MC M U UX Q N S Y Reference Weight

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

LX1LD020 LX1LD024 LX1LD030 LX1LD040 LX1LD042 LX1LD048 LX1LD090 LX1LD100 LX1LD110 LX1LD127 LX1LD180 LX1LD190 LX1LD220 LX1LD240 LX1LD360 LX1LD380 LX1LD415 LX1LD500 LX1LD660

kg 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300

Consumption at 50Hz: inrush (cos j: 0.55) 350 to 400VA; sealed (cos j: 0.28) 20 to 30VA. Consumption at 60Hz: inrush (cos j: 0.55) 420 to 500VA; sealed (cos j: 0.30) 24 to 36VA.

d.c. operation
The integral63 can operate on a d.c. supply when fitted with a special coil and corresponding voltage converter: see page 1/171. (1) Coil voltage reference code, used to complete the basic reference when ordering an integral unit.

General : pages 1/142 to 1/147

Selection : pages 1/148 to 1/151

Characteristics : pages 1/152 to 1/161

Dimensions and schemes : pages 1/176 to 1/179

1/173

Operation

Motor starters - open version


Contactor breakers integral 63
Auxiliary contact states according to the positions of the control knob

1/L1

3/L2

5/L3

1/L1

3/L2

5/L3

LD1

LD4

A1

A2

A1

A2

1 2

Auxiliary contact actuators


Auto

+0
U U U

LA1 LC010
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3

Auxiliary contacts
LA1 LC012 LA1 LC025 LA1 LC001
98 41

LA1 LC020
13 23 31 14 24 32
13 23 31 14 24 32

LA1 LC030
(53) 63 (54) 64
53 54 53 54 53 54 53 54 53 54 53 54 53 54 53 54 53 54

08

13 23 31

16 18

06 08

96 98

13 23 31

98

13 23 31

Contact open Contact closed

96

ou
05 14 24 32 15 95 14 24 32 95 05 14 24 32 95

LD1

3 4

Off + control test function

LD4
13 23 31 14 24 32 16 18 15 0608 05 96 98 95 13 23 31 14 24 32 08 05 98 95 13 23 31 14 24 32 96 98 95 95 41 42

Off
13 23 31 14 24 32 16 18 15 0608 05 96 98 95 13 23 31 14 24 32 08 05 98 95 13 23 31 14 24 32 96 98 95 95 41 42 13 23 31 14 24 32

On, contactor open


AUTO AUTO

13 23 31 14 24 32

16 18 15

0608 05

96 98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

08 05

98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

96 98 95 95

95

42

41 42

13 23 31 14 24 32

5
On, contactor closed
AUTO AUTO

13 23 31 14 24 32

16 18 15

0608 05

96 98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

08 05

98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

96 98 95 95

41 42

13 23 31 14 24 32

6 7 8 9 10

Off after overload


TRIP. + TRIP. +

13 23 31 14 24 32

16 18 15

0608 05

96 98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

08 05

98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

96 98 95 95

41 42

13 23 31 14 24 32

Tripped on overload
TRIP. + TRIP. +

13 23 31 14 24 32

16 18 15

0608 05

96 98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

08 05

98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

96 98 95 95

41 42

13 23 31 14 24 32

Tripped on short-circuit
TRIP. + TRIP. +

13 23 31 14 24 32

16 18 15

0608 05

96 98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

08 05

98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

96 98 95 95

41 42

13 23 31 14 24 32

Off after short-circuit


TRIP. + TRIP. +

13 23 31 14 24 32

16 18 15

0608 05

96 98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

08 05

98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

96 98 95 95

41 42

13 23 31 14 24 32

Manual reset
TRIP. + TRIP. +

13 23 31 14 24 32

16 18 15

0608 05

96 98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

08 05

98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

96 98 95 95

41 42

13 23 31 14 24 32

RESET

RESET


General : pages 1/142 to 1/147 Characteristics : pages 1/148 to 1/161 References : pages 1/162 to 1/173 Dimensions : pages 1/176 and 1/177

1/174

Operation

Motor starters - open version


Auxiliary contact states according to the positions of the control knob

Reversing contactor breakers integral 63

1/L1

3/L2

5/L3

LD5

Auxiliary contact actuators


Auto

+0
U U U

ou

1
LA1 LC021
13 23 31

A1

A2

A2

A1

LA1 LC010

Auxiliary contacts
LA1 LC012 LA1 LC025 LA1 LC020
98 13 23 31

LA1 LC001
41

LA1 LC031
53 63

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

13 23 31

96 98

13 23 31

06 08

13 23 31

16 18

08

2/T1

4/T2

6/T3

98

96 95

14 24 32

14 24 32

95

14 24 32

95

14 24 32

05

42

14 24 32
13 23 31 14 24 32 13 23 31 14 24 32 13 23 31 14 24 32 13 23 31 14 24 32 13 23 31 14 24 32 13 23 31 14 24 32 13 23 31 14 24 32 13 23 31 14 24 32

05

Contact closed Off + control test function

15

95

13 23 31 14 24 32

16 18 15

06 08 05

96 98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

08 05

98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

96 95

98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

41 42

Off
13 23 31 14 24 32 16 18 15 06 08 05 96 98 95 13 23 31 14 24 32 08 05 98 95 13 23 31 14 24 32 96 95 98 95 13 23 31 14 24 32 41 42 53 63 54 64

On, reversing contactor open


AUTO

13 23 31 14 24 32

16 18 15

06 08 05

96 98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

08 05

98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

96 95

98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

41 42

On, closed
AUTO

13 23 31 14 24 32

16 18 15

06 08 05

96 98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

08 05

98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

96 95

98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

41 42

On, closed
AUTO

13 23 31 14 24 32

16 18 15

06 08 05

96 98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

08 05

98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

96 95

98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

41 42

Tripped on overload
TRIP. +

13 23 31 14 24 32

16 18 15

06 08 05

96 98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

08 05

98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

96 95

98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

41 42

Off after overload


TRIP. +

13 23 31 14 24 32

16 18 15

06 08 05

96 98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

08 05

98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

96 95

98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

41 42

Tripped on short-circuit TRIP. +

13 23 31 14 24 32

16 18 15

06 08 05

96 98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

08 05

98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

96 95

98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

41 42

Off after short-circuit TRIP. +

54 64
53 63 54 64 53 63 54 64 53 63 54 64 53 63 54 64 53 63 54 64 53 63 54 64 53 63 54 64

Contact open

ou

13 23 31 14 24 32

16 18 15

06 08 05

96 98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

08 05

98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

96 95

98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

41 42

13 23 31 14 24 32

53 63 54 64

9 10

Manual reset
TRIP. +

13 23 31 14 24 32

16 18 15

06 08 05

96 98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

08 05

98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

96 95

98 95

13 23 31 14 24 32

41 42

13 23 31 14 24 32

53 63 54 64

RESET


General : pages 1/142 to 1/147 Characteristics : pages 1/148 to 1/161 References : pages 1/162 to 1/173 Dimensions : pages 1/176 and 1/177

1/175

Dimensions, mounting

Motor starters - open version


Integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers

Contactor breakers integral63

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Control circuit: a.c. LDpLDp30 + LBpLD03

Control circuit: d.c. LDpLDp30 + LBpLD03 + LA1LD080 LA1 LD080

121,5

243

45 210

128,5

250

121,5

100,5

121,5

16,5

158,5 192

= 90

= 90

Reversing contactor breakers integral63


LD5LDp30 + LBpLD03M

Current limiter
LA9LB920
2M4

153,5

129,5

146

275

121,5

210

45

100,5

6 53,5

51

160,5 194

59

63 181

59

Add-on blocks
For mounting on contactor breakers integral 63 LA1LC012 LA1LC001 LA1LC010 LA1LC07p LA1 LC010 LA1 LC001 LA1 LC012 13 11 LA1 LC070 LA1 LC071 LA1 LC072 26 51 12 9 9 12 LA1LC052 LA1LC020 LA1LC030 (1 ou 2) LA1LC025 LALC001

16,5

148

45

103 115

16,5

146

= 28 =

146 158,5 192

= 28 =

100,5

45 210

104,5

97,5

LA1 LC001 LA1 LC025 11

8 9 10

For mounting on reversing contactor breakers integral 63 LA1LC021, LC025 LA1LC001


LA1 LC001 LA1 LC021 LA1 LC025 LA1 LC031 LA1 LC021

LA1LC031

LA1LC012 LA1LC001 LA1 LC001 LA1 LC012

LA1LC010 LA1LC07pp

LA1LC052p

LA1LC020

LA1 LC010 LA1 LC070 LA1 LC071 LA1 LC072


13 11 12 26

13

11

26

51

12

General: pages 1/142 to 1/147

References: pages 1/162 to 1/173

Schemes: pages 1/178 and 1/179

1/176

Mounting (continued)

Motor starters - open version


Integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers

Mounting
On 75 mm 6 rail, with mounting plate LA9LD010
137,5

On 32 mm 4 rails, at 220 mm centres

On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1P

1 2 3 4

266

220

210

128,5

DZ5 ME9

33

G 75

4xM5

15

AF1 EA5

a LD1 LD4 LD5 266 266 282

b 137,5 137,5 153,5

c 192 192 194

G 28 28 63 LD1 LD4 LD5

c 192 192 194

G 28 28 63 LD1 LD4 LD5

c 192 192 194

G 28 28 63

With mounting plate LA9LD010 SOn 32 mm 4 rails, at 120 mm centres


LA9 LD010 DZ5 ME5 G

120

110

c
40

G 78 78 94

68

LD1 LD4 LD5

192 192 194

210

LA9 LD010

210

31

5
Minimum electrical clearance

Flush mounting (contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers)

4 (1) a (3) LD1 LD030 LD4 LDp30 LD5 LDp30 LA1 LC010 LA1 LC012 a 90 90 181 a1 13 13 a2 51 51

6 7

==

46

a1 a2

1 (2)

LA1 LC012 + LA1 LC052p (1) Maximum door thickness for interlocking by LD4 and LD5. (2) Centre of operating handle. (3) Fixing centre.

30

LA1 LC010 + LA1 LC052p

30

Adjustable door interlock mechanisms LA9 LC33p and LA9 LC53p


For mounting on LD4 LDp30 and LD5 LDp30 Door drillings

8 9 10

105

105

275

105

243

105

105

= = 54

54

207357 (LD4) 209359 (LD5)

= 28 = = 90 = 59 63 181

45 59

General: pages 1/142 to 1/147

References: pages 1/162 to 1/173

Schemes: pages 1/178 and 1/179

= = 54

65

1/177

Schemes

Motor starters - open version


Integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers

Contactor breakers integral 63 with protection module LBp

1 2 3

Reversing contactor breakers integral 63 with protection module LBp


LD5 LDp30 + LB1 LD03M ou LD03P
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 6/T3 6/T3 LA1 LC001 41 42 95 96 32 31 A2 2/T1 2/T1 LA1 LC025 13 23 14 95 98 24 4/T2 4/T2 A1
5/L3

LD1 LD030 + LB1 LD03p


1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

LD4 LDp30 + LB1 LD03p


1/L1 3/L2

A1

A2

A1

A2

Q1

Q1

2/T1

4/T2

6/T3

2/T1

4/T2

2/T1

4/T2

5 6 7 8 9 10

Add-on blocks
For contactor breakers LD4 Mounted on LH side
LA1 LC030 (64) (63) 54 53 53 Isolator

6/T3

LB6 LD03M

6/T3

LB6 LD03M

For contactor breakers LD1 or LD4 and reversing contactor breakers LD5 Mounted on RH side
Breaker LA1 LC010 13 23 31 LA1 LC012 13 23 31 LA1 LC020 13 23 31 32

14

24

32

14

14

24

54

96

98

06

08

For reversing contactor breakers LD5 Mounted on LH side

16

41

13

23

31

Control knob position

42

14

24

LA1 LC031 53 63

54

General: pages 1/142 to 1/147

64

32

Isolator

References: pages 1/162 to 1/173

Dimensions, mounting: pages 1/176 and 1/177

1/178

15

18

LA1 LC001

LA1 LC021

Auto

+0

05

05

08

Short-circuit signalling

95

95

98

1 or 2 LA1LC030

Trip signallingt

32

24

A2

A1

Schemes (continued)

Motor starters - open version


Integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers

Tripping devices (1) for LD1, LD4, LD5


LA1 LC071
C1

Remote electrical reset devices (1) for LD1 to LD5


LA1 LC052p

LA1 LC070, LC072


D1

U< C2 D2

TRIP + Triping device RESET


B4 B2 B3

Reset device
M B1

The use of instantaneous auxiliary contact block LA1LC020 prevents the use of tripping devices or electrical reset devices

1 2 3

(1) For contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers already fitted with an LA1 LC010 or LA1 LC012 instantaneous auxiliary contact block.

Interface modules
LA1 LD180
A1

LA1 LD580
A1

+ E1
E2
A2

+ E1
E2
A2

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Voltage converter LA1 LD080 (supply with contactor breakers for c control circuit operation)
Switching by control contact 24 or 48 V Switching by Low level input 24 or 48 V
E1 E3 E2 A2

Supply

+
(0V)

A1

+
(0V)

E1

A1

E2

A2

Low level input

General: pages 1/142 to 1/147

References: pages 1/162 to 1/173

Dimensions, mounting: pages 1/176 and 1/177

1/179

1
2

2 6 1 7

DB400244

2 3 4 5

60 mm

6 7 8 9
5

DB400245

60 mm

1 6

10
4
1/180

Description

TeSys starters and bare devices


Plates for mounting on 60 mm busbar

DB400246

The TeSys mounting plate system for busbars simplifies the installation of motor feeder components used in your electrical installations. Power distribution is performed by a busbar. The mounting plates are fitted directly on this busbar, by snap-on mounting, thus implementing electrical connection. This system offers numerous benefits: b space saving in cabinets b fast, safe and reliable electrical and mechanical connection b easy connection b protection for users against electric shocks by direct contacts (IP20) by using covers b equipment flexibility and modularity b increased equipment availability: easier maintenance b power supply without drilling (connectors) from 1.5 to 120 mm2. The 3P and 4P busbar The busbar interaxis is 60 mm. Depending on the cross section of the bars, the busbar can withstand a maximum current of 630 A. Note: The bars forming the busbar are not part of the TeSys LA9Z offer. They are not supplied by us. Their selection depends on the maximum current needed for your installation (see next page). Support for 3P and 4P busbar (1) These are available in 2 versions: three-pole and four-pole. For applications having to comply with the UL standard, use the LA9ZX01508 support (3P only). The mounting plates (2) These allow mounting of the power feeder components consisting of: b a GV2 motor circuit breaker, mounted alone or in conjunction with a TeSys K or TeSys D contactor b a GV3 motor circuit breaker, mounted alone or in conjunction with a TeSys D contactor b a TeSys U starter-controller b a TeSys GV7 motor circuit breaker b an LD63 integral contactor-circuit breaker b a NSX100-250 or NSX400-630 A circuit breaker. Accessories Accessories complete the offer: b covers (3) for 5 and 10 mm bars b end covers (4) b a base plate (5) b 1P connectors (6) b 3P connectors on mounting plate (7) b a spring terminal 3P connection module (8).

Description

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

DB400247

Installation examples.

1/181

Curves

TeSys starters and bare devices


Plates for mounting on busbars
Short-circuit withstand capability

Determining the spacing between busbar supports (1)


Peak current Ipk (kA)

1 2 3

DB401392

Spacing between busbar supports (mm)

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

(1) Depending on the short-circuit current.

1/182

Curves

TeSys starters and bare devices


Plates for mounting on busbars
Short-circuit withstand capability

Load resistance of busbar assemblies


For an ambient temperature of 35 C and a busbar temperature of 65 C Cross section Permissible current mm2 A 12 x 5 200 15 x 5 250 20 x 5 320 25 x 5 400 30 x 5 450 12 x 10 360 20 x 10 520 30 x 10 630

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

In the event of changes in climatic conditions, the following curve indicates the correction factor K2 to be applied.
Factor K2 2,2
2,1 2,0 1,9 1,8 1,7 1,6 1,5 1,4 1,3 1,2 1,1 1,0 0,9 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 Busbar temperature (C) C 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65

Example: In normal operating conditions, a tinned busbar of 30 x 10 can permanently withstand 630 A. For a load of 800 A, the correction factor K2 to be applied will be 1.3 ( 800 A ). As a result, the temperature rise in the busbars will reach 82.5 C. 630 A

Ambient temperature

DF569559

1/183

References

TeSys starters and bare devices


Busbar support

DB400390

DB400258

IEC busbar supports and accessories

1 2

Sale Unit in ind. reference Q. 10 10 10 10 LA9ZX01495 LA9ZX01573 LA9ZX01485 LA9ZX01131

3-pole 4-pole

For 12, 15, 20, 25, 30 x 5/10 mm2 busbars End covers for 3-pole busbar support For 12, 15, 20, 25, 30 x 5/10 mm2 busbars End covers for 4-pole busbar support (5 left, 5 right)

LA9ZX01573
DB400239 DB400242

LA9ZX01495

3 4
LA9ZX01131
DB400390

UL busbar supports and accessories

Sale Unit in ind. reference Q. 10 2 10 LA9ZX01508 LA9ZX01515 LA9ZX01573

3-pole

For 12, 20, 30 x 5/10 mm busbars Base plate 240 x 700 End covers for busbar support

LA9ZX01485
DB400241

5 6

Other accessories

Sale Unit in ind. reference Q. 10 10 LA9ZX01244 LA9ZX01245

Covers, length 1 m For 12-30 x 5 mm2 busbars For 12-30 x 10 mm2 busbars LA9ZX01573 LA9ZX01508

7
Conformity with

General characteristics
C Hz mm A C K V V mm kA A2s mm

IEC 61439-2, UL508 IP20 with cover LA9ZX01244 or LA9ZX01245 120 50/60 12 x 5 200 35 1 690 LA9ZX01508 (UL) 12 x 5 35 1 x 108 4x6 12 x 10 35 4 x 108 LA9ZX01495 and LA9ZX01485 (IEC) 12 x 5 30 1 x 108 4x5 12 x 10 35 11 x 108 20 x 10 35 11 x 108 30 x 5 45 30 x 10 55 15 x 5 250 45 0.75 20 x 5 320 50 0.65 25 x 5 400 60 0.35 30 x 5 450 60 0.35 12 x 10 360 40 0.9 20 x 10 520 55 0.55 30 x 10 630 60 0.35

8 9 10

Degree of protection Thermal resistance Rated current frequency Rated operating current Depending on type of busbars and at 35 C K-factor to be applied depending on ambient temperature

Rated insulation voltage Rated operating voltage Peak permissible rated current With busbar support Bar dimensions Rated current

690 as per IEC 60947-1 and NF C 20-040

Maximum thermal stress Support fastening by screws

6.2 x 108 24.8 x 108

1/184

References

TeSys starters and bare devices


Choice of mounting plates

DB400234

DB400235

For TeSys GV2 motor circuit breakers


Operating current AC-3 440 V 25 A 32 A Protection by motor circuit breaker GV2ME GV2P GV2LE GV2ME GV2P GV2LE GV2ME GV2P GV2LE GV2ME GV2P GV2LE For contactor

Mounting Sale Unit plate Ixh in ind. reference Q. 45 x 200 45 x 200 4 4 LA9ZA32621 LA9ZA32434

Mounting plate, 1-way


LC1D LC1K LP4K06-K12 LC1D

1 2 3 4

LA9ZA32621
DB400233 DB400232

LA9ZA32434

Mounting plate, 2-way (3)


25 A 32 A LC1D LC1K LP4K06-K12 LC1D 90 x 200 90 x 200 2 2 LA9ZA32622 LA9ZA32623

LA9ZA32622
DB400237 DB400236

LA9ZA32623

TeSys U starter-controllers
Operating current AC-3 440 V 32 A Protection by power base

Mounting Sale Unit plate Ixh in ind. reference Q. 45 x 200 4 LA9ZA32427

Mounting plate, 1-way


LUB12, LUB32

5 6

Mounting plate, 2-way


32 A LA9ZA32427 LUB12, LUB32 45 x 260 4 LA9ZA32428

LA9ZA32428
DB400231 DB400230

Pour disjoncteurs-moteurs TeSys GV3


Operating current AC-3 440 V 63 A Protection by power base For contactor

Mounting Sale Unit plate Ixh in ind. reference Q. 54 x 200 54 x 260 4 4 LA9ZA32624 LA9ZA32625

Mounting plate, 1-way (1)


GV3P GV3P LA9ZA32624 LC1D40A65 A

7 8 9 10

Mounting plate, 2-way (1) (2)


63 A LA9ZA32625 GV3P LC1D40A65 A 117 x 260 4 LA9ZA32626

DB400229

(1) Contactor-circuit breaker combination without additional part. (2) Use the LAD 9R3 kit for the execution of changeover contactors. (3) Use the LAD 9R1 or LAD 9R1V kit for the execution of changeover contactors.

LA9ZA32626

Note: the mounting plate rails can be shifted vertically in 1.25 mm increments.

1/185

References

TeSys starters and bare devices


Choice of mounting plates

DB400228

For TeSys integral contactor-circuit breakers


Operating current AC-3 440 V 63 A Protection by contactor-circuit breaker Mounting plate Ixh

1 2

Sale in Unit ind. Q. reference

Mounting plate, 1-way


LD1, LD4LD 108 x 260 1 LA9ZA32627

For TeSys GV7 motor circuit breakers


LA9ZA32627

3 4 5
LV432623
DB4003887 DB400388

Operating current AC-3 440 V 80 A

Protection by contactor-circuit breaker

Mounting plate Ixh

Sale in Unit ind. Q. reference

Mounting plate, 1-way


GV7 104 x 190 1 LV429372

For Compact NSX circuit breakers


Operating current AC-3 440 V 100-250 A 400-630 A

Mounting plate Ixh

Sale in Unit ind. Q. reference 1 1 1 1 LV429372 LV429373 LV432623 LV432624

Mounting plate for 3P circuit breakers 104 x 190 Mounting plate for 4P circuit breakers 139 x 251 Mounting plate for 3P circuit breakers 139 x 270 Mounting plate for 4P circuit breakers 184 x 284

6 7 8

Characteristics of busbar mounting plates


Type of mounting plate LV432624 LA9ZA32621 LA9ZA32622

LA9ZA32427 LA9ZA32428 LA9ZA32434 LA9ZA32623

LA9ZA32624 LA9ZA32625 LA9ZA32626 LA9ZA32627

9 10

Degree of protection as per IEC 60529 Conductor cross section (colour: black) Type of conductor insulating material Permissible current Rated insulation voltage Peak rated current Maximum thermal stress

IP mm2 PVC A V kA A 2s

20 4 AWG 12 105 C 25 6 2 x 105 32 6 2 x 105 63 10 3 x 105 6 AWG 10 10 AWG 8

690 as per IEC 60947-1 and NF C 20-040

1/186

References

TeSys starters and bare devices


Terminals, connection module

DB400227

Terminals
One-pole for flat bars, 5 mm2 3P cover, width 84 mm

I max 270 A Capacity 4-35 mm2 400 A Capacity 16-70 mm2

Sale in ind. Q. 50 25 10

Unit reference LA9ZX01285 LA9ZX01287 LA9ZX01413

1 2

LA9ZX01285
DB400243

LA9ZX01287
DB400226

Terminals on mounting plate


I max 3P, on mounting plate + cover, for 12 x 5 to 30 x 10 busbars 440 A Capacity 35-120 mm2

Sale in ind. Q. 1

Unit reference LA9ZX01243

3 4

LA9ZX01243

DB400240

Connection module
3P, spring terminal connection + cover, for busbars of 12 x 5 to 30 x 10

I max 80 A Capacity 1.5-16 mm

Sale in ind. Q. 8

Unit reference LA9ZX01563

5 6

LA9ZX01563

Connection by connectors

LA9ZX01285 270 A maxi Min. Max. 35 35 35

LA9ZX01287 400 A maxi Min. 16 16 Max. 70 70

LA9ZX01243 440 A Min. 35 35 ... x 5-10 Max. 120 120

LA9ZX01563 4A Min. 1.5 1.5 1.5 ... x 5-10 80 A Max. 16 16 16

Flexible wire with end-piece Multi-strand wire Rigid wire Tightening torque

mm2 4 mm2 4 mm2 4 N.m

7 8 9 10

... x 5 Supplied without cover

... x 10 Supplied without cover

1/187

Selection guide

Installation system

TeSys Quickfit for motor starter components


Components with spring terminals

Functions

1 2 3 4

Assembly and connection of motor starter components with spring terminals, without using tools Power circuit pre-wiring components Control-command pre-wiring components for TeSys motor circuit-breakers GV2 ME

Product type

For contactors

TeSys D (9 to 25 A) Direct and reversing Limited to 60 A (Ith) Limited to 8 starters (1) 1 Direct Yes No Reversing Yes No

5 6 7 8 9 10

Type of starter Coil control Use with motor starters Number of motor starters Type of connection or bus Number of channels References Pages

LAD3p
1/195

LAD9AP3pp
1/197

(1) With TeSys circuit-breakers GV2ME and upstream terminal block LAD3B1.

1/188

Communication with the processing part Control-command pre-wiring components for TeSys motor circuit-breakers GV3P Splitter box Parallel interface module, with Advantys STB network interface module

1 2 3 4

TeSys D (40 to 65 A) Direct Yes Reversing Yes

8 starters per splitter box HE 10 16 inputs/12 outputs

4 starters per module Modbus Plus, Fipio, CANopen, Ethernet, TCP/IP, Profibus DP, INTERBUS, DeviceNet

5 6 7 8 9 10

LU9G02
1/197

STBEPI2145
1/197

1/189

Presentation

Installation system

TeSys Quickfit for motor starter components


Components with spring terminals

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Description : pages 1/192 and 1/193 Characteristics : pages 1/198 and 1/199

TeSys Quickfit is a modular system which standardises and simplifies setting up of motor starters with its pre-wired control and power circuits. Installation of a motor starter is therefore quick, simple, safe and flexible. In addition, this system: b enables the motor starter to be customised at a later date, b reduces maintenance time and b optimises panel space by reducing the number of terminals and intermediate interfaces and the amount of ducting.

System for motor starters with spring terminals


Motor starters with TeSys GV2 ME circuit-breakers

b From 0 to 18 A max., b TeSys GV2ME circuit-breakers combined with LC1D contactors from 9 to 25 A (spring terminal version), b Quickfit pre-wired power and control connections. Motor starters with TeSys GV3 P circuit-breakers b From 9 to 65 A max., b TeSys GV3 P circuit-breakers combined with LC1D contactors from 40 to 65 A (spring terminal version), b Quickfit pre-wired control connections only, b For pre-wired power connections, use busbar sets from the TeSys d 40 to 65 A contactor range (see page 5/85). This range comprises pre-wiring components for: b the power circuits, b the control circuits.
Power circuit pre-wiring components (motor starters with TeSys GV2 circuit-breakers only)

Motor starter with GV2 ME circuit-breakers

b a power circuit connection kit comprising, for each starter, a plate for mounting the contactor and the circuit-breaker and two power connection modules, b a power splitter box for 2 or 4 starters, b an upstream terminal block for a power supply up to 60 A (16mm2), b an outgoing terminal block for connection of the motor power supply cables and the earth cables (6 mm2). Note: with GV3 circuit-breakers, no accessories are required for pre-wiring of the power circuit. The GV3 Ppp outgoing terminal block can be removed. This circuit-breaker is also sold with only one terminal block (reference: GV3 Ppp1).
Control circuit pre-wiring components (motor starters with TeSys GV2 and GV3 circuit-breakers)

Motor starter with GV3P circuit-breakers

b a control circuit connection module which plugs directly into the contactor and the circuit-breaker on each starter. This module incorporates status and control data for this motor starter. b a parallel wiring module which concentrates the data of each motor starter: v HE10 connector, for centralised applications. Data is transmitted to the PLC via the Advantys Telefast pre-wired system. v STB, designed for decentralised automation architectures. This module is suitable for use in an Advantys STB configuration for connection to the PLC via a field bus.

References : pages 1/195 to 1/197

Dimensions : pages 1/200 and 1/201

Schemes : pages 1/202 and 1/203

1/190

Presentation (continued)

Installation system

TeSys Quickfit for motor starter components


Components with spring terminals

HE10 connection

Control/command

1
1 3

1 Automation platform 2 Connection cable TSXCDPpp or ABFH20pp 3 Splitter box LU9 G02

2 2
Connection on bus using Advantys STB (1) Configuration example (for motor starter applications only):
Power supply module Module STBPDT 3100 Connection base STBXBA 2200 Terminal block STBXTB 1130 Parallel interface module (2) Module STBEPI 2145 Connection base STB XBA 3000 Network interface module (3) CANopen STBNCO 1010 (4) Fipio STBNFP 2210 Ethernet TCP/IP STBNIP 2210 InterBus STBNIB 1010 (4) Profibus DP STBNDP 1010 (4) DeviceNet STBNDN1010 (4) Modbus Plus STBNMP 2210 Terminal block STBWTS 2120

2 3 4 5 6 7

4 Network interface module 5 Supply module 6 Parallel interface module

6 5 4 TeSys Quickfit LAD 9AP3 pp used with modules APP1Cpp

7 TeSys Quickfit module 8 Adapter plate APP2CX 9 Splitter box LU9G02 for 8 direct motor starters, with channel connections on the APP1C module side by two HE 10 connectors (20-way) and on theTeSys Quickfit side, by RJ45 connectors 10 Connection cable APP2AH40H060

9 10

8 9 10

The motor starter is connected to an APP1Cp module 7 using an adapter plate APP 2CX 8 and a connection cable APP2AH40H060 10. Information is available on the module for each motor starter: b 1 output: motor control, b 2 inputs: circuit-breaker status and contactor status.
(1) Please consult our catalogue "Advantys STB I/O. The open solution". (2) For 4 direct or 2 reversing motor starters. (3) Reference to be selected according to the network used. (4) Optimised version.

Description : pages 1/192 and 1/193

Characteristics : pages 1/198 and 1/199

References : pages 1/195 to 1/197

Dimensions : pages 1/200 and 1/201

Schemes : pages 1/202 and 1/203

1/191

Description

Installation system

TeSys Quickfit for motor starter components


Components with spring terminals

Power components
(only for motor starters with TeSys GV2 circuit-breakers) Power kits LAD 3p Each motor starter requires a power kit which consists of a plate 1 and two Quickfit technology power connection modules 2. The plate is used for mounting TeSys D contactors 3 (9 to 25 A, direct or reversing, with spring terminals and fitted with a.c. or d.c. coil) and the GV2ME circuit-breaker 4 only. This plate is mounted on two 35 mm 7 rails or is screwed onto a base plate. The two power connection modules 2a and 2b are identical, whatever the rating of the contactor up to 18 A. The upper power connection module 2a connects the power between the splitter box and the circuit-breaker. The lower power connection module 2b connects the power between the circuitbreaker and the contactor. Splitter boxes LAD 32p Splitter boxes 5 are available for 2 or 4 starters. They can be combined to create motor starters up to 60 A per power supply. A reversing starter occupies a width equivalent to that of 2 direct starters. Direct supply of power to the splitter boxes is possible up to 25 A (4 mm2). Upstream terminal block LAD 3B1 The upstream terminal block 6 performs two functions: b power supply up to 60 A (16 mm2), b power supply between two connected splitter boxes. The upstream terminal block connects to the splitter box using Quickfit technology. It is positioned on the splitter box or straddling two splitter boxes and takes up a width equivalent to two motor starters. Outgoing terminal block LAD 331 The outgoing terminal block 7 performs two functions: b connection of the motor power supply cables up to 6 mm2, b connection of the motor earth cables. In addition, the terminal block enables quick connection and disconnection for maintenance, avoiding the risk of phase reversal. The outgoing terminal block connects to the downstream spring terminals on the contactor, using Quickfit technology.

1 2
4

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Presentation: pages 1/190 and 1/191 Characteristics: pages 1/198 and 1/199

2a

2b 3

References: pages 1/195 to 1/197

Dimensions: pages 1/200 and 1/201

Schemes: pages 1/202 and 1/203

1/192

Description (continued)

Installation system

TeSys Quickfit for motor starter components


Components with spring terminals

Control circuit connection modules LAD 9 AP3 pp The control circuit connection module 1 plugs directly into the control terminals on the contactor and on the TeSys GV2 ME or TeSys GV3 P motor circuit-breaker, in the location provided for the front-mounting block. It is compatible with all contactor ratings up to 18 A for TeSys GV2ME and 65A for TeSys GV3P. Mechanical locking 2 of the system onto the top of the contactor ensures a perfect connection, whatever the operating conditions (vibrations, knocks, etc.). These modules are available in 4 versions: for direct or reversing starter, with or without contactor coil interface relay. The coil control can be a.c. or d.c., up to a 250 V and c 130 V. The version without relay is designed to control the contactor coils with no interface, at 24 V d.c. The version with relay has a connector for connecting the contactor power supply. Module LAD9AP3pp incorporates, in its lower part, several external connectors: 3 RJ45 connector, for connecting the automation system. 4 2-way connector, for connecting the contactor power supply (only on versions with relay). 5 2-way connector, for connecting an external contact in series with the contactor coil (supplied complete with shunt)
2 3 4 5

Control/command components

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Parallel wiring modules The parallel wiring system makes it possible to connect motor starters which incorporate TeSys Quickfit technology to the processing unit (PLC) quickly and without any need for tools. The parallel wiring module provides the status and command information for each motor starter. Control connection modules LAD9AP3pp are connected to the parallel wiring modules using RJ45 cables LU9Rpp 6, which are available in different lengths. The following information is available for each motor starter: b 2 inputs: circuit-breaker status and contactor status, b 1 output: contactor coil control. A direct motor starter uses one RJ45 channel. A reversing motor starter uses two RJ45 channels.
Note: for motor starters built using TeSys GV3 circuit-breakers and TeSysD contactors, the Quickfit pre-wired system allows the contactor to be mounted below the circuit-breaker or mounting of the two devices side by side. Parallel wiring module LU9 G02

This module 7 enables connection of up to 8 direct or 4 reversing motor starters directly to the I/O modules of PLCs. It is used with the Advantys Telefast pre-wiring system (1). This splitter box is optimised for use with card TSX DMZ28DTK.
Dedicated parallel interface module STBEPI2145 (2)

This module enables 4 direct or 2 reversing motor starters to be connected via the Advantys STB distributed I/O solution. With STB network interface modules, motor starters can be connected to the following communication networks: Modbus Plus, FIPIO, CANopen, Ethernet TCP/IP, ProfibusDP, INTERBUS and DeviceNet.
(1) Please consult our catalogue Power supplies, splitter boxes and interfaces. (2) Please consult our catalogue "Advantys STB I/O. The open solution".

Presentation: pages 1/190 and 1/191

Characteristics: pages 1/198 and 1/199

References: pages 1/195 to 1/197

Dimensions: pages 1/200 and 1/201

Schemes: pages 1/202 and 1/203

1/193

1
LAD 3B1

2
LAD 352 GV2 MEpp3

3 4
Power circuit pre-wiring components Direct starter

LC1 Dpp3

LAD 331

5 6 7 8
LC2 Dpp3

9 10

Power circuit pre-wiring components Reversing starter

1/194

References

Installation system

TeSys Quickfit for motor starter components


Components with spring terminals

Power circuit pre-wiring components (only for motor starters with TeSys GV2 circuit-breakers)
Description Maximum connection c.s.a. Application Sold in lots of Reference Upstream terminal block LAD3B1 Description Power splitter box, 60 A 16 mm2 (1) Extension by LAD32p Power supply of 1 or 2 power splitter boxes Number of starters 2 4 Description LAD 324 Composition 1 LAD3B1 Reference LAD 322 LAD 324 Reference

Weight kg 0.212

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Weight kg 0.120 0.240 Weight kg 0.078

Direct starter
Power connection kit 1 plate LAD 311 for GV2 ME and 2 power connection modules LAD341 LAD 352

Reversing starter
To build a reversing starter, order 2 kits LAD352 Description Outgoing terminal block Description Plate for mounting a GV2 ME circuit-breaker and a contactor Power connection module Maximum connection c.s.a. 6 mm2 Application Connection of motor cables No. of starters 1 1 Sold in lots of 10 Sold in lots of 10 10 Reference LAD 331 Unit reference LAD 311 LAD 341 Weight kg 0.050 Weight kg 0.042 0.018

LAD 352

(1) Cables with one end pre-crimped are available to allow fast connection. References: 1 set of 3 x 6 mm 2 cables (length 1 m: LAD 3B061, length 2 m: LAD 3B062 and length 3 m: LAD 3B063), 1 set of 3 x 10 mm2 cables (length 1 m: LAD 3B101, length 2 m: LAD 3B102 and length 3 m: LAD 3B103), 1 set of 3 x 16 mm2 cables (length 1 m: LAD 3B161, length 2 m: LAD 3B162 and length 3 m: LAD 3B163). LAD 331

Presentation: pages 1/190 and 1/191

Characteristics: pages 1/198 and 1/199

References: pages 1/195 to 1/197

Dimensions: pages 1/200 and 1/201

Schemes: pages 1/202 and 1/203

1/195

STB EPI 2145

LAD 32p

1
GV2 MEpp3

2
LC1 Dpp3 LC2 Dpp3

3 4 5 6
GV3 Ppp

LU9 G02 LAD 9AP3D1 LAD 9AP3D2

7
LC1 DppA3

LC2 DppA3

8 9 10
Note: Circuit-breakers TeSys GV3P and contactors LC1 D40A3 to D65A3 can be mounted side by side, using a set of S-shape busbars (GV3 S).

1/196

References (continued)

Installation system

TeSys Quickfit for motor starter components


Components with spring terminals

Control-command pre-wiring components


Description TeSys D coil voltage Control connection modules a 12... 250 V or c 5...130 V c 24 V

Type of coil control relay Electromechanical

Type of starter Direct Reversing

Reference LAD9AP31 LAD9AP32 LAD9AP3D1 LAD9AP3D2

Weight kg 0.150 0.200 0.140 0.190

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Without relay

Direct Reversing

Parallel wiring modules (c 24 V)


Description LAD 9AP3p Splitter box Description Advantys STB parallel interface module Connectors PLC side 2 x HE 10 20-way Connectors PLC side Motor starter side 4 x RJ45 Motor starter side 8 x RJ45

Reference LU9G02 Reference STBEPI2145

Weight kg 0.260 Weight kg 0.165

Connection cables
Connectors 2 x RJ45 connectors

Between the control connection module and the splitter box LU9G02 or STBEPI2145
Length m 0.3 1 3 LU9 R03 LU9 R10 LU9 R30 Reference Weight kg 0.045 0.065 0.125

Between splitter box LU9G02 and the PLC


Type of connection PLC side HE 10 20-way Splitter box side AWG HE 10 20-way 22 mm2 0.324 m 0.5 1 2 3 5 28 0.080 1 2 3 Bare wires HE 10 20-way 22 0.324 3 5 TSX CDP 053 TSX CDP 103 TSX CDP 203 TSX CDP 303 TSX CDP 503 ABFH20H100 ABFH20H200 ABFH20H300 TSX CDP 301 TSX CDP 501 kg 0.085 0.150 0.280 0.410 0.670 0.080 0.140 0.210 0.400 0.660 Gauge C.s.a. Length Reference Weight

Separate components
Description Spring terminal connections for: b the external contact b the auxiliary power supply Self-stripping connector for: b the external contact b the auxiliary power supply Connecting cable between module APP1Cp and splitter box LU9 G02 ( length: 0.6 m)

Characteristics 2-way, 5 mm pitch Wire c.s.a.: 0.22.5 mm 2-way, 5 mm pitch Wire c.s.a.: 0.75 mm Connectors: 1 x HE 10, 30-way 2 x HE 10, 20-way

Sold in lots of 10

Unit reference APE 1PRE21

Weight kg 0.020

16

APE 1PAD21

0.020

APP 2AH40H060

0.400

Presentation: pages 1/190 and 1/191

Characteristics: pages 1/198 and 1/199

References: pages 1/195 to 1/197

Dimensions: pages 1/200 and 1/201

Schemes: pages 1/202 and 1/203

1/197

Characteristics

Installation system

TeSys Quickfit for motor starter components


Components with spring terminals

Type of control connection module

1 2 3 4 5 6

General environment
Standard Certifications Degree of protection Resistance to incandescent wire Shock resistance Vibration resistance Resistance to electrostatic discharge Resistance to radiated fields Immunity to fast transient currents Surge withstand Immunity to radioelectric fields Ambient air temperature

LAD9AP3pp IEC 60439-1 UL, CSA IP 40 (mounted assembly) 960 11 ms and 15 gn (half sine wave) 2100 Hz : 4 and 3100 Hz: 0.7 Level 3 10 (261000 MHz) Level 3 2 in common mode, 0.6 in differential mode Wave form: 1.2/50 s - 8/20 s 10 (0.15...80 MHz) - 5+ 60 - 5+ 40 - 40+ 70 > 30 3 On 2 x 35 mm rails or with 2 x 5.5 mm screws on plate for GV2 ME 3 16 25 25 2 1.5 2.5 2.5

Conforming to IEC 60529 Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1

Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 gn and BV/LR Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-6 Operation in floor-standing enclosure Operation in wall-mounted enclosure Storage For inserting cables and heat dissipation V/m

kV V C C C mm

Space required around mounted assembly Degree of pollution Assembly fixing (with TeSys GV2 circuit-breakers only) Suitable wire c.s.a.

Voltage supply Number of wires for power Flexible cable with cable end Flexible cable without cable end Solid cable Voltage supply Number of wires for contactor Flexible cable coil control with cable end (max) Flexible cable without cable end (max) Solid cable (max)

mm mm mm mm mm mm

3-phase power circuit characteristics


Per power supply Per sub-base GV2 operating limit Maximum current per starter Insulation voltage Operational voltage U imp Rated operational frequency Rated short-circuit current conditional Isc at 415 V Permissible short-time rating Icw Maximum current Conforming to IEC 60439-1 Conforming to IEC 60439-1 A A A V V kV Hz kA kA 60 (single power supply to one or more sub-bases or splitter boxes) 60 80 % of Imax at 60 C ambient temperature (see table on opposite page) 18 (with an empty slot between two starters) 750 690 6 50-60 50 9.1 (for 70 ms)

7 8 9 10

Conforming to IEC 60439-1 Conforming to IEC 60439-1

Control circuit characteristics


V V V a 12250 (with interface relay) c 524 (without interface relay) c 5130 (with interface relay)

Contactor coil control voltage

Presentation : pages 1/190 and 1/191

Description : page 1/197

References : pages 1/195 to 1/197

Dimensions : pages 1/200 and 1/201

Schemes : pages 1/202 and 1/203

1/198

Characteristics (continued)

Installation system

TeSys Quickfit for motor starter components


Components with spring terminals

Table of GV2 circuit-breaker current limitation at 60C ambient temperature with TeSys Quickfit
Circuit-breaker reference GV2 ME06 GV2 ME07 GV2 ME08 GV2 ME10 GV2 ME14 GV2 ME16 GV2 ME20 GV2 ME21 GV2 ratings (1) 1 - 1.6 A 1.6 - 2.5 A 2.5 - 4 A 4 - 6.3 A 6 - 10 A 9 - 14 A 13 - 18 A 17 - 23 A Maximum current of GV2 with TeSys Quickfit 1.28 A 2A 3.2 A 5A 8A 11.2 A 14.4 A 18 A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Electromechanical relay characteristics


Type of control connection module LAD9AP31, LAD9AP32 V V V V mA mA W ms c 24 c 19.2 c 2.4 c 30 15 1 0.36 5

Characteristics of the electromechanical relay control circuit (PLC side)


Rated voltage at Us Energisation threshold at 40 C Drop-out voltage at 20 C Maximum operational voltage Maximum current at Us Drop-out current at 20 C Maximum power dissipated at Us Supply failure

Characteristics of the electromechanical relay output circuit


Type of contact Maximum switching voltage Frequency of the operating current Maximum current of the contact V V Hz A 1F a 250 c 130 50/60 4

Other characteristics of the electromechanical relay


Maximum operating time at Us (including bounce) Between coil energisation and closing of the contact Between coil de-energisation and opening of the contact No load At Ie In millions of operating cycles ms ms Hz Hz 10 5 10 0.5 20

Maximum operating ratet Mechanical life

Dielectric strength Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Primary/secondary rated insulation voltage Maximum current 24 V - DC13 for 500 000 operations 230 V - AC15

V 1000 (50/60 Hz) - 1 mn kV 2.5 V 300 A 0.6 A 0.9 (1) Thermal trip setting range.

Presentation : pages 1/190 and 1/191

Description : page 1/197

References : pages 1/195 to 1/197

Dimensions : pages 1/200 and 1/201

Schemes : pages 1/202 and 1/203

1/199

Dimensions

Installation system

TeSys Quickfit for motor starter components


Components with spring terminals

Dimensions

1 2 3

Mounted assembly, with TeSys GV2ME circuit-breakers and TeSys D contactors


120

5 2 4 3

255

4 5 6 7 8
1

6
110 135
1 Circuit-breaker and contactor support plate 2 Power connection module 3 Power splitter box 4 Control splitter box 5 Upstream terminal block 6 Outgoing terminal block (1) 2 starters: 90 mm, 4 starters: 180 mm, 8 starters: 360 mm.

(1)

Mounted assembly with TeSys GV3P circuit-breakers and TeSys D contactors (LC1D40A3 LC1D65A3)
Vertical mounting Side by side mounting

119

285

2 1

2
1 1

231

141

119

9
141 55 55

10

1 Control splitter box 2 Set of GV3 G264 busbars 3 Set of S-shape busbars GV3S

Presentation : pages 1/190 and 1/191

Description : page 1/197

Characteristics : pages 1/198 and 1/199

References : pages 1/195 to 1/197

Schemes : pages 1/202 and 1/203

1/200

138

Dimensions (continued), schemes

Installation system

TeSys Quickfit for motor starter components


Components with spring terminals

Dimensions

Parallel wiring modules


Splitter box LU9 G02 75 47 Parallel wiring module Advantys STB EPI 2145 5 70

1 2

56

42 155 120 35

35

3
28,1 (1) (1)Dimension to be multiplied by the number of STB EPI 2145 modules present in the configuration. 10

Schemes
Splitter box LU9 G02
X1 Control contact NC Output common NC Contactor status RJ45 NC Circuit-breaker status Input common X2 LU9 G02

4
Colours of TSXCDPppp connection cable wires (4)

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

X9

20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

RJ45 X3

(2)
RJ45 X4

RJ45 X5

RJ45

20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Control contact NC Output common NC Contactor status NC Circuit-breaker status Input common

Fault X1 Fault X2 Fault X3 Fault X4 Fault X5 Fault X6 Fault X7 Fault X8 Pole status X1 Pole status X2 Pole status X3 Pole status X4 Pole status X5 Pole status X6 Pole status X7 Pole status X8 + 24 V Aux - 24 V Aux + 24 V Aux - 24 V Aux

5 6 7 8 9 10
Schemes : pages 1/202 and 1/203

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 White 2 Brown 3 Green 4 Yellow 5 Grey 6 Pink 7 Blue 8 Red 9 Black 10 Violet 11 Grey-pink 12 Red-blue 13 White-green 14 Brown-green 15 White-yellow 16 Yellow-brown 17 White-grey 18 Grey-brown 19 White-pink 20 Pink-brown

X10
Control X1 Control X2 Control X3 Control X4 Control X5 Control X6 Control X7 Control X8 Not used with TeSys Quickfit NC NC NC NC + c 24 V - c 24 V + c 24 V - c 24 V

X6

RJ45

(3)
X7

RJ45 X8

RJ45 c 24 V

24 V Aux Inputs

Outputs

(2) 20-way HE10 input connector. (3) 20-way HE10 output connector. (4) Wire colours and corresponding HE10 connector pin numbers. Characteristics : pages 1/198 and 1/199 References : pages 1/195 to 1/197

Com

Presentation : pages 1/190 and 1/191

Description : page 1/197

Com

1/201

Schemes (continued)

Installation system

TeSys Quickfit for motor starter components


Components with spring terminals

Wiring schemes

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

With relay
LAD9AP31

LAD9AP32

13

23

13
Q1

Q1

14

24

14
21

13

21

24

23

KM1

(1)

13

KM1

13

21

KM2

14

22

22

14

KA1 (2)

14

KA1 (2)

Ph

22

(1)

(1)

KA2 (2)

Ph

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Shunt 1

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Shunt 1

Ph

Shunt 2

Q1 Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breaker. (1) Contactor coil. (2) Interface relay.

Presentation : pages 1/190 and 1/191

Description : page 1/197

Characteristics : pages 1/198 and 1/199

References : pages 1/195 to 1/197

Schemes : pages 1/202 and 1/203

1/202

Schemes (continued)

Installation system

TeSys Quickfit for motor starter components


Components with spring terminals

Without relay
LAD9AP3D1

Wiring schemes (continued)


LAD9AP3D2

1
13
Q1

13

23

Q1

14

24

14

24

23

2 3 4
Shunt 2

21

13

13

21

KM1

14

22

14

22

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Shunt 1

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Shunt 1

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Q1 Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breaker. (1) Contactor coil.

14

22

(1)

KM1

13

21

(1)

KM2

(1)

5 6 7 8 9 10
Presentation : pages 1/190 and 1/191 Description : page 1/197 Characteristics : pages 1/198 and 1/199 References : pages 1/195 to 1/197 Schemes : pages 1/202 and 1/203

1/203

1 2 3
5 1

4 5 6

8 10 11

12

6 9

7 8 9 10
10 AK5-ASS-3-Q 15 12 14

6 7 13

1/204

Presentation

Power distribution in control panels


Pre-assembled panel busbar system AK5

The assembly of automated control and distribution panels requires the use of products that are not only safe but also simple and quick to mount and cable. The AK5 pre-assembled busbar system meets all these criteria by incorporating prefabricated components which cater for 3 principal functions:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Carrying of electric current


By the pre-assembled 4-pole busbar system 1, 160 A at 35 C. 4-pole busbar systems can be used for 3-phase + Neutral or 3-phase + Common. The busbar systems are available in 6 lengths: 344, 452, 560, 668, 992, 1100 mm. An incoming supply terminal block 2 is located at the extreme left of the busbar system. "Knock-out" partitions allow connection of the power supply from above or below to connectors 3 which are protected by a removable cover 4. Upstream protection of the busbar system is shown on page 1/206.

Current distribution
Tap-off units 5 (factory assembled) are available in 4 versions: b 2-pole, b 3-pole, b 4-pole (3-phase + Neutral), b 4-pole (3-phase + Common). The tap-offs clip onto the busbar system with instantaneous mechanical and electrical connection to the busbars. 2 ratings are available: 16 and 32 A. The tap-off units ensure not only rapid mounting, but also a neat appearance for the power distribution system and complete safety when accessing under live circuit conditions.

Component mounting
Component mounting plates with incorporated tap-off allow mounting of and supply of power to components. They are available in 25 A or 50 A ratings. These mounting plates clip onto the mounting rail 11, which also supports the busbar system, and at the same time make electrical connection via the incorporated tapoff. 2 types of mounting plate are available: b single plates 6 (height 105 mm), with bolt-on 35 mm wide 7 rail 7, which may be bolted on in one of two positions, allowing height adjustment of 10 mm. b double plates 8 and 14 (height 190 mm), with two bolt-on, 35 mm wide 7 rails 9 mounted on 100 mm fixing centres; each rail may be bolted on in one of 4 positions, allowing height adjustment in 10 mm steps. These plates are supplied with connectors 12 to allow wiring between control and protection devices. Single mounting plates enable the following types of distribution: b 2-pole (Ph + N) and (Ph + Ph) b 3-pole, b 4-pole (3 Ph + N or 3 Ph + common). Double mounting plates enable the following types of distribution: 2-pole (Ph + N, Ph + Ph), 3-pole or 4-pole (3Ph+N and 3Ph + common). Extension plates 10 can be bolted onto single and double mounting plates to enable mounting of wider components. Using a side stop 15 in conjunction with these extension plates also supports the AK5 JB busbar system when used vertically. A control terminal block 13 comprising a support plate bolted onto the single or double mounting plates and a 10-pole plug-in block, enables connection of the control circuit wires (c.s.a. 1.5 mm2 max).

Characteristics: pages 1/206 and 1/207

References: pages 1/210 and 1/211

Dimensions: pages 1/212 and 1/213

Schemes: pages 1/212 and 1/213

Mounting possibilities: pages 1/208 and 1/209

1/205

Characteristics

Power distribution in control panels


Pre-assembled panel busbar system AK5

Busbar system characteristics

1 2 3 4

Conforming to standards Product certifications Degree of protection Against access to live parts

IEC 60439 UL, CSA, DNV, LROS IP XXB conforming to IEC 60529

Flame resistance

Conforming to IEC 60695 Conforming to standard UL 94

850 (incandescent wire) V0 4 a

Number of conductors Supply current Rated operational frequency Rated operational current

AK5JB14p

Hz Ambient temperature 35 C A

50 or 60 160

Coefficient K to be applied according to the ambient temperature

35

40

45

50

55

60

0.96

0.92

0.88

0.83

0.78

Rated insulation voltage

Conforming to IEC 60439-1 Conforming to UL and CSA

V V

690 600 Off-load plugging-in and unplugging, with supply switched on 400 480 Plugging-in and unplugging, with supply switched off 690 600 25

5 6

Operational voltage Conforming to IEC 60439-1 Conforming to UL, CSA V V

Conforming to IEC 60439-1 Conforming to UL, CSA Maximum permissible peak current

V V kA

7 8 9 10

Maximum let-through energy Upstream short-circuit (1) and overload protection Type of protection

A 2s

1 x 10 7 Schneider Electric circuit-breaker NS 160 H NS 160 H 160 70 Fuses aM 160 100 gF 160 100

Rating Prospective short-circuit current Operational current Cabling Flexible cable with cable end Solid cable Tightening torque Mounting position Horizontal or vertical (2)

A kA

160 36

160 Maximum c.s.a.

160

160 Minimum c.s.a. 2.5 2.5

160

mm2 mm2 Nm

70 70 10

Fixing with screws provided (1) For conditions where conditional short-circuit current exceeds 25 kA. (2) Using side stop AK5BT01 on mounting plates AK5PA.

Prsentation : pages 1/205

References: pages 1/210 and 1/211

Schemes: pages 1/212 and 1/213

Mounting possibilities: pages 1/208 and 1/209

1/206

Characteristics (continued)

Power distribution in control panels


Pre-assembled panel busbar system AK5

Tap-off characteristics
Type AK5 PC12 Conforming to standards Product certifications Degree of protection Polarity IEC 60439 UL, LROS, CSA, DNV Against access to live parts: IP XXB conforming to IEC 529 Phase + Neutral Conductor c.s.a. (UL cables) mm2 2 x 2.5 Phase + Phase 2 x 2.5 3 x 2.5 3-phase 3-phase + Neutral 4 x 2.5 3-phase + Common 3 x 2.5 1 x 1.5 Phase + Neutral 2x4 Phase + Phase 2x4 3x4 3-phase 3-phase + Neutral 4x4 3-phase + Common 3x4 1 x 1.5 AK5 PC12PH AK5 PC13 AK5 PC14 AK5 PC131 AK5 PC32L AK5 AK5 PC33L AK5 PC34 PC34L AK5 PC331 PC32LPH PC33

1 2 3 4 5

Conductor colours

Black Blue (Neutral)

Black

Black

Black Blue (Neutral)

Black White

Black Blue (Neutral)

Black

Black

Black Blue (Neutral)

Black White (Common)

Permissible current

16

16

16

16

16 10 (Common)

32

32

32

32

32 10 (Common)

Rated insulation voltage Rated peak current Maximum let-through energy Type of conductor insulation

V kA A 2s

690 conforming to IEC 60439-1 6 100 000 PVC 105 C 200000

Tap-off characteristics
Type AK5 PA211N1 PA211N2 PA211N3 PA212N1 PA212N2 PA212N3 IEC 60439 UL, LROS, CSA, DNV Against access to live parts: IP XXB conforming to IEC 60529 Phase + Neutral mm2 2x4 Phase + Phase 2x4 3-phase 3-phase + Neutral 4x4 3-phase + Common 3x4 1 x 1.5 25 10 (Common) 3-phase 3-phase + Neutral 2 x (4 x 4) 3-phase + Common 2 x (3 x 4) 1 x 1.5 50 10 (Common) AK5 PA211PH12 PA211PH13 PA211PH23 PA212PH12 PA212PH13 PA212PH23 AK5 PA231 PA232 PA232S AK5 PA241 PA242 AK5 PA2311 PA2312 PA2312S AK5 PA532 AK5 PA542 AK5 PA5312

6 7 8 9 10

Conforming to standards Product certifications Degree of protection Polarity

Conductor c.s.a. (UL cables) Permissible current Rated insulation voltage Rated peak current Maximum let-through energy Type of conductor insulation

3x4

2 x (3 x 4)

A V kA A 2s

25

25

25

25

50

50

690 conforming to IEC 60439-1 6 200 000 PVC 105 C

Type

Characteristics of mounting rails AM1DL201 and AM1DL2017 Omega 7 (width 75 mm, depth 15 mm)
2 mm sheet steel Galvanized

Material Surface treatment

1/207

Mounting (equipment possibilities)

Power distribution in control panels


Pre-assembled panel busbar system AK5

Component mounting plates incorporating tap-off mounted on AK5 JB busbar system

1 2
Note: if the equipment is wider than the mounting plate, an extension plate can be used to increase the width of the support plate. AK5 PA211N1 PA211N2 PA211N3 54 105 3 25 A Ph + N Minimum centres with 60 mm ducting AK5 AK5 PA231 PA241 PA2311 (1) 54 105 3 25 A 3-pole 54 105 3 25 A AK5 PA212N1 PA212N2 PA212N3 54 190 3 25 A AK5 PA212PH12 PA213PH13 PA212PH23 54 190 3 25 A AK5 AK5 PA232 PA242 PA2312 (1) 54 190 3 25 A 3-pole 54 190 4 25 A 3-pole +N AK5 PA232S PA2312S (1) 108 190 6 25 A 3-pole AK5 AK5 PA532 PA542 PA5312 (1) 108 190 6 50 A 3-pole 108 190 6 50 A 3-pole +N

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

(1) 3-pole + common Width in mm Mounting plate incorporating Height in mm tap-off No. of 18 mm pitches Thermal current Application Motor starter type

Ph + Ph 3-pole Ph + N +N Number of points used on the busbar system

Fuses, contactors and thermal overload relay


LS1D25 170 LS1D25 + LA8D254 170 LS1 D25 + LC1 -D09 to D25 and overload relay up to LR2 D1322 320 LS1D25 + LC1D09 to D25 (with 1 add-on block LA8 D) + 320 overload relay up to LR2 D1322 LS1D25 + LC2D09 to D18 (with 1 add-on block LA8 D) + overload relay up to LR2D1322 LS1D25 + LC2D25 with 1 add-on block LA8 D) + overload relay up to LR2D1322 4 4 5 4 4

Fuses, reversing contactors + thermal overload relay


320 320 6 7

Optimal breaker switch


GK2CF03 to CF22 GK2CF03 to CF22 + 4 blocks GK2AX GK3EF40 GK3 EF40 + 4 blocks GK2 AX GK2CF03 to CF21 + LC1D09 to D18 + overload relay up to LR2 D1322 GK2CF03 to CF22 + LC1D09 to D25 + overload relay up to LR2 D1322 GK2CF03 to CF22 + 4 blocks GK2-AX + LC1 D09 to D18 with 1 block LA8 D + overload relay up to LR2 D1322 GK2CF03 to CF22 + 4 blocks GK2 AX + LC1 D09 to D18 with 1 block LA8 D + overload relay up to LR2 D1322 GK2CF03 to CF22 + 4 blocks GK2 AX + LC2D25 with 1 block LA8 D + overload relay up to LR2 D1322 170 170 270 270 3 5 6 6

Optimal breaker switch + contactor + thermal overload relay


320 320 320 3 4 5

Optimal breaker switch + reversing contactor + thermal overload relay


320 6

320

1/208

Mounting (equipment possibilities)


(continued)

Power distribution in control panels


Pre-assembled panel busbar system AK5

Component mounting plates incorporating tap-off mounted on AK5 JB busbar system

1 2
AK5 PA211N1 PA211N2 PA211N3 54 105 3 25 A Ph + N AK5 AK5 AK5 PA241 PA212N1 PA212PH12 PA212N2 PA213PH13 PA212N3 PA212PH23 54 54 54 105 190 190 3 3 3 25 A 25 A 25 A 3-pole Ph + N Ph + Ph +N Number of points used on the busbar system AK5 PA231 PA2311 (1) 54 105 3 25 A 3-pole AK5PA 232 PA2312 (1) 54 190 3 25 A 3-pole AK5 AK5 PA242 PA232S PA2312S (1) 54 108 190 190 4 6 25 A 25 A 3-pole 3-pole +N AK PA532 PA5312 (1) 108 190 6 50 A 3-pole AK5 PA542 108 190 6 50 A 3-pole +N

Note 1: if the equipment is wider than the mounting plate, an extension plate can be used to increase the width of the support plate. Note 2: for upstream protection, see page 13230/4 (1) 3-pole + common Mounting Width in mm plate Height in mm incorporating No. of 18 mm pitches tap-off Thermal current Application Motor starter type Minimum centres with 60 mm ducting 170 270

3 4

Motor circuit-breaker (type 1 coordination)


GV2p06 to p22 GV3M01 to M40 3 6

Motor circuit-breaker + contactor


GV2p06 to p16 + LC1 D09 or D12 with 1 add-on block LA8 D 270 GV2p06 to p20 + LC1D09 270 to D18 GV2p06 to p22 + LC1 D09 or D12 with 1 add-on block LA8 D 270 GV3M01 to M40 with GV1App + LC1D09 to D32 270 270 4 3

5 6 7 8 9 10

7 8

GV3M01 to M40 + LC1D09 to D32 with 1 add-on block LA8D

Motor circuit-breaker + reversing contactor


270 270 6 7

GV2p06 to p20 + LC2-D09 to D18 with or without add-on block LA8 D GV2p22 with 1 add-on block LA8-D LD1LB030 + LB1LB03Ppp (integral 18) LD1 LB030 with 2 add-on blocks LA1 -LB + LB1 LB30P (integral 18) LD1 LB030 with 4 add-on blocks LA1 LB + LB1 LB03P (integral 18) LD1 LC030 + LB1 LC03M (integral 32) LD1 LC030 + LB1 LC03M (integral 32) with 1 add-on block LA1 LC and 1 reset device LA1 LC052p LD1 LC030 with 2 add-on blocks LA1 LB + LB1 LC03M (integral 32) LD5LB130 + LB1LB03Ppp LD5 LB130 with 3 add-on blocks LA1 LB + LB1 LB03P 2369p 2370p 2371p and 2372p

Integral contactor breaker + protection module


270 270 270 270 270 3 4 6 6 7

270

Reversing contactor breaker integral 18 + protection module


270 270 170 170 170 2 3 4 2 2 3 4 6 8 3 3 4

Schneider Electric C 60 circuit-breaker for circuit protection

1/209

References

Power distribution in control panels


Pre-assembled panel busbar system AK5

Busbar systems

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
AK5PC14 AK5PC12 AK5JB1pp

The busbar system can be screw-mounted onto any type of support. However. if it is to be used in conjunction with component mounting plates incorporating a tap-off, it is essential that it is mounted on the AM1DL201 rail. When mounting tap-offs, the rated operational current of the busbar system should be taken into account: 160 A at 35 C. Number of Number of Length Suitable for Reference Weight conductors tap-offs at mounting in 18 mm intervals enclosure width mm mm kg 4 (1) 0.700 12 344 600 AK5JB143 18 24 30 48 54 452 560 668 992 1100 800 800 800 1200 1200 AK5JB144 AK5JB145 AK5JB146 AK5JB149 AK5JB1410 0.900 1.100 1.300 1.900 2.100

Omega rail, width 75 mm


This rail is designed to accommodate the busbar system when it is used with AK5 PA mounting plates incorporating tapoffs. It supportsthe busbar system. The plates simply clip onto the rail. Material and surface treatment 2 mm sheet steel Depth mm 15 Length mm 2000 (4) Sold in lots of 6 Unit reference AM1 DL201 Weight kg 3.000

Removable power sockets


Use Number of points used on the busbar system Thermal current A Single-phase + Neutral 2-phase 1 16 32 1 16 32 3-phase 2 16 32 Cable lengths mm 200 1000 200 1000 200 250 1000 3-phase + Neutral 2 16 32 200 250 1000 3-phase + common 2 16 10 (common) 32 10 (common) 200 6 (2) 6 (2) 6 (3) 6 (3) 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 AK5PC12 AK5PC32L AK5PC12PH AK5PC32LPH AK5PC13 AK5PC33 AK5PC33L AK5PC14 AK5PC34 AK5PC34L AK5PC131 Sold in lots of Unit reference Weight kg 0.035 0.040 0.035 0.040 0.040 0.045 0.060 0.045 0.050 0.065 0.045

8 9 10
Presentation : page 1/205

AK5GF1

250

AK5PC331

0.050

Accessories
Description

Maximum no. C.s.a. mm2 Sold in Unit of connections lots of reference 20 AK5GF1 Cable guide 4 2.5 or 4 (1) 4-pole: 3-phase + Neutral or 3-phase + Common. (2) Total of 6 sockets supplied: 2 sockets (N + L1), 2 sockets (N + L2). 2 sockets (N + L3). (3) Total of 6 sockets supplied: 2 sockets (L1 + L2), 2 sockets (L1 + L3). 2 sockets (L2 + L3). (4) Cut and drill to suit use.

Weight kg 0.300

Characteristics : pages 1/206 and 1/207

Schemes: pages 1/212 and 1/213

Mounting possibilities : pages 1/208 and 1/209

1/210

References (continued)

Power distribution in control panels


Pre-assembled panel busbar system AK5

Single plate (height 105 mm)


Use Single-phase + neutral

Component mounting plates incorporating tap-off


No. of 18mm Phase points used on the busbar system 3 Ph1+N Ph2+N Ph3+N Ph1+Ph2 Ph1+Ph3 Ph2+Ph3 Thermal currentA 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 Number of 6 rails for component support 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Reference AK5PA211N1 AK5PA211N2 AK5PA211N3 AK5PA211PH12 AK5PA211PH13 AK5PA211PH23 AK5PA231 AK5PA2311 AK5PA241 Weight kg 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.140 0.145 0.145

1 2 3

2-phase

AK5PA231

3-phase 3 3-phase + common 3 3-phase + neutral 3

Double plate (height 190 mm)


Prefabricated 25 A connectors are supplied for connecting the 2 protection and control devices. Single-phase + neutral 2-phase 3 Ph1+N Ph2+N Ph3+N Ph1+Ph2 Ph1+Ph3 Ph2+Ph3 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 50 25 25 (10 common) 25 (10 common) 50 (10 common) 50 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 AK5PA212N1 AK5PA212N2 AK5PA212N3 AK5PA212PH12 AK5PA212PH13 AK5PA212PH23 AK5PA232 AK5PA232S AK5PA532 AK5PA242 AK5PA2312 AK5PA2312S AK5PA5312 AK5PA542 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.230 0.600 0.700 0.230 0.235 0.610 0.710 0.715

3-phase

3 6

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

AK5PA232

3-phase + neutral 3 3-phase + common 3 6

3-phase + neutral

Extension plates
These plates bolt onto the equipment support plates, after having removed them from the rails, to be able to mount wider components. Use Number of tap-offs Reference Weight at 18 mm intervals kg For mounting Single 4 AK5PE17 0.100 plates incor0.150 Double 4 AK5PE27 porating tap-off

Side stop (AK5JB mounted vertically)


Use For extension plate AK5BT01 Sold in lots of 50 Unit reference AK5BT01 Weight kg 0.005

Control terminal blocks


Thermal current A 10-pole terminal blocks, for screwing onto plate AK5 PAppp 10 Description Sold in lots of 10 Unit reference AK5SB1 Weight kg 0.065

10-pole front connecting plug-in terminal blocks which can be clipped onto 1 6 4 rails Fixed part 10 10 AB1 DV10235U Moving part 10 10 AB1 DVM10235U

0.047 0.021

Accessories
AK5SB1 Description Strips of clip-in markers 10 identical numbers, signs or capital letters per strip Marking 09 + AZ Sold in lots of 25 25 25 25 Unit reference AB1Rp (1) AB1 R12 AB1 R13 AB1Gp (1) Weight kg 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050

(1) Replace the p in the selected reference with the number or letter required. Example: AB1R1 or AB1GA.

Presentation : page 1/205

Characteristics : pages 1/206 and 1/207

Schemes: pages 1/212 and 1/213

Mounting possibilities : pages 1/208 and 1/209

1/211

Dimensions

Power distribution in control panels


Pre-assembled panel busbar system AK5

Busbar systems

1 2

AK5JBppp

82

79

3
81 45

30
AK5 JB143 JB144 JB145 JB146 JB149 JB1410

a 344 452 560 668 992 1100

G 330 438 546 654 978 1086

No. of 18 mm points

4
Busbar feed units
AK5JBppp

G a

12 18 24 30 48 54

Installation of AK5JBppp busbar systems Connection Flexible cable with or without cable end 1 x 2.5 2 x 2.5 Flexible bar Flexible bar 9x4 + 1 x 2.5 9x4 + 1 x 35 2 x (9 x 4) 1 x 70 (1) 2 x 35 C.s.a. in mm2 min max

5 6 7
Removable power sockets 16 and 32 A
AK5PC12p. AK5PC32Lp

+ flexible cable with or without cable end

(1) Maximum c.s.a. or connection of conductor without cable end.

Mounting plates incorporating tap-offs, 25 A


AK5PA2p1. AK5PA2311. AK5PA211pppp

Single width extension plates


AK5PE17

45,5

8
38 17,5

9 10

AK5PCp3. AK5PC33L AK5PCp4. AK5PC34L AK5PCp31

53 (1)

53 (1)

45,5

105

38

35,5

15

46

54

10

15 7

71

Note: It is recommended that the power sockets or the removable plates are connected as close as possible to the busbar feed unit. (1) Can be fixed at 43 mm Presentation : page 1/205 Characteristics : pages 1/206 and 1/207 References : pages 1/210 and 1/211 Mounting possibilities : pages 1/208 and 1/209

1/212

10

105

Dimensions

(continued)

Power distribution in control panels


Pre-assembled panel busbar system AK5

Component mounting plates incorporating tap-off


AK5PA232. AK5PA2312. AK5PA242

Double extension plate


AK5PE27

1
53 (1)

53 (1)

2
190

10 100 190

40

100

10

3
10

15

46

54

15 7

71

4 5 6 7 8 9

Component mounting plates incorporating tap-off


AK5PA232S. AK5PA2312S AK5PA532. AK5PA5312. AK5PA542

Side stop
AK5BT01

Control terminal block


AK5SB1

15,5
4,2 22

0,8

20

7
(1) Can be fixed at 43 mm Presentation : page 1/205 Characteristics : pages 1/206 and 1/207 References : pages 1/210 and 1/211 Mounting possibilities : pages 1/208 and 1/209

10

1/213

Contents

2 - TeSys motor starters: enclosed version

Selection guide .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/2

1 2

VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors


b Pre-assembled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/4 b Assembled by the user. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/5 b Add-on modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/6 b VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors for the North American market, conforming to UL and CSA standards .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/10

Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers


b TeSys GV2 ME v Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/12 v Assembly of a safety enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/14 b TeSys GV3 PC.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/13

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

D.O.L. starters for motor control


b 0.55 to 30 kW v With manual control and with magnetic circuit-breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/18 b 2.2 to 45 kW v Without isolating device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/20 v With isolating device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/24 b 0.25 to 7.5 kW v With 3-phase thermal overload relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/28 b 0.37 to 5.5 kW v With thermal magnetic circuit-breaker and contactor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/30

Star-delta starters for motor control


b 5.5 to 132 kW v Without isolating device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/32 b 7.5 to 75 kW v With isolating device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/36 b 90 to 375 kW v Without isolating device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/42

D.O.L. starters for control in category AC-1


b Without isolating device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/44 b With isolating device .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/48

2/0

integral 63 contactor breaker and reversing contactor breaker


b Enclosures and door interlock mechanisms for customer assembly . . . . page 2/52 b For control and protection of motors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/56 b For control and protection of resistive circuits in category AC-1.. . . . . . . page 2/58 b Auxiliary contact blocks and accessories.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/59

1 2

Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control for use in a machine subject to the application of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE
b Non-reversing starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/62 b Reversing starters .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/64

Enclosed D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system


Selection guide .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/72 b TeSys LF3 P and LF4 P .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/84 b TeSys LF3 M and LF4 M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/89

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

2/1

General selection guide

TeSys enclosed starters

Applications

D.O.L. starters

1 2 3 4

Type

Standard starters

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors in AC-3 400/415 V

437 kW

0.0645 kW

0.5530 kW

0.375.5 kW

0.2545 kW

Starters Manual Auto

Isolation Switch

5
Protection

Circuit-breaker Fuse carrier

Short-circuit

p p

p p

p p

6
Communication References

Overload

7 8 9 10

Non-reversing

VpF VCFN VpFX

GV2 ME GV3 CE

GV2 LC GV NGC

LE1 GVME

LE1 M LE1 D LE2 K LE2 D

Reversing

Pages

2/4 and 2/5

2/12 and 2/13

2/18

2/30

2/20, 2/21 and 2/28

2/2

Soft starters

Starters for safety applications

Starters for use on AS-Interface line

Standard star-delta starters

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

2.245 kW

0.0611 kW

0.069 kW

0.069 kW

0.065.5 kW

5.5132 kW

7.575 kW

p p

p p

p p

p p

p p

p p

p p

LE4 K LE4 D LE8 K LE8 D LE2 D


2/24 and 2/25

GV2 ME

LG1 K LG1 D

LG7 K LG7 D LJ7 K LG8 K LJ8 K

LF3P LF3M LF4P LF4M

LE3K LE3D LE3F

LE6D LE3D

2/14 and 2/15

2/63

2/62, 2/63, 2/68 and 2/69

2/84 and 2/85

2/32, 2/33 and 2/42

2/36 and 2/37

2/3

References

Enclosed starters

VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors, pre-assembled

1 2 3 4
VCF3GE

580545

Enclosed switch disconnectors for high performance applications


b b b b b 3-pole rotary switch disconnectors, 10 to 140 A, conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC60204. Marking on operator O Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not included). IP 65 degree of protection enclosures, sealable and lockable. Cover lockable in position I (ON) up to 63 A rating.

3-pole main and Emergency Stop switch disconnectors (1)


VCF0GE Operator Handle lthe Front plate Dimensions mm Yellow 60 x 60 A 10 16 20 25 32 50 63 100 140 Power AC-23 at 400V kW 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 22 30 37 45 Incorporated switch body V02 V01 V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6 Possible attachments (2) Reference Weight

Red, standard, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks (4to8 shank)

2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 1

VCF02GE VCF01GE VCF0GE VCF1GE VCF2GE VCF3GE VCF4GE VCF5GEN VCF6GEN

kg 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.930 0.930 2.190 2.190

580546

Red, long, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks (4to8 shanks)

Yellow 90 x 90

3-pole main switch disconnectors (1)


Black, standard, padlockable with up to3padlocks (4to8 shank) Black 60 x 60 10 16 20 25 32 50 63 100 140 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 22 30 37 45 V02 V01 V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 VBF02GE VBF01GE VBF0GE VBF1GE VBF2GE VBF3GE VBF4GE VBF5GEN VBF6GEN 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.930 0.930 2.190 2.190

569394

5 6 7 8 9 10

Black, long, padlockable with up to 3padlocks (4to8 shank)

Black 90 x 90

Enclosed switch disconnectors for standard applications


b 3-pole rotary switch disconnectors, 10 to 32 A, conforming to IEC 60947-4-1. b Degree of protection IP 55.
VCF5GEN

3-pole main and Emergency Stop switch disconnectors (1)


Operator Handle
580548

lthe Front plate Dimensions mm Yellow 60 x 60 A 10 16 20 25 32

Power AC-23 at 400V kW 4 5.5 7.5 11 15

Incorporated switch body VN12 VN20 V0 V1 V2

Possible attachments (2)

Reference

Weight

Red padlockable, either by 1 (8 shank) or by3padlocks (6 shank)

2 2 0 0 0

VCFN12GE VCFN20GE VCFN25GE VCFN32GE VCFN40GE

(2) (2)

kg 0.422 0.422 0.512 0.512 0.512

(1) For characteristics of switch disconnectors, please consult your Regional Sales Office. (2) For VCF and VBF enclosures, see page 2/6. For VCFN enclosures, see page 2/7.

VCFN12GE

Dimensions: page 2/8

Schemes: page 2/9

2/4

References

Enclosed starters

VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors, assembled by the user

580549

Empty enclosures
For switch body

IP 65 enclosure with red padlockable handle operator and yellow front plate (for mounting a main or Emergency Stop switch disconnector)
lthe A 1032 1032 50 Possible attachments (1) Reference Weight kg 0.340 0.660 0.660

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

VN12, VN20 V02V2 V02V2 VBFXGE2 V3

2 4 3

VCFXGE1 VCFXGE4 VCFXGE2

IP 65 enclosure with black padlockable handle and black front plate (for mounting a main switch disconnector)
VN12, VN20 V02V2 V02V2 V3 1032 1032 50 2 4 3 VBFXGE1 VBFXGE4 VBFXGE2 0.340 0.660 0.660

Switch bodies for standard applications (2)


Description 3-pole switch disconnectors Rating A 10 16 Reference VN12 VN20 Weight kg 0.110 0.110

Switch bodies for high performance applications (2)


Description
580550

3-pole switch disconnectors

Rating A 10 16 20 25 32

Reference V02 V01 V0 V1 V2 V3 V4

Weight kg 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200

V0

50 63 (1) See pages 2/6 and 2/7. (2) For characteristics of switch disconnectors, please consult your Regional Sales Office.

Dimensions: page 2/8

Schemes: page 2/9

2/5

References

Enclosed starters
Add-on modules

VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors

580589

Add-on modules for enclosures VCF and VBF


Description Main pole module (mountedinenclosure) Rating A 10 16 20 25 32 50 63 10 to 32 50 and 63 100 and 140 10 to 32 50 and 63 100 and 140 Type of contacts N/O + N/C (1) N/O + N/O Reference VZ02 VZ01 VZ0 VZ1 VZ2 VZ3 VZ4 VZ11 VZ12 VZ13 VZ14 VZ15 VZ16 Reference VZ7 VZ20 Weight kg 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.100 0.100 0.050 0.100 0.250 0.050 0.100 0.250 Weight kg 0.050 0.050

1 2
580595

VZ0

580594

VZ11 Neutral pole modules with early make and late break contacts Earthing modules

3
VZ15 VZ20

580596

Description Auxiliary contact block modules with 2 auxiliary contacts

4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Schemes : page 2/9

Maximum number of add-on modules that can be fitted on a switch body


1 add-on module on each side of the switch body
VZ7 or VZ20 or VZ11 or VZ12 or VZ14 or VZ15 or VZ0p/VZ0 to VZ4 + V4 + to + + V0 + + V0p + VZ7 or VZ20 or VZ11 or VZ12 or VZ14 or VZ15 or + VZ0p/VZ0 to VZ4

2 add-on modules on each side of the switch body


VZ0p VZ0 VZ1 VZ2 VZ3 VZ4 + + + + + + VZ0p + VZ0 VZ1 VZ2 VZ3 VZ4 + + + + + V0p V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 + VZ0p + + + + + + VZ0 VZ1 VZ2 VZ3 VZ4 + + + + + VZ7 VZ7 VZ7 VZ7 VZ7 VZ7 or or or or or or VZ20 VZ20 VZ20 VZ20 VZ20 VZ20 or or or or or or VZ11 VZ11 VZ11 VZ11 VZ12 VZ12 or or or or or or VZ14 VZ14 VZ14 VZ14 VZ15 VZ15

Note: The add-on modules mounted next to the switch body are main pole modules. Maximum of 3 main pole modules per switch body. (1) Late make N/O, early break N/C contacts

2/6

References (continued)

Enclosed starters
Add-on modules

VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors

580597

Add-on modules for enclosures VCFN12GE and 20GE


Description Main pole modules Rating A 10 16 Neutral pole module withearly make and late break contacts Earthing module Description Auxiliary contact block modules 10 and 16 10 and 16 Type of contacts 1 N/O latemakecontact 1 N/C earlybreakcontact Reference VZN12 VZN20 VZN11 VZN14 Reference VZN05 VZN06 Weight kg 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.016 Weight kg 0.020 0.020

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

VZN11

580598

VZN14

Maximum number of add-on modules that can be fitted on a switch body


VZN12 or VZN20 + + VZN12 or VZN20 or VN12 or VN20 VZN11 or VZN05 or VZN06 or VZN05 or VZN06 VZN14

580599

or VZN05

Schemes : page 2/9

2/7

Dimensions

Enclosed starters

VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors

Dimensions

1 2

VCFN12GE to VCFN40GE

106

131

90

82,5

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Cable glands: 2 x 16 P top and bottom.

VCF or VBF02GE to 4GE VCFX or VBFXGE1 to GE4

c c1

= a

VpF02GE to VpF2GE, VpFXGE1 (1) VpF3GE and VpF4GE (2) VpFXGE2 and VpFXGE4 (2) (1) Cable glands: 2 x 16 P top and bottom. (2) Cable glands: 2 x 16/21/29 P top and bottom .

a 90 150 150

b
b 146 170 170

c 85 106 106

c1 131 152 152

H 130 164 164

VCF or VBF5GEN and 6GEN


4x4,2
= 268,5

128 190,5

218,5 241

10
References: pages 2/4 and 2/5 Schemes: page 2/9

2/8

291

Schemes

Enclosed starters

VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors

Schemes

Switch disconnectors
Enclosed or switch bodies
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

Main pole module

Neutral pole module

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

2/T1

4/T2

Auxiliary contact blocks


VZ7
13 21

6/T3

VZ20
13 23

VZN05
13

VZN06
21 22

14

14

References: pages 2/5 and 2/6

22

24

14

2/9

References

Enclosed starters

VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors for the North American market, conforming to UL and CSA standards
569396

1 2 3
VC3GUN
569398

b 3-pole rotary switch disconnectors, 25 to 140 A, conforming to IEC 60947-4-1, IEC60204, UL 508 and CSA22.2 n 14. b Marking on operator O b Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not included). b NEMA type 1 and type 12 enclosures, IP 65 degree of protection, sealable and lockable.
VC1GUN
569397

Enclosed switch disconnectors for high performance applications

3-pole main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors (1)


Operator Handle Front plate Dimensions Rating IEC (Ith) UL 600 V mm Red, standard, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks (4to8) Red, long, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks (4to8) Yellow 60 x 60 A 32 40 63 80 125 175 A 20 25 45 63 100 115 Standard power ratings of UL motors 240 V 480 V 600 V HP 5 5 10 15 25 30 HP 10 10 20 30 50 50 HP 10 15 30 40 50 60 V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6 2 2 2 2 1 1 VC1GUN VC2GUN VC3GUN VC4GUN VC5GUN VC6GUN kg 0.500 0.500 0.930 0.930 2.190 2.190 Incorporated switch body Possible attachments Reference Weight

Yellow 90 x 90

4 5
VC5GUN

Add-on modules for VC enclosure


Description Rating A Main pole module (mounted in enclosure) 25 32 50 63 10 to 32 50 and 63 100 and 140 10 to 32 50 and 63 100 and 140 Type of contacts N/O + N/C (2) N/O + N/O

Reference Weight kg VZ1 VZ2 VZ3 VZ4 VZ11 VZ12 VZ13 VZ14 VZ15 VZ16 0.050 0.050 0.100 0.100 0.050 0.100 0.250 0.050 0.100 0.250

Neutral pole module with early make and late break contacts
569401

6 7

569400

Earthing modules

Description Auxiliary contact block modules with 2 auxiliary contacts

Reference Weight kg VZ7 VZ20 0.050 0.050

VZ11

VZ15

Maximum number of add-on modules that can be fitted on a switch body


1 add-on module on each side of the switch body
569402

8 9 10

VZ7 or VZ20 or VZ11 or VZ12 or VZ20 VZ14 or VZ15 or VZ1 to VZ4

+ V1 + to + V4 +

VZ7 or VZ20 or

VZ11 or VZ12 or

VZ14 or VZ15 or

VZ1 to VZ4

(1) For characteristics of switch disconnectors, please consult your Regional Sales Office. (2) Late make N/O, early break N/C contacts.

2/10

Dimensions, schemes

Enclosed starters

VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors for the North American market, conforming to UL and CSA standards

Dimensions

VC1GUN and VC2GUN


Fixing (rear view)

1
141

164

2 3 4 5 6
268,5

87 132,1

121

98

4x4,2

VC3GUN and VC4GUN


Fixing (rear view)

193

87 132,1

164

141

VC5GUN and VC6GUN


Fixing (rear view)

291

170 4x4,2

7
128 190,5 241 218,5 4x4,2

Schemes

8 9

Switch disconnectors
Enclosed switch disconnectors or switch bodies
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

Main pole module

Neutral pole module

2/T1

4/T2

Auxiliary contact block modules


VZ7
13 21

6/T3

VZ20
13 23

10

14

14

22

24

2/11

References

TeSys enclosed starters

Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2ME and accessories, for customer assembly

1 2
500277_1

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2ME For motor circuit-breakers and accessories: see pages 3/48, 3/56 and 3/63. Starters consisting of a GV2ME motor circuit-breaker in an enclosure conform to standard IEC 60947-4-1.
GV2 Ithe in enclosure (A) ME ME ME 01 02 03 0.16 0.25 0.4 ME ME 04 05 0.63 1 ME 06 1.6 ME 07 2.5 ME 08 4 ME 10 6.3 ME 14 9 ME 16 13 ME 20 17 ME 21 21 ME 22 23

References

Enclosures for thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers GV2ME


Type Degree of protection Possible no. of Reference side mounting auxiliary contact blocks on GV2ME LH side RH side 1 1 GV2MC01 1 1 GV2MC02 or GV2MCK04 (1) IP 55 for 1 temperature < + 5 C IP 41 (front face) IP 41 (reduced flush mounting) IP 55 (front face) IP 55 (reduced flush mounting) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 GV2MC03 GV2MP01 GV2MP03 GV2MP02 GV2MP04 Weight kg 0.290 0.300 0.420 0.300 0.115 0.115 0.130 0.130

3
GV2MC

500280_1

4 5

Surface mounting, double insulated with protective conductor. Sealable cover

IP 41 IP55

Flush mounting, with protective conductor

GV2MP

500278_1

Front plate
Description Reference IP 55 GV2CP21

6 7

GV2-MP

For direct control, through a panel, of a chassis mounted GV2ME

Weight kg 0.800

Accessories common to all enclosures (to be ordered separately)


GV2CP21 Description Padlocking device (2) for GV2ME operator (padlocking is only possible in the O position)
500279_1

Sold in lots of 1 to 3 padlocks 1 4 to 8 mm

Unit reference GV2V01

Weight kg 0.075

GV2-CP

8 9 10
GV2K011

Mushroom head Emergency stop pushbutton 40 mm, red

Spring return (2) Latching (2) IP55

1 Key release, key 1 n 455 Turn to release 1 1

GV2K011 GV2K021 GV2K031 GV2K04 (3) GV2E01

0.052 0.160 0.115 0.120 0.012

Sealing kit

For enclosures and front plate

IP55 for temperature between +5C and +40C IP55 for temperature between -20C and +40C

10

GV2-K011

10

GV2E02

0.012

Neutral terminal Partition

100 50

AB1VV635UBL AB1AC6BL

0.015 0.003

2/12

References dimensions

TeSys enclosed starters

Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3P (for customer assembly)

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3P For motor circuit-breakers and accessories: see pages 3/48 and 3/59. GV3P40: operational current in enclosure limited to 30 A. Starters consisting of a GV3P motor circuit-breaker in an enclosure conform to standards IEC/EN 60947-4-1 and IEC/EN 60947-2. Metal enclosures fitted with a padlockable rotary handle (1), for thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers GV3P, up to 30 A
Composition (2) Type Degree of Reference protection of enclosure IP55 GV3PC01 IK09 Weight kg 2.000

References (continued)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

b Metal enclosure, b Black handleLU9AP11 Padlocking in ON/OFF position b Circuit-breaker/handle adapter b Metal enclosure, b Red handleLU9AP12 Padlocking in OFF position b Circuit-breaker/handle adapter

Surface mounting

Surface mounting

IP55 IK09

GV3PC02

2.000

(1) For special applications a GV3L magnetic motor circuit-breaker can be fitted in this type of enclosure. Please consult your Regional Sales Office. (2) Components for customer assembly. Circuit-breaker to be ordered separately.

Dimensions
7,7

312

150 203,5

181

52,5 52,5

97,5

97,5

2/13

References

TeSys enclosed starters


Assembly of a safety enclosure

Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2ME and accessories

1 2 3
GV2MC

For motor circuit-breakers and accessories: see pages 3/48, 3/55 and 3/57. Starters consisting of a GV2ME motor circuit-breaker in an enclosure conform to standard IEC60947-4-1.
GV2 ME 01 ME 02 ME 03 ME 04 ME 05 ME 06 1.6 ME 07 2.5 ME 08 4 ME 10 6.3 ME 14 9 ME 16 13 ME 20 17 ME 21 21 ME 22 23

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2ME

Ithe in 0.16 0.25 0.4 enclosure (A)


500277_1

0.63 1

Enclosures for thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers GV2ME


Type Degree of protection Reference Possible number of side-mounting auxiliary contact blocks on GV2ME RH side 1 GV2MC01 1 GV2MC02 or GV2MCK04 (1) 1 GV2MC03 Weight kg 0.290 0.300 0.420 0.300

4 5 6
GV2K011

LH side Surface IP 41 1 mounting, double IP 55 1 insulated with protective conductor. Sealable cover 1 IP 55 for temperature < + 5 C

Accessories common to all enclosures (to be ordered separately)


Description Padlocking devices (2) for GV2ME operator (padlocking is only possible in the O position)
500279_1

Sold in Unit lots of reference 1 to 3 padlocks 4 1 to 8mm GV2V01

Weight kg 0.075

Mushroom Spring return (2) head Emergency Latching (2) stop IP 55 pushbutton 40mm, red

1 Key release, key n 1 455 Turn to release 1 1

GV2K011 GV2K021 GV2K031 GV2K04 (3) GV2E01

0.052 0.160 0.115 0.120 0.012

Sealing kit

For enclosures and front plate

10 IP 55 for temperature between +5C and +40C IP 55 for 10 temperature between -20C and +40C

7 8 9 10

GV2E02

0.012

GV2-K011
Neutral terminal Partition

100 50

AB1VV635UBL AB1AC6BL

0.015 0.003

(1) Enclosure GV2MCK04 is fitted with a GV2K04 mushroom head Emergency stop pushbutton as standard. (2) Supplied with IP 55 sealing kit. To be fitted with enclosure GV2Mp01. (3) Padlockable in Off position using 4 to 8 mm shank padlocks.

2/14

References (continued)

TeSys enclosed starters


Assembly of a safety enclosure

Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2ME and accessories

Assembly of a safety enclosure


(conforming to standards IEC 60974-4-1, IEC 60204 and IEC 60292)
Type of product Enclosure Circuit-breaker Undervoltage trip or INRS trip (1) Page Opposite 3/46 3/55 Reference GV2MCpp GV2MEpp GV2Apppp or GV2AXppp Mushroom head Emergency stop pushbutton 40mm, red Opposite GV2K021 or GV2K031

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

or GV2K04 (1) Safety device for dangerous machines conforming to INRS and VDE 0113.

2/15

Dimensions, mounting

TeSys enclosed starters

Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2ME

Dimensions

1 2 3 4

Surface mounting enclosure GV2 MC0p


(1)
= 147

84

93

(1) 4 knock-outs for 16 mm plastic cable gland or 16 mm conduit. Surface mounting enclosure GV2 MCK04

(1)
= 147

84 145,5

93

(1) 4 knock-outs for 16 mm plastic cable gland or 16 mm conduit.

6 7 8

Mounting
GV2 MP0p

Flush mounting enclosures GV2MP0p (panel cut-out)


GV2 MP01, MP02 GV2 MP03, MP04 Front plate GV2CP21

71
9,5

130

130

=
=

127

140

21
= 117 133

11,5

1...6 12 a
a 86

93,5 106,5

71 93

6,5

1...4 12

76 93

7,5

9 10

GV2 MP01, MP02 MP03, MP04

2/16

118

133

62

Schemes

TeSys enclosed starters

Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2ME

Schemes
GV2MEpp
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

1 2

2/T1

4/T2

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts


GVAE1
11
or

6/T3

GVAE11
21

GVAE20

3 4

13

13

13 14

12

14

14

22

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and fault signalling contacts


GVAD0110 GVAD0101 GVAD1010 GVAD1001

53

95

95

51

97

24
53

23

97 98

98

96

96

52

54

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts


GVAN11
(61) 31 43 (73)

54

Short-circuit signalling contacts


GVAM11

GVAN20
(63) 33 43 (73)

52

51

(62) 32

44 (74)

(64) 34

44 (74)

6 7 8 9

Voltage trips
GVAUppp GVASppp GVAXppp
D1 D2

D1

D2

C2

C1

E1

Wiring diagram for undervoltage trip used on potentially dangerous machines, conforming to INRS
10 AgG max

1/L1

3/L2

5/L3

D1

D2

E2

05

08 06

E2

10

2/T1

4/T2

6/T3

E1

2/17

Characteristics, references

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters with manual control, with magnetic circuit-breaker, 0.55 to 30 kW

Characteristics (1)

1 2
533740

Conforming to standards Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 Operational voltage Ue Material

IEC 60947-4, IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-102 and EN 60947 GV2 LC: IP 547 GV NGC: IP 407 GV2 LC: 690 V GV NGC: 500 V Polycarbonate (2)

References

Control by black rotary handle, padlockable in Off position (up to 3 padlocks with 8 shank, to be ordered separately)
Rating In Breaking capacity Icu conforming to IEC 60947-2 220/ 400/ 440 V 230 V 415 V kA kA kA 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 100 100 100 20 20 20 30 30 30 30 30 500 V kA 100 100 100 100 10 10 10 15 15 15 15 15 Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 13 In 13 In 13 In 13 In 13 In 13 In 13 In 12 In 12 In 12 In 12 In 12 In Reference Weight

3
GV2 LC02pp

A 1.6 2.5 4

GV2 LC0206 (3) GV2 LC0207 (3) GV2 LC0208 (3) GV2 LC0210 (3) GV2 LC0214 (3) GV2 LC0216 (3) GV2 LC0220 (3) GV NGC0225 GV NGC0232 GV NGC0240 GV NGC0250 GV NGC0263

kg 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 2.450 2.450 2.450 2.450 2.450

4 5 6 7 8

526148

6.3 10 14 18 25 32 40 50 GV NGC02pp 63

GV2 LC02pp
526149

Variants

Starters with control by red rotary handle on yellow background


Add the letter R to the references selected above. Example: GV2 LC0206 becomes GV2 LC0206R.

526148

Enclosure without circuit-breaker, with rotary handle mounted on cover


Description Black rotary handle Rating A 1.618 2563 1.618 2563 Reference GV2 LC02 GV NGC02 GV2 LC02R GV NGC02R Weight kg 0.300 0.550 0.300 0.550

9
GV2 LC02

Red rotary handle on yellow background

10
Dimensions : page 2/19

(1) Circuit-breaker characteristics: GV2 L: see pages 3/14 and 3/15. NG 125L: product marketed under the Schneider Electric brand, please consult your Regional Sales Office. (2) Avoid placing this material in contact with harsh substances (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons). (3) The following can be fitted by the customer: a GVAD or GVAM auxiliary contact block on the LH side and a GVAp trip on the RH side. Schemes : page 2/19

2/18

Dimensions, scheme

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters with manual control, with magnetic circuit-breaker, 0.55 to 30 kW

Dimensions

GV2 LC0206LC0220
=

GV NGC0225NGC0263
=

1 2

65

150

166

348

120 173

= 88

330

3 4
=

167 237

= 186,3

Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands


Enclosure type GV2 LC GV NGC At top ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or 2 x 32 or 2 x 40 At bottom ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or 2 x 32 or 2 x 40

5 6 7 8 9 10

Scheme
3/L2 4/T2 1/L1 5/L3 6/T3

References : page 2/18

2/T1

2/19

Characteristics, references

TeSys enclosed starters


2

D.O.L. starters for motor control (1)


2.2 to 45 kW, without isolating device

Characteristics

1 2 3 4 5 6
526423

Conforming to standards Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 Ambient air temperature Operating positions Material

IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-102, EN 60947 IP 659: LE2 K IP 657: LEp D09D35 IP 557: LEp D405D955 Operation: - 5+ 40 C Same as that of the contactors Polycarbonate (2): LE2 K and LEp D09D35 Sheet steel: LEp D405D955

References

Non-reversing starters
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220 V 380 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V 230 V 400 V 690 V kW kW kW kW kW kW 2.2 4 4 4 5.5 5.5 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 4 7.5 9 9 10 10 5.5 11 11 11 15 15 7.5 15 15 15 18.5 18.5 11 18.5 22 22 22 30 15 22 25 30 30 33 18.5 30 37 37 37 37 22 37 45 45 55 45 25 45 45 45 55 45 Maximum Basic reference, current to be completed by adding I the the voltage code (3) up to A 9 12 18 25 35 40 50 65 80 95 LE1 D09pp LE1 D12pp LE1 D18pp LE1 D25pp LE1 D35pp LE1 D405pp LE1 D505pp LE1 D655pp LE1 D805pp LE1 D955pp Weight

LE1 D12pp

kg 0.920 0.920 1.015 1.015 4.320 4.820 4.850 4.850 5.140 5.440

Reversing starters
1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 25 2.2 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 2.2 4 5.5 9 11 15 22 25 37 45 45 3 4 5.5 9 11 15 22 30 37 45 45 5.5 7.5 10 15 18.5 22 30 37 55 55 5.5 7.5 10 15 18.5 30 33 37 45 45 6 9 9 12 18 25 35 40 50 65 80 95 LE2 K065pp LE2 K095pp LE2 D09pp (4) LE2 D09pp LE2 D12pp LE2 D18pp LE2 D25pp LE2 D35pp LE2 D405pp LE2 D505pp LE2 D655pp LE2 D805pp LE2 D955pp 1.080 1.080 2.100 2.100 2.100 2.410 2.570 4.100 5.270 5.470 5.470 6.700 7.000
526424

LE2 D12pp

7 8 9 10
Dimensions : page 2/22 Schemes : page 2/23

(1) Overload protection must be provided by a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately, see pages 6/20 and 6/23. (2) Avoid placing this material in contact with harsh substances (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons). (3) Standard control circuit voltages. Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 a 50/60 Hz LE2 K B7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 LE1, LE2 D B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 Other voltages: please consult your Regional Sales Office. (4) Selection according to the number of operating cycles, please consult your Regional Sales Office.

2/20

References (continued)

D.O.L. starters for motor control (1) 2.2 to 45 kW, without isolating device

TeSys enclosed starters

526425

Standard versions comprise: b For non-reversing starters: v 1 green Start button I, v 1 red Stop/Reset button O.
LE1 D12ppA04

Description

1 2 3
Suffix to be added to the starter reference (2) A04 A11

b For reversing starters: v LE2 K: - 1 Start button A, - 1 Start button E, - 1 red Stop/Reset button. v LE2 D09D35: - 1 2-position spring return selector switch I-II, - 1 red Stop/Reset button O, v LE2 D405D955: - 1 blue Reset button R.

526426

LE1 D12ppA05

Variants (pre-assembled)
Description No pushbuttons on cover Application LE1 D09D955 LE2 D09D955 LE2 D405D955

526427

1 green Start button I 1 green Start button II 1 red Stop/Reset button O 1 blue Reset button R LE1 D12ppA09 1 3-position stay put selector switch (I-O-II) (I: Automatic Start; O: Stop; II: Manual Start) 1 blue Reset button R 1 2-position stay put selector switch O-I (O: Stop; I: Manual Start) 1 blue Reset button R LE1 D12ppA13 1 3-position selector switch O-I spring return to centre position (I: Manual start; O: Stop, stay put) 1 blue Reset button R 1 neutral terminal Fitted as standard on LE1 and LE2D09 to D35, LE1 and LE2D405 to D955 starters ordered with 222 V (M7), 230 V (P7) or 240 V (U7) control supply Mounting of an LC1D09 or D12 contactor in an enclosure identical to LE1D18 (3) Description Start pushbutton latching device for stay put operation (Start-Stop) (1) See previous page. (2) Example: LE1 D09F7A04. (3) See dimensions page 2/22.

4 5 6

LE1 D09D955 LE2 K06 and K09 LE2 D09D35 LE1 D09D35

A05

A09

526428

LE1 D09D35

A13

LE1 D09D35

A35

526429

LE1 D405D955 LE2 K06 and K09 LE2 D405D955

A59

7 8
Weight kg 0.060

LE1 D12ppA35

Accessory (for customer assembly)

LE1D09 LE1D12 Application LE1 D405D955

Reference LA9 D09907

9
Possible combinations of 2 variants. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

Other versions

10

Schemes : page 2/23

2/21

Dimensions

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for motor control 2.2 to 45 kW, without isolating device

Dimensions

1 2 3 4 5

LE1 D09 and D12

LE1 D09 and D12ppT LE1 D18D35 and LE2 D09D35


=

LE1 D405D655

166

150

201

c1

= = 88

c1

= = 101

183

312

c1

105 181

Standard version Variant A04 Variant A05 Variant A09 Variant A13 Variant A35

c1 128.5 135 128.5 135 135 135

Standard version Variant A04 Variant A05 Variant A09 Variant A13 Variant A35

c1 LE1 D 153.5 145 153.5 160 160 160

LE2 D 160 145 153.5

Standard version Variant A04 Variant A05

c1 161 150 161

LE2 K06 and K09


19 120

146

165

84 175

6 7

LE1 D805, LE1 D955 and LE2 D405D655


=

150

LE2 D805 and D955


=

307

165

287

c1

225 367

c1

165 257

8 9 10
Standard version Variant A04 Variant A05 Variant A11

c1 LE1 D 176 165 176

LE2 D 176 165 176

Standard version Variant A04 Variant A05

c1 194 190 194

Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands


Type of enclosure LE1 D09 and D12 LE1 D18D35 and LE2 D09D35 LE2 D405 LE1 D405D655, LE2 D505 and D655 LE1 or LE2 D805 and D955 LE2 K References : pages 2/20 and 2/21 Schemes : page 2/23 At top PG 1 x 13 and 1 x 21 1 x 13 and 1 x 29 1 x 13 and 1 x 36 2 x 13 and 2 x 16 ISO 2 x 20 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 1 x 20 and 1 x 25 1 x 20 and 1 x 32 1 x 20 and 1 x 40 4 x 20 At bottom PG 2 x 13 or 2 x 16 2 x 16 or 2 x 21 1 x 13 and 2 x 21 1 x 13 and 2 x 29 1 x 13 and 2 x 36 2 x 13 and 2 x 16 ISO 2 x 20 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 1 x 20 and 2 x 25 1 x 20 and 2 x 32 1 x 20 and 2 x 40 4 x 20

2/22

195

195

Schemes

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for motor control 2.2 to 45 kW, without isolating device

Schemes
L1 L2

LE1 D09D955
L3

LE1 D09D955
A

Variant A04 or A05


A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

KM1
O

14

KM1

2221 13
KM1

O Remote control

A1

KM1
B

KM1

A2

LE2 K06, K09


L1 L2 L3

LE2 K06, K09


A

Variant A05
A

R
O

KM1

KM2

Remote control

KM1

KM2

KM2

KM1
A1

KM2

KM1

A1

A1

A2

A2

A2

LE2 D09D955
L1 L2 L3

LE2 D09D35
A

LE2 D405D955, LE2 D09D955 with variants A04 or A05


A R

I S1
KM1 KM2

II

O Remote control
22

21

ll

KM1

KM2

KM2

KM1

A2

KM1

KM2

KM1

A1

A2
KM2

A1

KM2
A1

KM1
A1

KM2
A1

KM1
A1

8
KM2

KM1
A2 A2

KM2
B

KM1
A2 A2

Connections 220 V, 230 V, 240 V

LE2 K, LE1 and LE2 D09 and D12 LE1 and LE2 D18D955 All products LE1 and LE2 D09D35 LE2 K, LE1 and LE2 D405 and D955

A L3 L3 L3

B Neutral Neutral terminal L1

9 10

380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V Other voltages

Terminal 1 Terminal 2 Direct connection

References : pages 2/20 and 2/21

Dimensions : page 2/22

2/23

Characteristics, references

D.O.L. starters for motor control (1) 2.2 to 45 kW, with isolating device

TeSys enclosed starters

Characteristics

1 2 3 4
511547

Conforming to standards Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 Ambient air temperature Operating positions Material

IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-102, EN 60947 IP 659: LEp K IP 657: LEp D09D35 IP 557: LEp D406D806 Operation: - 5+ 40 C Same as that of the contactors Polycarbonate (2): LEp K and LEp D09D35 Sheet steel: LEp D406D806

References

Non-reversing starters
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220 V 380 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V 230 V 400 V 690 V kW 1.5 2.2 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 kW 2.2 4 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 kW 2.2 4 4 5.5 9 11 15 22 25 37 45 kW 3 4 4 5.5 9 11 15 22 30 37 45 kW 5.5 7.5 10 15 18.5 22 30 37 55 kW 18.5 30 33 37 45 Maximum Fuses to be fitted current by the customer I the Size Type aM up to A 6 9 9 12 18 25 35 40 50 65 80 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 14 x 51 14 x 51 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 A 10 12 or 12 16 20 25 32 40 63 80 80 Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (3) Weight

LE4 D12pp

5
526430

LE4 K065pp LE4 K095pp LE4 D09pp (4) LE4 D09pp LE4 D12pp LE4 D18pp LE4 D25pp LE4 D35pp LE4 D406pp LE4 D506pp LE4 D656pp LE4 D806pp (5)

kg 1.450 1.450 1.960 1.960 1.960 2.200 2.200 5.190 5.770 6.440 6.670 7.100

Reversing starters
1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 2.2 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 2.2 4 5.5 9 11 15 22 25 37 45 3 4 5.5 9 11 15 22 30 37 45 5.5 7.5 10 15 18.5 22 30 37 55 18.5 30 33 37 45 6 9 9 12 18 25 35 40 50 65 80 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 14 x 51 14 x 51 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 10 12 or 12 16 20 25 32 40 63 80 80 LE8 K065pp LE8 K095pp LE8 D09pp (4) LE8 D09pp LE8 D12pp LE8 D18pp LE8 D25pp LE8 D35pp LE2 D406pp LE2 D506pp LE2 D656pp LE2 D806pp 1.600 1.600 3.550 3.550 3.550 3.700 4.670 5.800 14.170 14.700 14.770 16.000

6 7 8 9 10
Dimensions: page 2/26 LE8 D12pp

(1) Overload protection must be provided by a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately, see pages 6/20 and 6/23. (2) Avoid placing this material in contact with harsh substances (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons). (3) Standard control circuit voltages. Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 a 50/60 Hz LEp K B7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 LEp D B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 Other voltages: please consult your Regional Sales Office. (4) Selection according to dimensions and the number of operating cycles, please consult your Regional Sales Office. (5) Supplied with 3 cable entries.

Schemes: page 2/27

2/24

References (continued)

D.O.L. starters for motor control (1) 2.2 to 45 kW, with isolating device

TeSys enclosed starters

526431

Description
Standard versions comprise: b For non-reversing starters: v LE4 K and LE4 D09D656 - 1 green Start button I, - 1 red Stop/Reset button O. v LE4 D806 - no pushbuttons on cover
LE4 D12ppA04

1 2 3
Control circuit None + 1 additional pole + 1 circuit-breaker GB2 CB08

b For reversing starters: v LE8 K : - 1 Start button A, - 1 Start button E, - 1 red Stop/Reset button. v LE8 D09D35 : - 1 2-position spring return selector switch I-II, - 1 red Stop/Reset button O, v LE2 D406 to D806: - no pushbuttons on cover.
Protection LE4 and LE8 K LE4 and LE8 D09D25 LE4 and LE2 D35D806 Power circuit 1 3-pole isolating device 1 3-pole isolating device 1 3-pole isolating device

4 5 6

526432

Variants (pre-assembled)
Description No pushbuttons on cover Application LE4 D09D656 LE8 D09D35 Suffix to be added to the starter reference (2) A04

LE4 D12ppA05

1 green Start button I 1 green Start button II 1 red Stop/Reset button O

LE2 D406D806

A11

1 blue Reset button R

LE4 D09D806 LE8 K06 and K09 LE8 D09D35 LE2 D406D806 LE4 K06 and K09 LE4 D09D806 LE8 K06 and K09 LE8 D09D35 LE2 D406D806

A05

1 neutral terminal Fitted as standard on LE4 D18D806, LE8 D18D35 and LE4 D406D806 starters ordered with 220 V (M7), 230 V (P7) or 240 V (U7) control supply

A59

7 8 9

Accessory (for customer assembly)


Description Start pushbutton latching device for stay put operation (Start-Stop) Application LE4 D406D656 Reference LA9 D09907 Weight kg 0.060

(1) See previous page (2) Example: LE4 D09F7A04.

Other versions

Possible combinations of 2 variants. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

10
Dimensions: page 2/26 Schemes: page 2/27

2/25

Dimensions

TeSys enclosed starters


D.O.L. starters for motor control 2.2 to 45 kW, with isolating device

Dimensions

2 3 4 5

165

150

348

19 20 120 c1

84 175

(1)

186

Standard version Variant A05 (1) For LE8 only

c1 LE4 K 146

LE8 K 146 139

Standard version Variant A04 Variant A05

c1 LE4 D 175.5 167 175.5

LE8 D 182 167 175.5

LE4 D406D656

LE2 D406D806, LE4 D806


= a-75 = 31

c1

330

LE4 K06 and K09, LE8 K06 and K09


31

LE4 D09D35, LE8 D09D35

31

287

195

400 (1)

342,5

350

6 7

4xM8x25
=

c1

225 367

= 31
202 c1 a-50 a a+57,5

325
c1 LE2 D 218 218

Standard version Variant A04 Variant A05

c1 201 190 201

8 9 10

a LE2 D406, D506, D656 300 LE2 D806 400 LE4 D806 400 (1) + 14 mm with blanking plugs. At top PG 1 x 13 and 1 x 21 1 x 13 and 1 x 29 1 x 13 and 1 x 36 2 x 13 and 2 x 16

Standard version Variant A05 Variant A11

LE4 D 218 218 218

Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands


Type of enclosure LE4 and LE8 D09D35 LE2 D09D35 LE2 D406 and LE4 D406 LE1 D506D656, LE4 D506 and D656 LE2 D806 and LE4 D806 LE4 K and LE8 K ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or 2 x 32 or 2 x 40 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 1 x 20 and 1 x 25 1 x 20 and 1 x 32 1 x 20 and 1 x 40 4 x 20 At bottom PG 1 x 13 and 2 x 21 1 x 13 and 2 x 29 1 x 13 and 2 x 36 2 x 13 and 2 x 16 ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or 2 x 32 or 2 x 40 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 1 x 20 and 2 x 25 1 x 20 and 2 x 32 1 x 20 and 2 x 40 4 x 20

References : pages 2/24 and 2/25

Schemes : page 2/27

2/26

Schemes

TeSys enclosed starters


D.O.L. starters for motor control 2.2 to 45 kW, with isolating device

Schemes

LE4 K06, K09 LE4 D09D806


L1 L2 L3

LE4 K06, K09


A

LE4 D09D35

LE4 D406D656

LE4 D806, LE4 D09D656 with variant A04 or A05


A

1 2

A Q1 Q1
I KM1

A F1 Q1

Q1

F1

Q1

O
O

18

KM1
I

Remote control

KM1

KM1

17

13 22 A2 14
KM1

A2

A1

KM1

A1

21

KM1 B

KM1

KM1

A2

LE8 K06, K09


L1 L2 L3

LE8 K06, K09


A Q1

Variant A05
A

A1

3 4

A1

A2

Q1
O

Remote control

KM1

KM2
KM1 KM2

KM2
KM2
A1

KM1

5
KM2

KM1

A1

A1

A2

A2

A2

LE8 D09LE2 D806


L1 L2 L3

A2

KM1

KM2

KM1

A1

LE8 D09D35
A Q1 Q1

LE2 D406D806
A

6 7

F1

Q1

Q1

I
2 KM1 KM2

II

14

S1 KM2

O Remote control ll

22 21

13

KM1

KM1 KM2
A1
KM2

KM2

8
A1

KM2
A1

KM1
A1

KM1 KM2

KM1
A2 A2

KM1
A2

A2

Connections 220 V, 230 V, 240 V

LE4 and LE8 K, LE4 and LE8 D09 and D12 LE4 D18D806, LE8 D18D35 and LE2 D406D806 All products LE4 and LE8 D09D35 LE4 and LE2 D406D806

A L3 L3 L3

B Neutral Neutral terminal L1

9 10

380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V Other voltages

Terminal 1 Terminal 2 Direct connection

References : pages 2/24 et 2/25

Dimensions : page 2/26

2/27

Characteristics, references

TeSys enclosed starters


2

D.O.L. starters for motor control 0.25 to 7.5 kW with 3-phase thermal overload relay with 3 protected phases

Characteristics (1)

1 2 3 4 5
533789

Conforming to standards Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 Ambient air temperature Operating positions Material

IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-102 and EN 60947 IP 65 Operation: - 5 to + 40 C Same as for the TeSys K contactors Self-extinguishing ABS

References
511548

Non-reversing starters Starter LE1M, combined with short-circuit protection components, provides type 1 or type 2 coordination, depending on the type of devices used.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220 V 240 V 380 V 415 V 230 V 400 V kW kW kW kW 0.12 0.12 0.25 0.25 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 1.1 1.5 2.2 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 2.2 3 4 0.37 0.55 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 Setting range of thermal overload relay LR2K (2) A 0.540.8 0.81.2 1.21.8 1.82.6 2.63.7 3.75.5 5.58 811.5 1014 1216 Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (3) LE1 M35pp05 LE1 M35pp06 LE1 M35pp07 LE1 M35pp08 LE1 M35pp10 LE1 M35pp12 LE1 M35pp14 LE1 M35pp16 LE1 M35pp21 LE1 M35pp22 Weight

kg 0.600 0.600 0.600 0.600 0.600 0.600 0.600 0.600 0.600 0.600

LE1 M35pppp

3 3.7

6 7 8 9 10

Description

b v v v v v

The standard version comprises: 1 TeSys contactor LC1Kpp, 1 TeSys thermal overload relay LR2K, 1 green Start button I, 1 red Stop/Reset button O/R, 1 yellow operating indicator.

Variant

b Control may be pulsed or maintained. b An earth terminal and a neutral terminal are provided on the bottom of the enclosure. b For safey applications, see enclosed starters: GV2MC, LG1K, LG1D, LG7K, LG7D, LJ7K, LG8K and LJ8 K. Starter without thermal overload relay LR2 K Delete the last 2 digits of the starter references selected above. Example: LE1 M35pp
Description Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (3) LC1 KppA80 Weight kg 0.180

Replacement part

Contactor

(1) For characteristics of TeSys K contactor, see pages 5/10 and 5/13. For characteristics of TeSys thermal overload relay LR2K, see pages 6/10 to 6/11. (2) Thermal overload relay fitted as standard. (3) The contactor coil is pre-wired between 2 phases of the power circuit. The codes indicated below therefore correspond to the power circuit voltage. Volts 24 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 a 50/60 Hz Code B7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 Example: 380/400 V 3-phase supply, 4 kW motor: LE1 M35Q716. Dimensions : page 2/29 Schemes : page 2/29

2/28

Dimensions, schemes

TeSys enclosed starters


2

D.O.L. starters for motor control 0.25 to 7.5 kW with 3-phase thermal overload relay with 3 protected phases

Dimensions
LE1 M35 (1)
108
78

1 2
130 (5"1/8)

160

3 4
ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25

Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands


Enclosure type LE1 M At top PG 2 x 13 to 2 x 21 ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 At bottom PG 2 x 13 to 2 x 21

(1) Can be mounted on machine panel or frame. Knock-outs for 4 x 13 P cable glands.

Schemes
LE1 M35
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
L1 L2 L3

Choice of type of control built into the product


Control by latching pushbuttons
A

5 6 7 8 9 10

Control by spring return pushbuttons


A

1 3 5 I

13
KM1

13
I I
13

A1

KM1

14

95

O/R

A2 96

2 4

14 A2

Reset/OR

O/R

A1

T1 T2 T3

Connection 220 V, 230 V, 240 V 380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V Other voltages

A L3 L3 Terminal 1

A1

KM1

H1

KM1

A2

96

95

KM1

H1

14

B Neutral L1 Terminal 2

References : page 2/28

2/29

Characteristics, references

TeSys enclosed starters


2

D.O.L. starters for motor control, 0.37 to 5.5 kW with thermal magnetic circuit-breaker and contactor

Characteristics

1 2 3 4

Conforming to standards Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 Ambient air temperature Operating positions Material

IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-102 and EN 60947 IP 55 Operation: - 5 to + 40 C Same as for the TeSys K contactors Polycarbonate (1) Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 230 V 400/ 440 V 500 V 690 V 415 V kW kW kW kW kW 0.18 0.37 0.37 0.37 0.75 0.25 0.55 0.55 0.55 1.1 0.75 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 0.75 0.75 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 Setting range of thermal trips A 11.6 Fixed magnetic tripping current 13 Irth A 22.5 Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) Weight

References

526440

LE1 GVME06Kpp

kg 1.210

533798

1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914

33.5 51 78 138 170

LE1 GVME07Kpp LE1 GVME08Kpp LE1 GVME10Kpp LE1 GVME14Kpp LE1 GVME16Kpp

1.210 1.210 1.210 1.210 1.210

LE1 GVMEppKpp

2.2 3

5
526441

Variants
Description Neutral terminal Suffix to be added Weight to the starter reference (3) kg A59 Reference LE1 GVMEK Weight kg 0.740

6
LE1 GVMEK

Description Enclosure without starter, with sealing kit fitted (references of combination motor starters for customer assembly, see pages 1/6 and 1/7) Description Sold in lots of 1 1 Key release, key n 455 Turn to release 1 1 1 10

Accessories (to be ordered separately)

7 8 9 10
Dimensions : page 2/31 Schemes : page 2/31

Padlocking device (4) for GV2 ME operator (padlocking is only possible in the O position) Mushroom Spring return (4) head Stop pushbutton Latching (4) 40 mm, IP 55 red Sealing kit

1 to 3 padlocks 4 to 8 mm

Unit reference GV2 V01 GV2 K011 GV2 K021 GV2 K031 GV2 K04 (5) GV2 E01

Weight kg 0.075 0.052 0.160 0.115 0.120 0.012

IP 55 for temperature between +5C and +40C IP 55 for 10 GV2 E02 0.012 temperature between -20C and +40C (1) Avoid placing this material in contact with harsh substances (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons). (2) Standard control circuit voltages. Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 a 50/60 Hz Item B7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 Other voltages: please consult your Regional Sales Office. (3) Example: LE1 GVME06KF7A59. (4) Supplied with IP 55 sealing kit. (5) Padlockable in position O using 4 to 8 mm shank padlocks.

2/30

Dimensions, schemes

TeSys enclosed starters


2

D.O.L. starters for motor control, 0.37 to 5.5 kW with thermal magnetic circuit-breaker and contactor

Dimensions
LE1 GVMEK

1
183 201

2
= 101 =

86 94

Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands


Enclosure type LE1GV At top ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 At bottom ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25

3 4
A

Schemes

LE1 GVMEK
L1 L2 L3

Q1
Q1

5
KM1

External control

KM1

KM1

A2

A1

6 7 8 9 10

Connections 220 V, 230 V, 240 V 380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V Other voltages

A L3 L3 Terminal 1

B Neutral L1 Terminal 2

References : page 2/30

2/31

Characteristics, references

TeSys enclosed starters


2

Star-delta starters 5.5 to 132 kW, without isolating device (1)

Characteristics

1 2 3
526435

Conforming to standards Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 Ambient air temperature Operating positions Material

IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-102, EN 60947 IP 659: LE3 K IP 657: LE3 D09D35 IP 557: LE3 D405D150 Operation: - 5 to + 40 C Same as that of the contactors Polycarbonate (2): LE3 K and LE3 D09D35 Sheet steel: LE3 D405D150

References

Maximum operating rate: LE3 K: 12 starts/hour and LE3-D: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds. LE3 D: an LAD S2 timer imposes a delay of 40 ms 15 ms on the delta contactor at the moment of changeover to ensure that the star contactor has sufficient breaking time.
Standard power ratings of squirrel cage motors Mains voltage - delta connection 220 V 380/400 V 415 V 440 V kW kW kW kW 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 4 7.5 7.5 7.5 or Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (3) LE3 K065pp LE3 K095pp LE3 D09pp (4) LE3 D12pp LE3 D18pp LE3 D35pp LE3 D405pp LE3 D505pp LE3 D805pp LE3 D115pp LE3 D150pp Weight

4 5
LE3 D12pp

kg 1.460 1.460 3.650 3.650 3.750 5.160 8.160 8.150 14.000 24.500 24.500

5.5 11 15 18.5

11 18.5 30 37 55 75 110 132

11 22 30 37 59 75 110 132

11 22 30 37 59 75 110 147

6 7 8 9 10
Dimensions : page 2/34 Schemes : page 2/35

30 37 63 75

(1) Overload protection must be provided by a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/20 and 6/23. (2) Avoid placing this material in contact with harsh substances (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons). (3) Standard control circuit voltages. Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 a 50/60 Hz LE3 K B7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 LE3 D B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 Other voltages: please consult your Regional Sales Office. (4) Selection according to dimensions and the number of operating cycles, please consult your Regional Sales Office.

2/32

References (continued)

TeSys enclosed starters

Star-delta starters 5.5 to 132 kW, without isolating device

526436

The standard version comprises: b LE3 K and LE3 D09D35: v 1 green Start button I, v 1 red Stop/Reset button O. b LE3 D405D150: v no pushbuttons on cover.

Description

1 2
Application LE3 D09D35 LE3 D405D150 Suffix to be added to the starter reference (1) A04 A06

Variants (pre-assembled)
Description LE3 D12ppA04 No pushbuttons on cover 1 green Start button I 1 red Stop/Reset button O 1 blue Reset button R

526437

3 4 5

LE3 D09D805

A05

1 neutral terminal Fitted as standard on starters LE3 D115 and D150 Mechanical interlock Fitted as standard on starters LE3 K and LE3 D09D35 LE3 D12ppA05 (1) Example: LE3D09F7A04

LE3 K065 and K095 A59 LE3 D09D805

LE3 D405 to D150

A64

Other versions

Possible combinations of 2 variants. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

6 7 8 9 10

Schemes : page 2/35

2/33

Dimensions

TeSys enclosed starters

Star-delta starters 5.5 to 132 kW, without isolating device

Dimensions

2 3 4 5 6 7

165

150

348

146

84 175

186

Standard version Variant A04 Variant A05

c1 175.5 167 175.5

LE3 D405 and D505

LE3 D805D150
= a - 75 =

c1

330

LE3 K065, K095


19 120

LE3 D09D35

287

195

b + 57,5

c1

225 367

=
=

c1 c1 + 15,5

b - 50

b (1)

a - 50 a a + 57,5

b - 75
b 400 600 600 LE3 Standard version Variant A05 Variant A06 c1 D805 202 218 218

Standard version Variant A05 Variant A06

c1 190 194 194

LE3 a D805 400 D1155 500 D1505 500 (1) + 14 mm with blanking plugs. At top PG 1 x 29 1 x 36 1 x 36 2 x 13 and 2 x 16

D115, D150 252 268

8 9 10

Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands


Type of enclosure LE3 D09D35 LE3 D405 LE3 D505 LE3 D805 LE3 K ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or 2 x 32 or 2 x 40 1 x 32 1 x 40 1 x 40 4 x 20 At bottom PG 1 x 29, 2 x 13 and 2 x 21 1 x 36, 2 x 13 and 2 x 29 2 x 13 and 3 x 36 2 x 13 and 2 x 16 ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or 2 x 32 or 2 x 40 1 x 32, 2 x 20 and 2 x 25 1 x 40, 2 x 20 and 2 x 32 2 x 20 and 3 x 40 4 x 20

References : pages 2/32 and 2/33

Schemes : page 2/35

2/34

Schemes

TeSys enclosed starters

Star-delta starters 5.5 to 132 kW, without isolating device

Schemes
L1 L2

LE3 K065 and K095


L3

A
W1 U1 V1

1
O I

KM2

KM3

KM1

KM2 KM1

W1

U1

V1

KM3
Recommended cabling for reversal of motor rotation (standard motor, viewed from shaft end).

KM1

2
KM2

W2

U2

V2

T
A1 A1 A1 A1

W2

U2

V2

T
A2

KM1
A2 A2

KM3
A2

3
LE3 D405D805
A

LE3 D09D805
L1 L2 L3

LE3 D09D35
A

U1

V1

W1

O
KM2 KM3 KM1

KM2 KM1

W2

U2

V2

18

17

U1

V1

W1

KM2
Recommended cabling for reversal of motor rotation (standard motor, viewed from shaft end).

KM3
A1 A1

W2

A1

A1

A1

U2

V2

KM1
A2

KM2
A2

KM3
A2

KM1
A2

KM2
A2

KM3
A2

A1

Note: in accordance with current installation regulations, short-circuit protection must be provided by fuses or a circuit-breaker.

LE3 D115 and D150


L1 L2 L3

U1

18

17

KM2

KM3

KM1

V1

W1

Remote control l

KM1 KM1 KM2 KM3

KM2

W2

U2

V2

W1

U1

V1

KM1

Recommended cabling for reversal of motor rotation (standard motor, viewed from shaft end).

KM2
A1 A1

KA1
A1

W2

U2

V2

F2
B

KM1
A2

A1

KM2
A2

KA1
A2

KM3
A2

Connections 220 V, 230 V, 240 V

LD09 and D12 LE3D18 to D150 All products LE3D09D35 LE3K and LE3D405D150

A L3 L3 L3

B Neutral Neutral terminal L1

380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V Other voltages

Terminal 1 Terminal 2 Direct connection

References : pages 2/32 and 2/33

Dimensions : page 2/34

Y
KM2

4
Remote control I

KM2

KM1

KM2 KM3

KM2 KM1

5 6 7 8 9 10

KM1

2/35

Characteristics, references

Star-delta starters (1) 7.5 to 75 kW with isolating device

TeSys enclosed starters

Characteristics

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Conforming to standards Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 Ambient air temperature Operating positions Material

IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-102, EN 60947 IP 657: LE6 D09D18 IP 557: LE3 D326D806 Operation: - 5 to + 40 C Same as that of the contactors Polycarbonate (2): LE6 D Sheet steel: LE3 D

References

Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds. An LA2 DS2 timer imposes a delay of 40 ms 15 ms on the delta contactor at the moment of changeover to ensure that the star contactor has sufficient breaking time.
Standard power ratings of squirrel cage motors. Mains voltage - Delta connection 220 V 380 V 415 V 440 V 400 V kW kW kW kW 4 7.5 7.5 7.5 5.5 11 15 18.5 11 18.5 30 37 55 75 11 22 30 37 59 75 11 22 30 37 59 75 Fuses to be fitted Basic reference, by the customer to be completed by adding the voltage code (3) Size Type aM A 20 25 40 63 80 125 160 Weight

511549

10 x 38 10 x 38 14 x 51 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 0

LE6 D09pp LE6 D12pp LE6 D18pp LE3 D326pp LE3 D406pp LE3 D506pp LE3 D806pp

kg 3.900 3.900 4.850 7.650 16.900 17.000 27.500

LE6 D12pp

30 37

(1) Overload protection must be provided by a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/20 and 6/23. (2) Avoid placing this material in contact with harsh substances (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons). (3) Standard control circuit voltages. 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 Volts 50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 Other voltages: please consult your Regional Sales Office.

Dimensions: page 2/38

Schemes: page 2/39

2/36

References (continued)

TeSys enclosed starters


Star-delta starters 7.5 to 75 kW, with isolating device

526438

The standard version comprises: b LE6 D09D18: v 1 green Start button I, v 1 red Stop/Reset button O. b LE3 D326D806: v no pushbuttons on cover
Protection LE6 D09 and D12 LE6 D18LE3 D806 LE6 D12ppA04 Power circuit 1 3-pole isolating device 1 3-pole isolating device Control circuit + 1 additional pole + 1 circuit-breaker GB2 CB08

Description

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Variants (pre-assembled)
Description No pushbuttons on cover Application LE6 D09D18 Suffix to be added to the starter reference (1) A04

526439

1 green Start button I 1 red Stop/Reset button O 1 blue Reset button R

LE3 D326D806

A06

LE6 D09LE3 D806

A05

1 neutral terminal

LE6 D09LE3 D806

A59

LE6 D12ppA05

Mechanical interlock Fitted as standard on starters LE6 D09D18 (1) Example: LE6 D09F7A04.

LE3 D326D806

A64

Dimensions: page 2/38

Schemes: page 2/39

2/37

Dimensions

TeSys enclosed starters

Star-delta starters 7.5 to 75 kW, with isolating device

Dimensions

1 2 3 4 5

LE6 D09D18

LE3 D326
=

348

330

367

c1

= 186
c1 175.5 167 175.5

31

190

195 287

= 31

Standard version Variant A04 Variant A05

LE3 D406D806
= a-75 = 31

b+57,5

b (1)

b-50

6
c1

4xM8x25
=

a-50 a a+57,5
(1) + 14 mm with blanking plugs.

b-75

7 8 9 10

LE3 D406, D506 D806

a 400 500

b 500 700

=
c1 218 269

Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands


Type of enclosure LE6 D09D18 LE3 D326 LE3 D406 LE3 D506 LE3 D806 At top PG 1 x 21 1 x 29 1 x 36 1 x 36 ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or 2 x 32 or 2 x 40 1 x 32 1 x 32 1 x 40 1 x 40 At bottom PG 2 x 13, 2 x 16 and 1 x 21 2 x 13, 2 x 21 and 1 x 29 2 x 13, 2 x 29 and 1 x 36 2 x 13 and 3 x 36 ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or 2 x 32 or 2 x 40 2 x 20, 2 x 25 and 1 x 32 2 x 20, 2 x 25 and 1 x 32 1 x 40, 2 x 20 and 2 x 32 2 x 20 and 3 x 40

References : pages 2/36 and 2/37

Schemes : page 2/39

2/38

225

Schemes

TeSys enclosed starters

Star-delta starters 7.5 to 75 kW, with isolating device

Schemes
3/L2 1/L1

LE6 D09D18
5/L3

A Q1 Q1

1 2 3
A2 A1
KM3

Q1
2 4 6

4 V1

U1

W1

O
3 3 5 5 3 1 1 1 5

KM2
2 4

KM3
6 6 2 4 2 4

KM1

l
W2 V2

KM2

U2

KM1
U1 V1 W1

KM2
Recommended cabling for reversal of motor rotation (standard motor, viewed from shaft end)

KM2 KM1

KM3

W2

U2

V2

A1

KM1

KM2

A2

A2

A1

4 5 6
KM2 KM1

LE3 D326D806
3/L2 5/L3

1/L1

A F1 Q1

Q1

U1

V1

W1

KM2

KM3

KM1

W2

U2

V2

13 22
KM2

S1 Remote control

14
KM1 KM2 KM3

U1

V1

W1

A2

A2

A2

Recommended cabling for reversal of motor rotation (standard motor, viewed from shaft end)

21

KM1

KM2

KM3

7 8 9 10

W2

U2

V2

A1

A1

Connections 220 V, 230 V, 240 V

LE6 D09 and D12 LE6 D18LE3 D806 All products LE6 D09D18 LE3 D326D806

A L3 L3 L3

A1

B Neutral Neutral terminal L1

380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V Other voltages

Terminal 1 Terminal 2 Direct connection

References : pages 2/36 and 2/37

Dimensions : page 2/38

2/39

References

TeSys enclosed starters

Replacement parts for starters without isolating device

500118_1

Heads for Start and Stop/Reset pushbuttons


Description Flush, green I (1) For use on LE1 D09...D35 Unit reference ZB5 AA331 Weight kg 0.018

1 2 3

ZB5 AA331

Projecting, red O (1)

LE1 D09...D35

ZB5 AL432

0.019

500120_1

Adaptation kit for head ZB5AL432

LE1 D09 and D12

LAD 9091

0.002

LE1 D18...D35

LAD 91810

0.003

ZB5 AL432

Heads for Reset pushbuttons


Flush, blue R(2) LE1 D09...D35 ZB5 AA0 0.022

500117_1

4
Adaptation kit for head ZB5AA0 + ZBA639 LE1 D09 and D12

+ZBA 639 (3)

0.001

LAD 9092

0.002

5 6
500119_1

LE1 or LE2 D18...D35 LAD 9091 LE3, LE6, LE4 or LE8 D09...D35

LAD 91810

0.003

LAD 9T4

0.004

Heads for selector switches


3-position stay put ZB5 ADp LE1 D09...D35 ZB5 AD3 0.024

2-position stay put

LE1 D09...D35

ZB5 AD2

0.024

7 8 9 10

500121_1

3-position spring return to centre

LE1 D09...D35

ZB5 AD5

0.024

Contact blocks
1 N/O spring return ZEN L1111 1 N/C spring return LE1 D09...D35 ZEN L1121 0.010 LE1 D09...D35 ZEN L1111 0.010

500122_1

Mounting for contact block

LE1 D09 and D12

LAD 90909

0.008

LEp D18...D35 (4)

LAD 91809

0.014

ZEN-L1111
LAD 91809 (1) Remember to order adaptation kit LAD 9091 or LAD 91810, depending on size. (2) Remember to order adaptation kit LAD 9092. (3) Sold in lots of 10. (4) LE1, LE2, LE3, LE4, LE6 or LE8.

2/40

References (continued)

TeSys enclosed starters

Replacement parts for starters without isolating device

511551

Empty enclosures for D.O.L. starters without isolating device


Designed for use with LE1 D09 and D12 Head(s) mounted on cover Without Reference DE1 DS1A04 Weight kg 0.300

1 2 3

1 flush blue head R

DE1 DS1A05

0.300

DE1 DS1A04

511552

1 flush green head I 1 projecting red head O

DE1 DS1

0.300

4
1 flush blue head R 1 switch DE1 DS1A13 0.300

DE1 DS1A05

5
LE1 D18...D35 Without DE1 DS2A04 0.500

511553

6
1 flush blue head R DE1 DS2A05 0.500

7 8 9 10

DE1 DS1 1 flush green head I 1 projecting red head O DE1 DS2 0.500

511554

1 flush blue head R 1 switch

DE1 DS2A13

0.500

DE1 DS1A13

2/41

References

Star-delta starters (1) 90 to 375 kW, without isolating device

TeSys enclosed starters

533866

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Maximum operating rate: 12 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 20 seconds


Standard power ratings of squirrel cage motors Mains voltage - delta connection 220 V 380 V 415 V 440 V kW kW kW kW 90 160 160 185 100 110 200 220 280 315 200 220 280 355 220 250 315 375 Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) (3) LE3 F185pp LE3 F225pp LE3 F265pp LE3 F330pp LE3 F400pp Weight

Star-delta starters

kg 31.400 33.000 50.800 80.000 82.000

533867

160 185

Specifications
Enclosure No pushbuttons on cover Connections LE3 Fppppp LE3 F185F400 Metal, degree of protection IP 559 LE3 F185F400 LE3 F185F400 Pre-wired power and control circuit connections

Variants (pre-assembled)
Description 1 green Start button I 1 red Stop/Reset button O For use on LE3 F185F400 Suffix to be added to the starter reference(4) A06

(1) Overload protection must be provided by a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/34 and 6/35. (2) Standard control circuit voltages. 48 110 220/230 230 240 380/400 400 415 Volts 50/60 Hz E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 For other voltages, see pages 5/130 to 5/137. (3) LC1 F185 and F225: contactors fitted with LX9 F coils, LC1 F265F400: contactors fitted with LX1 F coils. (4) Example: LE3 F185M7A06.

Other versions

Possible combinations of 2 variants. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

Dimensions : page 2/43

Schemes : page 2/43

2/42

Dimensions, schemes

TeSys enclosed starters

Star-delta starters 90 to 375 kW, without isolating device

Dimensions
LE3 Fppp
= a-75 =

1
=

b+57,5

b (1)

b-50

4xM8x25

b-75

2 3 4 5

c c1

a-50 a a+57,5

LE3 a b (1) F185, F225 600 700 F265 700 900 F330, F400 800 1000 (1) + 14 mm with blanking plugs.

c 303 303 403

c1 319 319 419

Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands Type of enclosure At top LE3 F185, F225 2 x 48 P LE3 F265400

At bottom 2 x 13 P and 4 x 48 P

Schemes
LE3 Fppp
L1 L2 L3

F1 KM3:5 F1
21 96
95

4 V1

U1

W1

O
Remote control

6
KM2
53 54 53

W2

U2

V2

l
14

13

KM2

KM3

KM1

22

KM1
U1 V1 W1
Recommended cabling for reversal of motor rotation (standard motor, viewed from shaft end)

KM1
62

55

54 (14)

7
KA1
14 13

(13)

KM2
61 56

KM2
68

67

61

KM3
A1 62 A1 A1 A1

8
KM2 KA1
A2 A2

W2

U2

V2

A2

KM3:1

A2

F2

KM1

KM3

Note: in accordance with current installation regulations, each starter must be provided with short-circuit protection by fuses or a circuit-breaker.

9 10

References : page 2/42

2/43

References

TeSys enclosed starters

Equipment for control in utilisation category AC-1(1) (2), without isolating device

References

1 2
LE1 D123
511550

Operational Minimum current c.s.a. of up to phase conductors A 16 17.5 24 32 mm2 2.5 1.5 2.5 6 10 10 16 16 25 35

Fuses to be fitted separately aM A 20 25 63 80 100 gG A 16 32 50 63 100

For use with relay LR2 D or kit LA9 D (to be ordered separately) LA9 D1275 (4) LR2 D1321 (3) LR2 D1322 (3) LA9 D0975 (4) LR2 D3359 (3) LR2 D3363 (3) LR2 D3365 (3)

Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) LE1 D123pp LE1 D123pp LE1 D255pp LE1 D255pp LE1 D405ppA04 (5) LE1 D405pp LE1 D655ppA04 (5) LE1 D655pp LE1 D805pp LE1 D805ppA04 (5)

Weight

kg 0.920 0.920 1.015 1.015 4.820 4.820 4.850 4.850 5.140 5.140

3
526421

50 57 63 76 90

4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Dimensions : page 2/46

100 LE1 D405

Specifications
Enclosure LE1 D12 LE1 D25 LE1 D40...D80 Control (2 pushbuttons mounted on enclosure cover) No pushbuttons on cover Connections LE1 D12D80 LE1 DpppppA04 LE1 D12D80 Pre-wired control circuit connections Double insulated, degree of protection IP 659 Double insulated, degree of protection IP 557 Metal, degree of protection IP 559 1 green Start button I 1 red Stop/Reset button O

(1) 3-phase 220/230 V, 240 V, 380/400 V or 415 V 50/60 Hz. 3-core or 3 Ph + N (unprotected neutral) insulated PVC cable, fixed to walls, ceilings, in cable racks or ducting, laid singly, ambient temperature y 35 C, conforming to NF C 15-100. (2) Control circuit voltage 50/60 Hz 220/230 V (code M7) or 380/400 V (code Q7). (3) Order the required LR2 D thermal overload relay separately, for use on balanced circuits only. (4) As protection is provided by type gG fuses only, the Stop function normally provided by the thermal overload relay (where aM type fuses are used) can be obtained by means of kit LA9 Dpp75. (5) Equipment supplied without pushbuttons; external Start-Stop station required.

Schemes : page 2/47

2/44

References (continued)

TeSys enclosed starters

Equipment for control in utilisation category AC-1(1) (2), without isolating device

Variants (pre-assembled)
Description No pushbuttons on cover Application LE1 D12 and D25 Suffix to be added to the starter reference (3) A04

1 2 3 4

1 blue Reset button R

LE1 D12D80

A05

1 green Start button I and 1 red Stop button O with 1 N/C contact (for distribution circuits without thermal overload relay) 1 2-position selector switch O-I (O: Stop; I: Manual Start) 1 blue Reset button R Knock-outs for 4 x 16 mm plastic cable glands (instead of 4 x 13 mm plastic glands) 1 neutral terminal (for 3-phase + N circuits)

LE1 D12 and D25

A07

LE1 D12

A13

LE1 D12

A20

LE1 D12D80

A59

Accessories (for customer assembly)


Description Start pushbutton latching device for stay put operation (Start-Stop) Kits to provide Stop function without thermal overload relay fitted For use on LE1 D25D65 Reference LA9 D09907 Weight kg 0.060

LE1 D12 LE1 D25

LA9 D1275 LA9 D0975 LA9 D931 LA9 D941

0.040 0.020 0.040 0.025

5 6 7 8 9 10

Miniature control circuit fuse holder size 5 x 20, 4 A/250 V Fuse supplied

LE1 D12 LE1 D25

Pilot light with neon bulb, red lens and locking ring

110 V 220 V 380, 415 V

LE1 D12 and D25 LE1 D12 and D25 LE1 D12 and D25

LA9 D924 LA9 D925 LA9 D926

0.020 0.020 0.020

1 front-mounting block of 2 auxiliary contacts, please consult your Regional Sales Office

LE1 D12 D80

LA1 DNpp

0.030

(1) 3-phase 220/230 V or 380/400 V 50/60 Hz. 3-core or 3 Ph + N (unprotected neutral) insulated PVC cable, fixed to walls, ceilings, in cable racks or ducting, laid singly, ambient temperature y 35 C, conforming to NF C 15-100. (2) Order the required LR2 D thermal overload relay separately, for use on balanced circuits only. Example: LE1 D123M7A04.

. Other versions Possible combinations of 2 variants. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

Dimensions : page 2/46

Schemes : page 2/47

2/45

Dimensions

Enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters and equipment, without isolating device

Dimensions

1 2 3 4

LE1 D123

LE1 D255
=

166

150

140

88

142

101

LE1 D405, D655


=

LE1 D805
= 307

120

= =

135

185

165

312

195

150

105 181

165 c1

165 257

5 6 7 8 9 10

161 (1)

(1) 150 for LE1 DpppppA04 (without pushbuttons).

Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands


Type of enclosure LE1 D123 LE1 D255 LE1 D405 and LE1 D655 LE1 D805 At top 2 x 13 P 1 x 13 P and 1 x 16 P 1 x 13 P and 1 x 29 P 1 x 13 P and 1 x 36 P At bottom 2 x 13 P 2 x 16 P 1 x 13 P and 2 x 29 P 1 x 13 P and 2 x 36 P

References : pages 2/44 and 2/45

Schemes : page 2/47

2/46

165

Schemes

Enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters and equipment, without isolating device

Schemes

D.O.L. starters and equipment for control in category AC-1


LE1 D123D805, LE1 DpppppA04
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

LE1 D123
KM1/5

1
O

KM1

96

95

KM1

13

KM1

KM1/1

A2

A1

13

2 3 4
KM1

LE1 D255D805
KM1/5

LE1 DpppppA04, LE1 DpppppA05


KM1/5

95

Remote control

18

14

13 22

KM1

17

13

21 96

96

95

14

14

14

KM1

N KM1/1

KM1

A2

A1

KM1/1

A2

13

A1

14

5 6 7 8 9 10

References : pages 2/44 and 2/45

Dimensions : page 2/46

2/47

References

TeSys enclosed starters

Equipment for control in utilisation category AC-1 (1) (3), with isolating device

526419

References
Operational current up to A 16 Minimum c.s.a. of phase conductors mm2 2.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 10 10 16 16 25 35 Fuses to be fitted by the customer Size Type aM gG A A 10 x 38 16 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 14 x 51 14 x 51 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 20 25 50 80 100 20 40 63 100 For use with relay LR2 D or kit LA9 D (to be ordered separately) LA9 D0975 (4) LR2 D1321 (3) LA9 D0975 (4) LR2 D1322 (3) LR2 D3357 (3) LR2 D3363 (3) LR2 D3365 (3) Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) LE4 D126pp LE4 D126pp LE4 D256pp LE4 D256pp LE4 D406ppA04 (5) LE4 D406pp LE4 D656ppA04 (5) LE4 D656pp LE4 D806pp (5) LE4 D806pp (5) Weight

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

kg 1.960 1.960 2.200 2.200 5.770 5.770 6.670 6.670 7.100 7.100

17.5 LE4 D126 20 22


526420

40 45 63 LE4 D406 76 90 100

Specifications
Enclosure LE4 D12 and D25 LE4 D40D80 Control (2 pushbuttons mounted on enclosure cover) LE4 D12D65 Double insulated, degree of protection IP 557 Metal, degree of protection IP 559 1 green Start button I 1 red Stop/Reset button O LE4 Dppppp A04 LE4 D80 LE4 D12 and D25 LE4 D40D80 Connections LE4 D12D80 1 3-pole isolator + 1 additional pole 1 3-pole isolator and 1 circuit breaker GB2 CB08 Pre-wired power and control circuit connections

No pushbuttons on cover Isolating device with external operator

(1) 3-phase 220/230 V or 380/400 V 50/60 Hz. 3-core or 3 Ph + N (unprotected neutral) insulated PVC cable, fixed to walls, ceilings, in cable racks or ducting, laid singly, ambient temperature y 35 C, conforming to NF C 15-100. (2) Control circuit voltage 50/60 Hz 220/230 V (code M7) or 380/400 V (code Q7). (3) Order the required LR2 D thermal overload relay separately, for use on balanced circuits only. (4) As protection is provided by type gG fuses only, the Stop function normally provided by the thermal overload relay (where aM type fuses are used) can be obtained by means of kit LA9 D0975. (5) Equipment supplied without pushbuttons; external Start-Stop station required.

Dimensions : page 2/50

Schemes : page 2/51

2/48

References (continued)

TeSys enclosed starters

Equipment for control in utilisation category AC-1 (1) (2), with isolating device

Variants (pre-assembled)
Description No pushbuttons on cover For use on LE4 D12 and D25 Suffix to be added to the starter reference(3) A04

1 2 3

1 blue Reset button R

LE4 D12D80

A05

1 green Start button I and 1 red Stop button O with 1 N/C contact (for distribution circuits without thermal overload relay) 1 neutral terminal (for 3-phase + N circuits)

LE4 D12 and D25

A07

LE4 D12D80

A59

Accessories (for customer assembly)


Description Start button latching device for stay put operation (Start-Stop) Kit to provide Stop function without thermal overload relay fitted Miniature control circuit fuse holder size 5 x 20, 4 A/250 V Fuse supplied Pilot light with neon bulb, red lens and locking ring 110 V 220 V 380, 415 V For use on LE4 D12D65 Reference LA9 D09907 Weight kg 0.060

LE4 D12 and D25

LA9 D0975

0.020

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

LE4 D12 and D25

LA9 D941

0.025

LE4 D12 and D25 LE4 D12 and D25 LE4 D12 and D25

LA9 D924 LA9 D925 LA9 D926

0.020 0.020 0.020

1 front-mounting block of 2 auxiliary contacts, please consult your Regional Sales Office

LE4 D12D80

LA1 DNpp

0.030

(1) 3-phase 220/230 V or 380/400 V 50/60 Hz. 3-core or 3 Ph + N (unprotected neutral) insulated PVC cable, fixed to walls, ceilings, in cable racks or ducting, laid singly, ambient temperature y 35 C, conforming to NF C 15-100. (2) Order the required LR2 D thermal overload relay separately, for use on balanced circuits only. (3) Example: LE4 D126M7A04.

Other versions

Possible combinations of 2 variants. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

Dimensions : page 2/50

Schemes : page 2/51

2/49

Dimensions

Enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters and equipment, with isolating device

Dimensions

1 2

LE4 D126, D256


=

LE4 D406, D656

280

260

= 122

c c1 (1)

G a

= 31

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

c1

31

LE4 D126 D256

c 132 144

c1 139 151

(1) c1 = c for LE4 DpppppA04 (without pushbuttons).

LE4 D806
= a-75 = 31

b+57,5

b (1)

b-50

4xM8x25

c c1

a-50 a a+57,5

(1) + 14 mm with blanking plugs.

Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands


Type of enclosure LE4 D126 LE4 D256 LE4 D406 LE4 D656 LE4 D806 At top 2 x 13 P 1 x 13 P and 1 x 16 P 1 x 13 P and 1 x 21 P 1 x 13 P and 1 x 29 P 1 x 13 P and 1 x 36 P At bottom 2 x 13 P 2 x 16 P 1 x 13 P and 2 x 21 P 1 x 13 P and 2 x 29 P 1 x 13 P and 2 x 36 P

References : pages 2/48 and 2/49

Schemes : page 2/51

2/50

b-75

Schemes

Enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters and equipment, with isolating device

Schemes

D.O.L. starters and equipment for control in category AC-1


LE4 D126D806, LE4 DpppppA04
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

LE4 D126 and D256


Q1/2 0 Q1 9 Q1

1 2 3 4 5
KM1
14
13 14

KM1

18

KM1

17

KM1

LE4 D406 and D656


Q1/2
13

Q1/6

LE4 D806, LE4 DpppppA04 and DpppppA05


Q1/2 13 F1 Q1
95
Remote control

A2
14

F1

Q1
14

A1

13

14

96

95

14

Q1

13

95

18

14

l
17

KM1
13

A1

A2

13

22

96

21

96

N Q1/6

KM1
A2

N Q1/1

KM1
A1

6 7 8 9 10

References : pages 2/48 and 2/49

Dimensions : page 2/50

2/51

References

TeSys enclosed starters

integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers, for customer assembly
Empty metal enclosure
Type of enclosure Degree of protection IP 54 with drillings for door interlock mechanism (interlock not supplied), for customer assembly (1)

526411

1 2 3
DE1LT315

For use on integral

Reference DE1LT315

Weight kg 3.510

LD1LD or LD4LD

Door interlock mechanisms (IP 54)


Type For use on enclosure DE1LT315 (LD1) Non-adjustable

Colour of knob Red Black

Reference LA9LC320 LA9LC321 LA9LC520 LA9LC521

Weight

kg

0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200

DE1LT315 (LD4)

Red Black

4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Dimensions : page 2/53

(1) Enclosures supplied with drillings and fitted with removable blanking plugs, for addition of cable glands (to be ordered separately): for number and diameters, see page 2/53.

2/52

Dimensions, mounting of accessories

TeSys enclosed starters

integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers, for customer assembly

Empty metal enclosure, degree of protection IP 54

1 2

367

69

190

192 287

225

Number of blanked-off cable entries for addition of cable glands


At top 1 1 bottom 2 2 Cable min. 10 24 max. 12 30 For cable gland N 13 36 Type 13M 36M

3 4 5
105 275

Non-adjustable door interlock mechanisms LA9LC33p and LA9LC53p


For mounting on LD4 LDp30 and LD5 LDp30 LD4LDp30 (1) LD5LDp30

105

243

6 7 8 9 10

65

105

54

172 (LD4) 174 (LD5)

= 28 = = = 90

105

45 59 63 181 59

Door drillings

= = 54 (1) Thickness: 5 mm max.

References : page 2/52

= = 54

105

2/53

Characteristics

Enclosed starters

integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers

1 2 3 4 5 6

Type Number of poles Rated operational current (Ie) Rated operational voltage (Ue) Electrical durability, AC-43 at 415 V Mechanical durability at Uc a Maximum operating rate at ambient temperature c With converter y 55 C

A V

integral 63 3 63 in AC-3 690 1.2 million operating cycles 5 million operating cycles 3600 operating cycles/hour 600 operating cycles/hour

Environment
Conforming to standards IEC: 60947-1, 60047-2, 60947-3, 60947-4-1, 60947-6-2 VDE: 0100, 0110, 0113, 0170, 0171, 471, 0660 BS: 5424, 4752, 4941 NEN, NBN ASE, ASEFA, ASTA, BV, CSA, DEMKO, DNV, GL, NEMKO, NKK, VE, RINA, SCC, SETI, UL, USSR, LROS, PTB, SEMKO a c (1) Vibration resistance Permissible acceleration Shock resistance Permissible acceleration Degree of protection Flame resistance Maximum operating altitude Operating positions (without derating) Without derating In relation to normal vertical mounting plane m 5100 Hz Impulse duration: 11 ms Conforming to IEC 144 and 529 Conforming to VDE 0106 Operation Storage Operation Storage C C C C TH - 20+ 60 - 40+ 80 - 25+ 50 - 25+ 70 Energised state: 3 gn De-energised state: 3 gn Energised state: 8 gn De-energised state: 8 gn IP 20B Protection against direct finger contact Conforming to IEC 60295-2-1, NF C 20-455 and the requirement of 22-12-81 (JO 27 NC of 1st and 2/2/1982) and conforming to UL 94 - V0 and NF T 51-072 3000

Product certifications

Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device

From main axis (left-right tilt)

Control circuit characteristics

7 8 9 10

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Voltage limits at q y 55 C Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc

Heat dissipation Operating time (2) at 20 C and at Uc

a 50 Hz a 60 Hz c With converter Operating Drop-out a Inrush Sealed c (1) Inrush Sealed a 50 Hz a C 50/60 Hz O c (1) C O

V V V

VA VA W W W ms ms ms ms

24660 24600 24, 48, 110 0.851.1 Uc 0.250.7 Uc 375 (50 Hz), 450 (60 Hz) 25 (50 or 60 Hz) 300 for 50 ms 8 8 (50 Hz) 11 (60 Hz) 1235 720 2540 1525

(1) With converter. (2) The closing time C is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time O is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.

References : pages 2/56 to 2/59

Dimensions : page 2/60

Schemes : page 2/61

2/54

Characteristics (continued)

Enclosed starters

integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers

Pole characteristics
Type Rated thermal current (Ith) Frequency limits of the operational current Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Heat dissipation in the power circuits of the contactor breaker and its protection module Rated making capacity Rated breaking capacity conforming to IEC 60947-2 q y 40 C A Hz Conforming to IEC 60947-4 Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Operational current Power per pole, hot state kV V A W integral 63 63 4060 8 690 25 4.4

1 2 3 4 5
LB1 LD03L Distribution circuits

32 5

40 5.8

50 7

63 9

I rms conforming to IEC 60947-4 A I peak conforming to IEC 60947-2 kA Operational voltage V Value of cos j Icu (O-t CO) Ics (O-t-CO-t-CO) Icu = Ics (O-t-CO-t-rCO)

12 or 15 x Ith (1) 105 220/ 240 380/ 415

440

480/ 525

600/ 690

Conforming to IEC 60947-6-2 ensuring continuity of service

0.25 kA rms 50 kA rms 50 kA rms 50 O t CO rCO ms A 2s

0.25 0.25 0.25 0.5 50 40 35 10 50 40 35 10 50 50 30 10 : breaking short-circuit current (open) : time : closing on short-circuit, breaking short-circuit current (closed-open) (manual) : closing on short-circuit, breaking short-circuit current (remote control)

Total breaking time Thermal stress limit Cabling

With Isc max. at 415 V, 50 Hz

Tightening torque

Flexible cable without cable end mm2 Flexible cable with cable end mm2 Solid cable mm2 N.m

4 300 x 103 Maximum c.s.a. 1 x 50 or 2 x 35 2 x 25 1 x 50 6

Minimum c.s.a. 1x6 1x6 1x6

Characteristics of thermal-magnetic or magnetic only protection modules


Module type Protection Standard motors, frequent starting, distribution circuits Conforming to standards Number of poles Number of protected poles Rated operational voltage Maximum continuous current Setting range (Irth min./Irth max.) Temperature compensation Protection against phase imbalance Tripping class Instantaneous trip current setting range Tripping tolerance LB1 LD03P Standard motors LB1 LD03M Standard motors LB6 LD03P Frequent starting

Thermal protection

V A A C

IEC 60947-4 type 2 (Iq = 50 kA) and NF C 63-650 63-650 3 3 3 3 690 690 1363 1363 10/13... 45/63 10/13... 45/63 - 20+ 60 With 20 Fixed at 15 20 %

6 7 8 9 10

63-650 3 3 690 1363

63-120 3 3 690 1363 10/13... 45/63

With 20 612 (2)

Without 612

Without 36

Magnetic protection conforming to IEC 60947-1/2/4/6-2

Irth max.

Characteristics of versions with control test function and padlocking facility


Conforming to standards Rated operational voltage Mechanical durability Padlocking V Operating cycles IEC 60947, NF C 63-130, VDE 0660, VDE 0113 690 10 000 1, 2 or 3 padlocks (shank 8 mm max. and 5 mm min.). When flush mounting, interlocking of the enclosure or cabinet door is possible.

(1) Above this value, the breaker trips. (2) Usual setting range 910 Irth max.

References : pages 2/56 to 2/59

Dimensions : page 2/60

Schemes : page 2/61

2/55

References

Enclosed starters

integral 63 contactor breakers for control and protection of motors

526404

3-pole contactor breakers without protection module (1)


Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-43 220 V 400 V 440 V 500 V 660 V 240 V 415 V kW kW kW kW kW Operational current Breaking capacity (Iq) for Ue y 415 V kA Basic reference, to be completed by adding the control voltage code (2) Weight

1 2

kg

With control test function and padlocking facility


Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO) Emergency Stop 15 30 33 33 37 55 63 50 LD4 LD030p 3.800

LD4 LD030p
526405

3 4

3-pole reversing contactor breakers without protection module (1)


Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-43 220 V 400 V 440 V 500 V 660 V 240 V 415 V kW kW kW kW kW Operational current Breaking capacity (Iq) for Ue y 415 V kA Basic reference, to be completed by adding the control voltage code (2) Weight

kg

With control test function and padlocking facility


Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO) Emergency Stop 15 LD5 LD030p (1) For the unit to function, it must be fitted with a protection module, to be ordered separately, see page opposite. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 24 36 42 48 110 120 220 230 240 380/ 400 415 440 480 500 50 Hz 60 Hz B BC BD CC D E CE ED F K FD FC M LC M MC U MC Q N N UX Q S 30 33 33 37 55 63 50 LD5 LD030p 7.600

5 6 7 8 9 10
Characteristics : pages 2/54 and 2/55

600 S

660 Y

c (3)

(3) For use on d.c., the unit is supplied with 1 or 2 converters, including coil suppression devices (2 converters for reversing contactor breakers).

Dimensions : page 2/60

Schemes : page 2/61

2/56

References

Enclosed starters

integral 63 contactor breakers

Motor protection modules (for customer assembly)

533936

Thermal-magnetic protection, compensated and differential for normal starting motors


Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220 V 400 V 440 V 480/ 600/ 240 V 415 V 525 V 690 V kW kW kW kW kW Thermal setting range (Irth min. to Irth max.) A 10...13 13...18 18...25 23...32 28...40 35...50 45...63 10...13 13...18 18...25 23...32 28...40 35...50 45...63 Reference Magnetic setting range (6...12 Irth max) A 78...156 108...216 150...300 190...380 240...480 300...600 380...760 LB1 LD03P16 LB1 LD03P21 LB1 LD03P22 LB1 LD03P53 LB1 LD03P55 LB1 LD03P57 LB1 LD03P61 LB1 LD03M16 LB1 LD03M21 LB1 LD03M22 LB1 LD03M53 LB1 LD03M55 LB1 LD03M57 LB1 LD03M61 Weight

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

LB1 LD03Mpp

kg 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780

Fixed magnetic protection, set at 15 Irth max


3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15
533936

5.5 9 11 15 22 25 33 5.5 9 11 15 22 25 33

5.5 9 11 15 22 25 33 5.5 9 11 15 22 25 33

7.5 11 15 18.5 25 33 40 7.5 11 15 18.5 25 33 40

10 15 18.5 22 33 45 55 10 15 18.5 22 33 45 55

Adjustable magnetic protection from 6 to 12 Irth max

Magnetic only protection, for frequent starting motors


Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220 V 400 V 440 V 480/ 600/ 240 V 415 V 525 V 690 V kW kW kW kW kW 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 5.5 9 11 15 22 25 33 5.5 9 11 15 22 25 33 7.5 11 15 18.5 25 33 40 10 15 18.5 22 33 45 55 Thermal setting range (Irth min. to Irth max.) A Reference Magnetic setting range (6...12 Irth max) A 78...156 108...216 150...300 190...380 240...480 300...600 380...760 LB6 LD03M16 LB6 LD03M21 LB6 LD03M22 LB6 LD03M53 LB6 LD03M55 LB6 LD03M57 LB6 LD03M61 Weight

LB6 LD03Mpp

kg 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780

Adjustable magnetic protection from 6 to 12 Irth max

Characteristics : pages 2/54 and 2/55

Dimensions : page 2/60

Schemes : page 2/61

2/57

References

Enclosed starters

integral 63 contactor breakers for control and protection of resistive circuits in category AC-1
3 and 4-pole contactor breakers without protection module (1)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Characteristics : pages 2/54 and 2/55

Rated thermal current Ith q y 40 C A

Maximum operational current AC-1 q y 40 C A

Maximum operational voltage V

Breaking capacity Iq for Ue y 415 V kA

Number of poles

Basic reference, to be completed by adding the control voltage code (2)

Weight

kg

With control test function and padlocking facility


Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO) Emergency Stop 63 63 690 50 3 LD4 LD030p 3.800

Protection modules (for customer assembly)


Thermal-magnetic (compensated)
Thermal setting range (Irth min. to Irth max.) A 10...13 13...18 LB1 LD03Lpp 18...25 23...32 28...40 35...50 45...63 Magnetic setting range (3...6 Irth max) A 39...78 54...108 75...150 95...190 120...240 150...300 190...380 Number of poles 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Number of protected poles 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Reference Weight kg 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780

533937

LB1 LD03L16 LB1 LD03L21 LB1 LD03L22 LB1 LD03L53 LB1 LD03L55 LB1 LD03L57 LB1 LD03L61

(1) For the unit to function, it must be fitted with a protection module, to be ordered separately. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 50 Hz 60 Hz c (3) 24 B BC BD 36 CC 42 D 48 E CE ED 110 F K FD 120 FC 220 M LC 230 M MC 240 U MC 380/ 400 Q 415 N 440 N UX 480 Q 500 S 600 S 660 Y

(3) For use on d.c., the unit is supplied with a converter, including coil suppression device.

Dimensions : page 2/60

Schemes : page 2/61

2/58

References

Enclosed starters

integral 63 contactor breakers

Auxiliary contact blocks and accessories

526407

Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks (IP 20)


For use on Type and number of blocks per unit Composition Reference Weight

1 2

LD4 or LD5 Mounted on RH side integral + LA1 LC030

1 block of 6 instantaneous contacts comprising: 3 signalling contacts contactor state 1 signalling contact tripped on short-circuit 1 signalling contact tripped 1 signalling contact control knob in any position other than Auto 1 block of 5 instantaneous contacts comprising: 3 signalling contacts contactor state 1 signalling contact tripped 1 signalling contact tripped on short-circuit

LA1 LC010 2 1 1 1 1 LA1 LC012 2 1 1 1

kg 0.280

0.220

3
Reference Weight

526408

Isolating blocks
For use on Type and number of blocks per unit Composition

4
1 LA1 LC030 kg 0.035

LD4 Mounted on LH side integral + LA1 LC010 + LA1 LC070p LD5 Mounted on LH side

1 control circuit isolating block (1 or 2 blocks per unit) 1 control circuit isolating block

LA1 LC031

0.100

5 6 7

Electrical tripping devices


For use on Type and number of blocks per unit Function Basic reference, to be completed by adding the control voltage code (1) Weight

LD4 or LD5 fitted with an LA1 LC010 or LA1 LC012 add-on block
526409

1 undervoltage trip

Time delay LA1 LC070p 0.2 s Instantaneous LA1 LC072p Instantaneous LA1 LC071p

kg 0.150 0.150 0.150

or 1 shunt trip

Remote electrical reset devices


For use on LD4 or LD5 fitted with an LA1 LC010 or LA1 LC012 add-on block integral + LA1 LC012 + LA1 LC052p Type and number of blocks per unit 1 remote electrical reset block Control voltage 24 V 50/60 Hz 42 V 50 Hz 48 V 50/60 Hz 100/127 V 50/60 Hz 200/240V 50/60 Hz Reference LA1 LC052B LA1 LC052E LA1 LC052F LA1 LC052M Weight kg 0.320 0.320 0.320 0.320

8 9 10

(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 24 48 110 120 220/230 240 380/ 400 50 Hz B E F M U Q 60 Hz B E F F M M Q

415 N

440 N N

Characteristics : pages 2/54 and 2/55

Dimensions : page 2/60

Schemes : page 2/61

2/59

References, dimensions

TeSys enclosed starters


integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers Enclosures

References

1 2 3
Dimensions
Metal enclosure DE1LT315

Empty metal enclosure


Type of enclosure For use on Reference DE1LT315 Weight

kg

Degree of protection IP54 (1) LD4LD130p with drillings for door interlock LD4LD030p mechanism (interlock not supplied). For customer assembly

3,510

Door interlock mechanism (IP54)


Type Non-adjustable For use on enclosure DE1LT315 Colour of knob Red Reference LA9LC520 Weight

kg

0,200

(1) Enclosure supplied with drillings and fitted with removable blanking plugs, for addition of cable glands (te be ordered separately): for number and diameters, see below.

4
367 225 =

5
69 190 = 195 287 =

Number of blanked-off cable entries


= At Top 1 1 Bottom 2 2 Cable min. 10 24 max. 12 30 For cable gland N 13 36 Type 13M 36M

6 7

Non-adjustable door interlock mechanism LA9LC52p


integral 63, for mounting on LD4 LD030 and LD5 LD030 LD4LD030 (2) LD5LD030

105

243

65

105

8 9 10

54

172 (LD4) 174 (LD5)

= 28 = = = 90

105

45 59 63 181 59

Door drillings

= = 54

(2) thickness 5 mm max. Schemes : page 2/61

2/60

= = 54

105

105 275

schemes

TeSys enclosed starters


integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers Enclosures

Contactor breakers with protection module LBp


LD4 LD030 + LB1 LD03p
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

Reversing contactor breakers with protection module LBp


LD5 LD030 + LB1 LD03M or LD03P
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

1
A2

A1

A2

A1

A2

A1

Q1

2 3

2/T1

4/T2

6/T3

2/T1

4/T2

LB6 LD03M
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3

LB6 LD03M
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3

6/T3

4 5 6 7 8

Add-on blocks
Mounted on LH side Mounted on LH side
LA1 LC030 (64) (63) 54 53 53 Isolator

For contactor breaker LD4 and reversing contactor breaker LD5 Mounted on RH side
Breaker LA1 LC010 13 23 31 LA1 LC012 13 23 31 LA1 LC020 13 23 31 LA1 LC025 13 23 31 LA1 LC001 41 42

14

24

32

14

24

32

14

24

14

24

54

96

98

98

1 or 2 LA1LC030

Trip signalling

32

98

95

95

95

Mounted on LH side
LA1 LC031 53 63 Isolator

06

08

16

Control knob position signalling

Tripping devices (1) for LD4, LD5 LA1LC071


C1

Remote electrical reset devices (1) for LD4, LD5 LA1LC052p


Aut o Tri p+ RES ET
B4 B2 B3

LA1LC070, LC072
D1

U< C2 D2

15

18

Auto

+0

54

64

05

B1

05

08

Short-circuit signalling

95

For reversing contactor breaker LD5

96

32

9 10

(1) For contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers already fitted with an LA1 LC010 or LA1 LC012 instantaneous auxiliary contact block.

References, dimensions : page 2/60

2/61

References

TeSys enclosed starters

Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control for use on a machine subject to the application of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE (1)
Non-reversing starters (with pushbutton control of isolation)
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220/ 400/ 230 V 415 V kW kW 0.06 Circuit-breaker Setting range of thermal trips A 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 Dust & damp protected starter Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) (3) LG7 K06pp02 LG7 K06pp03 LG7 K06pp04 LG7 K06pp05 LG7 K06pp06 LG7 K06pp07 LG7 K06pp08 LG7 K06pp10 LG7 K09pp14 LG7 D12pp16 LG7 D18pp20 LG7 D18pp21 Weight

1 2 3

526414

440 V kW 0.06 0.12 0.18 0.37 0.55 1.1 1.5 3 4 5.5 9 9

kg 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.450 1.600 1.630 1.630

LG7 K06

0.06 0.12 0.25 0.37

0.09 0.18 0.25 0.55 0.75 1.5 2.2 4 5.5 7.5 9

526415

0.75 1.1 1.5 3 4 LG7 D12 with padlocking facility fitted as standard 4

6 7 8 9 10
Dimensions : page 2/66

Specifications Functions performed by the starter: b isolation, b locking of isolation fitted as standard as from LG7 K09, b lockable Emergency Stop (1/4 turn) (3), b short-circuit protection, b overload protection, b pushbutton control: 1 white Start button I and 1 black Stop button O, b degree of protection of enclosure: IP 657, double insulated. Switching back on of power supply after tripping must be by a deliberate action. A GV2 SNpp indicator light may be added (to be assembled by customer), please consult your Regional Sales Office. For supply voltages between 380 and 415 V (codes Q7, V7 or N7) the control circuit is pre-wired between phases. For other supply voltages, the control circuit must be wired by the customer.

Variants (pre-assembled) See page 2/65.


(1) Compliance with a harmonised European standard assumes conformity with the corresponding directive, provided that installation, building in and/or assembly of the starter is carried out correctly by the machine manufacturer. Harmonised European standards: EN 60947 and EN 60439. Conformity to international standards: IEC 60947 and IEC 60439. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):

LG7 K
Volts a 12 50/60 Hz Code J7 24 B7 36 C7 42 D7 48 E7 110 F7 127 FC7 220/ 230 M7 230 P7 230/ 240 U7 380/ 400 Q7 400 V7 400/ 415 N7 440 R7 500 S7 660/ 690 Y7

LG7 D
Volts a 24 50/60 Hz Code B7 42 D7 48 E7 110 F7 220/ 230 M7 230 P7 240 U7 380/ 400 Q7 400 V7 415 N7 440 R7

(3) LG7 K06: the mushroom head type Emergency Stop acts mechanically on the circuit-breaker. LG7 K09, D12, D18: the Emergency Stop function is performed by an undervoltage trip, acting on the circuit-breaker. This circuit-breaker is always supplied pre-wired for use on 380/415 V 50 Hz. For a 60 Hz supply, please consult your Regional Sales Office.

Other versions

Starters for voltages other than those indicated above. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

Schemes : page 2/67

2/62

References (continued)

TeSys enclosed starters

Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control for use on a machine subject to the application of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE (1)

Non-reversing starters (with rotary operator for control of isolation) Enclosure cannot be opened when energised in position I.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220/ 400/ 230 V 415 V kW kW 0.06 0.06 0.12 0.25 0.37 0.75 1.1 1.5 3 4 4 0.09 0.18 0.25 0.55 0.75 1.5 2.2 4 5.5 7.5 9 Circuit-breaker Setting range of thermal trips A 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 Dust & damp protected starter Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) LG1 K065pp02 LG1 K065pp03 LG1 K065pp04 LG1 K065pp05 LG1 K065pp06 LG1 K065pp07 LG1 K065pp08 LG1 K065pp10 LG1 K095pp14 LG1 D122pp16 LG1 D182pp20 LG1 D182pp21 Weight

526416

1 2 3 4

440 V kW 0.06 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.55 1.1 1.5 3 4 5.5 9 9

LG1 K

kg 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970 1.120 1.270 1.290 1.290

Specifications Functions performed by the starter: b isolation, b locking of isolation, b lockable Emergency Stop (red/yellow switch disconnector), b short-circuit protection, b overload protection, b pushbutton control: 1 white Start button I and 1 black Stop button O, b degree of protection of enclosure: IP 657, double insulated. Switching back on of power supply after tripping must be by a deliberate action. A GV2 SNpp indicator light may be added (to be assembled by customer), please consult your Regional Sales Office. For supply voltages between 380 and 415 V (codes Q7, V7 or N7) the control circuit is pre-wired between phases. For other supply voltages, the control circuit must be wired by the customer.

6 7 8 9 10

See page 2/65.

Variants (pre-assembled)

(1) Compliance with a harmonised European standard assumes conformity with the corresponding directive, provided that installation, building in and/or assembly of the starter is carried out correctly by the machine manufacturer. Harmonised European standards: EN 60947 and EN 60439. Conformity to international standards: IEC 60947 and IEC 60439. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):

LG1 K
Volts a 12 50/60 Hz Code J7 24 B7 36 C7 42 D7 48 E7 110 F7 127 FC7 220/ 230 M7 230 P7 230/ 240 U7 380/ 400 Q7 400 V7 400/ 415 N7 440 R7 500 S7 660/ 690 Y7

LG1 D
Volts a 24 50/60 Hz Code B7 42 D7 48 E7 110 F7 220/ 230 M7 230 P7 240 U7 380/ 400 Q7 400 V7 415 N7 440 R7

Other versions

Starters for voltages other than those indicated above. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

Dimensions : page 2/66

Schemes : page 2/67

2/63

References (continued)

TeSys enclosed starters

Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control for use on a machine subject to the application of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE (1)

526417

Reversing starters (with pushbutton control of isolation)


Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220/ 400/ 230 V 415 V kW kW 0.06 LG8 K06 0.06 0.12 0.25 0.37 0.09 0.18 0.25 0.55 0.75 1.5 2.2 4 5.5 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.55 1.1 1.5 3 4 5.5 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 LG8 K06pp03 LG8 K06pp04 LG8 K06pp05 LG8 K06pp06 LG8 K06pp07 LG8 K06pp08 LG8 K06pp10 LG8 K09pp14 LG8 K12pp16 1.640 1.640 1.640 1.640 1.640 1.640 1.640 1.640 1.640 Circuit-breaker Setting range of thermal trips A 0.160.25 Dust & damp protected starter Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) (3) LG8 K06pp02 Weight

1 2 3 4

440 V kW 0.06

kg 1.640

0.75 1.1 1.5 3

526418

LG8 K09 with padlocking facility fitted as standard

6 7 8 9 10
Dimensions : page 2/66

Specifications of reversing starters Functions performed by the starter: b isolation, b locking of isolation fitted as standard as from LG8 K09, b Emergency stop (3), b short-circuit protection, b overload protection, b control by selector switch 1-2, position non maintained, b degree of protection of enclosure: IP 657, double insulated. Switching back on of power supply after tripping must be by a deliberate action. A GV2 SNpp indicator light may be added (to be assembled by customer), please consult your Regional Sales Office. For supply voltages between 380 and 415 V (codes Q7, V7 or N7) the control circuit is pre-wired between phases. For other supply voltages, the control circuit must be wired by the customer.

Variants (pre-assembled) See page 2/65.


(1) Compliance with a harmonised European standard assumes conformity with the corresponding directive, provided that installation, building in and/or assembly of the starter is carried out correctly by the machine manufacturer. Harmonised European standards: EN 60947 and EN 60439. Conformity to international standards: IEC 60947 and IEC 60439. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts a 12 24 36 42 48 110 127 220/ 230 230/ 380/ 400 400/ 440 500 660/ 50/60 Hz 230 240 400 415 690 Code J7 B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 FC7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 S7 Y7 (3) LG8 K06: the mushroom head type Emergency Stop acts mechanically on the circuit-breaker. LG8 K09: the Emergency Stop function is performed by an undervoltage trip, acting on the circuit-breaker. This circuit-breaker is always supplied pre-wired for use on 380/415 V 50 Hz. For a 60 Hz supply, please consult your Regional Sales Office.

Other versions

Starters for higher power ratings. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

Schemes : page 2/67

2/64

References (continued)

TeSys enclosed starters

Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control for use on a machine subject to the application of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE (1)

Variants
Description With Emergency Stop No control pushbuttons With Emergency Stop 2 pushbuttons with arrows A and E (latching) 1 Stop button O Without Emergency Stop 2 pushbuttons with arrows A and E (non latching) Without Emergency Stop With Emergency Stop, mushroom head Application LG1, LG7, LG8 Suffix to be added to the starter reference (2) A04

1 2 3 4

LG8 K06

A10

LG8

A14

LG1

A37

Without Emergency Stop (when the Emergency Stop is on the machine) With padlocking facility (fitted as standard as from LG1 K09 or LG7 K09) 1 neutral terminal Fitted as standard on starters ordered for use on 240 V (U7) supply Short-circuit signalling block

LG7, LG8

A39

LG1 K06, LG7 K06 LG1, LG7, LG8

A29 A59

LG7

A12

Vacuum valve for compressor

LG7 D

A40

Without circuit-breaker

LG1, LG7, LG8

(3)

Possible combinations of variants for the selected starter type (4)


Starter type LG1 K LG7 K06 LG7 K09 LG7 D12 LG8 K06 A04 A10 A12 A14 A29 A37 (5) A39 A40 A59

6 7 8

LG8 K09

Combination possible

Combination not possible

(1) Compliance with a harmonised European standard assumes conformity with the corresponding directive, provided that installation, building in and/or assembly of the starter is carried out correctly by the machine manufacturer. Harmonised European standards: EN 60947 and EN 60439. Conformity to international standards: IEC 60947 and IEC 60439. (2) Example: LG7 D12M716A04. (3) Delete the last 2 digits of the selected starter reference. Example: LG1 K065pp08 becomes LG1 K065pp. (4) Example: LG8 K095ppA04A39A59. (5) LG1 K06: the mushroom head type Emergency Stop acts mechanically on the circuit-breaker. LG1 K09, D12, D18: the Emergency Stop function is performed by an undervoltage trip, acting on the circuit-breaker. This circuit-breaker is always supplied pre-wired for use on 380/415 V 50 Hz. For a 60 Hz supply, please consult your Regional Sales Office.

9 10

2/65

Dimensions

Safety control and protection solutions

Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control for use on a machine subject to the application of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE
Starters without isolator

1 2

LG1 K06, K09 LG1 D12, D18

LG7 K06, K09, D12, D18 LG8 K06, K09, K12


120 (1)

(2)
150
150 165

120

84 175

146 (2) 177 (1)

84 175

3 4

165

(1) Emergency Stop for starters < 3 kW (2) Emergency Stop for starters u 3 kW (3) Only for LG7

Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands


Type of enclosure LG1 K and LG1 D LG7 K and LG7 D LG8 K At top 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P At bottom 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P

6 7 8 9 10
References : pages 2/62 to 2/65 Schemes : page 2/67

2/66

165

(3)

Schemes

Safety control and protection solutions


2

Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control for use on a machine subject to the application of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE
D.O.L. starters
L3 L2

LG1 K06, K09, D12, D18


L1

380/400 V, code Q7 or 400/415 V, code N7 220/230 V, code M7


Ph

LG1 K06, K09, D12, D18

1 2 3 4

Q1

2 T3

4 T2

6 T1

KM1/1

13

KM1

S1

14

5 5

1 1

3 3

S2

U1 2

V1 4

W1 6

KM1 KM1/5 N

LG7 K06
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

LG7 K09, D12, D18

A1

A2

KM1

12

11

14

13

Q2

1/L1

3/L2

5/L3

380/400 V, code Q7 or 400/415 V, code N7 220/230 V, code M7


D1 D2

LG7 K06, K09, D12, D18

Q1

Ph KM1/1

Q1

13

KM1

S1

14

F1
E1 E2

KM1
2 4 6
U1 2 V1 4 W1 6

W1

U1

V1

KM1 KM1/5 N

A1

A2

12

KM1

S2

11

14

13

6 7 8
21 12 11
KM1

Reversing starters
LG8 K06
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

LG8 K09, K12


1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

D1

Q1
Q1

D2

380/400 V, code Q7 or 400/415 V, code N7 220/230 V, code M7


Ph KM2/5

LG8 K06, K09, K12

E1

E2

S1

KM2

21

KM1

KM2

S2

54

14

14

KM1

S2

KM2

A1 53

A1 53

54

10

13

02

13

KM1

KM2

9 10

22

A2

KM2/1 N

References : pages 2/62 to 2/65

Schemes : page 2/66

2/67

A2

KM1

KM2

22

References

TeSys enclosed starters

Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control for use on a machine subject to the application of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE
Non-reversing starters with integral transformer

511544

1 2 3 4
LJ7 K

Compliance with a harmonised European standard assumes conformity with the corresponding directive, provided that installation, building in and/or assembly of the starter is carried out correctly by the machine manufacturer. Harmonised European standards: EN 60947 and EN 60439. Conformity to international standards: IEC 60947 and IEC 60439. Starters pre-wired for operation on a 3-phase 380 to 400 V 50 Hz supply
Dust and damp protected starter Reference (1) LJ7 K06Q702 LJ7 K06Q703 LJ7 K06Q704 LJ7 K06Q705 LJ7 K06Q706 LJ7 K06Q707 LJ7 K06Q708 LJ7 K06Q710 LJ7 K09Q714 Weight

(with pushbutton control of isolator function) Standard power ratings of 3-phase Circuit-breaker motors 50 Hz in category AC-3 Setting range of thermal trips 380/400 V kW 0.06 0.09 0.18 0.25 0.55 0.75 1.5 2.2 4 A 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610

kg 2.270 2.270 2.270 2.270 2.270 2.270 2.270 2.270 2.270

6 7 8 9 10
Dimensions : page 2/70

Specifications Functions performed by the starter: b isolation, b locking of isolation fitted as standard on LJ7 K09, b lockable Emergency Stop (1/4 turn) (2), b short-circuit protection, b overload protection, b pushbutton control: 1 white Start button I and 1 black Stop button O, b terminal allowing connection of a volt-free contact, if required, in the control circuit, b degree of protection of enclosure: IP 657, double insulated. Switching back on of power supply after tripping must be by a deliberate action. A GV2 SNpp indicator light may be added (to be assembled by customer), please consult your Regional Sales Office. Integral transformer: 400/24 V, 25 VA.

Variants (3)
Description With Emergency Stop No control pushbuttons Without Emergency Stop LJ7 (when the Emergency Stop is on the machine) With padlocking facility LJ7 K06 (fitted as standard on LJ7 K09) Without circuit-breaker LJ7 For use on LJ7 Suffix to be added to the starter reference (4) A04 A39 A29 (5)

(1) In the reference, the voltage code Q7 (380/400 V) indicates the power supply voltage to which the starter will be connected, it being assumed that the contactor has a a 24 V coil (see control circuit scheme). (2) LJ7 K06 (P y 3 kW at 400 V): the mushroom head type Emergency Stop acts mechanically on the circuit-breaker. LJ7 K09 (P > 3 kW at 400 V): the Emergency Stop function is performed by an undervoltage trip GV AX385, acting on the circuit-breaker. This circuit-breaker is always supplied pre-wired for use on 380/400 V 50 Hz. (3) Possible combination of variants A04, A29 and A39 on starters LJ7 K06. Example: LJ7 K06Q702A04A29A39. Possible combination of variants A04 and A39 on starters LJ7 K09Q714A04A39. (4) Example: LJ7 K06Q702A04. (5) Delete the last 2 digits of the selected starter reference. Example: LJ7 K06Q702 becomes LJ7 K06Q7.

Other versions

Starters for voltages other than those indicated above. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

Schemes : page 2/71

2/68

References (continued)

TeSys enclosed starters

Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control for use on a machine subject to the application of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE

511545

Compliance with a harmonised European standard assumes conformity with the corresponding directive, provided that installation, building in and/or assembly of the starter is carried out correctly by the machine manufacturer. Harmonised European standards: EN 60947 and EN 60439. Conformity to international standards: IEC 60947 and IEC 60439. Starters pre-wired for operation on a 3-phase 380 to 400 V 50 Hz supply
Dust and damp protected starter Reference (1) LJ8 K06Q702 LJ8 K06Q703 LJ8 K06Q704 LJ8 K06Q705 LJ8 K06Q706 LJ8 K06Q707 LJ8 K06Q708 LJ8 K06Q710 LJ8 K09Q714 Weight

Reversing starters with integral transformer

1 2 3 4

LJ8 K

(with pushbutton control of isolator function) Standard power ratings of 3-phase Circuit-breaker motors 50 Hz in category AC-3 Setting range of thermal trips 380/400 V kW 0.06 0.09 0.18 0.25 0.55 0.75 1.5 2.2 4 A 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610

kg 2.650 2.650 2.650 2.650 2.650 2.650 2.650 2.650 2.650

Specifications Functions performed by the starter: b isolation, b locking of isolation fitted as standard on LJ8 K09, b lockable Emergency Stop (1/4 turn) (2), b short-circuit protection, b overload protection, b pushbutton control: 1 white Start button I and 1 black Stop button O, b terminal allowing connection of a volt-free contact, if required, in the control circuit, b degree of protection of enclosure: IP 657, double insulated. Switching back on of power supply after tripping must be by a deliberate action. A GV2 SNpp indicator light may be added (to be assembled by customer), please consult your Regional Sales Office. Integral transformer: 400/24 V, 25 VA.

6 7 8 9 10

Variants (3)
Description With Emergency Stop No control pushbuttons Without Emergency Stop (when the Emergency Stop is on the With padlocking facility (fitted as standard on LJ8 K09) Without circuit-breaker For use on LJ8 LJ8 LJ8 K06 LJ8 Suffix to be added to the starter reference (4) A04 A39 A29 (5)

(1) In the reference, the voltage code Q7 (380/400 V) indicates the power supply voltage to which the starter will be connected, it being assumed that the contactor has a a 24 V coil (see control circuit scheme). (2) LJ8 K06 (P y 3 kW at 400 V): the mushroom head type Emergency Stop acts mechanically on the circuit-breaker. LJ8 K09 (P > 3 kW at 400 V): the Emergency Stop function is performed by an undervoltage trip GV AX385, acting on the circuit-breaker. This circuit-breaker is always supplied pre-wired for use on 380/400 V 50 Hz. (3) Possible combination of variants A04, A29 and A39 on starters LJ8 K06. Example: LJ8 K06Q702A04A29A39. Possible combination of variants A04 and A39 on starters LJ8 K09. Example : LJ8 K09Q714A04A39. (4) Example: LJ8 K06Q702A04. (5) Delete the last 2 digits of the selected starter reference. Example: LJ8 K06Q702 becomes LJ8 K06Q7.

Other versions

Starters for voltages other than those indicated above. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

Dimensions : page 2/70

Schemes : page 2/71

2/69

Dimensions

Enclosed starters

Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control for use on a machine subject to the application of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE

Dimensions

1 2

LJ7 K06, LJ8 K06


120

150

177

84 175

3 4

LJ7 K09, LJ8 K09


120

150

146

84 175

Cut-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands at the top and at the bottom 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P.

6 7 8 9 10
References : pages 2/68 and 2/69 Schemes : page 2/71

2/70

165

165

Schemes

Enclosed starters

Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control for use on a machine subject to the application of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE

Schemes
LJ7 K06

Non-reversing starters
LJ7 K09
3/L2 1/L1 5/L3

1
KM1/1
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
F1

KM1/1

F1

4A

1
4A

D1

D2

Q1

Q1
T1

X1

X1

13 1

13

13 1

T1

2
14 13

5 6

1 2

3 4

1 2

3 4

11 14

KM1

KM1

F1

E1

U1 2

V1 4

W1 6

U1 2

V1 4

W1 6

KM1/5

KM1/5

S2

E2

S2

11 14

400/24 V 25 VA

5 6

KM1 S1

400/24 V 25 VA

KM1 S1

14

KM1

M 3

3 4

A1 12

KM1

A2

Reversing starters
LJ8 K06
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
2

F1

21

12

Q1

KM2/5

S1

11

KM2

KM1

22

23

KM1

KM2

400/24 V S2 25 VA

54

24

53

14

KM1

S2

KM2

54

10

02

13

22

T1

21

A2

A1 12

KM2/1

6
KM2

A1

KM1

A2

A2

A1

53

LJ8 K09
2

7
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 D1 D2
F1

KM2/5

S1

Q1

12

11

21

KM2

KM1

E1

E2

22

23

KM1

KM2

400/24 V S2 25 VA

54

54

10

02 S2

13

22

T1

21

8 9
KM2

24

53

14

KM1

KM2

KM2/1

A1

KM1

A2

A2

A1

53

10
References : pages 2/68 and 2/69

2/71

Selection guide

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Applications

1 2 3
Composition

4
Degree of protection

Thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker Low consumption contactor or contactor pair Electronic control device

IP 54

5 6 7 8 9 10

Enclosure

Insulated (plastic)

Operator

Rotary knob

Sensor connection

With

With and local/line control

Contactors

Non-reversing Reversing

LF3Pppp LF4Pppp
2/84 and 2/85

LF3PpppA79 LF4PpppA79

Pages

2/72

1 2 3 4
Metal Insulated (plastic)

Pushbuttons

5
With and local/line control

With

With and local/line control

With

LF3MPppp LF4MPppp

LF3MPpppA79 LF4MPpppA79

LF3Mppp LF4Mppp

LF3MpppA79 LF4MpppA79

6 7 8 9 10

2/73

Presentation

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Presentation

1 2 3 4 5

Decentralised control of motors using enclosed starters which communicate on ASInterface, drastically reduces setting-up times, thereby increasing the availability of machines. In order to cater for different environments, these starters are sub-divided according to: b the different power connection methods: cable gland or Harting plug-in connectors, b the local/AS-Interface remote operating modes, b the type of enclosure: insulated (plastic) or metal.

Decentralisation of machine starters


These enclosed starters which communicate on AS-Interface are pre-assembled and ready-to-use with a minimum of cabling. They are designed for building decentralised electrical installations: i.e. the starters are installed as near as possible to the motors they are to control. The decentralisation of the starters provides obvious advantages regarding power distribution to machines not grouped together, for example: motors driving a conveyor system. Traditional installation
Equipment floor-standing enclosure

Distribution circuit circuit-breaker Programmable controller with its inputs/outputs

6 7 8 9 10
Characteristics: pages 2/80 to 2/83 References: pages 2/84 and 2/85

Contactor + thermal overload relay

Decentralised installation
Distribution enclosure

AS-Interface
Power

M
Distribution circuit circuit-breaker Programmable controller AS-Interface starters

Power is distributed either by prefabricated trunking or by cable. These starters incorporate all the functions necessary for the management of motors (control, protection, isolation, etc.), and comprise: - a thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker, - a low consumption contactor (non reversing) or contactor pair (reversing), - an I/O module ASI 20MTpp. Designed primarily for use with 3-phase a.c. motors, they can nevertheless be used with single-phase or d.c. motors. In these applications, the 3 phases of the internal circuit-breaker should be wired in series (each phase sensing the same current) in order to avoid tripping due to an assumed phase failure.

Dimensions, schemes: pages 2/88 to 2/93

Connections: pages 2/94 and 2/95

2/74

Description

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Connection by cable gland


1 2 3
DF526362

4
DF526363

1 2 3

1 2 3 13 4

5 6 7

11

10 9

11

10

Product diagnostics via 3 LEDs. Input state. Output state. Knock-out for cable gland (not included for any power extension or output control relay cabling). 12 5 Disconnect rotary control knob. Indicates Trip when switch-disconnector tripped. 6 6 Local/AS-Interface key switch (variant A79). 7 7 For variant A79: 3-position, spring return to zero selector switch for reversing starter (LF4). Function: - position 1 = forward running, - position 0 = Stop, - position 2 = reverse running. Pushbutton for non-reversing starter (LF3). Function: Pulsed operation. 8 Cable gland for power supply cable. 9 M12 female connector for cable connection to a sensor (supplied with protective cap). 10 M12 male connector for connection to AS-Interface (1) and auxiliary supply. 11 Cable gland for motor cabling. 12 Reset pushbutton. 13 Stop pushbutton.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Connection by plug-in connectors(variant A74)


1 2 3 8 4
DF526364

5
DF526367

1 2 3 8 4 13 14

12 11

9 10

12 11

9 10

Product diagnostics via 3 LEDs. Input state. Output state. Knock-out for cable gland (not included for output control relay cabling). Male connector for incoming power supply to motor starter (2). Disconnect rotary control knob. Indicates Trip when switch-disconnector tripped. 7 Female connector for power supply to the next motor starter (2). 8 Local/AS-Interface key switch. 9 For variant A79: 3-position, spring return to zero selector switch for reversing starter (LF4). Function: - position 1 = forward running, - position 0 = Stop, - position 2 = reverse running. Pushbutton: for non-reversing starters (LF3). Function: Pulsed operation. 10 Female connector for power supply to motor (2). 11 M12 female connector for cable connection to a sensor (supplied with protective cap). 12 M12 male connector for connection to AS-Interface (1) and auxiliary supply. 13 Stop pushbutton. 14 Reset pushbutton.
(1) Extension cables: please consult your Regional Sales Office. (2) HARTING plug-in connector to be fitted to cable (not included, see page 2/95).

1 2 3 4 5 6

Characteristics: pages 2/80 to 2/83

References: pages 2/84 and 2/85

Dimensions, schemes: pages 2/88 to 2/93

Connections: pages 2/94 and 2/95

2/75

Functions

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Auxiliary supply

1 2

AS-Interface Control-command and contactor supply Auxiliary supply Contactor supply Contactor supply

Power supply

3 4
DF526368

A c 24 V supply is necessary for LF3 and LF4 starters. Prospective current consumptions are listed on page 2/83.

Motor command-control
The functions provided by this range of starters are: - motor control and status monitoring via AS-Interface, - D.O.L. starting (non-reversing or reversing), - overload protection of the motor, - short-circuit protection of the motor and its power supply cabling. Starters with rotary control knob These starters provide the following functions: - load break switch-disconnector with padlockable control knob, - IP 54 degree of protection, double insulation. Opening of the enclosure is mechanically inhibited whilst the starter is switched on or whilst in the off position and padlocked.

5 6
DF526365

The rotary control knob has 3 positions: 0: switch-disconnector opened manually, I: switch-disconnector closed, Trip: switch-disconnector tripped. Starters with pushbutton control These starters provide the following functions: - pushbutton resetting of the protection device, - pushbutton stop control, - IP 54 degree of protection, double insulation.

7 8 9 10
Characteristics: pages 2/80 to 2/83 References: pages 2/84 and 2/85

Dimensions, schemes: pages 2/88 to 2/93

Connections: pages 2/94 and 2/95

2/76

Functions (continued)

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Local control
Stop and reset functions are possible from the front of the enclosure. The stop command is achieved by actuating the internal circuit-breaker, which provides the switch-disconnector function. Depending on the type of starter, stopping is controlled by either: - a rotary control knob, or - a stop pushbutton (black). In the event of an overload, resetting of the internal thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker is possible after the motor has cooled down. Depending on the type of starter, resetting is controlled by either: - a rotary control knob, or - a reset pushbutton (blue).
DF526369

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Integral local/AS-Interface control (variant A79) This starter variant is fitted with a 2-position local/AS-Interface switch which, depending on the position of the switch, allows the following functions: b AS-Interface: the PLC controls the motor starter. b Local: local Start/Stop commands override instructions from the PLC. b 3-position, spring return to zero selector switch for reversing starter (LF4). Function: - position 1 = forward running, - position 0 = Stop, - position 2 = reverse running. b Pushbutton for non-reversing starter (LF3) . Function: - Pulsed operation. Control via a control station
AS-Interface Message 2 Message 1

Power supply

It is possible to achieve manual local start control from pushbutton control stations connected to AS-Interface. Please consult your Regional Sales Office. Actuation of a pushbutton is transmitted to the programmable controller (message 1) which passes it on to the starter (message2).

8 9 10

Characteristics: pages 2/80 to 2/83

References: pages 2/84 and 2/85

Dimensions, schemes: pages 2/88 to 2/93

Connections: pages 2/94 and 2/95

2/77

Functions (continued)

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Local signalling

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Characteristics: pages 2/80 to 2/83 References: pages 2/84 and 2/85

Indication of all the operating states (diagnostic, inputs and outputs) is visible without having to open the enclosure (transparent window in the enclosure cover).

Safety
The starter features continual self-checking to ensure correct operation. External safety functions are not processed by the starter. Emergency stop and machine safety wiring must follow standard safety practice and be hard-wired, using electromechanical devices in the approved way. These functions must not be handled by communication bus systems (EN 60204 9.2.5.4). Protection against unexpected restarting, after an accidental power supply failure, must be provided by a safety device separate from the starter. The starter control (rotary knob or pushbutton) does not provide the Emergency Stop function if the machine is fitted with other actuators. The control operators on the starter are therefore coloured black, in accordance with standard EN 60204 10.2.1. Starters with rotary control knob may be padlocked in the ON position, since this control does not provide an Emergency Stop function.

Assume fallback condition


When communication is interrupted, the starter is no longer controlled by the PLC. The fallback condition of the starter is motor stopped (outputs at 0).

Output control relay


This relay incorporates a C/O contact, which may be used to control an indicator lamp, solenoid valve, etc. (250 V, 5 A), via AS-Interface.

AS-Interface

Dimensions, schemes: pages 2/88 to 2/93

Connections: pages 2/94 and 2/95

2/78

Functions (continued)

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Starters with sensors connected (1)


Two 3-wire PNP sensors (50 mA max) or 2-wire limit switches can be connected directly to the starter. The information supplied by the sensor/limit switch is fed back via the AS-Interface line. (1) For "Reflex Stop" function, please consult your Regional Sales Office.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Characteristics: pages 2/80 to 2/83

References: pages 2/84 and 2/85

Dimensions, schemes: pages 2/88 to 2/93

Connections: pages 2/94 and 2/95

2/79

Characteristics

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Environment

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Starter type Conforming to standards

LF3,LF4 IEC 60204-1, EN 60204-1, IEC 60439-1, IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 UL 508, CSA C22-2 n 14 (1) Standard version TC IP 54 Storage Operation Without derating In relation to normal vertical mounting plane C C m -40+80 -5+40 2000

Product certifications Protective treatment Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 Ambient air temperature around the device conforming to IEC 60439-1 Maximum operating altitude Operating position without derating

30

30

90

90

Flame resistance of equipment Shock resistance (1/2 sine wave, 11ms) conforming to IEC60068-2-27 Vibration resistance 5150Hz conforming to IEC60068-2-6 Safe separation of circuits Immunity to non-dissipating shock wave (Uimp) Material and colour of enclosure base Material and colour of enclosure cover Resistance to chemical agents

Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 Contactor open Contactor closed Contactor open Contactor closed Conforming to VDE 0106 and IEC 60536 Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Insulated enclosures Metal enclosures Insulated enclosures Metal enclosures Insulated enclosures

960 10 gn 15 gn 2 gn 4 gn SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage), up to 400 V

kV

6: power 2.5: AS-Interface, 24 V and sensor Polycarbonate impregnated with 20 % glass fibre, black throughout Sheet steel RAL 9001 Polycarbonate impregnated with 20% glass fibre, RAL 9001 throughout Sheet steel RAL 9001 Avoid allowing this material to come into contact with: strong bases (certain detergents), aromatic hydrocarbons, alcohol, chlorine solvents, ketones.

Electromagnetic compatibility
Immunity to electrostatic discharge Immunity to fast transient currents Immunity to dissipated shock wave Immunity to conducted radio-frequency interference Immunity to radiated radio-frequency interference Radio-conducted and radio-radiated rejection Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2 EN 61000-4-2 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4 EN 61000-4-4 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5 EN 61000-4-5 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-6 ENV 50 141 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 ENV 50 140 and ENV 50 204 (GSM) ENV 55 011/CISPR11 (G1) kV kV kV 8: in open air (level 3) 4: in indirect mode (level 2) 2: power, AS-Interface, 24 V and sensor (level 3) 4/2: power (level 4) 2/0.5: power, AS-Interface, 24 V and sensor (level 2) V/m V/m 10 10 Class B (1) Only for metal enclosures with letter U at the end of the reference. Certification pending.

Functions : pages 2/76 to 2/79

References: pages 2/84 and 2/85

Dimensions, schemes: pages 2/88 to 2/93

Connections: pages 2/94 and 2/95

2/80

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Cabling
Starter type Power supply cabling Screw clamp terminals Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque (1) Cable Gland (Pg16) Motor cabling Screw clamp terminals Clamping capacity mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m mm LF3 Min. 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 1.7 10 Min. Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque (1) Cable Gland (Pg16) Output control relay cabling Clamping capacity mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m mm 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 0.8 10 Min. Terminal block Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque (2) Cable gland mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.7 8 10 Max. 2x6 2x6 2x4 1.7 15 Max. 2x4 2x4 1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5 0.8 15 Max. 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.7 13 15 LF4 Min. 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 1.7 10 Min. 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 0.8 10 Min. 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.7 8 10 Max. 2x6 2x6 2x4 1.7 15 Max. 1x4 1x4 1 x 2.5 0.8 15 Max. 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.7 13 15

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Clamping capacity Pg 13 mm Pg 16 mm

Pole electrical characteristics


Utilisation category Conforming to IEC 60947-2 (circuit-breaker) Conforming to 947-4-1 (motor starter) Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Rated operational frequency Breaking capacity (Ics and Icu) Sensitivity to phase failure Conforming to IEC 60947 Conforming to IEC 60947 Conforming to IEC 60947 V V Hz A AC-3 415 415 50/60 > 100 > 100 Yes

Conforming to 230/240 V kA IEC60947-2 400/415 V kA Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 7-2-1-5-2 C.O.: closing, opening For AC-3 duty Maximum operating rate In operating cycles per hour In millions of operating cycles In category AC-3 at 8.5 A C.O. C.O. C.O./h

Circuit-breaker characteristics (manual operation)


Mechanical durability Electrical durability Duty class Maximum operating rate Mechanical durability Electrical durability 100000 100000 25 3600 30 800000 5

Circuit-breaker characteristics (automatic operation)

Other characteristics
Starters with rotary control knob Starters with pushbutton control Non-reversing starters Reversing starters Circuit-breaker type GV2P Circuit-breaker type GV2ME LF3, LF4 only Contactor LP4K0901BW3 (3) Reversing contactor LP5K0901BW3 (4) See pages 3/8 to 3/11 See pages 3/8 to 3/11 See pages 5/10 to 5/13 See pages 5/10 to 5/13 (1) Philips n 2 or flat screwdriver 5.5. (2) Flat screwdriver 3.5. (3) LP4 K1201BW3 for circuit-breaker ratings 00 and 16. (4) LP5 K1201BW3 for circuit-breaker ratings 00 and 16.

Functions : pages 2/76 to 2/79

References: pages 2/84 and 2/85

Dimensions, schemes: pages 2/88 to 2/93

Connections: pages 2/94 and 2/95

2/81

Characteristics (continued)

Tess enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Sensor inputs

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Starter type Cabling Nominal input values Voltage Maximum current available per sensor Sensor supply (including ripple) Input voltage range At state 1 At state 0 Maximum number of sensors Proximity sensor compatibility Isolation with respect to the AS-Interface line Input type Voltage Current Voltage Current V mA V V mA V mA

LF3,LF4 M12 c 24 50 1930 c > 11 >6 c<5 <2 2 2-wire/3-wire Yes Resistive for PNP type sensor

Output control relay


Operating voltage limit Thermal current at 40 C (Ith) Service life on an a 24 V load Resistive Millions of operating cycles load AC-12 Inductive Millions of operating cycles load AC-14 Service life on a c 24 V load Resistive Millions of operating cycles load DC-12 Resistive Millions of operating cycles load DC-3 Response time Contact type Built-in protection Against overload and short-circuits Against a.c. or d.c. inductive overloads Isolation rms voltage between output and earth or between output and internal logic V Latching Unlatching ms ms a.c. supply d.c. supply V V A 250 30 5 0.1 (1) in 5 A current, 1 (2) in 1 A current. 0.5 (2) in 1 A current, 1 (2) in 0.5 A current, 5 (3) in 0.25 A current. 0.1 (1) in 5 A current, 0.2 (1) in 2 A current. 0.5 (2) in 1 A current, > 1 (3) in 0.25 A current. < 10 < 15 C/O None, a quick-blow fuse must be fitted Protected against overvoltages generated by switching the coils of preactuators 1500, 50/60 Hz for 60 s > 1000

Insulation resistance between mW output terminals and AS-Interface

(1) 0.2 of an operation (C/O) per second. (2) 0.5 of an operation (C/O) per second. (3) 1 operation (C/O) per second.

Functions : pages 2/76 to 2/79

References: pages 2/84 and 2/85

Dimensions, schemes: pages 2/88 to 2/93

Connections: pages 2/94 and 2/95

2/82

Characteristics (continued)

Tess enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Consumption
Starter type Product configured for supply from an auxiliary c 24 V supply LF3 Current consumption From the AS-Interface line (1) De-energised 20 mA Inrush Sealed Per sensor Relays From the auxiliary c 24 V supply 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 0 110 mA 30 mA LF4 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA

1 2 3

Sensor consumption (50 mA max) + 10 mA (signal = 1)

De-energised 0 Inrush Energised 110 mA 30 mA

Data exchange characteristics


AS-Interface profile Data bits (commands) Bit value Command D0 (O) Command D1 (O) Command D2 (O) Command D3 (O) Data bits (status) Bit value Status D0 (I) Status D1 (I) Status D2 (I) Status D3 (I) 7.D.F.F (standard addressing 7.A.7.0 (extended addressing A/B) =0 Stop - forward running Stop - reverse running Deactivation of control relay Not Used =0 Not ready or fault Stopped Sensor 1 signal absent (3) Sensor 2 signal absent (4) =1 Start - forward running Start - reverse running (2) Activation of control relay Not Used =1 Ready Running Sensor 1 signal present (3) Sensor 2 signal present (4)

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

(1) 30 mA maximum + sensor consumption. (2) Only on LF4. (3) Sensor 1 or circuit-breaker fault signal, depending on configuration. (4) Sensor 1 or sensor 2 signal or control/local mode, depending on configuration.

Functions : pages 2/76 to 2/79

References: pages 2/84 and 2/85

Dimensions, schemes: pages 2/88 to 2/93

Connections: pages 2/94 and 2/95

2/83

Characteristics, references

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system LF3 P and LF4 P

Characteristics

1 2
DF526356

Conforming to standards Degree of protection Ambient air temperature Operating positions Material Conforming to IEC 60529 Operation

IEC 60204-1, 60439-1, 60947-4-1, EN 60204-1, 60947-4-1 UL 508, CSA C22-2 n 14 (1) IP 54 - 5 to + 40 C Same as that of the contactors LFpP: polycarbonate (2). LFpMP: sheet steel Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220/230 V kW 400/415 V kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 Circuit-breaker adjustment range of thermal trips A Without 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 LF3P00D (4) LF3P02D LF3P03D LF3P04D LF3P05D LF3P06D LF3P07D LF3P08D LF3P10D LF3P14D LF3P16D LF3P00E (4) LF3P02E LF3P03E LF3P04E LF3P05E LF3P06E LF3P07E LF3P08E LF3P10E LF3P14E LF3P16E Starter Ref. with standard addressing Ref. with extended addressing Weight kg 1.020 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.350 1.350 1.350 1.350 1.350 1.350

Starters in insulated (plastic) enclosure

Non-reversing starters with rotary control knob, with black handle on blue background (3)
0.06 0.09 0.12

3 4 5 6

LF3PppD

0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3

DF526357

Reversing starters with rotary control knob, with black handle on blue background (3)
0.06 0.09 0.12 LF4PppDA79A74 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 Without 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 LF4P00D (4) LF4P02D LF4P03D LF4P04D LF4P05D LF4P06D LF4P07D LF4P08D LF4P10D LF4P14D LF4P16D LF4P00E (4) LF4P02E LF4P03E LF4P04E LF4P05E LF4P06E LF4P07E LF4P08E LF4P10E LF4P14E LF4P16E 1.020 1.550 1.550 1.550 1.550 1.600 1.600 1.600 1.600 1.600 1.600

7 8 9 10
LF4MPppDA74A79 Dimensions: pages 2/88 to 2/90

Starters in metal enclosures


b To order a metal enclosure, add a letter M after LF3 or LF4, in the references selected above. Example: LF3P02D becomes LF3MP02D. b To order a metal enclosure that conforms to standards UL 508 and CSA C22-2 n 14, add a letter M after LF3 or LF4 and a letter U at the end of the references selected above. Example: LF3P02D becomes LF3MP02DU.

Variants (pre-assembled)
Description
DF526358

For mounting on Insulated or metal enclosure Insulated enclosure Metal enclosure

Suffix to be added to the starter reference (5) A74 A79 A79

With HARTING connectors (6) With local/AS-Interface control With local/AS-Interface control

(1) Only for metal enclosures with letter U at the end of the reference. Certification pending. (2) Avoid allowing the material to come into contact with strong bases (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons). (3) On metal enclosures only, to order an Emergency Stop rotary control knob with red handle on yellow background, add the letter R to the end of the reference. Example: LF3MP02DR. (4) Supplied without GV2 P motor circuit-breaker. (5) Example: LF3P02DA79A74. (6) Connectors to be fitted to cables (to be ordered separately, see page 2/95). Schemes: pages 2/91 to 2/93

2/84

Characteristics, references

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system LF3 M and LF4 M

Characteristics
Conforming to standards Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 Ambient air temperature Operating positions Material Operation IEC 60204-1, 60439-1, 60947-4-1, EN 60204-1, 60947-4-1 UL 508, CSA C22-2 n 14 IP 54 - 5 to + 40 C Same as that of the contactors LFpM: polycarbonate (1). Circuit-.breaker adjustment range of thermal trips A Without 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 LF3M00D (2) LF3M00E (2) LF3M02D LF3M03D LF3M04D LF3M05D LF3M06D LF3M07D LF3M08D LF3M10D LF3M14D LF3M16D LF3M02E LF3M03E LF3M04E LF3M05E LF3M06E LF3M07E LF3M08E LF3M10E LF3M14E LF3M16E Starter Ref. with standard addressing Ref. with extended addressing Weight kg 1.000 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Starters in insulated (plastic) enclosure


Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220/230 V kW
DF526359

400/415 V kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5

Non-reversing starters with pushbutton control


0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3

LF3MppD

DF526360

Reversing starters with pushbutton control


0.06 0.09 0.12 Without 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 LF4M00D (2) LF4M00E (2) LF4M02D LF4M03D LF4M04D LF4M05D LF4M06D LF4M07D LF4M08D LF4M10D LF4M14D LF4M16D LF4M02E LF4M03E LF4M04E LF4M05E LF4M06E LF4M07E LF4M08E LF4M10E LF4M14E LF4M16D 1.000 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.550 1.550 1.550 1.550 1.550 1.550

LF3MppDA79

0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3

Variants (pre-assembled)
Description With HARTING connectors (4) With local/AS-Interface control For mounting on Insulated enclosure Insulated enclosure Suffix to be added to the starter reference (3) A74 A79

(1) Avoid allowing the material to come into contact with strong bases (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons). (2) Supplied without GV2 ME motor circuit-breaker. (3) Example: LF3M02DA79A74. (4) Connectors to be fitted to cables (to be ordered separately, see page 2/95).

9 10

Dimensions: pages 2/88 to 2/90

Schemes: pages 2/91 to 2/93

2/85

References (continued)

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Insulated enclosures LF3 and LF4

1 2 3

Power extension (daisy-chaining)

Terminal

LA9 LFF

LA9 LFF

LA9 LFM

LA9 LFM

LA9 LFC

4
Metal enclosures LF3 and LF4

LA9 LFT

5 6 7 8 9 10
LA9 LFM

LA9 LFMM

LA9 LFFM40

2/86

References (continued)

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Presentation In order to reduce setting-up times and to simplify maintenance, variant A74 LF starters are fitted with Harting plug-in connectors. These starters are designed to allow 2 types of connection topology.
Connection using tap links This configuration avoids having to switch off the power supply when replacing or adding one or more starters. Although machine availability is increased, a larger number of power connections is required: 4 per starter.

Accessories for insulated enclosures with variant A74

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

LF

LF

Connection using power extension (daisychaining)

LF

LF

The number of power connections per starter is halved, but continuity of service is no longer assured if any of the upstream starters are disconnected or removed. With this type of installation, special precautions must be taken because removal of a starter at the head of the power supply line de-energises all the remaining starters on that line. For safety reasons therefore, starters must not be removed under load (prohibited by standard EN60204 above 3kW/400V).

The 2 connection kits and accessories shown below have been designed to facilitate setting up of power extension configurations by the user.

Connection kit (depending on enclosure application)


Enclosure Capacity application mm2 Power extension (daisychaining) Terminal 3-pole 1.5 or 2.5 3-pole 1.5 or 2.5 1 female connector Enclosures 2 male connectors and LF3 and LF4 corresponding power sockets (1) 1 female connector 1 male connector 1 blanking plug and corresponding power sockets (1) Enclosures LF3 and LF4 LA9LFC Kit contents For Reference mounting on Weight kg 0.150

LA9LFT

0.110

Crimping contacts
Type Male Capacity mm2 1.5 2.5 Female 1.5 2.5 Sold in lots of 100 100 100 100 Unit reference LA9LFM15 LA9LFM25 LA9LFF15 LA9LFF25 Weight kg 0.120 0.120 0.160 0.150

Accessories for metal enclosures with variant A74


Connection kits
For connector Input Kit contents For Reference mounting on Metal enclosures LF3, LF4 Metal enclosures LF3, LF4 LA9LFFM40 Weight kg 1 metal cover 2 size 16 cable glands 1 blanking plug 1 female power socket (3P + earth) 4 female crimping contacts (2) 1 metal cover 1 size 16 cable gland 1 female power socket (3P+ earth) (1) Capacity mm2 Male 1.5 2.5 Thermal current A 10 10 0.260

Output to motor

LA9LFMM

0.060

Crimping contacts
Type Voltage Sold in lots of V 400 400 100 100 LA9LFM15 LA9LFM25 Unit reference Weight kg 0.120 0.120

10

(1) Crimping contacts to be ordered separately. (2) For flexible cable, 4 mm2 maximum, Ith: 16 A, Us: 400 V.

2/87

Dimensions

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system LF3P and LF4 P

Non-reversing and reversing starters with rotary control knob

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

With cable glands LFpPppp

With HARTING plug-in connectors (A74) LFpPpppA74

175 120 4x5,3

175 84

47

150

(1)

(2)

With cable glands Incorporating sensor and local/AS-Interface control variant (A79) LFpPpppA79

With HARTING plug-in connectors (A74) Incorporating sensor and local/AS-Interface control variant (A79) LFpPpppA79A74

175 120 4x5,3

175 84

47

150

(1)

(2)

Knock-outs for cable gland From above 2 x Pg16 and 2 x Pg13 From below 2 x Pg16 (cable glands supplied) (1) M12 male connector for connection to AS-Interface and auxiliary 24 V supply. (2) M12 female connector for connection to sensor.

References: page 2/84

Schemes: pages 2/91 to 2/93

2/88

18

165

18

165

Dimensions (continued)

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system LF3M and LF4 M

Non-reversing and reversing starters with pushbutton control


With cable glands LFpMppp With HARTING plug-in connectors (A74) LFpMpppA74

140 120 4x5,3

175 84

140 120 4x5,3

175 84

47

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

150

30

150 165

(1)

(2)

(1)

(2)

With cable glands Incorporating sensor and local/AS-Interface control variant (A79) LFpMpppA79

With HARTING plug-in connectors (A74) Incorporating sensor and local/AS-Interface control variant (A79) LFpMpppA79A74

165 120 4x5,3

175 84

47

150
(1) (2)
Knock-outs for cable gland From above 2 x Pg16 and 2 x Pg13 From below 2 x Pg16 (cable glands supplied) (1) M12 male connector for connection to AS-Interface and auxiliary 24 V supply. (2) M12 female connector for connection to sensor. References: page 2/85 Schemes: pages 2/91 to 2/93

2/89

18

165

18

165

Dimensions (continued)

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system LF3MP and LF4 MP

Non-reversing and reversing starters with rotary control knob

1 2

With cable glands LFpMPppp

With HARTING plug-in connectors (A74) LFpMPpppA74

179 125 7

219 175
8,5

179 125 7

219 175
8,5

60

199

230

245

199

230 230

3
13 (1) (2)

13

(1)

(2)

4 5

With cable glands Incorporating sensor and local/AS-Interface control variant (A79) LFpMPpppA79

With HARTING plug-in connectors (A74) Incorporating sensor and local/AS-Interface control variant (A79) LFpMPpppA79A74

179 125 7

219 175

179 125

219
8,5

60

8,5

175

199

199

230

6 7 8 9 10
References: pages 2/84 and 2/85

13

(1)

(2)

245

13

(1)

(2)

Knock-outs for cable Standard enclosure Enclosure with variant gland A74 From above 3 x Pg16 1 x Pg16 From below 2 x Pg16 1 x Pg16 (1) M12 male connector for connection to AS-Interface and auxiliary 24 V supply. (2) M12 female connector for connection to sensor.

Schemes: pages 2/91 to 2/93

2/90

245

245

Schemes

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Non-reversing starters LF3


AS Interface I1 I2 Input I3 J21A 1 KM GV ready GV Flt. 2 3 I4 J21B 1 2 3 +S-S Output Q1 -KA1 A (bus) M (local) Q2 Q3 Aux+ AuxASi+ ASi-

1 2 3

-KM1 -KA1 GV ready -KO3

5 PR3

PR5 4 1 2 3 -KO3 J2 NO COM O3 250 VAC / 5 A NC +24 V 0V ASi+ ASi-

Black White Brown Blue

4 5 6 7

Sensor 2 Sensor 1

Insulated enclosure with variant A79 or metal enclosure with variant A79

Reversing starters LF4


AS Interface I1 -KM1 1 -KM2 GV ready GV Flt. I 0 II 2 I2 Input I3 J21A 3 I4 J21B 1 2 3 +S-S Q1 -KA1 A (bus) M (local) Q2 Q3 Aux+ AuxASi+ ASiBlack White Brown Blue -KM2 GV -KO3 ready PR5 4 1 2 3 -KO3 J2 NO Sensor 2 Sensor 1 COM O3 250 VAC / 5 A NC +24 V 0V ASi+ ASiOutput

-KM1 -KA1

8 9 10

5 PR3

Insulated enclosure with variant A79 or metal enclosure with variant A79

References: pages 2/84 and 2/85

Dimensions: pages 2/88 to 2/90

2/91

Recommended application TeSys enclosed starters D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system schemes

Non-reversing and reversing starters with 2 sensors, an auxiliary supply and a control relay

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
References: pages 2/84 and 2/85 Dimensions: pages 2/88 to 2/90
AS-Interface line

2/92

Recommended application schemes


(continued)

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Connections on enclosure
M12 male connector for AS-Interface and c 24 V auxiliary supply
24 V 4 3 AS-i

1 2

AS-i +

0V

Sensor M12 female connector Limit switch


3 4

2-wire PNP type sensor


3 4

3-wire PNP type sensor


3
Sensor 1

Sensor 1
1

Sensor 1

2
Sensor 2

+ +
Sensor 2

+ +
Sensor 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

References: pages 2/84 and 2/85

Dimensions: pages 2/88 to 2/90

2/93

Connections

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Starters in enclosures with cable glands

1
2

2 3
M

4
8

5
7 6

1 Junction box

6 7 8 9 10

2 Incoming power 3 Power extension 4 FTXCY1212: splitter block 5 XZCR1511040Ap: extension 6 XZCB1pp02: flat cable (black) for auxiliary supply 7 XZCG01403D: tap link for two cables 8 XZCB1pp01: flat cable (yellow) for AS-Interface

Functions : pages 2/76 to 2/79

Characteristics: pages 2/80 to 2/83

References: pages 2/84 and 2/85

Dimensions, schemes: pages 2/88 to 2/93

2/94

Connections (continued)

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Starters in insulated enclosures with HARTING type plug-in power connectors


3 1

2
M

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Incoming power Power extension Control relay (example: illuminated indicator bank FTXCY1212: splitter block XZCR1511040Ap: extension XZCB1pp02: flat cable (black) for auxiliary supply XZCG01403D: tap link for two cables XZCB1pp01: flat cable (yellow) for AS-Interface

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Configuration of HARTING connectors to be fitted on cables (to be ordered separately)


4
Number and HARTING reference for incoming power female connector Straight cover 1 x 09-20-003-0420 1 x 09-12-005-3001 3 x 09-33-000-6202 for power extension and motor connection male connectors 2 x 09-20-003-0420 2 x 09-12-005-3101 8 x 09-33-000-6102 1 x 09-20-003-5408

8 5

Male insert 6-way, 400 V Female insert 6-way, 400 V

Male contacts 2.5 mm2 Female contacts 2.5 mm2

Plug for the last socket

Starters in metal enclosures with HARTING type plug-in power connectors


2
1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Incoming power Control relay (example: illuminated indicator bank FTXCY1212: splitter block XZCR1511040Ap: extension XZCB1pp02p: flat cable (black) for auxiliary supply XZCG1403D: tap link for two cables XZCB1pp01p: flat cable (yellow) for AS-Interface

Configuration of HARTING connectors to be fitted on cables (to be ordered separately)


Number and HARTING reference for incoming power female connector Straight cover 1 x 09-30-006-442 (1) 1 x 09-30-006-443 (2) 1 x 09-33-006-2702 3 x 09-33-000-6207 for power extension and motor connection male connectors 2 x 09-20-003-1440 2 x 09-12-005-3101 5 x 09-33-000-6102

7 4

Male insert 6-way, 400 V Female insert 6-way, 400 V Male contacts 2.5 mm2

Female contacts 2.5 mm2 (1) PG21. (2) PG29.

Functions : pages 2/76 to 2/79

Characteristics: pages 2/80 to 2/83

References: pages 2/84 and 2/85

Dimensions, schemes: pages 2/88 to 2/93

2/95

Presentation

D.O.L. starters

LA9Z modules for AS-Interface cabling system

1 2 3
AS-I PWR

AS-Interface modules LA9Z32810 and LA9Z32811 allow motor starters to be monitored and controlled by AS-Interface. These products are in addition to the ASInterface enclosed starter range, LF1 and LF2, LF7 and LF8. The module sizes offered are: 2 inputs/1 output or 4 inputs/2 outputs. These products can be mounted in two ways: b on 5 rail, b on LA9Zppp adapters for use with busbar systems.
565188 565189

Presentation

4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Characteristics: page 2/98 References: page 2/99

AS-I PWR

Inputs/outputs are connected to a built-in, flexible terminal type connector, so reducing installation time. The AS-Interface line is connected to the module by the yellow connector. The external c 24 V supply to the module outputs is connected to the black connector. With this supply method, it is possible to make the output states subject to external safety conditions (Emergency stop, safety overtravel, etc.).

Dimensions, scheme : pages 2/100 and 2/101

2/96

Presentation (continued)

D.O.L. starters

LA9Z modules for AS-Interface cabling system

The various module sizes allow control of: - non-reversing starters, - reversing starters, - 2-speed starters for motors with separate windings. The outputs, supplied by the separate auxiliary voltage, can simultaneously switch a current of 0.5 A at c 24 V and can therefore switch the following contactors: - LP1, LP4K06 to K12, - LC1D09 to D32.

Fields of application

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Composition
565190

AS-Interface module 1 AS-Interface green/red LED indicator: - red: no communication with the Master. The outputs are switched off, - green: communication OK, outputs OK, - red/yellow flashing: module has no address (assign an address between 1 and 31), - off: no power supply to AS-Interface. 2 Green PWR LED: - LED on: auxiliary power supply ON, - LED off: auxiliary power supply OFF.

1
AS-I PWR

Characteristics: page 2/98

References: page 2/99

Dimensions, scheme : pages 2/100 and 2/101

2/97

Characteristics

D.O.L. starters

LA9Z modules for AS-Interface cabling system

General system environment

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Interface type Product certifications Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature around the device Maximum operating altitude Flame resistance Resistance to external mechanical impact Vibration resistance Immunity to non-dissipating shockwave (Uimp) Immunity to electrostatic discharge Immunity to fast transient currents Immunity to dissipated shock wave Immunity to conducted radio-frequency interference Immunity to radiated radio-frequency interference Radio-conducted and radio-radiated rejection AS-Interface supply Cabling c.s.a., AS-Interface Cabling c.s.a., 24 V Cabling c.s.a., input/output

Conforming to IEC 60539 Storage, conforming to IEC 60539 Operation Without derating Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 1/2 sine wave, 11ms conforming to IEC60068-2-6 5150 Hz conforming to 60068-2-6 Conforming to IEC 60439-1 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2 EN 61000-4-2 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4 EN 61000-4-4 level 4 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5 EN 61000-4-5 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-6 ENV 50 141 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 ENV 50 140 and ENV 50 204 (GSM) ENV 55 011/CISPR (G1)

C C m C

LA9Z32810 AS-Interface N 18701 TH IP 20 -40+85 -10+55 2000 960 15 gn 2 gn

LA9Z32811 AS-Interface N 18601

kV kV kV kV V/m V/m

2.5: AS-Interface, 24 V and on inputs/outputs 8: in open air (level 3) 4: in indirect mode (level 2) 2: AS-Interface, 24 V and on inputs/outputs 2: AS-Interface, 24 V and on inputs/outputs 10 10 Class A

Flexible cable Flexible cable Flexible cage terminal and flexible cable

V mm2 mm2 mm2 mA m A A

29.5-31.6 2 x 0.50.75 2 x 0.50.75 0.082.5; AWG2812 7 100 % 0.4 0.5 2 100 % Yes Yes 3F 2 inputs/1 output 812 0 Off Not used Not used Not used Absent Absent Not used Not used Not used 7F 4 inputs/2 outputs 812 0 Off Off

Input current Coincidence of inputs Maximum length of wires to switching components Maximum current of outputs c 13/14, (24 V) Thermal current Ith Coincidence of outputs Short-circuit protection By flywheel diode Outputs switched off Watchdog in event of interference on the AS-Interface line AS-Interface profile Number of I/O Current consumption On AS-Interface On/OFF Data bits Status Command D0 (O) D1 (O) D2 (O) D3 (O) Status D0 (I) D1 (I) D2 (I) D3 (I) Parameters P0P3

mA Out 1 Out 2 Out 3 Out 4 In 1 In 2 In 3 In 4

1 On

1 On On

Present Present

Absent Absent Absent Absent

Present Present Present Present

Presentation: pages 2/96 and 2/97

References: page 2/99

Dimensions, scheme : pages 2/100 and 2/101

2/98

References

D.O.L. starters

LA9Z modules for AS-Interface cabling system

AS-Interface modules (1) (2)


No. of Number channels of inputs 3 6 2 4 Number Output of outputs voltage V 1 c 24 2 c 24 Current Reference per output A 0.5 LA9Z32810 0.5 LA9Z32811 Weight kg 0.070 0.070

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Accessories
Description Busbar system mm 40 or 60 Width mm 45 54 40 45 54 60 45 54 Reference Weight kg 0.044 0.051 0.091 0.098 0.085 0.092

Modules without electrical connection, for use with all LA9Zpp adapters

LA9Z32744 LA9Z32745 LA9Z32740 LA9Z32741 LA9Z32742 LA9Z32743

Module with PE + N polarity and 5-way connector

Replacement connectors and adapter cable


Description Colour Insulation Displacement Yellow Connector (IDC) for AS-Interface Insulation Displacement Connector (IDC) for auxiliary supply Description Black Sold in lots of 5 5 Unit reference LA9Z32825 LA9Z32826 Weight kg 0.100 0.100

Cable length m 0.5

Reference

Weight kg 0.070

Adapter cable for connection to addressing terminal XZMC11

XZMG12

(1) Users Manual to be ordered separately, please consult your Regional Sales Office. (2) Supplied with connectors LA9Z32825 and LA9Z32826.

Presentation: pages 2/96 and 2/97

Characteristics: page 2/98

Dimensions, scheme : pages 2/100 and 2/101

2/99

Dimensions, mounting

D.O.L. starters
2

LA9Z modules for AS-Interface cabling system

Dimensions

1 2

LA9 Z3281p

86

45

3 4

Mounting on modules
LA9 Z32742, LA9 Z32743
60 mm busbar system

LA9 Z32740, LA9 Z32741


40 mm busbar system Common front face view

65

69,5

40
80

80
120

5 6 7 8 9
LA9 Z32745 Z32744

135,5

125,5

115

30 a

LA9 Z32740, Z32742 Z32741, Z32743

a 45 54

LA9 Z32745
40 or 60 mm busbar system

LA9 Z32744
Common front face view

80

40
135,5 125,5

80

a 54 45

10

Presentation: pages 2/96 and 2/97

Characteristics: page 2/98

References: page 2/99

2/100

Schemes

D.O.L. starters

LA9Z modules for AS-Interface cabling system

Schemes
1 motor

D.O.L. starter, non-reversing


2 motors

1
LA9 Z32811
IN2 X3, 2 IN3 X3, 3 IN4 X3, 4 IN + X3, 5 M X3, 6 OUT1 X3, 7 OUT2 X3, 8

LA9 Z32810
IN1 X3, 1 IN2 X3, 2 IN + X3, 3 M X4, 4 OUT1 X4, 2
IN1 X3, 1

KM

KM

KM1

KM2

Q1

Q2

Q1

Q2

2 3 4

KM1

KM2

1/L1

3/L2

5/L3

1/L1

3/L2

5/L3

1/L1

3/L2 4/T2 V

Q1

Q2

KM

KM1

KM2
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 2/T1 6/T3 W

2/T1

4/T2

6/T3

5/L3

M1

M2

5 6 7 8 9 10

D.O.L. starter, reversing


LA9 Z32811
IN1 X3, 1 IN2 X3, 2 IN3 X3, 3 IN4 X3, 4 IN + X3, 5 M X3, 6 OUT1 X3, 7 OUT2 X3, 8

KM1

KM2

KM2 KM1

KM1 KM2

1/L1

3/L2

KM1

5/L3

KM2

2/T1

4/T2 V

Presentation: pages 2/96 and 2/97

6/T3

Characteristics: page 2/98

References: page 2/99

2/101

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

3/0

Contents

3 - TeSys protection components: motor circuit-breakers

TeSys GV thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers


Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/2 b Presentation. page 3/6 b Characteristics page 3/8 b References page 3/46 b Dimensions, mounting page 3/70 b Schemes page 3/82

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

TeSys GV magnetic motor circuit-breakers


Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/4 b Characteristics page 3/14 b References page 3/52 b Dimensions, mounting page 3/84 b Schemes page 3/89

TeSys GB2 thermal-magnetic circuit breakers for the protection of control circuits, solenoid and transformers
Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/90 b Presentation. page 3/92 b Characteristics page 3/93 b References page 3/96 b Dimensions page 3/97 b Schemes page 3/97

3/1

Selection guide

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

Applications

Protection of motors against short-circuits and overloads

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Tripping threshold on short-circuit

13 In

Standard motor power ratings in AC-3, 415 V

Up to 15 kW

Up to 30 kW

37 kW

Operational current at 415 V

0.132 A

965 A

5680 A

Breaking capacity at 415 V (Icu) to IEC 60947-2

10100 kA

35100 kA

50100 kA

15 kA

Door interlock mechanism

Without

With

With

Without

Circuit-breaker type

GV2 ME
3/47 and 3/48

GV2 P
3/49

GV3P
3/49

GV3 ME80
3/49

Pages

3/2

Protection of motors with high current peak on starting

1 2 3

20 In

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

7.5110 kW

Up to 11 kW

12220 A

0.2523 A

35 and 36 kA

70 kA

15100 kA

With

With

GV7 RE
3/49

GV7 RS

GV2 RT
3/50 and 3/51

3/3

Selection guide

TeSys protection components


Magnetic motor circuit-breakers

Applications

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Protection of motors Magnetic circuit-breakers provide short-circuit protection. They must be combined with thermal overload relays to provide motor overload protection.

Tripping threshold on short-circuit

13 In

Standard motor power ratings in AC-3, 415 V

Up to 15 kW

Operational current at 415 V

0.432 A

Breaking capacity at 415 V (Icu) to IEC 60947-2

10100 kA

35100 kA

Door interlock mechanism

With

Circuit-breaker type

GV2 LE

GV2 L

Pages

3/52

3/53

3/4

1 2 3 4 5
35.7150 kA 45.7150 kA

614 In

813 In

6.312.5 In

Up to 30 kW

37 kW

0.37250 kW

2565 A

80 A

1.5500 A

50100 kA

35 kA

25.7 and 150 kA

With

With

With

GV3L

GK3 EF80

NS 80

NS 100 to NS 250

NS 400 and NS 630

6 7 8 9 10

3/53

3/53

Please consult the Schneider Electric catalogue - Low Voltage Distribution

3/5

Presentation

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2, GV3 and GV7

526134

526135

1 2 3 4

1 2 4
GV2 ME with screw clamp terminals

1 2 4

GV2 ME with spring terminals connections

GV2 ME, GV2 P, GV3 ME, GV3P and GV7 R motor circuit-breakers are 3-pole thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers specifically designed for the control and protection of motors, conforming to standards IEC 60947-2 and IEC 60947-4-1. Connection GV2 GV2ME and GV2P circuit-breakers are designed for connection by screw clamp terminals. Circuit-breaker GV2ME can be supplied with lugs or spring terminal connections. Spring terminal connections ensure secure, permanent and durable clamping that is resistant to harsh environments, vibration and impact and are even more effective when conductors without cable ends are used. Each connection can take two independent conductors. GV3 GV3 circuit-breakers feature connection by BTR screws (hexagon socket head), tightened using a n 4 Allen key. This type of connection uses the EverLink system with creep compensation (1) (Schneider Electric patent). This technique makes it possible to achieve accurate and durable tightening torque, in order to avoid cable creep. GV3 circuit-breakers are also available with connection by lugs. This type of connection meets the requirements of certain Asian markets and is suitable for applications subject to strong vibration, such as railway transport. GV7 GV7 circuit-breakers: with connection by screw clamp terminals (for bars and lugs) and by clip-on connectors. Operation Control is manual and local when the motor circuit-breaker is used on its own. Control is automatic and remote when it is associated with a contactor. Pushbutton control. Energisation is controlled manually by operating the Start button I 1. De-energisation is controlled manually by operating the Stop button O 2, or automatically by the thermal-magnetic protection elements or by a voltage trip attachment.
GV2 P, GV3P and GV7R GV2 ME and GV3 ME80

Presentation

526136

1 3 2 4
GV3 P

526137

5 6

1 3 2 4
GV2 P

526138

7 8

b Control by rotary knob: for GV2P and GV3P b Control by rocker lever: for GV7R. Energisation is controlled manually by moving the knob or rocker lever to position I 1. De-energisation is controlled manually by moving the knob or rocker lever to position O 2. De-energisation due to a fault automatically places the knob or rocker lever in the Trip position 3. Re-energisation is possible only after having returned the knob or rocker lever to position O.
(1) Creep: normal crushing phenomenon of copper conductors, that is accentuated over time.

1 3 2


GV7 R

9 10
Characteristics: pages 3/8 to 3/45 References: pages 3/46 to 3/69 Dimensions and schemes: pages 3/70 to 3/89

3/6

Presentation (continued)

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2, GV3 and GV7

Protection of motors and personnel Motor protection is provided by the thermal-magnetic protection elements incorporated in the motor circuit-breaker. The magnetic elements (short-circuit protection) have a non-adjustable tripping threshold, which is equal to 13 times the maximum setting current of the thermal trips. The thermal elements (overload protection) include automatic compensation for ambient temperature variations. The rated operational current of the motor is displayed by means of a graduated knob 4. Personnel protection is also provided. All live parts are protected against direct finger contact from the front panel. The addition of an undervoltage trip allows the circuit-breaker to be de-energised in the event of an undervoltage condition. The user is therefore protected against sudden starting of the machine when normal voltage is restored, since the Start button I has to be pressed to restart the motor. With the addition of a shunt trip, de-energisation of the unit can be remotely controlled. The operators on both open-mounted and enclosed motor circuit-breakers can be locked in the Stop position O by up to 4 padlocks. Because they are suitable for isolation, these circuit-breakers, in the open position, provide an adequate isolation distance and indicate the actual position of the moving contacts by the position of the operators. Special features These motor circuit-breakers are easily installed in any configuration thanks to their universal fixing arrangement: screw fixing or clip-on mounting on symmetrical, asymmetrical or combination rails.

Presentation (continued)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Characteristics: pages 3/8 to 3/45

References: pages 3/46 to 3/69

Dimensions and schemes: pages 3/70 to 3/89

3/7

Characteristics

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

1 2

Circuit-breaker type Conforming to standards

Environment

GV2 ME GV2 P IEC 60947-1, 60947-2, 60947-4-1, EN 60204, UL 508, CSA C 22.2 n 14-05, NF C 63-650, 63-120, 79-130, VDE 0113, 0660

GV3P IEC/EN 60947-1, 60947-2, 60947-4-1, UL 508 type E, CSA C 22.2 n 14-05 type E

GV3 ME80 IEC/EN, NF EN, BSEN, DIN EN 60947-2, 60947-4-1

Product certifications

3
Protective treatment Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 Open mounted In enclosure

UL, CSA, CCC, CEBEC, GOST, TSE, BV, GL, LROS , DNV, PTB, EZU, SETI, RINA, ATEX TH IP 20 GV2 Mp01: IP41 GV2 Mp02: IP55 30 gn -11 ms

UL (1), CSA, PTB, EZU, GOST, TSE, DNV, LROS, GL, BV, RINA, CCC, ATEX

UL, CSA, CCC, GOST, ATEX, BV, GL, DNV, RINA, LROS (pending)

UL, CSA, LROS

GV7 R IEC 60947-1, 60947-2, 60947-4-1, EN 60947-1, 60947-2, EN 60947-4-1, NF C 63-650, NF C 63-120, 79-130, VDE 0113, 0660 UL, DNV, CCC

TH IP 20

TC IP 20

4
Shock resistance Vibration resistance

GV3 CE01: GV3 PC01 and GV3 PC02: IP55 IP55 22 gn - 20 ms 2.5 gn (025 Hz) - 40+ 80 - 20+ 60 - 20+ 40 - 20+ 60 - 20+ 40 960 3000 0.5

TC IP 405 with terminal shrouds

Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Storage Operation C C C C C C m J

5 6 7 8 9 10

Ambient air temperature

Open mounted In enclosure Temperature compensation Open mounted In enclosure Flame resistance Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 Maximum operating altitude Suitable for isolation Conforming to IEC 60947-1 7-1-6 Resistance to mechanical impact

Sensitivity to phase failure Circuit-breaker type Utilisation category

On: 15 gn -11ms Off: 30 gn -11ms 5 gn (5150 Hz) 4 gn (5300 Hz) - 40+ 80 - 40+ 80 - 40+ 80 - 20+ 60 - 20+ 60 - 20+ 60 (2) - 20+ 40 - 20+ 40 - 20+ 40 - 20+ 60 - 20+ 60 - 20+ 60 - 20+ 40 - 20+ 40 - 20+ 40 960 960 2000 3000 Yes Yes 0.5 0.5 10 IK 04 IK 09 (in enclosure) Yes, conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 7-2-1-5-2 GV2 ME GV2 P A AC-3 690 690 600 50/60 6 2.5 100 000 GV2 RT GV3 P A AC-3 690 690 600 50/60 6 8 50 000 GV3 ME80 A AC-3 690 690 600 (B600) 50/60 6 8 30 000

15 gn -11 ms 2.5 gn (25 Hz) - 55+ 95 - 25 + 70 - 25 + 55 (3) 960 2000 Yes 0.5

Technical characteristics

Conforming to IEC 60947-2 Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 Rated operational voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-2 (Ue) Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-2 (Ui) Rated voltage Conforming to CSA C22-2 n 14, UL 508 Rated operational Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 frequency UL, CSA Rated impulse withstand Conforming to IEC 60947-2 voltage (U imp) Total power dissipated per pole Mechanical durability (C.O.: Close, Open) Electrical durability 440 V In/2 for AC-3 duty 440 V In Duty class (maximum operating rate) Maximum conventional Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 rated thermal current (Ith) Rated duty Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1

V V V Hz kV W C.O. C.O. C.O. C.O./h A

GV7 Rp20... Rp100 A AC-3 690 750 600 50/60 8 5 50 000

GV7 Rp150

GV7 Rp220

8.7 40 000

14.5 20 000

100 000 30 000 50 000 40 000 20 000 50 000 30 000 20 000 10 000 25 25 25 25 0.16 0.16 13 80 12 150 220 0.40 32 23 65 100 32 Continuous duty (1) UL 508 type E for GV2 PppH7 (2) Leave a space of 9 mm between 2 circuit-breakers: either an empty space, or side mounting addon contact blocks. Side by side mounting is possible up to 40 C. (3) For operation up to 70 C, please consult your Regional Sales Office. Schemes: pages 3/78 and 3/79

References: pages 3/47 to 3/51

Dimensions: pages 3/70 to 3/77

3/8

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

Mounting characteristics
Operating position Without derating, in relation to normal vertical mounting plane (1)
90 90
90 90

1 2 3

Connection characteristics
Bare cables

Connection to screw clamp terminals or spring terminals

Circuit-breaker type Connection to screw clamp terminals (2) Solid cable (Max. number of conductors x c.s.a.) Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque Connection to spring terminals Number of conductors x c.s.a. Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end

mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m mm2 mm2

GV2 ME Min. 2x1 2 x 1.5 2x1 1.7 2 x 1 (3)

Max. 2x6 2x6 2x4 1.7 2x6

GV2 P Min. 2x1 2 x 1.5 2x1 1.7

Max. 2x6 2x6 2x4 1.7

GV3 P Min. 2x1 2x1 2x1 5

Max. 1 x 25 and 1 x 35 1 x 25 and 1 x 35 1 x 25 and 1 x 35 5: 25 mm2 8: 35 mm2

GV3 ME80 Min. Max. 1 x 2.5 1 x 35 1 x 2.5 1 x 2.5 5 2 x 16 2 x 16 5

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

2 x 1.5 (3) 2 x 4

Connection by bars or lugs


Bars or lugs

6
d

e
Circuit-breaker type Pitch Without spreaders With spreaders Bars or cables with lugs e L L d Screws Tightening torque Bare cables (copper or aluminium) with connectors Height (h) C.s.a. Tightening torque N.m mm mm2 N.m mm mm mm mm mm mm

L
GV3Ppp6 17.5 y6 y 13.5 y 16.5 y 10 M6 6

L
GV7 Rp20...Rp100 35 45 y6 y 25 y 10 M6 10 20 1.5...95 15

L'
GV7 Rp150 35 45 y6 y 25 y 10 M8 15 20 1.5...95 15 GV7 Rp220 35 45 y6 y 25 y 10 M8 15 20 1.5...185 15

GV2MEpp6 13.5 y6 y 9.5 y 9.5 y 10 M4 1.7

(1) When mounting on a vertical rail, fit a stop to prevent any slippage. (2) For motor circuit-breakers GV3 P: BTR hexagon socket head screws, EverLink system. Require use of an insulated Allen key, in compliance with local electrical wiring regulations. (3) For cross-sections 1 to 1.5 mm2, the use of an LA9 D99 cable end reducer is recommended. References: pages 3/47 to 3/51 Dimensions: pages 3/70 to 3/77 Schemes: pages 3/78 and 3/79

3/9

Characteristics

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 ME and GV2 P

TeSys protection components

Breaking capacity of GV2 ME and GV2 P

1 2 3 4

Circuit-breaker type

Rating Breaking capacity conforming to IEC 60947-2 230/240 V Icu Ics % (1) 400/415 V Icu Ics % (1) 440 V Icu Ics % (1) 500 V Icu Ics % (1) 690 V Icu Ics % (1)

A kA

GV2 ME 01 07 08 to 06 0.1 2.5 4 to 1.6 g g g g g g

10

14

16 14 g g

20 18 g g

6.3 10 g g g g

21 & 22 23 & 25 50

32 32 50

GV2 P 01 07 08 to 06 0.1 2.5 4 to 1.6 g g g g g

10

14

16 14 g g

20 18 g g

6.3 10 g g g g

21 & 22 23 & 25 g g

32 32 g g

100 100 g 15 40 6 50 4 75 3 75 80 10 50 6 50 4 75 3 75 g g

kA

g g

g g

g g

g g

g g

15 50 8

15 50 8 50 6 75 3 75

g g

g g

g g

g g

g g

50 50 20 75 10 75 4

50 50 20 75 10 75 4

50 50 20 75 10 75 4

kA

g g

g g

g g

50

15

g g

g g

g g

g g

g g

50 75 42

100 100 50 50 10 6

kA

g g

g g

g g

g g

g g

g g

g g

50

100 100 75 3 75 3 75 3 75

100 75 6 6

kA

g g

3 75 g

3 75

g g

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g

5 6

Associated fuses (if required) if Isc > breaking capacity Icu conforming to IEC 60947-2

230/240 V

aM gG

A A A A A A A A A A

g g

g g g

g g g

80 g

g g g

g g

100 100 g 80 80 g

400/415 V

aM gG

g g g g g 63 g g g g g g g g 50 g g g 63 g g g 50 g g g 63 g 16 g 20 25 32 32 40 50 63 50 63 32 40 80 50 63 50 63 40 50

63

g g

g g

g g

g g

g g

100 100 100 125 125 125 63 80 80

80 100 100 g 50 63 50 63 40 50 63 80 50 63 40 50 63 80 50 63 40 50 g g

440 V

aM gG

g g

g g

g g

g g

50 63 50 63 50 63

80 100 100 50 63 50 63 50 63 50 63 50 63 50 63

7 8 9 10
References: pages 3/47 to 3/51

500 V

aM gG

g g

g g

g g

g g

50 63 40 50

690 V

aM gG

g g

20 25

25 32

40 50

g > 100 kA. (1) As % of Icu.

Dimensions: pages 3/70 to 3/72

Schemes: pages 3/78

3/10

Characteristics (continued)

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 ME and GV2 P

TeSys protection components

Breaking capacity of GV2ME and GV2P (used in association with current limiter GV1 L3)
Circuit-breaker type Rating Breaking capacity conforming to IEC 60947-2 230/240 V Icu Ics % (1) 400/415 V Icu Ics % (1) 440 V Icu Ics % (1) 500 V Icu Ics % (1) Circuit-breaker type Rating Breaking capacity conforming to IEC 60947-2 230/240 V Icu Ics % (1) 400/415 V Icu Ics % (1) 440 V Icu Ics % (1) 500 V Icu Ics % (1) 690 V (3) Circuit-breaker type Rating Cable protection against thermal stress in the event of short-circuit (PVC insulated copper cables) Minimum c.s.a. protected at 40 C at Isc max. 1 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 46 mm2 A Icu = Ics kA kA kA kA A kA kA kA kA A kA GV2 ME 01 to 06 07 0.1 to 2.5 1.6 g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g 08 4 g g g g g g g g 10 6.3 g g g g g g g g 14 10 g g g g g g 50 100 16 14 g g 100 50 50 75 42 100 20 18 g g 100 50 20 75 10 75 21 23 g g 100 40 20 75 10 75 22 25 g g 100 40 20 75 10 75 32 32 g g 100 40 20 75 10 75

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

GV2 P 01 to 06 07 0.1 to 2.5 1.6 g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g 50

08 4 g g g g g g g g 50

10 6.3 g g g g g g g g 50

14 10 g g g g g g 100 50 50

16 14 g g g g 100 50 100 50 50

20 18 g g g g 100 50 100 50 50

21 23 g g g g 100 50 100 50 50

22 25 g g g g 100 50 100 50 50

32 32 g g g g 100 50 100 50 50

GV2 ME 01 to 06 07 0.1 2.5 to 1.6 p p p p p p p p

08 4 p p p p

10 6.3

14 10

16 14

20 18

21 23

22 25

32 32

y 10 kA y 6 kA

(2)

(2) (2) p p

(2) (2) p p

(2) (2) p p

(2) (2) (2) p

y 20 kA y 10 kA (2) p p p p p p

g > 100 kA p Cable c.s.a. protected (1) As % of Icu (2) Cable c.s.a. not protected (3) With limiter LA9 LB920

References: pages 3/47 to 3/51

Dimensions: pages 3/70 to 3/72

Schemes: pages 3/78

3/11

Characteristics

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3P and GV3ME80

Breaking capacity of GV3P and GV3ME80

1 2 3 4

Motor circuit-breaker type Rating Breaking capacity conforming to IEC 60947-2 230/240 V Icu Ics % (1) 400/415 V Icu Ics % (1) 440 V Icu Ics % (1) 500 V Icu Ics % (1) 690 V Icu Ics % (1) Associated fuses, if required if lsc > breaking capacity Icu 230/240 V aM gG A A A A A A A A A A kA kA kA kA A kA

GV3 P 13 13 100 100 100 100 50 100 12 50 6 50 g g g g 63 80 63 80 50 63 18 18 100 100 100 100 50 100 12 50 6 50 g g g g 80 100 63 80 50 63 25 25 100 100 100 100 50 100 12 50 6 50 g g g g 125 160 63 80 50 63 32 32 100 100 100 100 50 100 12 50 6 50 g g g g 125 160 63 80 50 63 40 40 100 100 50 100 50 100 12 50 6 50 g g 125 160 125 160 80 100 63 80 50 50 100 100 50 100 50 100 12 50 6 50 g g 125 160 125 160 80 100 63 80 65 65 100 100 50 100 50 100 12 50 6 50 g g 125 160 125 160 80 100 63 80

GV3 ME80 80 100 100 15 50 10 60 4 100 2 100 g g 315 400 315 400 200 250 200 250

5 6 7 8 9 10
References: pages 3/47 to 3/51

415 V

aM gG

440 V

aM gG

500 V

aM gG

690 V

aM gG

g Fuse not required: breaking capacity Icn > Isc. (1) As % of Icu.

Dimensions: pages 3/73 and 3/74

Schemes: pages 3/78 and 3/79

3/12

Characteristics

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV7 R

TeSys protection components

Breaking capacity of GV7R


Circuit-breaker type Rating Breaking capacity conforming to IEC 60947-2 230/240 V lcu Ics % (1) 400/415 V Icu Ics % (1) 440 V Icu Ics % (1) 500 V Icu Ics % (1) 690 V Icu Ics % (1) Cable protection against thermal stress in the event of short-circuit (PVC insulated copper cables) Minimum c.s.a. protected at 40 C at Isc max. 4 mm2 6 mm2 1050 mm2 kA kA kA kA A kA GV7 RE20RE100 RS20RS100 RE150 90150 85 100 35 100 35 100 30 100 8 100 RS150 90150 100 100 70 100 65 100 50 100 10 100 RE220 132220 85 100 35 100 35 100 30 100 8 100 RS220 132220 100 100 70 100 65 100 50 100 10 100 1220 to 60100 85 100 36 100 36 100 18 100 8 100 y 6 kA p p 100 100 70 100 65 100 50 100 10 100 y 6 kA y 25 kA p

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

(2) (2) p

(2) (2) p

(2) (2) p

(2) (2) p

(1) As % of Icu. p Cable c.s.a. protected. (2) Cable c.s.a. not protected.

References: pages 3/47 to 3/51

Dimensions: pages 3/73 and 3/74

Schemes: pages 3/78 and 3/79

3/13

Characteristics

TeSys protection components


Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 LE and GV2 L

Environment

1 2 3 4

Circuit-breaker type Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Shock resistance Vibration resistance Ambient air temperature Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Storage Operation Flame resistance Maximum operating altitude Operating position Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 C C C m

GV2 LE GV2 L IEC 60947-1, 60947-2, EN 60204, NF C 63-650, NF C63-120, 79-130, VDE 0113, 0660. CSA, CCC CSA, CCC, BV, DNV, GL, LROS, RINA TH 30 gn 5 gn (5 to 150 Hz) - 40+ 80 - 20+ 60 960 2000 TH 30 gn 5 gn (5 to 150 Hz) - 40+ 80 - 20+ 60 960 2000

Connection (Max. number of conductors x c.s.a)

Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end

mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m

Min. 2x1 2 x 1.5 2x1 1.7 Yes

Max. 2x6 2x6 2x4

Min. 2x1 2 x 1.5 2x1 1.7 Yes 0.5

Max. 2x6 2x6 2x4

5
Tightening torque Suitable for isolation

Conforming to IEC 60947-1 7-1-6 J

6 7 8 9 10

Resistance to mechanical impact

0.5

Technical characteristics
Utilisation category Conforming to IEC 60947-2 Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Rated operational frequency Conforming to IEC 60947-2 Conforming to IEC 60947-2 Conforming to IEC 60947-2 V V Hz kV W C.O. C.O. C.O./h A AC-3 690 690 50/60 6 1.8 100 000 100 000 40 Continuous duty A AC-3 690 690 50/60 6 1.8 100 000 100 000 40 Continuous duty

Conforming to IEC 60947-2 Rated impulse withstand voltage (U imp) Total power dissipated per pole Mechanical durability For AC-3 duty (C.O.: Closing, Opening) Electrical durability for AC-3/415V duty (C.O.: Closing, Opening) Duty class (maximum operating rate) Rated duty Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1

References: pages 3/52 and 3/53

Dimensions: pages 3/83 to 3/84

Schemes: page 3/87

3/14

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys protection components


Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 LE and GV2 L

Circuit-breaker type

Rating Breaking capacity conforming to IEC 60947-2 230/240 V Icu Ics % (1) 400/415 V Icu Ics % (1) 440 V Icu Ics % (1) 500 V Icu Ics % (1) 690 V Icu Ics % (1) Associated fuses (if required) if Isc > breaking capacity Icu conforming to IEC 60947-2 amendment 1 230/240 V aM gG 400/415 V aM gG 440 V aM gG 500 V aM gG 690 V aM gG Cable protection against thermal stress in the event of short-circuit (PVC insulated copper cables) Minimum c.s.a. protected at 40 C and at Isc max. 1 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 46 mm2

A kA

GV2 LE 03 07 08 10 14 to 06 0.4 2.5 4 6.3 10 to 1.6 g g g g g g g g g g g g g 3 g g g g g g g 3 g g g 50 g g g 15

16 20 22 14 18 25 g g g g 50

32 32 50

GV2 L 03 06 08 to & 05 07 0.4 1.6 4 to to 1 2.5 g g g g g g g g g g 4 g g g g g g g 4

10

14

16 14 g g 50 50 20 75 10

20 18 g g 50 50 20 75 10 75 4

22 25 50

32 32 50

6.3 10 g g g g g g g g 4 g g g g 20 75 10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

100 100 g 10 50 6 50 4 75 3 75 80 g g g g g g g g g

100 100 50 50 20 75 10 75 4 50 50 20 75 10 75 4

kA

g g

15 15 15 50 50 40 8 8 6

kA

g g

100 100 50 50 50 50 10 6 6 4

kA

g g

100 100 75 75 75 3 3 75 g g g g 50 63 50 63 32 40 3 3 3

100 75 4 4

kA

g g

75 75 75 g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g 50 63 50 63

75 75 75 g g g g 80

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 g g g g g g g g 20 25 p p p p g g g g g g g g 25 32 p p p p g g g g g g g g 40 50 g g g g 50 63 50 63 40 50 g g g g 100 100 125 125

A A A A A A A A A A kA kA

g g g g g g g g g g p p p p

100 100 g 80 g

63 63 80

80 100 100 100 100 125 125 125 63 80 80 80

80 80 100 100 g 50 50 63 63 63 80 50 50 50 63 63 63 40 40 40 50 50 50 63 80 50 63 40 50 g g g g g g

80 100 100 100 50 63 50 63 50 63 50 63 50 63 50 63 50 63 50 63

16 25 32 20 32 40 p p p p p p p p

y10 y 6 (2) (2) (2) (2) p y20 y 10 (2) (2) (2) (2) p p p p p p p p p p p (2) p p p

y10 y 6 (2) (2) (2) (2) y20 y10 (2) (2) (2) (2) p p p p p p p p p p (2) p

g > 100 kA p Cable c.s.a. protected (1) As % of Icu (2) Cable c.s.a. not protected

References: pages 3/52 and 3/53

Dimensions: pages 3/83 to 3/84

Schemes: page 3/87

3/15

Characteristics

TeSys protection components


Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3L and GK3EF80

Environment

1 2 3 4

Circuit-breaker type Conforming to standards Protective treatment Degree of protection Shock resistance Vibration resistance Flame resistance Ambient air temperature Conforming to IEC 60529 Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 Storage Operation Maximum operating altitude Operating position Without derating, in relation to normal vertical mounting plane (2)

GV3 L IEC/EN 60947-1, 60947-2 TH IP 20 On : 15 gn -11 ms Off : 30 gn -11 ms 4 gn (5300 Hz) C C C m 960 - 40+ 80 - 20+ 60 (1) 3000

GK3 EF80 IEC 60947-2, EN 60204 TC IP 20 22 gn -20 ms 2.5 gn (025 Hz) 960 - 40+ 80 - 20+ 70 open mounted 3000 Any position

Connection (Max. number of conductors x c.s.a)

Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end

mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m

Min. 2x1 2x1 2x1 5 Yes

5
Tightening torque Suitable for isolation conforming to IEC 60947-1 7-1-6

Max. 1 x 25 1 x 35 1 x 25 1 x 35 1 x 25 1 x 35 5 : 25 mm2 8 : 35 mm2

Min. 1 x 2.5 1 x 2.5 or 2 x 2.5 1 x 2.5 or 2 x 2.5 5 Yes

Max. 1 x35 1 x 25 or 2 x 16 1 x 25 or 2 x 16

6 7 8 9 10

Technical characteristics
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Rated impulse withstand voltage (U imp) Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated operational frequency Conforming to IEC 60947-2 Conforming to IEC 60947-2 Conforming to IEC 60947-2 V kV V Hz C.O. C.O. C.O./h 690 6 690 50/60 50000 50000 25 14 I max A 750 10 690 5060 1500 20000 40 3363 A

Electrical durability for AC-3/415V duty (C.O.: Close - Open) Mechanical durability (C.O.: Closing, Opening) Maximum operating rate Operating threshold of magnetic trips Utilisation category Conforming to IEC 60947-2

(1) Leave a space of 9 mm between 2 circuit-breakers: either an empty space or side-mounting add-on contact blocks. Side by side mounting is possible up to 40 C. (2) When mounting on a vertical rail, fit a stop to prevent any slippage.

References: pages 3/52 and 3/53

Dimensions: pages 3/85 and 3/88

Schemes: page 3/87

3/16

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys protection components


Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3L and GK3EF80

Breaking capacity of GV3L and GK3EF80


Type Breaking capacity of the circuitbreaker only or of the circuitbreaker combined with a thermal overload relay 230/240 V Icu Ics % (1) 400/415 V Icu Ics % (1) 440 V Icu Ics % (1) 500 V Icu Ics % (1) 690 V Icu Ics % (1) Associated fuses (if required) for use with circuit-breaker only or circuit-breaker combined with a thermal overload relay if lsc > breaking capacity 230/240 V aM gG 415 V aM gG 440 V aM gG 500 V aM gG 690 V aM gG Use of circuit-breakers without fuses Cable c.s.a. Isc (rms) 3-phase, incoming (Ue = 415 V) 50 kA 45 kA 40 kA 37 kA mm2 m m m m A A A A A A A A A A kA kA kA kA kA GV3L25 100 100 100 100 50 100 12 50 6 50 g g g g 63 80 63 80 50 63 GV3L32 100 100 100 100 50 100 12 50 6 50 g g g g 80 100 63 80 50 63 GV3L40 100 100 50 100 50 100 12 50 6 50 g g g g 125 160 63 80 50 63 GV3L50 100 100 50 100 50 100 12 50 6 50 g g g g 125 160 63 80 50 63 GV3L65 100 100 50 100 50 100 12 50 6 50 g g 125 160 125 160 80 100 63 80 GK3 EF80 50 40 35 25 25 30 15 30 6 50 200 315 200 250 160 250 160 200 125 160

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Minimum cable length (in metres) limiting the maximum short-circuit current to 35 kA maximum, so enabling breakers GK3 EF80 to be used without fuses y 25 5 5 5 5 35 6 5 5 5 50 8 7 5 5 70 10 8 5 5 95 13 10 8 5 120 15 12 9 5

g Fuse not required: breaking capacity Icn > Isc. (1) As % of Icu

References: pages 3/52 and 3/53

Dimensions: pages 3/85 and 3/88

Schemes: page 3/87

3/17

Characteristics

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2, GV3P and GV3L
Auxiliary contacts

Type of contacts

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Instantaneous auxiliary GV AN, GV AD Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Conforming to CSA C22-2 n 14 and UL 508 Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Conforming to CSA C22-2 n 14 and UL 508 V V A A C.O. 690 600 6 5 100 000 AC-15/100 000 C.O. V VA kVA A 48

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) (associated insulation coordination) Conventional thermal current (Ith)

Fault signalling GV AD, GV AM11 (1) 690 300 2.5 1 1000 AC-14/1000 C.O. 48 48

Instantaneous auxiliary GV AE 250 (690 in relation to main circuit) 300 2.5 1 100 000 AC-15/100 000 C.O. 48 60 110 230 127 240 120 120 1.27 2.4 0.5

Mechanical durability (C.O.: Close - Open) Operational power and current conforming to IEC 60947-5-1. a.c. operation Rated operational voltage (Ue) Operational power, normal conditions Occasional breaking and making capacities, abnormal conditions Rated operational current (Ie) Operational power and current conforming to IEC 60947-5-1. d.c. operation Rated operational voltage (Ue) Operational power, normal conditions Occasional breaking and making capacities, abnormal conditions Rated operational current (Ie) Low power switching reliability of contact Minimum operational conditions d.c. operation Short-circuit protection Cabling, screw clamp terminals Number of conductors Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque

110 230 380 440 500 690 24 127 240 415 300 500 720 850 650 500 400 36 3 6 7 4.5 13 3.3 15 2.2 13 1.5 12 1 9 0.6

110 230 24 127 240 72 72 48

0.22 0.3 1.5 1

0.45 0.45 0.48 0.6 0.5 0.3 2

1.25 1

DC-13/100 000 C.O. V W W A 24 110 240 (2) 140 240 180 140 120 240 360 240 210 180 6 5 3 1.3 0.5 48 60

DC-13/1000 C.O. 24 24 48 15 60 9 50

DC-13/100 000 C.O. 24 24 48 15 60 9 50

100 50 1 0.3

100 50 1 0.3

0.15

0.15

V mA

mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m

GV AE: Number of failures for n million operating cycles (17 V-5 mA): = 10-6 17 5 By GB2 CBpp circuit-breaker (rating according to operational current for Ue y 415 V) or by gG fuse 10 A max 1 2 12.5 12.5 0.752.5 0.752.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 1.4 max 1.4 max GV AN only 0.752.5

GB2 CB06 or gG fuse 10 A max

Cabling, spring terminal connections GV2 Power pole GV AN20 GV AN11 GV AE1 GV AE20 GV AE11 GV AD10pp GV AD11pp F F F O F O F F F O F O

Flexible cable without cable end Operation of instantaneous auxiliary contacts 0 1

mm2

0.752.5

0.751.5 Operation of fault signalling contacts

GV3P, GV3L Power pole GV AN20 GV AN11 GV AE1 GV AE20 GV AE11 GV AD10pp F F F O F O F F F O F O O

1 GV AM11 Change of state following tripping on shortcircuit. GV AD10pp and GV AD01pp Change of state following tripping on shortcircuit, overload or undervoltage.

Contact open Contact Close

GV AED101 F GV AED011

(1) For application example of fault signalling contact and short-circuit signalling contact, see page 3/82. (2) Add an RC circuit type LA4 D to the load terminals, see page 5/81.

References: page 3/55

Dimensions, schemes: pages 3/70 to 3/87

3/18

Characteristics

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3ME80
Auxiliary contacts

Type of contacts Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts GV3 A01A07 690 600 (B600) 6 5 (B600) 100 000 48 110 220 380 127 240 415 AC-11/100 000 C.O. 350 500 4 6 24 12 4.5 48 800 20 3.5 60 850 20 2.2 110 440 500 690

Fault signalling contacts GV3 A08 and A09 690 600 (B600) 6 5 (B600) 1000 48 110 220 380 127 240 415 AC-11/1000 C.O. 800 12 3.5 60 850 15 2.2 110 440 500 690

Conventional rated thermal current (Ith)

Conforming to CSA C22-2 n 14, V UL 508 Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 A Conforming to CSA C22-2 n 14, A UL 508 C.O. Rated operational voltage (Ue) Operational power V

1 2

Mechanical durability (C.O.: Close - Open) Operational power and current conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 a.c. operation

VA Occasional breaking and making capacities Operational current (Ie) Operational power and current conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 d.c. operation Rated operational voltage (Ue) Operational power kVA A V

700 15 1.5 220

700 15 1.5

400 10 0.6

240 460 2.4 5 24 8 3.6 48

450 12 1 220

450 12 1

200 8 0.3

3 4 5 6

DC-11/100 000 C.O. W 180 240 240 360 6 5 180 240 3 140 210 1.3 120 180 0.5

DC-11/1000 C.O. 120 120 180 180 5 2.5 90 135 1.5 70 105 0.7 60 90 0.3

Occasional breaking and making capacities Operational current (Ie) Short-circuit protection Connection Number of conductors Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Contact operation GV3 Power pole GV3 A01, A07 GV3 A02 GV3 A03 GV3 A05 GV3 A06 O F F F O F F F F F F O
Contact open Contact Close

W A

By GB2 CB08 circuit-breaker or gG fuse, 6A max 1 mm2 mm2 mm2 1 12.5 0.752.5 0.752.5 2 12.5 0.752.5 0.751.5 GV3 A08 and A09 change state following tripping on short-circuit or overload

7 8

9 10

References: page 3/65

Schemes: page 3/79

3/19

Characteristics

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV7
Auxiliary contacts

Auxiliary contact characteristics

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Type of contacts Rated insulation voltage(Ui) (associated insulation coordination) Conventional thermal current (Ith) Mechanical durability (C.O.: Close - Open) Operational current conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 a.c. operation

Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1

V A C.O.

GV7 AE11 690 6 50 000 AC-12 or AC-15. 50 000 C.O. 24 48 110 230/ 380/ 440 240 415 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 5 4 3 3

GV7 AB11 690 6 50 000 AC-12 or AC-15. 50 000 C.O. 24 48 110 230/ 380/ 440 240 415 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 3 2.5 2.5

Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated operational current (Ie)

V AC-12 AC-15 A A

690 6 0.1

690 5 0.1

Operational current conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 d.c. operation

Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated operational current (Ie)

V DC-12 DC-14 A A V mA

DC-12 or DC-14. 50 000 C.O. 24 48 110 2.5 1 17 5 2.5 0.2 0.8 0.5

250 0.3

DC-12 or DC-14. 50 000 C.O. 24 48 110 2 2 0.1 0.5 0.25

250

0.03 0.5 12 5

Minimum operational conditions d.c. operation

Short-circuit protection Cabling Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end mm2 mm2 mm2

By GB2 CBpp circuit-breaker (rating according to operational current for Ue y 415 V) or gG fuse, 10 A max. 1 x 1.5 conductor 1 x 1.5 conductor 1 x 1.5 conductor 1 x 1.5 conductor 1 x 1.5 conductor 1 x 1.5 conductor

References: page 3/61

Schemes: page 3/79

3/20

Characteristics

TeSys protection components


Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GK3EF80
Auxiliary contacts

Characteristics of Start-Stop and fault signalling contacts


Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Rated operational voltage (Ue) Conventional thermal current (Ith) Operational power and current conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 a.c. operation (C.O.: Close - Open) Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 V V A 500 500 6 AC-15. 20 000 C.O. 48 110/127 360 4000 6 500 12 000 4.5

1
220/240 800 20 000 3.5 380/415 850 20 000 2.2 440 700 15 000 1.5 500 700 15 000 1.5

Rated operational voltage (Ue) Operational power

V VA

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Occasional breaking and making VA capacities Rated operational current (Ie) A Operational power and current conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 d.c. operation (C.O.: Close - Open)

Rated operational voltage (Ue) Operational power Occasional breaking and making capacities Rated operational current (Ie)

V W W A

DC-13. 1000 C.O. 24 48 180 240 6 240 280 5

60 180 240 3

110 140 210 1.3

220 120 180 0.5

Short-circuit protection Cabling

Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m

By GB2 CB08 circuit-breaker or gG fuse, 6A max 1 x 14 conductor 1 x 2.5 conductor 1 x 12.5 conductor or 2 x 12.5 conductors 0.8

Tightening torque

References: page 3/65

Dimensions: page 3/88

3/21

Characteristics

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers
Electric trips

Characteristics of electric trips

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Circuit-breaker type Type of trip Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

Conforming to IEC 60947-1

GV2 ME, GV2 P GV3P, GV3L GV AU GV AS 690 690 600 0.85 1.1Un 0.7 0.35 Un 12 8 3.5 1.1 600 0.7 1.1Un 0.75 0.2 Un 14 10.5 5 1.6

GV2ME only GV AX (1) 500 0.85 1.1 Un 0.7 0.35 Un 12 8 3.5 1.1

GV3 ME80 GV3 B 690 GV3 D 690

GV7 R GV7 AU 690 GV7 AS 690 600 0.7 1.1 Un 0.2 0.75 Ue

Operational voltage Drop-out voltage Inrush consumption

Conforming to CSA C22-2 n 14, V UL 508 Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V V a c VA W VA W

600 (B600) 600 (B600) 600 0.81.1 Un 0.70.35 Un 12 7 7 2.5 0.85 1.1 Un 0.35 0.7 Ue < 10 <5 <5 <5

Sealed consumption

a c

Operating time

Conforming to IEC 60947-1 ms

From the moment the voltage reaches its operational value until opening of the circuitbreaker. 1015 10 15 < 50 100 % 100 % 1 or 2 12.5 0.752.5 0.752.5 1.2 100 % 1 1.5 1.5 1 1.2

On-load factor Cabling Number of conductors Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque Mechanical durability (C.O.: Close - Open) mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m C.O.

2 or 4 12.5 0.752.5 0.751.5 1.4 max

30 000 (GV2 ME and GV2 P) 50 % of the mechanical durability of the 10 000 (GV3 P and GV3 L) circuitbreaker (1) Wiring scheme of undervoltage trip for dangerous machines (conforming to INRS) on GV2 ME only, see page 3/82.

References: page 3/61

Schemes: pages 3/78 and 3/79

3/22

Characteristics

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic and magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 and GV3
Accessories

Characteristics of 3-pole busbars GV2 Gppp and GV3Gp64


Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conventional thermal current (Ith) Permissible peak current (I peak) Permissible thermal limit (I2t) Degree of protection Terminal block Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Conforming to IEC 60439-1 V A kA kA2s Conforming to IEC 60529 GV2Gppp 690 63 11 104 IP 20 Yes GV3Gp64 690 115 20 300 IP 20

1 2 3 4 5

Characteristics of terminal blocks GV2 G05 and GV1 G09 (for GV2ME and GV2 P)
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conventional thermal current (Ith) Degree of protection Connection Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Conforming to IEC 60439-1 Conforming to IEC 60529 Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Flexible or solid cable AWG Tightening torque Connector Screw clamp terminals N.m N.m mm
2

V A

690 63 IP 20 1 x 1.5 to 25 conductor or 2 x 1.5 to 6 conductors 1 x 1.5 to 16 conductor or 2 x 2.5 to 4 conductors 1 x 1.5 to 10 conductor or 2 x 1.5 to 2 conductors 1 AWG 4 2.2 1.7

mm2 mm
2

Characteristics of current limiters (GV2 ME and GV2 P)


Type Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conventional thermal current (Ith) Rated operational current (Ie) Operating threshold Connection Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V A A rms current A GV1 L3 690 63 32 1500 (non adjustable threshold) 1 conductor 1.525 1.525 1.516 2.2 2 conductors 1.510 2.510 1.5 4 LA9 LB920 690 63 32 1000 (non adjustable threshold) 1 conductor 1.525 1.525 1.516 2 conductors 1.510 1.510 1.5 4

6 7 8 9 10

References: page 3/67

3/23

Curves

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 ME and GV2 P

Thermal-magnetic tripping curves for GV2 ME and GV2 P


Time (s)

Average operating times at 20 C related to multiples of the setting current



10 000

1000

100

1
10

2 3

0,1

0,01

0,001

1,5

10

100
x the setting current (Ir)

1 3 poles from cold state 2 2 poles from cold state 3 3 poles from hot state

References: pages 3/48 and 3/49

Dimensions: pages 3/70 to 3/72

Schemes: page 3/76

3/24

Curves (continued)

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 ME and GV2 P

Dynamic stress

Current limitation on short-circuit for GV2 ME and GV2 P (3-phase 400/415 V)

I peak = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V


Limited peak current (kA)

100

0.

=0 .25

2 3 4 5 6

10

0. 8

0.7

0.

7 8

0.

9
= co s 0.9 5

10

11

0,1 0,1

10

15 (12)

100 Prospective Isc (kA)

1 Maximum peak current 2 24 -32 A 3 20 -25 A 4 17 -23 A 5 13 -18 A 6 9 -14 A 7 6 -10 A 8 4 -6.3 A 9 2.5 -4 A 10 1.6 -2.5 A 11 1 -1.6 A 12 Limit of rated ultimate breaking capacity on short-circuit of GV2 ME (14, 18, 23 and 25 A ratings)

References: pages 3/48 and 3/49

Dimensions: pages 3/70 to 3/72

Schemes: page 3/76

3/25

Curves (continued)

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 ME

Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2 ME


Sum of I2dt = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V
Sum of I2dt (kA2s)

Thermal limit in kA2s in the magnetic operating zone

100 1

2 3 4 5 6 7

10

9
1

10

0,1

0,01 0,1

10

100 Prospective Isc (kA)

1 24 -32 A 2 20 -25 A 3 17 -23 A 4 13 -18 A 5 9 -14 A 6 6 -10 A 7 4 -6.3 A 8 2.5 -4 A 9 1.6 -2.5 A 10 1 -1.6 A

References: pages 3/48 and 3/49

Dimensions: pages 3/70 to 3/72

Schemes: page 3/76

3/26

Curves (continued)

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 P

Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2 P


Sum of I2dt = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V
Sum of I2dt (kA2s)

Thermal limit in kA2s in the magnetic operating zone

100

1 2 3 4 5 6
10

3
7

8
1

0,1

0,01 0,1

10

100 Prospective Isc (kA)

1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

24 -32 A 20 -25 A 17 -23 A 13 -18 A 9 -14 A 6 -10 A 4 -6.3 A 2.5 -4 A 1.6 -2.5 A 1 -1.6 A

References: pages 3/48 and 3/49

Dimensions: pages 3/70 to 3/72

Schemes: page 3/76

3/27

Curves

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3 P and GV3ME80

Thermal-magnetic tripping curves


Time (s)

Average operating times at 20 C related to multiples of the setting current



10 000

4a
1000

4b

100

3a
10

3b 1a 2a 2b 1b

0,1

0,01

0,001

10

100
x the setting current (Ir)

1a 3 poles from cold state (Ir mini.) : GV3P 1b 3 poles from cold state (Ir maxi.) : GV3P 2a 2 poles from cold state (Ir mini.) : GV3ME80 2b 2 poles from cold state (Ir maxi.) : GV3ME80 3a 3 poles from hot state (Ir mini.) : GV3P 3b 3 poles from hot state (Ir maxi.) : GV3P 4a 3 poles from hot state (Ir mini.) : GV3ME80 4b 3 poles from hot state (Ir maxi.) : GV3ME80

References: page 3/49

Dimensions: page 3/73

Schemes: page 3/77

3/28

Curves (continued)

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3 P and GV3ME80

Current limitation on short-circuit (3-phase 400/415 V)


Dynamic stress I peak = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V
Limited peak current (kA) 100

=0 .25

1 2
0. 5

3
3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10

0.

0.

0.7

10

=
15

0. 3

100 Prospective Isc (kA)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Maximum peak current 56 -80 A 48 -65 A 37 -50 A 30 -40 A 23 -32 A 17 -25 A 12 -18 A 9 -13 A

References: page 3/49

Dimensions: page 3/73

Schemes: page 3/77

3/29

Curves (continued)

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3 P and GV3ME80

Maximum thermal limit on short-circuit


Sum of I2dt = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V
Sum of I2dt (kA2s) 1000

Thermal limit in kA2s in the magnetic operating zone

3
100

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

10

10

15

100 Prospective Isc (kA)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

56-80 A (GV3ME80) 48-65 A (GV3P65) 37-50 A (GV3P50) 30-40 A (GV3P40) 23-32 A (GV3P32) 17-25 A (GV3P25) 12-18 A (GV3P18) 9-13 A (GV3P13)

References: page 3/49

Dimensions: page 3/73

Schemes: page 3/77

3/30

Curves

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV7 R

Thermal-magnetic tripping curves for GV7 R


Time (s) 10 000

Average operating times at 20 C related to multiples of the setting current


5000 2000 1000 500

200 100 50 20 10 5 2 1 0,5

1 2

3
0,2 0,1 0,05 0,02 0,01 0,005 0,002 0,001

1 1,12

10

20

30

40 50

70

100

x the setting current (Ir)

1 Cold state curve 2 Cold state curve 3 1214 Ir In the event of total phase failure, tripping occurs after 4 s 20 %

References: page 3/49

Dimensions: page 3/73

Schemes: page 3/77

3/31

Curves (continued)

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV7 R

Current limitation on short-circuit (3-phase 400/415 V)


Dynamic stress I peak = f (prospective Isc)
For GV7 RE only

Limited peak current (kA)

1 GV7 RE220 2 GV7 RE150 3 GV7 RE100

100 80 70 60

50 40 30

20

1 2
10 8 7 6 5 4 2 3 4 5 6 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 100 Prospective Isc (kA)

For GV7 RS only

Limited peak current (kA)

1 GV7 RS220 2 GV7 RS150 3 GV7 RS100

100 80 70 60 50 40 30

20

1 2
10 8 7 6 5 4 2 3 4 5 6 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 100 Prospective Isc (kA)

References: page 3/50

Dimensions: pages 3/73 to 3/75

Schemes: page 3/77

3/32

Curves (continued)

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV7 R

Thermal limit

Thermal limit (3-phase 400/415 V)

Sum of I2dt = f (prospective Isc)


For GV7 RE only
Sum of I2dt (A2s)

10

1 GV7 RE220 2 GV7 RE150 3 GV7 RE100

5x10 3x10

2x106

10

3
1 2 3

5x105 3x10 2x10


5

10

5x10 3x10 2x10

4 4

10

20

30

40

50 60 70 100 Prospective Isc (kA)

For GV7 RS only


Sum of I2dt (A2s)

10

1 GV7 RS220 2 GV7 RS150 3 GV7 RS100

5x106 3x10 2x10


6 6

10

1
5x105 3x10 2x10
5

2 3

10

5x104 3x10
4

2x104 2 3 4 5 6 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 100 Prospective Isc (kA)

References: page 3/50

Dimensions: pages 3/73 to 3/75

Schemes: page 3/77

3/33

Curves (continued)

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV7 R

Current limitation on short-circuit (3-phase 690 V)


Dynamic stress I peak = f (prospective Isc)
For GV7 RE only
50 40

Limited peak current (kA)

1 GV7 RE220 2 GV7 RE150 and GV7 RE100

30

20

1 2
10

8 7 6 5 4 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 20 Prospective Isc (kA)

For GV7 RS only


50 40

Limited peak current (kA)

1 GV7 RS220 2 GV7 RS150 and GV7 RS100

30

20

1 2
10

8 7 6 5 4 2 3 4 5 6 10 20 Prospective Isc (kA)

References: page 3/49

Dimensions: pages 3/73 to 3/75

Schemes: page 3/77

3/34

Curves (continued)

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV7 R

Thermal limit on short-circuit (3-phase 690 V)


Thermal limit Sum of I2dt = f (prospective Isc)
For GV7 RE only
Sum of I2dt (A2s)
6

3x10

1 GV7 RE220 2 GV7 RE150 and GV7 RE100

2x10

10

3
1 2

5x10

3x10

2x10

10

10

20 Prospective Isc (kA)

For GV7 RS only


Sum of I2dt (A2s)
6

3x10

1 GV7 RS220 2 GV7 RS150 and GV7 RS100

2x10

10

5x10

1 2

3x10

2x105

10

10

20 Prospective Isc (kA)

References: page 3/49

Dimensions: pages 3/73 to 3/75

Schemes: page 3/77

3/35

Curves

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 RT

Thermal-magnetic tripping curves for GV2 RT


Time (s)

10 000

1000

100

3
10

2 1

0,1

0,01

0,001

10

100 k x Ir

1 3 poles from cold state 2 2 poles from cold state 3 3 poles from hot state

References: page 3/50

Dimensions: page 3/72

Schemes: page 3/76

3/36

Curves

TeSys protection components


Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 L and GV2 LE

Tripping curves for GV2 L or LE combined with thermal overload relay LRD or LR2 K
Average operating times at 20 C related to multiples of the setting current
Time (s)

10 000

1000

100

3
1 2 3

10

0,1

0,01

0,001

10

100 x the setting current (Ir)

1 3 poles from cold state 2 2 poles from cold state 3 3 poles from hot state

References: pages 3/52 and 3/53

Dimensions: page 3/84

Schemes: page 3/85

3/37

Curves (continued)

TeSys protection components


Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 L and GV2 LE

Current limitation on short-circuit for GV2 L and GV2 LE only (3-phase 400/415 V)
Dynamic stress I peak = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V
Limited peak current (kA)

100

1
= 0.2 5

0. 5

3
10
= 0. 7
0. 8

0. 3

2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9

0.9

10

0,1 0,1

co

=0

.95

10

15

100
Prospective Isc (kA)

11

1 Maximum peak current 2 32 A 3 25 A 4 18 A 5 14 A 6 10 A 7 6.3 A 8 4 A 9 2.5 A 10 1.6 A 11 Limit of rated ultimate breaking capacity on short-circuit of GV2 LE (14, 18, 23 and 25 A ratings).

References: pages 3/52 and 3/53

Dimensions: page 3/84

Schemes: page 3/85

3/38

Curves (continued)

TeSys protection components


Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 L and GV2 LE

Dynamic stress

Current limitation on short-circuit for GV2 L and GV2 LE + thermal overload relay LRD or LR2 K (3-phase 400/415 V)

I peak = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V


Limited peak current (kA)

100

1
=0 .25

0.

2 3

0. 5

10

4 5

0.

0.7

6 7

0.

8
0.9 co s = 5

10

0,1 0,1

10

15

100
Prospective Isc (kA)

11

1 Maximum peak current 2 32 A 3 25 A 4 18 A 5 14 A 6 10 A 7 6.3 A 8 4 A 9 2.5 A 10 1.6 A 11 Limit of rated ultimate breaking capacity on short-circuit of GV2 LE (14, 18, 23 and 25 A ratings).

References: page 3/52

Dimensions: page 3/84

Schemes: page 3/85

3/39

Curves (continued)

TeSys protection components


Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 LE

Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2 LE only


Thermal limit in kA2s in the magnetic operating zone Sum of I2dt = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V
Sum of I2dt (kA2s)

100

2 3 4 5 6

10

8
1

0,1

0,01 0,1

10

100 Prospective Isc (kA)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

32 A 25 A 18 A 14 A 10 A 6.3 A 4A 2.5 A 1.6 A

References: page 3/52

Dimensions: page 3/84

Schemes: page 3/85

3/40

Curves (continued)

TeSys protection components


Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 L

Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2 L only


Thermal limit in kA2s in the magnetic operating zone Sum of I2dt = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V
Sum of I2dt (kA2s)

100

1 2 3 4 5 6
10

0,1

0,01 0,1

10

100 Prospective Isc (kA)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

25 A and 32 A 18 A 14 A 10 A 6.3 A 4A 2.5 A 1.6 A

References: pages 3/52 and 3/53

Dimensions: page 3/84

Schemes: page 3/85

3/41

Curves (continued)

TeSys protection components


Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 L and GV2 LE

Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2 L and GV2 LE + thermal overload relay LRD or LR2 K
Thermal limit in kA2s in the magnetic operating zone Sum of I2dt = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V
Sum of I2dt (kA2s)

100

2 1 3 4 5 6

10

8
1

0,1

10

0,01 0,1

10

15

100 Prospective Isc (kA)

1 32 A (GV2 LE32) 2 25 A and 32 A (GV2 L32) 3 18 A 4 14 A 5 10 A 6 6.3 A 7 4 A 8 2.5 A 9 1.6 A 10 Limit of rated ultimate breaking capacity on short-circuit of GV2 LE (14, 18, 23 and 25 A ratings).

References: pages 3/52 and 3/53

Dimensions: pages 3/84

Schemes: page 3/85

3/42

Curves

TeSys protection components


Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3L and GK3EF80

Tripping curves for GV3L and GK3EF80 combined with thermal overload relay LRD 33
Average operating time at 20 C without prior current flow
Time (s)

10 000

1000

100

A 1 2 3
10

0,1

0,01

0,001

10

100 x the setting current (Ir)

1 3 poles from cold state 2 2 poles from cold state 3 3 poles from hot state A Thermal overload relay protection zone B GK3EF80 and GV3L protection zone

References: page 3/53

Dimensions: page 3/84

Schemes: page 3/85

3/43

Curves (continued)

TeSys protection components


Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3L and GK3EF80

Dynamic stress

Current limitation on short-circuit for GV3L and GK3EF80 (3-phase 400/415 V)

I peak = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V


Limited peak current (kA)

50

3
10

3 4 5

6 7

10

100
Prospective Isc (kA)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Maximum peak current GK3EF80 GV3L65 GV3L50 GV3L40 GV3L32 GV3L25

References: page 3/53

Dimensions: page 3/84

Schemes: page 3/85

3/44

Curves (continued)

TeSys protection components


Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3L and GK3EF80

Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV3L and GK3EF80


Thermal limit in A2s Sum of I2dt = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V
Sum of I2dt (A2s)

1000

2 3 4 5 6 1
100

10

1 1 10 100
Prospective Isc (kA)

1 2 3 4 5 6

GK3EF80 GV3L65 GV3L50 GV3L40 GV3L32 GV3L25

References: page 3/53

Dimensions: page 3/84

Schemes: page 3/85

3/45

References

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 ME

526134

Motor circuit-breakers from 0.06 to 15 kW/400 V, with screw clamp terminals


GV2 ME with pushbutton control
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 500 V 690 V P Icu Ics P Icu Ics (1) P Icu (1) kW kA % kW kA % kW kA GV2 ME10 0.06 0.09 g g 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 g g g g g g g g g g 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 116 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 2025 2432 2.4 5 8 13 22.5 33.5 51 78 138 170 223 327 327 416 GV2ME02 GV2ME03 GV2ME04 GV2ME05 GV2ME06 GV2ME07 GV2ME08 GV2ME10 GV2ME14 GV2ME16 GV2ME20 GV2ME21 GV2ME22 (3) GV2ME32 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 Setting range of thermal trips Ics (1) (2) % A 0.10.16 Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 1.5 Reference Weight

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Characteristics: pages 3/8 to 3/12

GV2ME01

kg 0.260

0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15

g g g

g g g

0.37 g 0.55 g 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 g g 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

g g g

g g g

g g 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75

g g g

g g g

g g 50 10 10 6 6 4 4

g g 100 100 100 75 75 75 75 75

g g 15 15 15 15 10

g g 50 50 40 40 50

18.5 3 22 3

18.5 4

To order thermal magnetic circuit-breakers with connection by lugs, add the digit 6 to the end of reference selected above. Example: GV2ME08 becomes GV2ME086. Thermal magnetic circuit-breakers GV2ME with built-in auxiliary contact block With instantaneous auxiliary contact block (composition, see page 3/55): b GV AE1, add suffix AE1TQ to the motor circuit-breaker reference selected above. Example: GV2 ME01AE1TQ. b GV AE11, add suffix AE11TQ to the motor circuit-breaker reference selected above. Example: GV2 ME01AE11TQ. b GV AN11, add suffix AN11TQ to the motor circuit-breaker reference selected above. Example: GV2 ME01AN11TQ. These circuit-breakers with built-in contact block are sold in lots of 20 units in a single pack.
(1) As % of Icu. (2) The thermal trip setting must be within the range marked on the graduated knob. (3) Maximum rating which can be mounted in enclosures GV2 MC or MP, please consult your Regional Sales Office. g > 100 kA.

Motor circuit-breakers from 0.06 to 15 kW/400 V, with lugs

Dimensions: pages 3/70 to 3/72

Schemes: page 3/76

3/46

References (continued)

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 ME

526135

Motor circuit-breakers from 0.06 to 11 kW, with spring terminal connections


GV2 ME (1) with pushbutton control
400/415 V P kW 0.06 GV2 MEpp3 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 11 Icu kA g g g g g g g g g g g g g g 15 15 15 15 15 Ics (2) % g g g g g g g g g g g g g g 50 50 40 40 40 500 V P kW 0.37 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 Icu kA g g g g g g g 50 10 10 6 6 4 4 Ics (2) % g g g g g g g 100 100 100 75 75 75 75 Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 Setting range of thermal trips (3) A 0.10.16 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 2025 Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 1.5 2.4 5 8 13 22.5 33.5 51 78 138 170 223 327 327 Reference Weight

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

GV2 ME013 GV2 ME023 GV2 ME033 GV2 ME043 GV2 ME053 GV2 ME063 GV2 ME073 GV2 ME083 GV2 ME103 GV2 ME143 GV2 ME163 GV2 ME203 GV2 ME213 GV2 ME223

kg 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.260 0.260

Contact blocks
Description Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Mounting Front LH side Maximum number 1 2 Type of contacts N/O + N/C N/O + N/O N/O + N/C N/O + N/O Sold in lots of 10 10 1 1 Unit reference GV AE113 GV AE203 GV AN113 GV AN203 Weight kg 0.030 0.030 0.060 0.060

Accessory
Description Cable end reducer LA9 D99 (1) For connection of conductors from 1 to 1.5 mm2, the use of an LA9D99 cable end reducer is recommended. (2) Maximum rating which can be mounted in enclosures GV2 MC or MP, please consult your Regional Sales Office (3) The thermal trip setting must be within the range marked on the graduated knob. g > 100 kA. Application For connection of conductors from 1 to 1.5 mm2 Sold in lots of 20 Unit reference LA9 D99 Weight kg

Characteristics: pages 3/8 to 3/12

Dimensions: pages 3/70 to 3/72

Schemes: page 3/76

3/47

References

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 P, GV3 P and GV3ME80

526137

Motor circuit-breakers from 0.06 to 30 kW / 400V


Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 500 V 690 V P Icu Ics P Icu Ics P Icu (1) (1) kW kA % kW kA % kW kA Setting range of thermal trips (2) A Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A Reference Weight

1 2 3 4

GV2P: control by rotary knob


g g g g g 50 42 10 10 10 10 g g g g g 100 75 75 75 75 75

Ics (1) %

kg

GV2P10

Screw clamp terminals g 0.06 g g 0.09 g g 0.12 g g 0.18 g g 0.25 g g 0.37 g 0.37 g 0.55 g 0.55 g 0.75 g 1.1 g 1.1 g 1.5 g 2.2 g 3 g g 3 5 g 5.5 g 7.5 7.5 50 50 9 9 50 50 11 11 50 50 15 15 35 50 18.5

0.37 0.55 0.75 1.5 2.2 4 5.5 9 11 15 18.5 22

g g g 8 8 6 6 6 6 4 4 4

g g g 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

0.10.16 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 2025 2432

1.5 2.4 5 8 13 22.5 33.5 51 78 138 170 223 327 327 416

GV2 P01 GV2 P02 GV2 P03 GV2 P04 GV2 P05 GV2 P06 GV2 P07 GV2 P08 GV2 P10 GV2 P14 GV2 P16 GV2 P20 GV2 P21 GV2 P22 GV2 P32

0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350

526139

GV3P: control by rotary knob

5 6 7 8
GV3 P651
526140

Connection by EverLink BTR screw connectors (3) 5.5 100 100 7.5 12 50 11 6 50 9 12 50 15 6 50 7.5 100 100 11 100 100 15 12 50 18.5 6 50 18.5 12 50 22 6 50 15 100 100 22 12 50 37 6 50 18.5 50 100 30 12 50 45 6 50 22 50 100 45 12 50 55 6 50 30 50 100

913 1218 1725 2332 3040 3750 4865

182 252 350 448 560 700 910

GV3P13 GV3P18 GV3P25 GV3P32 GV3P40 GV3P50 GV3P65

0.960 0.960 0.960 0.960 0.960 0.960 0.960

GV3 P65

To assemble a GV3 P13 to P65 circuit-breaker with an LC1 D40A to D65A contactor, it is possible to use the circuit-breaker supplied without downstream EverLink power terminal block. To order this product, add the digit1 to the end of the references selected above. Example: GV3 P65 becomes GV3 P651.
Connection by lugs

Connection by EverLink BTR screw connectors, for assembly with a contactor

To order thermal magnetic circuit-breakers with connection by lugs, add the digit 6 to the end of reference selected above. Example: GV3P18 becomes GV3P186. GV3ME80: pushbutton control, screw clamp terminals
37 15 50 45 4 100 55 2 100 5680 GV3 ME80 (4) 0.700

9 10
Characteristics: pages 3/8 to 3/13

GV2 (5) To obtain a GV2P motor circuit-breaker, UL 508 type E, combine: b a circuit-breaker GV2PppH7 (except 32 A), b and a Large Spacing adapter GV2GH7. GV3 (6) To obtain a motor-circuit-breaker GV3P, UL 508 type E, use the following with the circuit-breaker: b a Large Spacing cover GV3G66, b a short-circuit signalling contact GVAM11. GV3 with connection by lugs (6) To obtain a motor-circuit-breaker GV3P, UL 508 type E, with connection by lugs, add the digit 6 to the end of reference selected above and use the following with the circuit-breaker: b two IP20 covers LAD96570, b a short-circuit signalling contact GVAM11.
(1) As % of Icu. (2) The thermal trip setting must be within the range marked on the graduated knob. (3) BTR screws: hexagon socket head. Require use of an insulated Allen key, in compliance with local wiring regulations. (4) Recommended for use in association with a contactor. (5) Accessory: see page 3/67. (6) Accessories: see page 3/57. g > 100 kA. Dimensions: pages 3/70 to 3/73

Motor circuit-breakers up to 50 hp / 600 V, UL 508 type E

3/48

References

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV7 R

526138

Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers GV7 R with screw clamp terminals


Control by rocker lever
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 500 V P Icu Ics (1) P Icu Ics (1) kW kA % kW kA % 7.5 36 100 9 18 100 9 36 100 11 18 100 GV7 RE40 7.5 9 9 11 70 70 36 36 70 70 36 70 36 70 36 70 36 70 35 35 70 70 35 35 70 70 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 9 11 11 15 11 15 18.5 22 18.5 30 30 45 55 45 55 75 90 75 90 110 132 160 110 132 160 50 50 18 18 50 50 18 18 50 18 50 18 18 50 50 18 50 30 30 50 50 30 30 30 50 50 50 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Setting range of thermal trips A 1220 1220 1525 1525 2540 2540 3050 3050 4880 4880 60100 60100 90150 90150 132220 132220 Reference Weight

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

660/690 V P Icu kW kA 11 8 15 8 11 15 15 18.5 15 18.5 22 22 30 30 55 55 75 75 90 110 90 110 160 200 160 200 10 10 8 8 10 10 8 10 8 10 8 10 8 10 8 8 10 10 8 8 10 10

Ics (1) % 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

GV7 RE20 GV7 RS20 GV7 RE25 GV7 RS25 GV7 RE40 GV7 RS40 GV7 RE50 GV7 RS50 GV7 RE80 GV7 RS80 GV7 RE100 GV7 RS100 GV7 RE150 GV7 RS150 GV7 RE220 GV7 RS220

kg 2.010 2.010 2.010 2.010 2.010 2.010 2.015 2.015 2.040 2.040 2.040 2.040 2.020 2.020 2.350 2.350

526141

9 11 18.5 18.5 22 22 GV7 RS220 37 37 45 45 55 75 55 75 90 110 90 110

(1) As % of lcu

Characteristics: page 3/13

Dimensions: page 3/73

Schemes: page 3/77

3/49

References

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers GV2 RT

526142

For motors with high current peak on starting


Control by rocker lever
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 220/ 400/ 440 V 500 V 690 V 230 V 415 V kW kW kW kW kW 0.06 0.09 0.09 0.12 GV2 RT 0.09 0.12 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 7.5 9 11 0.37 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 Setting range of thermal trips (1) A 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 8 13 22 33 51 78 138 200 280 400 400 Reference Weight

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

GV2 RT03 GV2 RT04 GV2 RT05 GV2 RT06 GV2 RT07 GV2 RT08 GV2 RT10 GV2 RT14 GV2 RT16 GV2 RT20 GV2 RT21

kg 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350

0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 2.2 3 4 5.5

(1) The thermal trip setting must be within the range marked on the graduated knob.

Characteristics: pages 3/8 to 3/23

Dimensions: page 3/72

Schemes: page 3/76

3/50

References (continued)

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers GV2 RT

526142

For primaries of 3-phase transformers


Control by rocker lever
Standard power ratings 230/240 V 400/415 V 440 V kW kW kW 0.4 0.63 1 1.6 2 2.5 4 5 6.3 0.63 1 1.6 2 2.5 4 5 6.3 10 0.63 1 1.6 2 2.5 4 5 6.3 10 500 V kW 0.63 1 1.6 2 2.5 4 5 6.3 10 12.5 690 V kW 1 1.6 2 2.5 4 5 6.3 10 12.5 10 Setting range of thermal trips (1) A 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 8 13 22 33 51 78 138 200 280 400 Reference Weight

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

GV2 RT03 GV2 RT04 GV2 RT05 GV2 RT06 GV2 RT07 GV2 RT08 GV2 RT10 GV2 RT14 GV2 RT16 GV2 RT20

kg 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350

GV2 RT

Accessory (2)
Description Padlockable external operator (IP 54) black handle, blue legend plate Reference GV2 AP03 Weight kg 0.280

(1) The thermal trip setting must be within the range marked on the graduated knob. (2) Other accessories such as mounting, cabling and marking accessories are identical to those used for GV2 ME motor circuitbreakers, see page 3/57.

Characteristics: pages 3/8 to 3/23

Dimensions: page 3/72

Schemes: page 3/76

3/51

References

TeSys protection components


Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 LE

526144

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers from 0.06 to 15 kW


Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P Icu 500 V Ics (1) P kW Icu kA 690 V Ics (1) P kW Icu kA Ics (1) A 0.4 0.4 0.63 0.63 1 1 1 1 1.6 1.6 2.5 2.5 4 4 6.3 10 10 10 14 14 18 25 25 32 A 5 5 8 8 13 13 13 13 Magnetic protection rating

1 2

GV2L: control by rocker lever, connection by screw clamp terminals


Tripping current Id 20 % Use in Reference association with thermal overload relay LR2 K0302 GV2 LE03 LR2 K0304 GV2 LE03 LR2 K0304 GV2 LE04 LR2 K0305 GV2 LE04 LR2 K0305 GV2 LE05 LR2 K0306 GV2 LE05 LR2 K0306 GV2 LE05 LR2 K0306 GV2 LE05 LR2 K0307 GV2 LE06 LR2 K0307 GV2 LE06 LR2 K0308 GV2 LE07 LR2 K0308 GV2 LE07 LR2 K0310 GV2 LE08 LR2 K0312 GV2 LE08 LR2 K0312 GV2 LE10 LR2 K0314 GV2 LE14 LR2 K0316 GV2 LE14 LRD 14 LRD 16 GV2 LE14 GV2 LE16 Weight

kW kA 0.06 g 0.09 g GV2 LE10 0.12 g 0.18 g

g g g g g g g g g g g g g 50 50 40 40 50

g g g g g g 100 100 100 75 75 75 75 75

g g g g 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75

kg 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330

0.37 g

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Characteristics: pages 3/14 and 3/15

0.55 g

0.25 g

0.75 g 1.1 1.5 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 g 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

0.37 g 0.55 g

0.37 g 0.55 g 0.75 g 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 g g g 50 10 10 6 6 4 4

22.5 22.5 33.5 33.5 51 51 78 138 138 138 170 170 223 327 327 416

0.75 g 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 g g g g g 15 15 15 15 10

LR2 K0321 GV2 LE16 LRD 21 LRD 22 LRD 22 LRD 32 GV2 LE20 GV2 LE22 GV2 LE22 GV2 LE32

18.5 3 22 3

18.5 4

(1) As % of Icu. g > 100 kA.

Dimensions: page 3/84

Schemes: page 3/85

3/52

References

TeSys protection components


Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 L, GV3 L and GK3EF80

Motor circuit-breakers from 0.09 to 30 kW


Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P Icu 500 V Ics (1) P Icu 690 V Ics (1) P Icu Ics (1)
526145

GV2L: Control by rotary knob, connection by screw clamp terminals


Magnetic protection rating Tripping current Id 20 % Use in Reference association with thermal overload relay (class 10 A) LRD 03 LRD 04 LRD 04 LRD 05 LRD 05 LRD 06 LRD 05 LRD 06 LRD 06 LRD 07 LRD 08 LRD 08 LRD 08 LRD 10 LRD 12 LRD 14 LRD 14 LRD 16 LRD 16 LRD 21 LRD 22 LRD 22 LRD 32 GV2 L03 GV2 L04 GV2 L04 GV2 L05 GV2 L05 GV2 L05 GV2 L05 GV2 L06 GV2 L06 GV2 L07 GV2 L08 GV2 L08 GV2 L08 GV2 L10 GV2 L14 GV2 L14 GV2 L14 GV2 L16 GV2 L16 GV2 L20 GV2 L22 GV2 L22 GV2 L32 Weight

1 2 3 4 5 6

GV2 L10

kW 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15

kA g g g g g g g g g g 50 50 50 50 35

g g g g g g g g g g 50 50 50 50 50

kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 3 4 7.5 9 11 15 18.5

kA g g g g g g 10 10 10 10 10 10

g g g g g g 100 75 75 75 75 75

kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22

kA g g g g 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

g g g g 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

A 0.4 0.63 0.63 1 1 1 1 1.6 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 10 14 14 18 25 25 32

A 5 8 8 13 13 13 13 22.5 22.5 33.5 51 78 138 138 170 170 223 327 327 416

kg 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330

526146

GV3 L65

GV3L: control by rotary knob, connection by EverLink BTR screw connectors


Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P Icu 500 V Ics (1) P kW 15 Icu kA 12 690 V Ics (1) P Icu Ics (1) A 25 32 40 50 65 A 350 448 560 700 910 Magnetic protection rating Tripping current Id 20 % Use in Reference association with thermal overload relay (class 10 A) LRD325 LRD332 LRD340 LRD350 LRD365 GV3L25 GV3 L32 GV3 L40 GV3 L50 GV3 L65 Weight

kW kA 11 100 15 100

100 100 100 100 100

50 50 50 50 50

kW kA 18.5 6 22 37 45 55 6 6 6 6

50 50 50 50 50

kg 0.960 0.960 0.960 0.960 0.960

18.5 12 22 30 37 12 12 12

18.5 50 22 30
526147

7 8 9 10

50 50

Connection by EverLink BTR screw connectors, for assembly with a contactor

To assemble a GV3 L25 to L65 circuit-breaker with an LC1 D40A to D65A contactor, it is possible to use the circuit-breaker supplied without downstream EverLink power terminal block. To order this product, add the digit1 to the end of the references selected above. Example: GV3 L65 becomes GV3 L651.
Connection by lugs

To order these circuit-breakers with connection by lugs, add the digit 6 to the end of reference selected above. Example: GV3L32 becomes GV3L326. GK3: control by rotary knob, connection by screw clamp terminals
37 35 25 55 15 30 80 1040 LRD 3363 GK3 EF80 0.795

GK3EF80

(1) As % of Icu. Associated current limiter or fuses, where required. See characteristics page 3/17. g > 100 kA.

Characteristics: pages 3/14 and 3/15

Dimensions: page 3/84 and 3/85

Schemes: page 3/85

3/53

1 2 3
GV2 ME GV2 AK00 GV1 L3

GV AX

4
GV AM11

GV AD

5 6
GV AM11 GV2 P

GV AU

7 8 9 10
GV AN GV AN GV2 L

GV AS

GV AE11, GV AE20

GV AE1 GV2 LE GV AE1

3/54

References

TeSys protection components


Add-on blocks and accessories

Thermal-magnetic and magnetic motor circuitbreakers GV2 with screw clamp connections

Contact blocks
Description Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Mounting Front (1) Maximum number 1 Type of contacts N/O or N/C (2) N/O + N/C N/O + N/O N/O + N/C N/O + N/O N/O (fault) + N/O + N/C N/C (fault) + N/O + N/C C/O common point Sold in lots of 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Unit reference GV AE1 GV AE11 GV AE20 GV AN11 GV AN20 GV AD1010 GV AD1001 GV AD0110 GV AD0101 GV AM11 Weight kg 0.015 0.020 0.020 0.050 0.050 0.055 0.055 0.055 0.055 0.045

Side (LH) Fault signalling contact + instantaneous auxiliary contact Short-circuit signalling contact Side (3) (LH)

2 1

Side (LH)

Electric trips
Mounting Voltage Reference Weight kg 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105

Undervoltage or shunt trips (4)


Side (1 block on RH side of circuit-breaker) 24 V 48 V 100 V 100110 V 110115 V 120127 V 127 V 200 V 200220 V 220240 V 380400 V 415440 V 415 V 440 V 480 V 500 V 600 V 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz GV Ap025 GV Ap026 GV Ap055 GV Ap056 GV Ap107 GV Ap107 GV Ap115 GV Ap116 GV Ap125 GV Ap115 GV Ap207 GV Ap207 GV Ap225 GV Ap226 GV Ap385 GV Ap386 GV Ap415 GV Ap416 GV Ap385 GV Ap415 GV Ap505 GV Ap505

Undervoltage trip, INRS (can only be mounted on GV2 ME) Safety device for dangerous machines conforming to INRS and VDE 0113
Side (1 block on RH side of circuit-breaker GV2 ME) 110115 V 127 V 220240 V 380400 V 415440 V 440 V Mounting Front (1) At top (GV2 ME and GV2 P) Independent 50 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz Maximum number 1 1 1 GV AX115 GV AX116 GV AX115 GV AX225 GV AX226 GV AX385 GV AX386 GV AX415 GV AX385 Reference GV2 AK00 (6) GV1 L3 LA9 LB920 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 Weight kg 0.150 0.130 0.320

Add-on contact blocks


Description Visible isolation block (5) Limiters

LA9 LB920

(1) Mounting of a GV AE contact block or a GV2 AK00 visible isolation block on GV2 P and GV2 L. (2) Choice of N/C or N/O contact operation, depending on which way round the reversible block is mounted. (3) The GV AD is always mounted next to the circuit-breaker. (4) To order an undervoltage trip: replace the dot (p) in the reference with a U, example: GV AU025. To order a shunt trip: replace the dot (p) in the reference with an S, example: GV AS025. (5) Visible isolation of the 3 poles upstream of circuit-breaker GV2 P and GV2 L. Visible isolation block GV2 AK00 cannot be used with motor circuit-breakers GV2P32 and GV2L32 (Ith max = 25 A). (6) Ie Max = 32 A. Dimensions, schemes: pages 3/70 to 3/89

Characteristics: pages 3/18 to 3/23

3/55

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

3/56

References

TeSys protection components

Thermal-magnetic and magnetic motor circuitbreakers GV2 with screw clamp connections Accessories
Accessories
Description Adapter plates Application For mounting a GV2 ME or GV2 LE by screw fixing For mounting a GV2 ME or GV2 P and contactor LC1D09D38 with front faces aligned Height compensation plate Combination blocks 7,5 mm Between GV2 and contactor LC1 K or LP1 K Between GV2 and contactor LC1 D09D38 Between GV2 mounted on LAD 311 and contactor LC1 D09D38 Motor starter adapter plate Description Sets of 3-pole 63 A busbars With 3-pole connection for mounting a GV2 and a contactor LC1 D09D25 Application 2 tap-offs Sold in lots of 10 1 10 10 10 10 1 Pitch mm 45 54 72 3 tap-offs 4 tap-offs 45 54 45 54 72 5 tap-offs Description Protective end cover Terminal block for supply to one or more GV2 G busbar sets Cover for terminal block Flexible 3-pole connection for connecting a GV2 to a contactor LC1-D09D25 Set of connections upstream/downstream Large Spacing adapter UL 508 type E Clip-in marker holders (supplied with each circuit-breaker) Application For unused busbar outlets Connection from the top Can be fitted with current limiter GV1 L3 (GV2 ME and GV2 P) For mounting in modular panels Centre distance between mounting rails: 100120 mm For connecting GV2 ME to a printed circuit board For GV2PppH7 (except 32 A) For GV2 P, GV2 L, GV2 LE and GV2 RT (8 x 22 mm) 54 Sold in lots of 5 1 1 10 10 10 1 100 GV2 G245 GV2 G254 GV2 G272 GV2 G345 GV2 G354 GV2 G445 GV2 G454 GV2 G472 GV2 G554 Unit reference GV1 G10 GV1 G09 GV2 G05 LA9 E07 GV1 G02 GV2 GA01 GV2GH7 LA9 D92 Unit reference GV2 AF02 LAD 311 GV1 F03 GV2 AF01 GV2 AF3 GV2 AF4 GK2 AF01 Reference Weight kg 0.021 0.040 0.003 0.020 0.016 0.016 0.120 Weight kg 0.036 0.038 0.042 0.058 0.060 0.077 0.085 0.094 0.100 Weight kg 0.005 0.040 0.115 0.005 0.013 0.045 0.040 0.001

3/57

1 2 3 4 5 6
6 Allows a circuit-breaker or a starter-controller installed in back of an enclosure to be operated from the front of the enclosure. A rotary handle can be black or red/yellow, IP54 or IP65. It includes a function for locking the circuit breaker or the starter in the O (Off) or I (On) position (depending of the type of rotary handle) by means of up to 3 padlocks with a shank diameter of 4 to 8 mm. The extended shaft must be adjusted to use in different size enclosures. The IP54 rotary handle is fixed with a nut ( 22) to make easier the assembling. The new Laser Square tool brings the accuracy to align the circuit breaker and the rotary handle.

Extended Rotary Handle

Description 1 Kit handle + mounting system 2 Universal handle 3 Shaft 4 Bracket 5 Shaft support plate for deep enclosure 6 Retrofit accessory 7 Laser Square accessory 3 2 Kit handle + mounting system
Description For GV2 P/L

Padlockable external operators for GV2P and GV2L

Item Reference Black handle, front plate, with trip status, IP 54 Red handle, front plate, with trip status, IP 54 1 1 GV2 APN01 GV2 APN02 GV2 APN04 GV2 AP03

Weight kg 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.280

Red handle, front plate, without trip status, IP 65 1 For GV2 LE Padlocking in On and Off position Black handle, blue front plate, IP 54 Black handle, IP 54 Red handle, IP 54 Red handle, IP 65 -

Universal handle
For GV2 P/L 2 2 2 3 4 Depth u 250 mm 5 6 7 GV APB54 GV APR54 GV APR65 GV APA1 GV APH02 GV APK11 GV APP1 GV APL01 GV APSFR GV APSEN GV APSDE GV APSES GV APSCN GV APSPT GV APSRU GV APSIT Reference GV2 V03 Weight kg 0.092 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.110 0.300 0.030 0.100 0.160

7 8
7

Shaft
For GV2 P/L L = 315 mm

Bracket
For GV2 P/L

Shaft support plate for deep enclosure


For GV2 P/L For GV2 P/L

Retrofit accessory Laser Square accessory


For GV2 P/L

Sticker

Sold in lots of
For French For English For German For Spanish For Chinese For Portuguese 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 -

9 10

Warning label

For Russian For Italian

Padlocking device
Description For all GV2 device For use with up to 4 padlocks, 6 mm shank max. (padlocks not included)

3/58

3/59

1
GV3 G264 GV3 G364

2 3
GV AM11

4 5 6

GV3 P

GV AM11

GV AE113, GV AE203, GV AED 1013, GV AED 0113

GV3 L GV AE11, GV AE20,

7 8 9
GV3 APN02

GV AED 101, GV AED 011

GV AE1 GV AE1

10

GV2 V03

3/60

References

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3P and GV3L


Add-on blocks and accessories

TeSys protection components

Contact blocks
Description Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Mounting Front Maximum Type of number contacts 1 N/O or N/C (1) N/O + N/C N/O + N/O 2 N/O + N/C N/O + N/O 1 N/O (fault) + N/O N/O (fault) + N/C N/O (fault) + N/O 1 + N/C N/C (fault) + N/O + N/C 1 C/O common point Sold in lots of 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Unit reference GV AE1 GV AE11 (2) GV AE20 (2) GV AN11 (2) GV AN20 (2) GVAED101 (2) GVAED011 (2) GV AD1010 GV AD1001 GV AD0110 GV AD0101 GV AM11 Weight kg 0.015 0.020 0.020 0.050 0.050 0.020 0.020 0.055 0.055 0.055 0.055 0.045

Side (LH) Fault signalling contact + instantaneous auxiliary contact GV3G66 Front Side (3) (LH)

Short-circuit signalling contact

Side (LH)

Electric trips - undervotlage or shunt (4)


Mounting Side (1 block on RH side of circuit-breaker) Voltage 24 V 48 V 100 100110 V 110115 V LAD96575 120127 V 127 V 200 V 200220 V 220240 V 380400 V 415440 V 415 V 440 V 480 V 500 V 600 V 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz Reference GV Ap025 GV Ap026 GV Ap055 GV Ap056 GV Ap107 GV Ap107 GV Ap115 GV Ap116 GV Ap125 GV Ap115 GV Ap207 GV Ap207 GV Ap225 GV Ap226 GV Ap385 GV Ap386 GV Ap415 GV Ap416 GV Ap385 GV Ap415 GV Ap505 GV Ap505 Reference GV3Ppp and GV3Lpp GV3Ppp and GV3Lpp GV3Ppp GV3Ppp6 and GV3Lpp6 GV3Ppp6 and GV3Lpp6 GV3Ppp and GV3Lpp GV3 Ppp and GV3Lpp GV3Ppp6 and GV3Lpp6 GV3G264 GV3G364 GV3G66 LAD96570 LAD 96575 LAD ALLEN4 (5) GV2V03 LAD 7X3 Weight kg 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 Weight kg 0.150 0.250 0.020 0.021 0.010 0.026 0.092 0.150

LAD96570

LAD7X3

Accessories
Description Sets of 3-pole 2 tap-off 115 A busbars 3 tap-off Pitch: 64 mm Cover Large Spacing UL 508 type E (Only one cover required on supply side) IP20 cover (Two covers required per breaker) IP 20 cover for use when mounted with circuit-breakers Size 4 Allen key, insulated, 1000 V Padlocking device for use with up to 4 padlocks (not supplied) 6 mm shank max. Retrofit plate Replacement of GV3 ME with GV3 Ppp or GV2 Ppp for screw fixing

(1) Choice of N/C or N/O contact operation, depending on which way round the reversible block is mounted. (2) Contact blocks available in version with spring terminal connections. Add a figure 3 at the end of the references selected above. Example: GVAED101 becomes GVAED1013. (3) The GV ADpp is always mounted next to the circuit-breaker. (4) To order an undervoltage trip: replace the dot (p) in the reference with a U, example: GV AU025. To order a shunt trip: replace the dot (p) in the reference with an S, example: GV AS025. (5) Sold in lots of 5.

3/61

References

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3P and GV3L


Add-on blocks and accessories

TeSys protection components

1 2 3 4
3

Allows a circuit-breaker or a starter-controller installed in back of an enclosure to be operated from the front of the enclosure. A rotary handle can be black or red/yellow, IP54 or IP65. It includes a function for locking the circuit breaker or the starter in the O (Off) or I (On) position (depending of the type of rotary handle) by means of up to 3 padlocks with a shank diameter of 4 to 8 mm. The extended shaft must be adjusted to use in different size enclosures. The IP54 rotary handle is fixed with a nut ( 22) to make easier the assembling. The new Laser Square tool brings the accurency to align the circuit breaker and the rotary handle.

Extended Rotary Handle

Description 1 Kit handle + mounting system 2 Universal handle 3 Shaft 4 Bracket 5 Shaft support plate for deep enclosure 6 Retrofit accessory 7 Laser Square accessory Kit handle + mounting system
Description For GV3 P/L

Padlockable external operators for GV3 and GV3L

Item Reference Black handle, front plate, with trip status, IP 54 Red handle, front plate, with trip status, IP 54 1 1 GV3 APN01 GV3 APN02 GV3 APN04 GV APB54 GV APR54 GV APR65 GV APA1 GV APH03 GV APK12 GV APP1 GV APL01 GV APSFR GV APSEN GV APSDE GV APSES GV APSCN GV APSPT GV APSRU GV APSIT

Weight kg 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.110 0.300 0.030 0.100 0.160

2
For GV3 P/L

Red handle, front plate, without trip status, IP 65 1

Universal handle

5
5

Black handle, IP 54 Red handle, IP 54 Red handle, IP 65

2 2 2 3 4

Shaft
For GV3 P/L L = 315 mm

Bracket

6 7 8 9 10

For GV3 P/L

Shaft support plate for deep enclosure


For GV3 P/L For GV3 P/L Depth u 300 mm 5 6 7

Retrofit accessory Laser Square accessory


For GV3 P/L

Sticker
Warning label For French For English For German For Spanish

Sold in lots of
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 -

For Chinese For Portuguese For Russian For Italian

3/62

3/63

1 2 3
GV3 A01...A07

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

GV3 A08 GV3 A09

3/64

References

TeSys protection components


Motor circuit-breakers GV3 ME80 and GK3EF80
Add-on blocks and accessories

For thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3ME80


Contact blocks
Description Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks (1 per circuit-breaker) Type of standard early break contacts N/C + N/O N/O + N/O N/C + N/O + N/O N/O + N/O + N/O N/O + N/O + 2 volt-free terminals N/C + N/O + 2 volt-free terminals N/C N/O Reference GV3 A01 GV3 A02 GV3 A03 GV3 A05 GV3 A06 GV3 A07 GV3 A08 GV3 A09 Weight kg 0,060 0.060 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.030 0.030

Fault signalling contacts (1)

Electric trips
Description Udervoltage trips (1) Voltages 50 Hz 110, 120, 127 V 220, 240 V 380, 415 V 110, 120, 127 V 220, 240 V 380, 415 V Reference 60 Hz 120, 127 V 277 V 440 V, 480 V 120, 127 V 277 V 440 V, 480 V GV3 B11 GV3 B22 GV3 B38 GV3 D11 GV3 D22 GV3 D38 Weight kg 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070

Shunt trips (1)

Accessory
Description Padlocking device, for locking the Start button (on open-mounted product) Sold in lots of 5 Unit reference GV1 V02 Weight kg 0.010

For magnetic circuit-breaker GK3 EF80


Contact blocks
Description Auxiliary contact blocks for On-Off signalling and control circuit test function (1 or 2 blocks per device) mounted on RH side of GK3 EF80 Instantaneous fault signalling contact blocks (1 or 2 blocks per device) mounted on LH side of GK3 EF80 Number of poles N/O N/O + N/O N/C + N/O N/O N/O + N/O N/C + N/O Reference GK2 AX10 GK2 AX20 GK2 AX50 GK2 AX12 GK2 AX22 GK2 AX52 Weight kg 0.025 0.031 0.031 0.025 0.031 0.031

Accessories
Description Padlocking device for padlocking the operator, using up to 3 padlocks (padlocks to be ordered separately) External operator for mounting on enclosure door. Red 40 knob on yellow plate, padlockable in position O (with up to 3 padlocks). Door locked when knob in position I, and when knob padlocked in position O. Reference GK3 AV01 Weight kg 0.020

GK3 AP03

0.300

(1) 1 voltage trip OR 1 fault signalling contact to be fitted inside the motor circuit-breaker.

Other versions

24 to 690 V, 50 or 60 Hz voltage trips for circuit-breakers GV3 ME80. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

Characteristics: pages 3/18 and 3/22

Dimensions: pages 3/79 and 3/88

3/65

1 2
3 4

3 4
GV7 RE, RS

GV7 AE11, AB11

5
GV7 AU, AS

6 7 8 9 10

3/66

References

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV7 R with screw clamp connections
Add-on blocks and accessories

These allow remote indication of the circuit-breaker contact states. They can be used for signalling, electrical locking, relaying, etc. They are available in two versions: standard and low level. They include a terminal block and the auxiliary circuits leave the circuit-breaker through a hole provided for this purpose. They perform the following functions, depending on where they are located in the circuit-breaker:
Location 1 and/or 4 2 Function C/O contact Trip indication Application Indicates the position of the circuit-breaker poles Indicates that the circuit-breaker has tripped due to an overload, a short-circuit, a differential fault or the operation of a voltage trip (undervoltage or shunt trip), or of the push to trip test button. It resets when the circuit-breaker is reset. Indicates that the circuit-breaker has tripped due to an overload, a short-circuit or a differential fault. It resets when the circuit-breaker is reset. Reference GV7 AE11 GV7 AB11 Weight kg 0.015 0.015

Add-on auxiliary contacts

Electrical fault indication

Type Standard Low level

These make it possible to: b either differentiate a thermal fault from a magnetic fault, b or open the contactor only in the event of a thermal fault.
Voltage a 24...48 and c 2472 V z 110240 V Reference GV7 AD111 (1) GV7 AD112 (1) Weight kg 0.100 0.100

Fault discrimination devices

These allow the circuit-breaker to be tripped via an electrical control signal. b Undervoltage trip GV7 AU v Trips the circuit-breaker when the control voltage drops below the tripping threshold, which is between 0.35 and 0.7 times the rated voltage. v Circuit-breaker closing is only possible if the voltage exceeds 0.85 times the rated voltage. Circuit-breaker tripping by a GV7 AU trip meets the requirements of IEC 60947-2. b Shunt trip GV7 AS Trips the circuit-breaker when the control voltage rises above 0.7 times the rated voltage. b Operation (GV7 AU or GV7 AS) v When the circuit-breaker has been tripped by a GV7 AU or AS, it must be reset either locally or by remote control. (For remote control, please consult your Regional Sales Office). v Tripping has priority over manual closing: if a tripping instruction is present, manual action does not result in closing, even temporarily, of the contacts. v Durability: 50 % of the mechanical durability of the circuit-breaker.
Type Undervoltage trip Voltage 48 V, 50/60 Hz 110130 V, 50/60 Hz 200240 V, 50/60 Hz 380440 V, 50/60 Hz 525 V, 50 Hz 48 V, 50/60 Hz 110130 V, 50/60 Hz 200240 V, 50/60 Hz 380440 V, 50/60 Hz 525 V, 50 Hz Reference GV7 AU055 (1) GV7 AU107 (1) GV7 AU207 (1) GV7 AU387 (1) GV7 AU525 (1) GV7 AS055 (1) GV7 AS107 (1) GV7 AS207 (1) GV7 AS387 (1) GV7 AS525 (1) Weight kg 0.105 0.110 0.110 0.105 0.100 0.105 0.110 0.110 0.105 0.100

Electric trips

Shunt trip

(1) For mounting of a GV7 AD or a GV7 AU or AS.

Characteristics: pages 3/18, 3/22 and 3/23

Dimensions: pages 3/75 to 3/77

Schemes: page 3/79

3/67

1
ON ON

OFF

2
OFF
ON

GV7 AP04
O

GV7 AP01, AP02

3 4 5

GV7 RE, RS GV7 AP03

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

GV7 AP05

GV7 AC04 GV7 AC01

6
GV7 V01

7 8 9
GV7 AC03

GV7 RE, RS

GV7 AC04

GV7 AC01

10

3/68

References

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV7 R with screw clamp connections
Accessories

Cabling accessories
Description Clip-on connectors for GV7 R Application Up to 150 A, 1.595 mm2 Up to 220 A, 1.5185 mm2 For use on contactors LC1 F115F185 Sold in lots of 3 3 1 1 2 2 1 Unit reference GV7 AC021 GV7 AC022 GV7 AC03 GV7 AC01 GV7 AC04 GV7 AC05 GV7 AC06 GV7 AC07 GV7 AC08 Weight kg 0.300 0.350 0.180 0.125 0.075 0.075 0.550 0.550 0.550

+ +

Spreader 3-pole (1) Terminal shields IP 405 (1) Phase barriers Insulating screens Kits for combination with contactor(2)

To increase the pitch to 45 mm Supplied with sealing accessory Safety accessories used when fitting of shields is impossible Ensure insulation between the connections and the backplate Allowing link between the circuit-breaker and the contactor. The cover provides protection against direct finger contact

GV7AC07

LC1 F225 and F265 1 LC1 D115 and D150 1

GV7AC08

Replaces the circuit-breaker front cover; secured by screws. It includes a device for locking the circuit-breaker in the O (Off) position by means of up to 3 padlocks with a shank diameter of 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not included). A conversion accessory allows the direct rotary handle to be mounted on the enclosure door. In this case, the door cannot be opened if the circuit-breaker is in the ON position. Circuit-breaker closing is inhibited if the enclosure door is open.
Description Direct rotary handle Type Black handle, black legend plate Red handle, yellow legend plate Adapter plate (3) Four mounting direct rotary handle on enclosure door Degree of protection IP 40 IP 40 IP 43 Reference GV7 AP03 GV7 AP04 GV7 AP05 Weight kg 0.205 0.205 0.100

Direct rotary handle

Allows a circuit-breaker installed in the back of an enclosure to be operated from the front of the enclosure. It comprises: b a unit which screws onto the front cover of the circuit-breaker, b an assembly (handle and front plate) to be fitted on the enclosure door, b an extension shaft which must be adjusted (distance between the mounting surface and the door: 185 mm minimum, 600mm maximum). It includes a device for locking the circuit-breaker in the O (Off) position by means of up to 3 padlocks with a shank diameter of 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not included). This prevents the enclosure door from being opened.
Description Extended rotary handle Type Black handle, black legend plate Red handle, yellow legend plate Degree of protection IP 55 IP 55 Reference GV7 AP01 GV7 AP02 Weight kg 0.775 0.775

Extended rotary handle

Allows circuit-breakers not fitted with a rotary handle to be locked in the O (Off) position by means of up to 3 padlocks with a shank diameter of 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not included).
Description Locking device Application For circuit-breaker not fitted with a rotary handle Reference GV7 V01 Weight kg 0.100

Locking device

(1) Terminal shields cannot be used together with spreaders. (2) The kit comprises links, a protective shield and a depth adjustable metal bracket for the breaker. (3) This conversion accessory makes it impossible to open the door if the device is closed and prevents the device from being closed if the door is open.

Dimensions: pages 3/75 to 3/77

Schemes: page 3/79

3/69

Dimensions

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2ME and GV2P

TeSys protection components

Dimensions

1 2

GV2 ME

GV AX

GV AD, AM, AN, AU, AS, AX


Block GV AD, AM, AN Block GV AU, AS, AX

GV AE

X1

11

67,2

15
10

15,7

X1

46

44,5

45

16

9,3

9,3 81(1)

18

3 4 5

b GV2 MEpp 89 GV2 MEpp3 101 (1) Maximum X1 Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue y 690 V

GV2 P

GV AD, AM, AN, AU, AS


Block GV AD, AM, AN Block GV AU, AS

GV2 AK00
14

98
32

X1

89

45

15

X2

26

50 82

44,5

61

9,3

9,3 81(1)

18

44,5

6 7 8 9 10

(1) Maximum X1 Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue y 415 V, or 80 mm for Ue = 440 V, or 120 mm for Ue = 500 and 690 V X2 = 40 mm

GV2 GH7
70
15

44,5

3/70

Mounting, dimensions

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2ME and GV2P

TeSys protection components

Mounting
GV2 ME
On 35 mm 5 rail On panel with adapter plate GV2 AF02 On pre-slotted plate AM1 PA AF1 EA4 On rails DZ5 MB201

1 2 3

4,2

15

35

50/60

50/60

50

80

35

35 GV2 AF02

DZ5 ME8 DZ5 MB201

c = 78.5 on AM1 DP200 (35 x 7.5) c = 86 on AM1 DE200, ED200 (35 x 15)

GV2 P
On rail AM1 DE200, ED200 (35 x 15) Panel mounted On pre-slotted plate AM1 PA Adapter plate GK2 AF01

60

45 AF1 EA4
35 5

4
105 5

44,5

55

44,5

45

5 6

135

84

84

106

13,5

13,5

24

9,5

35

54

Dimensions
GV2 AF01

GV2 AF3
Combination GV2 ME + TeSys d contactor

Combination GV2 ME + TeSys k contactor

Combination GV2 P + TeSys d contactor


152

7
b

79

45

8
c1 c 45
c1 c d1 d
GV2 P + b c1 c d1 d LC1 D09 D18 176.4 100.1 105.6 95 100.5

45

GV2 ME + b c1 c

LC1 D09 D18 176.4 94.1 99.6

LC1 D25 and D32 186.8 100.4 105.9

LC1 D25 and D32 186.8 106.4 111.9 95 100.5

9 10

3/71

Dimensions, mounting

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2ME and GV2P

TeSys protection components

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Dimensions (continued) GV2 AF4 + LAD 311


Combination GV2 ME + TeSys d contactor

Combination GV2 P + TeSys d contactor


125 3

125 3

234

c1 c d1 d
GV2 ME + b c1 c d1 d LC1 D09D18 176.4 103.1 135.6 107 112.5

45

c1 c

45

LC1 D25 and D32 186.8 136.4 141.9 107 112.5

GV2 P + b c1 c

LC1 D09D18 176.4 136.5 141.6

b 234
LC1 D25 and D32 186.8 142.4 147.9

GV2 ME + GV1 L3 (current limiter)


X1

7.5 mm height compensation plate GV1 F03


39

40

13
129

35

77

44,5

X1 = 10 mm for Ue = 230 V or 30 mm for 230 V < Ue y 690 V

3/72

X1

45

89

Dimensions, mounting

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2P

Mounting

Mounting of external operator GV2 APN01, GV2 APN02 or GV2 APN04 for motor circuit-breakers GV2 P
Door cut-out

1
16 43,5 (1)

3,5

16

60

22

2 3

0,5...4 43 a 6 5,2 = =
(1) For IP65 only.

= 48

Mounting of external operator GV APH02 for motor circuit-breakers GV2 P


Door cut-out

3,5

16

43,5 (1)

48

173,4

60

22

0,5...4

= 48

48

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

16

43

= 64,1

(1) For IP65 only.

GV2 APNpp GV2 APNpp + GV APH02 GV2 APNpp + GV APK11 GV2 APNpp + GV APH02 + GV APK11

a Mini 140 250 -

Maxi 250 434 -

b Mini 151 250

Maxi 250 445

3/73

Dimensions, mounting

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2ME and GV2P

TeSys protection components

GV2ME, GV2P

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Sets of busbars GV2 G445, GV2 G454, GV2 G472, with terminal block GV2 G05
a 3
18

63

45
l 179 206 260 p 45 54 72 a 5 224 260 332

GV2G445 (4 x 45 mm) GV2G454 (4 x 54 mm) GV2 G472 (4 x 72 mm)

Number of tap-offs GV2 G445 GV2 G454 GV2 G472

6 269 314 404

7 314 368 476

8 359 422 548

Sets of busbars GV2 Gppp with terminal block GV1 G09


GV1 G09
38

Sets of busbars GV2 G245, GV2 G254, GV2 G272


GV2 G245 (2 x 45 mm) GV2 G254 (2 x 54 mm) GV2 G272 (2 x 72 mm)

l 89 98 116

Sets of busbars GV2 G554


260

Sets of busbars GV2 G345 and GV2 G354


GV2 G345 (3 x 45 mm) GV2 G354 (3 x 54 mm)

l 134 152

9 10

3/74

Dimensions, mounting

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2RT

TeSys protection components

GV2RT

Dimensions
X1

12,5

66

1
45 =

89

2 3
12,3

X1: Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue < 690 V

Mounting
Mounting of external operator GV2 AP03

X1

7,5

16

44

44,5

4
133282 6 = =

65

53

1,5...5

13

5
On pre-slotted plate AM1 PA On rails DZ5 MB

On 35 mm 7 rail

On panel with adapter plate GV2 AF02

4,2
44,5

AF1 EA4

15

35

6
50 60
DZ5 ME8

15

50/60

44,5

84,5

35

35
GV2 AF02

50/60

DZ5 MB201

7 8 9 10

GV2 A
c = 80 on AM1 DP200 (35 x 7.5) c = 88 on AM1 DE200, ED200 (35 x 15)

3/75

Dimensions, mounting

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3P

GV3P

1 2

Dimensions
(1)

X1

(2)

68

64

132

X1

136

55

18

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

X1 = Electrical clearance (ISC max) 40 mm for Ue y 500 V, 50 mm for Ue y 690 V

(1) Blocks GVANpp , GVADpp and GVAM11 (2) Blocks GV3 AUpp and GV3ASpp

Note: Leave a gap of 9 mm between 2 circuit-breakers: either an empty space or side-mounting add-on contact blocks. Horizontal mounting is possible up to 40 C

Mounting
Mounting with TeSys contactor LC1D40AD65A Side by side mounting with TeSys contactor LC1 D40AD65A (S-shape busbar system GV3 S)

231

136 120

119

136

55

Mounting on rail AM1 DE200 or AM1 ED201

Panel mounting, using M4 screws

68

144

64

136

37,5

3x4

Mounting on pre-slotted plate AM1 PA

136

18,7 18,7

AF1 EA4

3/76

137,5

137,5

138

Dimensions, mounting

TeSys protection components


Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3P

GV3P (continued) Busbar systems


Set of busbars GV3G264 Set of busbars GV3G364

119

183

1 2

16

Note: Leave a space of 9 mm between 2 circuit-breakers: either an empty space or side-mounting add-on contact blocks. Horizontal mounting is possible up to 40 C.

16

Mounting

Mounting of external operator GV3 APN01, GV3 APN02 or GV3 APN04 for motor circuit-breakers GV3 P
Door cut-out

3
3,5 16 43,5 (1)

4 5 6

16

=
= = 48
16 43,5 (1)

60

22

0,5...4 43 a = 60
(1) For IP65 only.

Mounting of external operator GV APH03 for motor circuit-breakers GV3 P


Door cut-out

3,5

48

16

213,4

7 8 9

60

22

= 48

0,5...4 43 b = 73,8 =

(1) For IP65 only.

GV3 APNpp GV3 APNpp + GV APK12 GV3 APNpp + GV APH03 GV3 APNpp + GV APH03 + GV APK12

a Mini 189 300 -

Maxi 300 481 -

b Mini 200 300

Maxi 300 492

48

10

3/77

Dimensions, mounting

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3ME80

TeSys protection components

1 2

Dimensions
4,5 17,3

GV3ME80

X1

20 =

100110

120

70

45

(1)

113

X1

22

77,5

5,5

21,2 61,2

70,4

3 4

X1 = Electrical clearance (ISC max) 40 mm for Ue y 500 V, 50 mm for Ue y 690 V

(1) Blocks GV3A01A07.

Mounting

Mounting on rail AM1 DE200 or AM1 ED201

Panel mounting, using M4 screws 61,2 =

Mounting on pre-slotted plate AM1 PA

100110

122,5

113

20 20 21,2

113

20

AF1 EA4

5 6 7 8 9 10

3/78

100110

Dimensions, mounting

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV7R

TeSys protection components

GV7R

Dimensions
35 = =

1 2 3 4 5 6
Minimum electrical clearance

161

81 86 111 (1)
(1) 126 for GV7 Rp220.

= 105

Motor circuit-breakers with terminal shields or phase barriers GV7 R + GV7 AC01 or AC04

(2) Phase barriers: GV7 AC04 (3) Terminal shields: GV7 AC01

Combination of GV7 R and TeSys contactor LC1 F with kit GV7 AC0p

x2

125

a b c GV7 R + LC1 F115 or 119 334 181 F150 + GV7 AC06 GV7 R + LC1 F185 + 119 338 188 GV7 AC06 GV7 R + LC1 F225 + 131 358 188 GV7 AC07 GV7 R + LC1 F265 + 131 364 215 GV7 AC07 Minimum distance between 2 circuit-breakers mounted side by side = 0

7
x1

x1

8
x1 0 5 10 20 x2 30 35 35 35

Painted or insulated metal plate, insulation or insulated bar Bare U y 440 V metal 440 V < U < 600 V plate U u 600 V

x2

9 10

3/79

Dimensions, mounting

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV7R

TeSys protection components

GV7R

1 2

Panel mounting

Mounting on 2 mounting rails DZ5 MB201


DZ5 ME5

135

35

35

35

125

15

35

3 4 5

Flush-mounting
1 circuit-breaker GV7 R n circuit-breakers GV7 R side by side

47

125

76

108

=
G 85 85 85 85 85 H 120 120 120 120 120

29

88

== 29

83

= 108

Combination of GV7 R and TeSys contactor LC1 F with kit GV7 AC0p

6 7 8 9 10

GV7 R + LC1 F115 + GV7 AC06 GV7 R + LC1 F150 + GV7 AC06 GV7 R + LC1 F185 + GV7 AC06 GV7 R + LC1 F225 + GV7 AC07 GV7 R + LC1 F265 + GV7 AC07

E 44 46 48 57 60

3/80

108

Dimensions, mounting

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV7R

TeSys protection components

GV7R

Spreaders GV7 AC03


114 45 45

Connection

Smooth terminals

Connectors

1
Z

10,5

Z
19

41

30

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

70

GV7 Rp40Rp150 GV7 Rp220

Direct rotary handle GV7 AP03, GV7 AP04


Flush-mounting

45

73

47

I 0

121 155

55 91

36

28

89

= 97

Direct rotary handle GV7 AP03 or GV7 AP04 with conversion accessory GV7 AP05
Front face cut-out

9,25

Enclosure viewed from top

120

59

41

100

125 2

69 120

51

= 100

e = 1 to 3 max

Extended rotary handle GV7 AP01, GV7 AP02


9,25 60 I
9

0 60 l = 75 =

l : 185 min, 600 max The shaft of the extended rotary handle GV7 AP01 or GV7 AP02 must be cut to length: l 126 mm.

75

Door cut-outs require a minimum distance between the centre of the circuit-breaker and the door hinge point D u 100 + (h x 5)

29

76

70
a 19.5 21.5

3/81

Schemes

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2ME, GV2P, GV3P and GV2RT

TeSys protection components

Schemes
1/L1 3/L2

5/L3

1/L1

3/L2

5/L3

1/L1

3/L2 4/T2

2
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3

2/T1

4/T2

6/T3

2/T1

3 4

Front mounting add-on contact blocks Instantaneous auxiliary contacts


GV AE1
13
or

Front mounting add-on contact blocks Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and fault signalling contacts
GV AED101
97 23

GV AE11
13 21
11

GV AE20
13 23

GV AED011
97 21

98

98

12

14

14

22

14

Side mounting add-on contact blocks Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and fault signalling contacts
GV AD0110 GV AD0101
95 51

24

GV AD1010
97 53

24

GV AD1001
97 51

5 6 7 8 9 10

95

53

98

96

96

54

52

98

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts


GV AN11
(61) 31 43 (73)

Short-circuit signalling contacts


GV AM11
08 06

GV AN20
(63) 33 43 (73)

(62) 32

44 (74)

(64) 34

44 (74)

Voltage trips
GV AUppp
D1

Current limiter
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

GV ASppp
D1

GV AXppp
D1 D2

GV1 L3

D2

D2

E1

Use of fault signalling contact and short-circuit signalling contact



GV AM11 GV AD10pp

E2

Connection of undervoltage trip for dangerous machines (conforming to INRS) on GV2 ME only

10Agl max

1/L1

05

3/L2

54

5/L3

D1

Short-circuit signalling

D2

Trip signalling N/C or N/O Start-Stop contact

E2

2/T1

4/T2

6/T3

E1

3/82

52

22

6/T3

5/L3

GV2 MEpp and GV2 RT


GV2 Ppp

GV3 Ppp

Schemes

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3ME80 and GV7R

TeSys protection components

Schemes
GV3 ME80
1/L1

Motor circuit-breakers
3/L2 5/L3

Auxiliary contact block modules


23

13

21

13

23

14

24

32

14

24

34

14

24

14

22

14

24

34

13

24

14

32

31

13

23

31

13

23

33

13

23

33

GV3 A01

GV3 A02

GV3 A03

GV3 A05

GV3 A06

GV3 A07

1 2

2/T1

Fault signalling contacts


GV3 A08
95

4/T2

6/T3

Voltage trips
D1 C1

GV3 A09
97

GV3 B

GV3 D

3 4
Location 4 C/O contact
24 22

D2

Motor circuit-breakers
3/L2 1/L1 5/L3

96

98

Add-on auxiliary contacts according to their location (1)


GV7 AE11, GV7 AB11 Location 1 Location 2 C/O contact Trip indication
14 12

GV7 R

C2


92 94

Location 3 Electrical fault indication


84 82

5 6 7 8

11

91

81

2/T1

4/T2

6/T3

A self-adhesive label, supplied with the contact, can be affixed to the front face of the circuitbreaker to allow personalised marking according to the function of the contact or contacts. (1) See pages 3/20 and 3/61. GV7 ASppp
C1

Electric trips
GV7 AUppp
D1

GV7 AD111, AD112


97
50 ms

D4

C2

Recommended application schemes GV7 AD111, AD112


Fault indication
97

Contactor opening on overload


97

98

KA1

14

13

50 ms

50 ms

Reset

98

98

21

21

Reset

KA1
A1 22 A1 B1

24

9 10

23

A2

Associated components KA1: CA2 KN or CAD N

Associated components KA1: CAD + LAD 6K10 or RHK KM1: LC1 D or LC1 F

A2

KA1

Overload fault

KA1

KM1

3/83

Dimensions, mounting

TeSys protection components


Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 L and GV2 LE

GV2 L

1 2

Dimensions
X1

GV AD, AM, AN, AU, AS


Block GV AD, AM, AN Block GV AU, AS

GV2 AK00
14 98
32

89

45

X2

26 15

50 82

44,5

61

9,3

9,3 81 (1)
(1) Maximum

18
44,5

3 4

X1 Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue y 415 V, or 80 mm for Ue = 440 V, or 120 mm for Ue = 500 and 690 V. X2 = 40 mm.

Mounting
On rail AM1 DE200, AM1ED200 (35 x 15) Panel mounted On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 PA

Adapter plate GK2 AF01

AF1 EA4
35 5 55

5,5 45
35 1055 135

44,5

84

84

5 6 7 8 9 10

44,5

106

13,5

13,5

24

45

9,5

54

7.5 mm height compensation plate GV1 F03


39

13

35

GV2 LE

Dimensions
X1

GV AD, AM, AN, AU, AS


Block GV AD, AM, AN Block GV AU, AS

GV AE
15
10

89

12,5

66

X1

7,5

16

44

44,5

45

9,3

9,3 81 (1)

18

X1 Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue y 690 V.

(1) Maximum On pre-slotted plate AM1 PA On rails DZ5 MB201

Mounting
On 35 mm 7 rail On panel with adapter plate GV2 AF02

44,5

AF1 EA4
50/60

15

35

44,5

50/60

c
c = 80 on AM1 DP200 (35 x 7.5) and 88 on AM1DE200, ED200 (35 x15)

84,5

4,2 35

35
GV2 AF02

DZ5 ME8 DZ5 MB201

3/84

50 60

Dimensions, mounting

TeSys protection components


Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 L and GV2 LE

Mounting

Mounting of external operator GV2 APN01, GV2 APN02 or GV2 APN04 for motor circuit-breakers GV2 L
Door cut-out

1
16 43,5 (1)
= 48

3,5
6

60

16

22
0,5...4 43 a 6 5,2 = =
(1) For IP65 only. Door cut-out

2 3

= 48

Mounting of external operator GV APH02 for motor circuit-breakers GV2 L

3,5
6

16

43,5 (1)

16

173,4

= 48

60

22
0,5...4

4 5 6

= 48
b = 64,1
a Mini 140 250 Maxi 250 434 b Mini 151 250 Maxi 250 445

43

=
(1) For IP65 only.

GV2 APNpp GV2 APNpp + GV APH02 GV2 APNpp + GV APK11 GV2 APNpp + GV APH02 + GV APK11

Mounting of external operator GV2 AP03 for GV2 LE


Door cut-out

65

45

7
54

1,5...5 53 135284 44,5

= 54

8 9 10

3/85

Dimensions, mounting

TeSys protection components


Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 L and GV2 LE

GV2 L and GV2 LE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Sets of busbars GV2 G445, GV2 G454, GV2 G472, with terminal block GV2 G05
GV1 G09 38

a 3 l

18

63

45

GV2 G445 (4 x 45 mm) GV2 G454 (4 x 54 mm) GV2 G472 (4 x 72 mm)

l 179 206 260 a 5 224 260 332

p 45 54 72

Number of tap-offs GV2 G445 GV2 G454 GV2 G472

6 269 314 404

7 314 368 476

8 359 422 548

Sets of busbars for GV2L and GV2LE


GV1 G09
30

Sets of busbars GV2 Gppp with term. block GV1 G09

Sets of busbars GV2 G245, GV2 G254, GV2 GR272


l

GV2 G245 (2 x 45 mm) GV2 G254 (2 x 54 mm) GV2 G272 (2 x 72 mm)

I 89 98 116

Set of busbars GV2 G554


260

Sets of busbars GV2 G345 and GV2 G354


l

GV2 G345 (3 x 45 mm) GV2 G354 (3 x 54 mm)

I 134 152

10

3/86

Dimensions, mounting

TeSys protection components


Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3 L

GV3L

Dimensions
(1)

1
X1
(2)

68

2
9 18 (1) Blocks GVANpp , GVADpp and GVAM11 (2) Blocks GV3 AUpp and GV3ASpp

X1 = Electrical clearance (ISC max) 40 mm for Ue y 500 V, 50 mm for Ue y 690 V

X1

136

64

55

132

Note: Leave a space of 9 mm between 2 circuit-breakers: either an empty space or side-mounting add-on contact blocks. Side by side mounting is possible up to 40 C.

3 4 5 6

Mounting
Mounting with Tesys contactor LC1D40AD65A and relay LR3D313365 Side by side mounting with Tesys contactor LC1D40AD65A (S-shape busbar system GV3 S)

115

185

299

136

119

136

55 Panel mounting, using M4 screws

Mounting on rail AM1DE200 or AM1ED201

70

195

7
137,5

144

64

68

136

37,5

3x4

8 9 10

Mounting on pre-slotted plate AM1PA

Set of busbars GV3G264

Set of busbars GV3G364

119

183

16

AF1 EA4 137,5

136

18,7 18,7

16

3/87

Dimensions, mounting

TeSys protection components


Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3 L and GK3 EF80

Mounting

1 2 3 4

Mounting of external operator GV3 APN01, GV3 APN02 or GV3 APN04 for motor circuit-breakers GV3 L
Door cut-out

3,5
6

16

43,5 (1)

16

60

22

=
0,5...4 43 a = 60 =
(1) For IP65 only. Door cut-out

= 48

Mounting of external operator GV APH03 for motor circuit-breakers GV3 L

3,5
6

16

43,5 (1)

213,4

16

60

22

5
0,5...4 43 b = 73,8
a Mini 189 300 b Mini 200 300

= 48

(1) For IP65 only.

6 7 8
120 GV3 APNpp GV3 APNpp + GV APK12 GV3 APNpp + GV APH03 GV3 APNpp + GV APH03 + GV APK12

Maxi 300 481 -

Maxi 300 492

GK3EF80
X1 105 38 28

GK3EF80 + 4 GK2AX

10

3/88

X1

45

80

15

70

4,5

Number of GK2AX 0 1 2 66 74.8 83.5

3 92.5

4 101

48

48

Schemes

TeSys protection components


Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 L, GV2 LE, GV3 L and GK3 EF80

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers


GV2 Lpp
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

GV2 LEpp
3/L2 5/L3 1/L1

GV3 Lpp
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

GK3 EF80

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

2/T1

4/T2

6/T3

6/T3

2/T1

4/T2

2/T1

Accessories
GV AE1
OR

Front mounting add-on contact blocks Instantaneous auxiliary contacts


GV AE11
13 21
11

GV AE20
13 23

GVAED101 and GVAED011

13

4/T2

6/T3

97 98

97

14

22

14

14

12

24

23

98

Side mounting add-on contact blocks Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and fault signalling contacts
GV AD0110 GV AD0101 GV AD1010 GV AD1001

95

53

95

51

97

53

97

96

96

54

52

98

54

98

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts


GV AN11
(61) 31 43 (73)

Short-circuit signalling contacts


GV AM11
08 06

GV AN20
(63) 33 43 (73)

(62) 32

44 (74)

(64) 34

44 (74)

Voltage trips
GV AUppp
D1

GV ASppp
C1

D2

Start-Stop signalling contact blocks


GK2 AX10
13

C2

GK2 AX20
13 23

GK2 AX50
13 21

05

52

51

24

22

21

8 9 10

14

14

14

Fault signalling contact blocks


GK2 AX12
97

GK2 AX22
97 07

24

GK2 AX52
97 98 05 06

98

98

08

22

3/89

Selection guide

Protection components

Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers TeSys GB2 for the protection of control circuits, solenoid valves and transformers
Protection of industrial equipment control circuits and of single-phase loads

Applications

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Breaking capacity (Icu) conforming to IEC 60947-2 50 kA at 415 V 1.550 kA at 415 V 1.550 kA at 250 V

Tripping threshold on short-circuit

57 In

1216 In

Operational current

0.5 and 1 A

0.520 A

Maximum operational voltage

415 V

250 V

Number of poles

1 + neutral

8 9 10

Device type

GB2 CS

GB2 CB

GB2 CD

Pages

3/97

3/96

3/96

3/90

Protection of transformers

Single-phase y 5000 VA/415 V Primary Secondary

3-phase y 10 kVA/415 V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

About 20 In

0.2523 A

415 V

690 V

1 + neutral

1.550 kA at 415 V

1.550 kA at 250 V

15100 kA at 415 V

GB2 DB

GB2 DB

GB2 CD

GV2 RT

8 9 10

3/96

3/96

3/96

3/51

3/91

Presentation, selection

Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers TeSys GB2 for the protection of industrial equipment control circuits
Presentation

Protection components

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Characteristics : pages 3/93 to 3/95 References : pages 3/96 and 3/97

GB2 thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers protect and isolate the control circuits of industrial equipment with contactor coils, transformers. They protect and isolate single-phase auxiliary circuits such as solenoid valves, electro-brakes, battery chargers, supplied from the control circuit voltage. GB2 CB, GB2 CD, GB2 DB 12 ratings are available, from 0.5 to 20 A, in single-pole (GB2 CB), single-pole + neutral (GB2 CD) and 2-pole (GB2 DB) versions. They have a magnetic tripping threshold set at between 12 and 16 In to withstand the current peaks generated by many industrial components. GB2 CS 2 ratings are available, 0.5 and 1 A, in single-pole version. The magnetic tripping threshold is set between 5 and 7 In. Functions, installation Clip-on fixing onto all types of 35 mm 5 rails, on 4 rails and on Telequick mounting plates. Upstream and downstream marking by means of AB1 clip-in markers. Clear indication of I and O positions on the operator. Tamper-proof device which requires no special maintenance (fixed magnetic and thermal tripping thresholds). Single-phase transformers. Magnetising peak: 20 In. Operation of magnetic trips: 13 In.
Power VA 40 63 100 160 250 400 630 1000 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 5000

Selection for the protection of circuits supplied by transformers

Primary (1) 220/240 V 380/415 V GB2 DB05 GB2 DB05 GB2 DB05 GB2 DB06 GB2 DB07 GB2 DB07 GB2 DB08 GB2 DB10 GB2 DB14 GB2 DB20 GB2 DB21 GB2 DB22 GB2 DB22 GB2 DB05 GB2 DB05 GB2 DB06 GB2 DB06 GB2 DB07 GB2 DB08 GB2 DB09 GB2 DB14 GB2 DB14 GB2 DB20 GB2 DB20 GB2 DB21 GB2 DB22

Secondary 24 V 48 V GB2 CD07 GB2 CD06 GB2 CD08 GB2 CD10 GB2 CD14 GB2 CD16 GB2 CD22 GB2 CD07 GB2 CD07 GB2 CD09 GB2 CD12 GB2 CD14 GB2 CD21

110 V GB2 CD05 GB2 CD06 GB2 CD06 GB2 CD07 GB2 CD08 GB2 CD09 GB2 CD12 GB2 CD16 GB2 CD22

220 V GB2 CD05 GB2 CD05 GB2 CD05 GB2 CD06 GB2 CD07 GB2 CD07 GB2 CD08 GB2 CD10 GB2 CD14 GB2 CD16 GB2 CD20 GB2 CD21 GB2 CD22

(1) If the breaking capacity of the GB2 is insufficient, use a GV2 RT with 2 poles connected in series, see page 3/51.

Dimensions : page 3/97

Schemes : page 3/97

3/92

Characteristics

Protection components

Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers TeSys GB2 for the protection of industrial equipment control circuits
GB2 CB GB2 CD GB2 DB GB2 CS

Circuit-breaker type

Environment

Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Degree of protection Shock resistance Vibration resistance Ambient air temperature around the device Flame resistance Maximum operating altitude Operating position

Conforming to IEC 60529 Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Storage Operation Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1

C C C m

IEC 60947-1, 947-2, EN 60947-1, 60947-2 CSA, NEMKO, UL NEMKO, UL TC IP 20 22 gn for 20 ms 5 gn (5110 Hz) - 40+ 80 - 20+ 60 960 3000

1 2 3

In relation to normal vertical mounting plane

GB2 CB,CD, CS Cabling Solid cable Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque mm2 mm2 N.m Minimum c.s.a. 1 x 0.75 1 x 0.75 1.2

GB2 DB Maximum c.s.a. 1 x 6 or 2 x 4 1 x 4 or 2 x 2.5

4
A 415 (1) 50/60 4 1.9 8000 + 40 0.90 + 50 0.85 57 In + 60 0.80

Technical characteristics
Utilisation category Rated operational voltage (Ue) Conforming to IEC 60947-2 Conforming to IEC 60947-2 Conforming to CSA C22-2 Nr 14 and UL 1077 Conforming to IEC 60947-2 Conforming to IEC 60947-2 V V Hz kV W C.O. C A 415 (1) 277 50/60 4 2 8000 - 20 - 10 0 A 250 50/60 4 2 8000 + 10 + 20 1 A 415 277 50/60 4 2 8000 + 30 0.95 1216 In

5 6 7 8 9 10

Rated operational frequency Rated impulse withstand voltage (U imp) Total power dissipated per pole Mechanical and C.O.: Closing - Opening electrical durability Operational current According to the permissible correction coefficient ambient temperature (a or c) Correction coefficient Tripping threshold Of the magnetic trips

1.2 1.15 1216 In

1.1 1.05 1216 In

(1) One GB2 circuit-breaker on each live conductor.

Tripping curves
Average operating time at 20 C without prior current flow (cold state) GB2 CB, GB2 CD, GB2 DB GB2 CS
120 60 20 10 5 2 1 20 10 5 2 1 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 2 1 1,05 2 3 4 5 6 8 1,5 10 100 x In

120 60 20 10 5 2 1 20 10 5 2 1 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 2 1

Minutes

Seconds

Milliseconds

Milliseconds

Seconds

Minutes

1,05 2 3 4 5 6 8 1,5 10

100 x In

Presentation, selection : page 3/92

References : pages 3/96 and 3/97

Dimensions : page 3/97

Schemes : page 3/97

3/93

Characteristics (continued)

Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers TeSys GB2 for the protection of industrial equipment control circuits
GB2 CB05 CB06 CB07 CB08 CB09 CB10 CB12 CB14 CB16 CB20 CB21 CB22 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 20 0.5 50 100 50 25 50 25 g g g g g g 50 50 50 25 50 25 g g g g g g 15 50 15 25 15 25 20 25 16 25 16 25 10 50 3 50 3 50 25 32 20 32 20 32 6 50 3 50 3 50 25 32 20 32 20 32 3 75 2 75 2 75 40 50 32 40 32 40 3 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 40 50 32 40 32 40 3 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 50 63 40 50 40 50 2 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 50 63 40 50 40 50 2 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 63 80 50 63 50 63 2 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 63 80 50 63 50 63 2 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 63 80 50 63 50 63

Protection components

Circuit-breaker type

1 2

Rating Breaking capacity conforming to IEC 60947-2 a 50/60 Hz 110 V Icu Ics % (1) Icu Ics % (1) Icu Ics % (1) aM gG aM gG aM gG

A kA

230/240 V

kA

400/415 V

kA

Associated fuses, if required if Isc > breaking capacity Icu conforming to IEC 60947-2

110 V

A A A A A A

3
Circuit-breaker type

230/240 V

400/415 V

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Rating Breaking capacity conforming to IEC 60947-2 a 50/60 Hz 110 V Icu Ics % (1) Icu Ics % (1) aM gG aM gG

A kA

GB2 CD05 CD06 CD07 CD08 CD09 CD10 CD12 CD14 CD16 CD20 CD21 CD22 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 20 0.5 1 2 50 100 50 25 g g g g 50 50 50 25 g g g g 15 50 15 25 20 25 16 25 10 50 3 50 25 32 20 32 6 50 3 50 25 32 20 32 3 75 2 75 40 50 32 40 3 75 1.5 75 40 50 32 40 3 75 1.5 75 50 63 40 50 2 75 1.5 75 50 63 40 50 2 75 1.5 75 63 80 50 63 2 75 1.5 75 63 80 50 63 2 75 1.5 75 63 80 50 63

230/ 240 V

kA

Associated fuses, if required if lsc > breaking capacity Icu conforming to IEC 60947-2

110 V

A A A A

230/240 V

Circuit-breaker type Rating Breaking capacity conforming to IEC 60947-2 a 50/60 Hz 110 V lcu Ics % (1) lcu Ics % (1) lcu Ics % (1) aM gG aM gG aM gG A kA

GB2 DB05 DB06 DB07 DB08 DB09 DB10 DB12 DB14 DB16 DB20 DB21 DB22 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 20 0.5 1 2 50 100 50 25 50 25 g g g g g g 50 50 50 25 50 25 g g g g g g 15 50 15 25 15 25 20 25 16 25 16 25 10 50 3 50 3 50 25 32 20 32 20 32 6 50 3 50 3 50 25 32 20 32 20 32 3 75 2 75 2 75 40 50 32 40 32 40 3 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 40 50 32 40 32 40 3 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 50 63 40 50 40 50 2 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 50 63 40 50 40 50 2 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 63 80 50 63 50 63 2 75 1.5 75 1.5 1.5 63 80 50 63 50 63 2 75 1.5 75 75 75 63 80 50 63 50 63

230/240 V

kA

400/415 V

kA

Associated fuses, if required if lsc > breaking capacity Icu conforming to IEC 60947-2

110 V

A A A A A A

230/240 V

400/415 V

(1) As % of Icu. g Fuse not required. Breaking capacity Icu > lsc.

Presentation, selection : page 3/92

References : page 3/96

Dimensions : page 3/97

Schemes : page 3/97

3/94

Characteristics (continued)

Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers TeSys GB2 for the protection of industrial equipment control circuits
GB2 pp05 pp06 pp07 pp08 pp09 pp10 pp12 pp14 pp16 pp20 pp21 pp22 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 GB2 CS05 0.5 50 100 50 25 50 25 1.5 1 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 48 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 48 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 48 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 110 31 39 52 78 130 200 110 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 110 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 230 365 460 610 910 1520 2400 230 230 290 390 580 970 1500 230 46 60 80 120 190 310 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 10 10 10 12 12 12 16 16 16 20 20 20

Protection components

Circuit-breaker type Breaking capacity (lcu) conforming to IEC 60947-2 c Operational current conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 c DC-12 24 V 48 V 24 V 48 V 24 V 48 V kA kA A A A A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

DC-13

Circuit-breaker type Rating Breaking capacity conforming to IEC 60947-2 a 50/60 Hz 110 V lcu lcs % (1) A kA

CS06 1 50 100 50 25 50 25 1.5 1 1 1 1 1 48 6 8 10 15 26 41 48 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 48 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 110 85 110 145 220 360 580 110 56 70 95 140 230 375 110 13 17 22 34 56 90 230 230 290 380 570 950 1500 230 230 290 380 570 950 1500 230 100 130 170 250 420 680

230/240 V lcu lcs % (1) 400/415 V lcu (2) lcs % (1) Breaking capacity (lcu) conforming to IEC 60947-2 c Operational current conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 c DC-12 24 V 48 V 24 V 48 V 24 V 48 V

kA

kA

kA kA A A A A V m m m m m m V m m m m m m V m m m m m m

DC-13

Maximum permissible line length for star-delta starting (length of cable containing 2 or more conductors)

With contactors LCp D09 D18

Operational voltage C.s.a. 060 mm2 0.75 mm2 1 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 4 mm2

With contactors LCp D25D32

Operational voltage C.s.a. 0.60 mm2 0.75 mm2 1 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 4 mm2

With contactors LCp D40D80

Operational voltage C.s.a. 0.60 mm2 0.75 mm2 1 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 4 mm2

(1) As % of Icu. (2) One GB2 CS circuit-breaker on each live conductor. (3) Use relays.

Presentation, selection : page 3/92

References : page 3/96 and 3/97

Dimensions : page 3/97

Schemes : page 3/97

3/95

References

Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers TeSys GB2 for the protection of industrial equipment control circuits
Circuit-breakers with magnetic tripping threshold: 12 to 16 In
Single-pole
Conventional rated thermal current Ith (1) A 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 20 Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 6.6 14 26 40 52 66 83 108 138 165 220 270 Sold in lots of Unit reference Weight kg 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060

Protection components

1 2 3

534268

GB2 CBpp

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

GB2 CB05 GB2 CB06 GB2 CB07 GB2 CB08 GB2 CB09 GB2 CB10 GB2 CB12 GB2 CB14 GB2 CB16 GB2 CB20 GB2 CB21 GB2 CB22

534269

Single-pole + neutral
Conventional rated thermal current Ith (1) A 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 20 Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 6.6 14 26 40 52 66 83 108 138 165 220 270 Sold in lots of Unit reference Weight kg 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070

4 5
GB2 CDpp

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

GB2 CD05 GB2 CD06 GB2 CD07 GB2 CD08 GB2 CD09 GB2 CD10 GB2 CD12 GB2 CD14 GB2 CD16 GB2 CD20 GB2 CD21 GB2 CD22

6 7 8 9 10

534270

2-pole
Conventional rated thermal current Ith (1) A 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 20 (1) Conforming to IEC 60947-1. Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 6.6 14 26 40 50 66 83 108 138 165 220 270 Sold in lots of Unit reference Weight kg 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115

GB2 DBpp

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

GB2 DB05 GB2 DB06 GB2 DB07 GB2 DB08 GB2 DB09 GB2 DB10 GB2 DB12 GB2 DB14 GB2 DB16 GB2 DB20 GB2 DB21 GB2 DB22

Presentation, selection : page 3/92

Characteristics : pages 3/93 to 3/95

Dimensions : page 3/97

Schemes : page 3/97

3/96

References (continued), dimensions, schemes

Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers TeSys GB2 for the protection of industrial equipment control circuits

Protection components

Circuit-breakers with magnetic tripping threshold: 5 to 7 In


Single-pole
Conventional rated thermal current Ith (1) A 0.5 Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 3.3 Sold in lots of Unit reference
534271

Weight kg 0.055

1 2

GB2 CS05

GB2 CS06

0.055

GB2 CSpp (1) Conforming to IEC 60947-1.

3
Description Busbar set for supply to 10 GB2 DB or 20 GB2 CB or GB2 CS with 2 connectors Supply connector Sold in lots of 1 Unit reference GB2 G210 Weight kg 0.100

Accessories for circuit-breakers GB2-CB, DB and CS

4 5

10

GB2 G01

Dimensions

GB2 CBpp, GB2 CDpp, GB2 CSpp

GB2 DBpp

74

82 82 75 79 67

15

85 85 78 82 70

30

74

6 7 8

Marking: up to twelve AB1 R clip-in markers.

Schemes
GB2 CBpp

1/L1

GB2 CDpp
3/L2 (13)

GB2 DBpp

1/L1 3/L2

GB2 CSpp

1/L1

1/L1

9 10

4/T2 (14)

2/T1

2/T1

2/T1


Presentation, selection : page 3/92 Characteristics : pages 3/93 to 3/95

4/T2

2/T1

3/97

Contents

4 - TeSys protection components: fuse protection

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors for standard applications


Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/2 b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/4 b Complete units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/8 b Switch bodies and add-on modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/9 b Operators and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/11 and page 4/17 b Dimensions, mounting and schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/22

VARIO switch disconnectors for high performance applications


Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/2 b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/4 b Complete units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/12 b Switch bodies, add-on modules and auxiliary contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/14 b Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/17 b Dimensions, mounting and schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/24

TeSys DF fuse carriers for the protection of control circuits or transformers


Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/26 b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/28 b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/29 b Dimensions, mounting and schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/31 b Fuse carriers for the North American market, conforming to UL and CSA standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/32

TeSys GK1 fuse carriers for motor protection


Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/27 b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/35 b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/36 b Operators and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/37 b Dimensions, mounting and schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/40

4/0

TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses for motor or variable speed drive protection


Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/42 b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/46 b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/53 b Operators and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/60 b Dimensions, mounting and schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/62 b Switch-disconnector-fuses for the North American market, conforming to UL and CSA standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/68

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Cartridge fuses for protection of equipment with current peaks


b Type aM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/73 b Type gG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/75

4/1

Selection guide

Protection components

Mini-VARIO and VARIO switch disconnectors

Applications

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Mini-Vario and Vario rotary switch disconnectors from 12 to 175 A are suitable for onload making and breaking of resistive or mixed resistive and inductive circuits where frequent operation is required. They can also be used for direct switching of motors in utilisation categories AC-3 and DC-3 specific to motors. Vario switch disconnectors are suitable for isolator applications with fully visible breaking (since the handle cannot indicate the open position unless all the contacts are actually open and separated by the appropriate isolating distance) and it is possible to padlock the handles in the open position.

Switch type

Mini-VARIO for standard applications VARIO for high performance applications

Thermal current Operational current AC-23 A at 400 Volts

12 A 8.1 A

20 A 11 A

12 A 8.1 A

20 A 11 A

25 A 14.5 A

Number of poles Number of auxiliary contacts

35 1 or 2

36 14

Switch fixing From the front From the back

Screw fixing, 1 or 4 holes Fixing: 1 x 22.5 hole or 4 x 5.5 screws Clip-on mounting on 7 rail Clip-on mounting on 7 rail or screw fixing

Reversible terminal blocks

Yes

Door mounting, direct operator Mounting at back of enclosure, indirect operator with door interlock

Yes Yes

Enclosure reference Product reference

VpDN12 VCFN12GE
2/4 and 4/8

VpDN20 VCFN20GE

VpD02 VpF02 VpF02GE


4/12 and 4/13

VpD01 VpF01 VpF01GE

VpD0 VpF0 VpF0GE

Pages

4/2

Mini-Vario and Vario rotary switch disconnectors from 12 to 175 A are suitable for on-load making and breaking of resistive or mixed resistive and inductive circuits where frequent operation is required. They can also be used for direct switching of motors in utilisation categories AC-3 and DC-3 specific to motors. Vario switch disconnectors are suitable for isolator applications with fully visible breaking (since the handle cannot indicate the open position unless all the contacts are actually open and separated by the appropriate isolating distance) and it is possible to padlock the handles in the open position.

1 2 3 4

VARIO for high performance applications

32 A 21.8 A

40 A 29 A

63 A 41.5 A

80 A 57 A

125 A 68.5 A

175 A 83 A

5 6

36 14

3 + N + PE

Screw fixing, 1 or 4 holes Fixing: 1 x 22.5 hole or 4 x 5.5 screws Clip-on mounting on 7 rail or screw fixing

Fixing 4 x 5.5 screws Screw fixing

Yes

7 8 9 10

Yes Yes

VpD1 VpF1 VpF1GE


2/4, 4/8 and 4/13

VpD2 VpF2 VpF2GE

VpF3 VpF3GE

VpF4 VpF4GE

VpF5 VpF5GE

VpF6 VpF6GE

4/3

Characteristics

Safety control and protection solutions


Mini-VARIO and VARIO switch disconnectors

Characteristics

1 2 3 4

Environment

Switch type (bare type) Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Degree of protection with protection shroud Ambient air temperature Flame resistance Shock resistance 1/2 sine wave = 11 ms conforming to IEC60068-2-27 Vibration resistance 10150 Hz conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 C C gn gn

VN12 V02 VZN12 VZ02 IEC 60947-3 UL, CSA, GL TC

VN20 VZN20

V01 VZ01

V0 VZ0

VVD0 VVE0

V1 VZ1

VVD1 VVE1

IP 20 conforming to IEC 60529 - 20+ 50 960 conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 15 5 30 1 15 30

Electrical characteristics, a.c. operation


Switch type (bare type) Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Conventional thermal currents in free air (lth) and rated uninterrupted (lu) Conventional thermal current in enclosure (lthe) Rated operational power and current AC-21A/22A AC-23A 230690 V 230 V 240 V 400 V 415 V 500 V V kV A A A A/kW A/kW A/kW A/kW A/kW A/kW kW kW kW kW VN12 VZN12 690 6 12 10 12 10.6/3 10.6/3 8.1/4 8.1/4 8.9/5.5 8.6/7.5 1.5 3 4 4 30 A/ 400V A/ 400V 120 120 300 1 10 200 200 140 0.5 6 20 300 1 10 25 35 250 320 250 384 5.5 V02 VZ02 VN20 VZN20 V01 VZ01 V0 VZ0 VVD0 VVE0 V1 VZ1 VVD1 VVE1

6 20 16 20 14/4 14/4 11/5.5 11/5.5 11.9/7.5 12.3/11 3 4 5.5

8 25 20 25 19.7/5.5 19.9/5.5 14.5/7.5 14/7.5 16.7/11 17.5/15 4 5.5 7.5 7.5 11 7.5 18.9/5.5 21.8/11 21/11 32 25 32

6 7 8
Intermittent duty class

690 V Rated operational power AC -3 230/240 V 400/415 V 500 V 690 V

9 10

Characteristics Rated making capacity in normal operating AC-21A/22A/23A (I rms) conditions Rated breaking capacity AC-21A/22A/23A (I rms) Short-circuit characteristics Permissible rms short time rating (Icw) Rated making capacity under short-circuit conditions (Icm) I peak Rated conditional short-circuit current (I rms) with aM/gG fuses

A/ 140 400V/1s kA/ 400V kA/ 400V A 0.5 6 12

4/4

V2 VZ2 IEC 60947-3 UL, CSA, GL TC

VVD2 VVE2

V3 VZ3

VVD3 VVE3

V4 VZ4

VVD4 VVE4

V5

V6

VZ7 VZ20 IEC 60947-5

VZN05 VZN06

1 2 3 4

IP 20 conforming to IEC 60529 - 20+ 50 960 conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 30 1

V2 VZ2 690 8 40 32 40 25.8/7.5 24.8/7.5 29/15 28/15 28.5/18.5 17.5/15 5.5 11 15 11 30 400 320 480 1 10 50

VVD2 VVE2

V3 VZ3

VVD3 VVE3

V4 VZ4

VVD4 VVE4

V5

V6

VZ7 VZ20

VZN05 VZN06

6 63 50 63 50.3/15 48.2/15 41.5/22 40/22 44/30 25/22 11 18.5 22 18.5 80 63 80 61.2/18.5 58.5/18.5 57/30 55/30 54/37 33/30 15 22 30 125 100 125 71.9/22 68/22 68.5/37 66/37 64.5/45 42/37 22 30 37 30 175 140 160 96.6/30 92.7/30 83/45 80/45 79/55 49/45 30 37 45 37 12 10 le/AC-15 6A 6A 4A 4A 2A 1A 630 500 756 2.1 800 640 960 1250 1000 1500 2.8 1750 1400 2100 1 63 80 125 200 16 1.6 6 4

6 7 8 9 10

4/5

Characteristics (continued)

Safety control and protection solutions


Mini-VARIO and VARIO switch disconnectors

Characteristics

1 2 3 4

Electrical characteristics, d.c. operation


Switch type (bare type) Rated 24 V operational current DC-1 (L/R = 1ms) 48 V 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A VN12 VZN12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 1.5 8 12 1.5 7 10 0.6 3 8 12 12 12 12 12 12 10 12 12 1.5 3 12 0.4 1.4 1 0.3 0.4 1.2 V02 VZ02 VN20 VZN20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 2 10 20 2 8 14 0.7 4 10 20 20 20 20 20 20 14 20 20 2 4 20 0.5 1.5 2 0.4 0.6 2.4 V01 VZ01 V0 VZ0 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 9 12 25 2.5 10 16 0.8 6 12 25 25 25 25 25 25 16 25 25 2.5 5 25 0.5 1.5 3 0.5 0.8 1.6 VVD0 VVE0 V1 VZ1 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 10 16 32 3 12 20 1 8 16 32 32 32 32 32 32 20 32 32 3 6 32 0.8 2 4 0.8 1 2 VVD1 VVE1

60 V

110 V

220 V

250 V

24 V Rated operational current DC-2toDC-5 (L/R=1ms) 48 V

60 V

6
110 V

7 8 9 10

220 V

250 V

Other characteristics
Switch type (bare type) Mechanical durability (millions of operating cycles) Electrical durability in cat. AC-21 (millions of operating cycles) Electrical durability in cat. DC-1 to 5 (operating cycles) Suitable for isolation Cabling Flexible cable + cable end Solid cable Tightening torque mm2 mm2 N.m VN12 VZN12 0.05 0.05 30 000 Yes 4 4 0.7 6 10 2.1 4 4 0.7 6 10 2.1 V02 VZ02 0.1 0.1 VN20 VZN20 0.05 0.05 V01 VZ01 0.1 0.1 V0 VZ0 VVD0 VVE0 V1 VZ1 VVD1 VVE1

4/6

V2 VZ2 40 40 40 40 40 40 35 40 40 12 20 40 4 14 25 2 12 20 40 40 40 40 40 40 25 40 40 5 8 40 1 3 7 1 2 6

VVD2 VVE2

V3 VZ3 63 63 63 63 63 63 40 63 63 20 63 63 6 25 30 4 20 30 63 63 63 63 63 63 40 63 63 6 10 50 1.5 4 10 1.2 3 8

VVD3 VVE3

V4 VZ4 80 80 80 80 80 80 50 80 80 25 80 80 8 30 40 5 25 40 80 80 80 80 80 80 50 80 80 8 20 63 2 6 15 1.5 6 10

VVD4 VVE4

V5 125 125 125 125 125 125 60 125 125 30 125 125 12 40 80 3 30 50 125 125 125 125 125 125 60 125 125 10 22 70 2.2 7 16 1.6 7 12

V6 175 175 175 175 175 175 70 175 175 12 175 175 15 50 100 10 40 61 175 175 175 175 175 175 70 175 175 12 24 80 2.4 8 13 1.8 8 14

VZ7 VZ20 8 (le/DC-11) 8 (le/DC-11) 4 (le/DC-11) 2 (le/DC-11) 1 (le/DC-11) 0.8 (le/DC-11)

VZN05 VZN06

1 2 3 4

6 7 8 9 10

V2 VZ2 0.1 0.1 30 000 Yes 6 10 2.1

VVD2 VVE2

V3 VZ3 0.03 0.03

VVD3 VVE3

V4 VZ4

VVD4 VVE4

V5

V6

VZ7 VZ20 0.1 0.1 (AC-15) 30 000 (DC-11)

VZN05 VZN06 0.05 0.05

16 25 4

70 95 22.6

2 x 0.751.5 2 x 12.5 0.7

4/7

References

TeSys protection components


Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors for standard applications
Complete units
b b b b

1 2 3
VCDN20

3-pole rotary switch disconnectors, 12 to 20 A Marking on operator . Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not supplied). Degree of protection IP65.

Main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors for door mounting


Operator Handle Red, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks (4to8)
511156

lth Front plate Fixing mm mm Yellow 22.5 60 x 60 A 12 20

Reference

Weight kg 0.177 0.177

VCDN12 VCDN20

Main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors for mounting at back of an enclosure (1)
Operator Handle Red, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks (4to8) lth Front plate Fixing mm mm Yellow 22.5 60 x 60 A 12 20 Reference Weight kg 0.334 0.334

4
511157

VCCDN12 VCCDN20

Main switch disconnectors for door mounting

5 6 7
VBDN20 VCCDN20

Operator Handle Black, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks (4to8)

lth Front plate Fixing mm mm Black 22.5 60 x 60 A 12 20

Reference

Weight kg 0.177 0.177

VBDN12 VBDN20

(1) Switches supplied with a shaft extension VZN17 and a door interlock plate KZ32 (see page 4/11).
511158

8 9 10
Characteristics : pages 4/4 to 4/6 Dimensions : pages 4/22 and 4/23 Schemes : page 4/23

4/8

References (continued) 

TeSys protection components


Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors for standard applications
Switch bodies, add-on modules

812801

Switch bodies
Description 3-pole switch disconnectors Rating A 12 20 Reference VN12 VN20 Weight kg 0.110 0.110

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

VN20

Add-on modules
Description Main pole modules Rating A 12 20 Neutral pole module with early make and late break contacts 12 and 20 Reference VZN12 VZN20 VZN11 Weight kg 0.020 0.020 0.020

580586

VZN11

Earthing module Auxiliary contact block modules

12 and 20 1 N/O late make contact 1 N/C early break contact

VZN14 VZN05 VZN06

0.016 0.020 0.020 0.004

580587

Input terminal protection shrouds

For add-on pole modules or VZN26 auxiliary contact block modules (single-pole shroud) For switch bodies (3-pole shroud) VZN08

VZN14

0.007

580588

Maximum number of add-on modules that can be fitted on a switch body


VZN12 or VZN20 + VN12 or VZN05 VZN05 or VZN06 or VN20 + VZN12 or VZN20 or VZN11 or VZN05 or VZN06 + VZN14

812806

812805

VZN26

VZN08

10
Characteristics : pages 4/4 to 4/6 Dimensions : pages 4/22 and 4/23 Schemes : page 4/23

4/9

1
KCC1YZ

2
VZNpp VN12, VN20

VZN14 VZNpp

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
VZN17, VZN30

KCD1PZ

KZ32, KZ83

KAD1PZ

4/10

References

TeSys protection components


Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors for standard applications
Operators and accessories

b Degree of protection IP65. b Marking on operator . b Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not supplied). b Operator fixing by 1 22.5 hole; for other operators see pages 4/17 and 4/19. b For other accessories and empty enclosures, see pages 4/20, 4/21 and 2/5.

1 2 3

Operators for main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors


Handle Front plate mm Yellow 45 x 45

Reference KCC1YZ

Red, padlockable with 1 padlock (4to6) Red, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks (4to8)

Weight kg 0.050

Yellow 60 x 60

KCD1PZ

0.084

Operators for main switch disconnectors


Handle Black, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks (4to8) Front plate mm Black 60 x 60 Reference KAD1PZ Weight kg 0.084

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Accessories for door interlocking


Description Front plate mm

For rear fixing switch disconnectors mounted at the back of an enclosure, in addition to a direct operator
Distance enclosure back/door mm 300330 Sold in Unit lots of reference Weight kg 0.100

Shaft extensions

VZN17

400430

VZN30

0.130

Door interlock plate

45 x 45 or 60x 60 45 x 45 or 60x 60

KZ32

0.170

Plate for door mounting

KZ83

0.205

Characteristics : pages 4/4 to 4/6

Dimensions : pages 4/22 and 4/23

Schemes : page 4/23

4/11

References

TeSys protection components


VARIO switch disconnectors for high performance applications
Complete units
b b b b

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Characteristics : pages 4/4 to 4/6 Dimensions : pages 4/24 and 4/25
511161 511160

3-pole rotary switch disconnectors, 12 to 175 A Marking on operator . Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not supplied). Degree of protection IP65.

511159

Main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors for door mounting


Handle VCF0 Red, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8) Front plate mm Yellow 60 x 60 Fixing 22.5 Rating A 12 20 25 32 40 12 20 25 32 40 63 80 125 175 Reference VCD02 VCD01 VCD0 VCD1 VCD2 VCF02 VCF01 VCF0 VCF1 VCF2 VCF3 VCF4 VCF5 VCF6 Weight kg 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.560 0.560 1.200 1.200

4 screws

Red, long, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8)

Yellow 90 x 90

4 screws

VCF5

Main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors for mounting at back of an enclosure (1)
Handle Red, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8) Front plate mm Yellow 60 x 60 Fixing 22.5 Rating A 12 20 25 32 40 12 20 25 32 40 63 80 125 175 Reference VCCD02 VCCD01 VCCD0 VCCD1 VCCD2 VCCF02 VCCF01 VCCF0 VCCF1 VCCF2 VCCF3 VCCF4 VCCF5 VCCF6 Weight kg 0.392 0.392 0.392 0.392 0.392 0.527 0.527 0.527 0.527 0.527 0.440 0.680 1.320 1.320

4 screws

Red, long, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8) VCCF0

Yellow 90 x 90

4 screws

(1) Unit supplied with a shaft extension VZN17 and a door interlock plate KZ32 or KZ74 (see page 4/20).

Schemes : page 4/25

4/12

References (continued) 

TeSys protection components


VARIO switch disconnectors for high performance applications
Complete units

b 3-pole rotary switch disconnectors, 12 to 175 A b Marking on operator . b Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not supplied). b Degree of protection IP65.
Handle
511162

1
Reference VBD02 VBD01 VBD0 VBD1 VBD2 VBF02 VBF01 VBF0 VBF1 VBF2 VBF3 VBF4 VBF5 VBF6 Weight kg 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.560 0.560 1.200 1.200

Main switch disconnectors for door mounting


Front plate mm Black 60 x 60 Fixing 22.5 Rating A 12 20 25 32 40 12 20 25 32 40 63 80 125 175

Black, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8)

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

4 screws

VBD0

Red, long, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8)

511163

Black 90 x 90

4 screws

Main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors


Handle Red, padlockable with 1 padlock ( 4 to 6) Front plate mm Yellow 45 x 45 Rating A 25 32 40 63 80

For mounting in an enclosure or for modular distribution boards


Reference VVE0 VVE1 VVE2 VVE3 VVE4 Weight kg 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.530 0.530

VBF4

580534

Main switch disconnectors


Handle Black, not padlockable Front plate mm Black 45 x 45

For mounting in an enclosure or for modular distribution boards


Rating A 25 32 40 63 80 Reference VVD0 VVD1 VVD2 VVD3 VVD4 Weight kg 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.560 0.560

VVE1

Characteristics : pages 4/4 to 4/6

Dimensions : pages 4/24 and 4/25

Schemes : page 4/25

4/13

References (continued)

TeSys protection components


VARIO switch disconnectors for high performance applications
Switch bodies, add-on modules, auxiliary contacts (forcustomerassembly)

580535

Switch bodies
Description 3-pole switch disconnectors (1) Rating A 12 20 25 Reference V02 V01 V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6 Weight kg 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.500 0.500 0.900 0.900

1 2 3 4 5 6

32 V0 40 63 80
580536

125 175

Add-on modules
Description Main pole modules Rating A 12 20 25 V5 32 40 63
580537 580538

Reference VZ02 VZ01 VZ0 VZ1 VZ2 VZ3 VZ4 VZ11 VZ12 VZ13 VZ14 VZ15 VZ16

Weight kg 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.100 0.100 0.050 0.100 0.250 0.050 0.100 0.250

80 Neutral pole modules with early make and late break contacts (1) 12 to 40 63 to 80 125 and 175

VZ0

VZ11

Earthing modules

12 to 40 63 and 80 125 and 175

7
580539 580540

Auxiliary contact block modules


Description Type N/O + N/C (2) N/O + N/O Reference VZ7 VZ20 Auxiliary contact block modules with 2 auxiliary contacts Weight kg 0.050 0.050

8
VZ15 VZ20

(1) Protection shrouds are available if required: see page 4/20. (2) Late make N/O, early break N/C contacts

9 10
Characteristics : pages 4/4 to 4/6 Dimensions : pages 4/24 and 4/25 Schemes : page 4/25

4/14

References (continued)

TeSys protection components


VARIO switch disconnectors for high performance applications
Switch bodies, add-on modules, auxiliary contacts (forcustomerassembly)
Maximum number of add-on modules that can be fitted on a switch body
1 add-on module on each side of the switch body
VZ7 or VZ20 or VZ11 or VZ12 or VZ14 or VZ15 or VZ0p/VZ0 to VZ4 + + V4 + + V0 to + + + V0p + VZ7 or VZ20 or VZ11 or VZ12 or VZ14 or VZ15 or VZ0p/VZ0 to VZ4 VZ7 or VZ20 or VZ13 or VZ16 + + + + or + + V5 + + VZ7 or VZ20 or VZ13 or VZ16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

V6

2 add-on modules on each side of the switch body


VZ0p VZ0 VZ1 VZ2 VZ3 VZ4 + + + + + + VZ0p + VZ0 VZ1 VZ2 VZ3 VZ4 + + + + + V0p V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 + VZ0p + + + + + + VZ0 VZ1 VZ2 VZ3 VZ4 + + + + + VZ7 VZ7 VZ7 VZ7 VZ7 VZ7 or or or or or or VZ20 VZ20 VZ20 VZ20 VZ20 VZ20 or or or or or or VZ11 VZ11 VZ11 VZ11 VZ12 VZ12 or or or or or or VZ14 VZ14 VZ14 VZ14 VZ15 VZ15

Nota : The add-on modules mounted next to the switch body are main pole modules. Maximum of 3 main pole modules per switch body.

Characteristics : pages 4/4 to 4/6

Dimensions : pages 4/24 and 4/25

Schemes : page 4/25

4/15

1
KAp1BZ

2 3

VN12, VN20 V02V2 KCp1YZ VZN17, VZN30

KCp1LZ

KZ32, KZ83 KDp1PZ V3, V4 KCp1PZ KAp1PZ

KBp1PZ

4
VZ18, VZ31 KAF2PZ

5
KZ81 V5, V6

KCF2PZ

6 7 8

KBF2PZ VZ18, VZ31 KDF2PZ

KZ74

KBF3PZ

KDF3PZ

9
KCF3PZ

KAF3PZ

10
503798

4/16

References

Protection components
Operators, handles and front plates
(forcustomerassembly)
b Marking on operator . b Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not supplied). b Degree of protection IP65.

Mini-VARIO and VARIO switch disconnectors

Handles and front plates for main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors
Operator Handle Reference Front plate Dimensions mm Yellow 45 x 45 Fixing 22.5 4 screws Yellow 60 x 60 22.5 4 screws KCC1YZ KCE1YZ KCD1PZ KCF1PZ kg 0.050 0.040 0.082 0.075 Weight

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

For switch body VN12, VN20 V02V2

Red, padlockable with 1 padlock ( 4 to 6) Red, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8)

V3 and V4

Red, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8) Red, long, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8)

Yellow 60 x 60

4 screws

KCF2PZ

0.070

V5 and V6

Yellow 90 x 90

4 screws

KCF3PZ (1)

0.160

Handles and front plates for main switch disconnectors


For switch body VN12, VN20 V02V2 Operator Handle Reference Front plate Dimensions mm Black 60 x 60 Fixing 22.5 4 screws KAD1PZ KAF1PZ kg 0.082 0.075 Weight

Black, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8) Black, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8) Black, long, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8)

V3 and V4

Black 60 x 60

4 screws

KAF2PZ

0.070

V5 and V6

Black 90 x 90

4 screws

KAF3PZ (1)

0.160

(1) For door mounting of 63 and 80 A switch disconnectors, adapter plate KZ106 must be ordered separately (see page 4/20).

Characteristics : pages 4/4 to 4/6

Dimensions : pages 4/22 to 4/25

Schemes : pages 4/23 and 4/25

4/17

1
KAp1BZ

2 3

VN12, VN20 V02V2 KCp1YZ VZN17, VZN30

KCp1LZ

KZ32, KZ83 KDp1PZ V3, V4 KAp1PZ KCp1PZ

KBp1PZ

4
VZ18, VZ31

KAF2PZ

5
KZ81 V5, V6

KCF2PZ

6 7

KBF2PZ VZ18, VZ31 KDF2PZ

KZ74

8
KBF3PZ KDF3PZ

9
KCF3PZ

KAF3PZ

10
503799

4/18

References (continued)

Protection components
Operators, handles and front plates
(forcustomerassembly)
b Marking on operator . b Degree of protection IP65.

Mini-VARIO and VARIO switch disconnectors

Handles and front plates for Emergency stop switch disconnectors


For switch body Operator Handle Reference Front plate Dimensions mm Yellow 45 x 45 Fixing 22.5 4 screws Yellow 60 x 60 22.5 4 screws KCC1LZ KCE1LZ KDD1PZ KDF1PZ KDF2PZ kg 0.050 0.040 0.082 0.075 0.070 Weight

1 2 3 4
Weight kg 0.050 0.040 0.055 0.045 0.070

VN12, VN20 V02V2

Red, not padlockable

V3 and V4

Red, long, not padlockable Red, long, not padlockable

Yellow 60 x 60 Yellow 90 x 90

4 screws

V5 and V6

4 screws

KDF3PZ (1)

0.160

Handles and front plates for switch disconnectors


For switch body VN12, VN20 V02V2 Operator Handle Reference Front plate Dimensions mm Black 45 x 45 Fixing 22.5 4 screws Black 60 x 60 22.5 4 screws V3 and V4 Black, not padlockable Black, not padlockable Black 60 x 60 Black 90 x 90 4 screws KAC1BZ KAE1BZ KBD1PZ KBF1PZ KBF2PZ

Black, not padlockable

5 6 7 8 9 10

V5 and V6

4 screws

KBF3PZ (1)

0.160

(1) For door mounting of 63 and 80 A switch disconnectors, adapter plate KZ106 must be ordered separately (see next page).

Characteristics : pages 4/4 to 4/6

Dimensions : pages 4/22 to 4/25

Schemes : pages 4/23 and 4/25

4/19

References (continued)

Protection components
Accessories
Input terminal protection shrouds

Mini-VARIO and VARIO switch disconnectors

580583

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Description For switch bodies (3-pole shroud)

For use on V02V2 V3 and V4

Reference VZ8 VZ9 VZ10 VZ26 VZ27 VZ28 VZ29

Weight kg 0.015 0.020 0.060 0.005 0.007 0.020 0.005

VZ8 For add-on pole modules (single-pole shroud)


580584

V5 and V6 VZ02VZ2, VZ11, VZ14 VZ3, VZ4, VZ12, VZ15 VZ13, VZ16

VZ26

For contact blocks with 2 auxiliary contacts

Components for door interlocking


Description For use on

For rear fixing switch disconnectors mounted at the back of an enclosure, in addition to a direct operator
Distance enc. Sold in back/door lots of mm 1 VN12, VN20 300330 V02V2 400430 1 V02V2
580526

Unit reference VZN17 (1) VZN30 (1) VZ17 VZ30 VZ18 VZ31 VZ18 VZ31 KZ32 KZ74 Unit reference KZ83 KZ81 KZ106

Weight kg 0.100 0.130 0.075 0.125 0.170 0.215 0.170 0.215 0.177 0.020 Weight kg 0.205 0.010 0.075

Shaft extensions

300330 400430

1 1 1 1 1 1 5 5 Sold in lots of 5 5 5

V3 and V4

300320 400420

VZ18 V5 and V6

330350 430450

580585

Door interlock plates

VN12, VN20 V02V2 V3V6 Front plate dimensions mm VN12, VN20 45 x 45 or V02V2 60 x 60 V3V6 V3 and V4 60 x 60 or 90 x 90 90 x 90 For use on

Description

KZ32

Plates for door mounting of handles with 4 screw fixing Adapter plate for switch disconnectors

8 9 10
Characteristics : pages 4/4 to 4/6 Dimensions : pages 4/22 to 4/25 KZ81

580527

(1) Can be used with V02 to V2 switches.

Schemes : pages 4/23 and 4/25

4/20

References (continued)

Protection components
Accessories
Accessories for operators
Description For use on Front plate dimensions mm 45 x 45 60 x 60 90 x 90 Legend holders without legend plate Front plate 45 x 45 60 x 60 90 x 90 Silver coloured blank legend plates for engraving by customer KZ14 KZ16 KZ101 45 x 45 60 x 60 60 x 60 90 x 90 Sold in lots of 5 5 5 20 10 5 20 10 5 5 5 5 5 5

Mini-VARIO and VARIO switch disconnectors

Unit reference KZ13 KZ15 KZ103 KZ14 KZ16 KZ101 KZ76 KZ77 KZ100 KZ65 KZ66 KZ62 KZ67 Z01

Weight kg 0.060 0.065 0.070 0.060 0.065 0.070 0.020 0.010 0.005 0.037 0.033 0.033 0.064 0.050

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Legend Front plate holder with silver coloured blank legend plate

812783

KZ15

580528

KZ67

Seals

VN12, VN20 V02V2 V3 and V4 V3V6

Tightening tool

For operators with 22.5 fixing

812785

Z01

Characteristics : pages 4/4 to 4/6

Dimensions : pages 4/22 to 4/25

Schemes : pages 4/23 and 4/25

4/21

Dimensions, mounting

Safety control and protection solutions

Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors, 12and20A

Dimensions

1 2

Switch disconnectors
Switch bodies VN12, VN20 Add-on modules VZN12, VZN20 Add-on modules VZN11, VZN14 VZN05 and VZN06

46,5

45,5

62

48 56

39

12

39

12

3 4

Mounting

Switch disconnector mounted on enclosure door


VN12, VN20 Single hole fixing

1,5...5

22,5
44 74,5

6 7

VN12, VN20 4 screw fixing 45 x 45 front plate 60 x 60 front plate

1,5...5

13

12,7

36

44

62,5

36

48

8 9 10
Characteristics : page 4/4 References : page 4/14 Schemes : page 4/23

4/22

48

45,5

Mounting (continued), schemes

Safety control and protection solutions

Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors, 12and20A

Mounting (continued)
VN12, VN20 Single hole fixing

Switch disconnector mounted at back of enclosure with shaft extension VZN17 or VZN30 (clip-on mounting on 6 rail)
4 screw fixing

1 2

1,5...5

1,5...5

3 4

Shaft extension

VN12, VN20

VZN17 VZN30

Distance (e) enclosure back/door mm 300330 400430

Schemes
Switch body VN12, VN20
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

Main pole module VZN12, VZN20

Neutral pole module VZN11

Auxiliary contact blocks VZN05


13

VZN06
21 22

2/T1

4/T2

6/T3

14

6 7 8 9 10
Characteristics : page 4/4 References : page 4/14

4/23

Dimensions, mounting

Safety control and protection solutions


VARIO switch disconnectors,12to 175A

Dimensions

1 2 3 4

Switch disconnectors
Switch bodies V0p, V0 to V2 Switch bodies V3 to V6

60

55

=
74

G a

Add-on modules VZ02 to VZ4 and VZ11 to VZ16

a V3, V4 60 V5, V6 90 Add-on modules VZ7, VZ20

b 83 125

=
c 65 90

G 48 68

H 48 68

5.5 5.5

48,5

20

VZ02 and VZ01, VZ0 to VZ2, VZ11, VZ14 VZ3, VZ4, VZ12, VZ15 VZ13, VZ16

a 16 20 30

b 74 83 125

c 35 46 63

Mounting

Switch disconnector mounted on enclosure door

6 7

Single hole fixing V0p, V0 to V2

4 screw fixing V0p, V0 to V4

65

4 screw fixing 4 screw fixing 45 x 45 front plate 60 x 60 front plate V0p, V0 to V2 V0p, V0 to V4

1,5...5
12,7

1,5...5

1,5...5

22,5
44 72

36

36

48

44

c
c 60 65

37

8 9

V0p, V0 to V2 V3, V4 V5 and V6. 4 screw fixing

90 x 90 front plate

1,5...5

94

10
65
Characteristics : page 4/4 References : pages 4/14 Schemes : page 4/25

68

90

4/24

68

48

Mounting (continued), schemes

Safety control and protection solutions

VARIO switch disconnectors, 12to175A

Mounting (continued)

Switch disconnector mounted at back of enclosure


4 screw fixing V0p, V0 to V2 with shaft extension VZ17 or VZ30 (clip-on mounting on 6 rail possible for V0p to V2) Single hole fixing V3 to V4 with shaft extension VZ18orVZ31 V5 and V6 with shaft extension VZ18 or VZ31

1 2

1,5...5

1,5...5

1,5...5

94

30

100

60

3 4

Shaft extension

V02 and V01 V0toV2 V3 and V4

VZ17 VZ30 VZ18 VZ31

Distance (e) enc.back/door mm 300330 400430 300320 400420

Shaft extension V5 and V6 VZ18 VZ31

2 x 4.2 2 x 4.2 2x5 2x5

15 15 20 20

Distance (e) enc. back/door mm 300350 430450

Switch disconnectors for modular distribution boards


VVp 0 to VVp2 VVp 3 to VVp4

45 74

5,5 68 106

45
110

5,5 72

60

45 83

6 7 8 9 10

Schemes
V02 and V01 V0 to V6
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

Switch body

Main pole module


VZ02 and VZ01 VZ0 to VZ4

Neutral pole module


VZ11 to VZ13

Auxiliary contact blocks


VZ7 VZ20

13

21

13 14

14

22

2/T1

4/T2

Characteristics : page 4/4

6/T3

References : pages 4/14

24

23

4/25

Selection guide

Protection components
Fuse protection

Applications

Protection of control circuits or transformers

1 2 3
Breaking under load

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Fuse type

NF C or DIN

Cartridge fuses

1125 A

Device type

Fuse carriers

References

DF
4/29

Pages

4/26


Protection of motors Protection of motors or variable speed drives

1 2 3

Yes, only if combined with a contactor

Yes

NF C or DIN

NF C, DIN, BS or UL

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1125 A

11250 A

Fuse carriers

Switch-disconnector-fuses

LS1 and GK1


4/36

GS
4/42

4/27

Characteristics

Protection components
Fuse carriers

Fuse carrier type

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Environment characteristics
Conforming to standards Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature Conforming to IEC 60529 Storage For operation, with derating (1) Operating positions Flame resistance Without derating Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 C C C

DF8

DF10

DF14

DF22

IEC 60947-3, UL 512, CSA 22-2 n 39 TH IP 20 - 40+ 80 - 20+ 60 23 in relation to normal mounting plane 960

Pole characteristics
Fuse size Rated insulation voltage (Ui) with tubular links, a.c. or D.C. supply Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Conventional thermal current (Ith) for ambient air temperature y 40 C (1) With tubular links With aM cartridge fuses With gG cartridge fuses Rated conditional short-circuit current Conforming to IEC 60947-3 400 V 500 V 690 V Peak withstand current (dynamic stress) Conforming to IEC 60269-1 With tubular links Cabling (number of conductors x c.s.a.) Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque mm V kV 8.5 x 31.5 500 6 10 x 38 690 6 14 x 51 690 8 22 x 58 690 8

A A A

25 25 25

32 32 32

50 50 50

125 125 100

kA kA kA kA mm2 mm2 mm2 Nm

20 11 Min. 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 2.2 Max. 1 x 16 2x6 1 x 10 2x6 1 x 10 2x6

120 120 15 Min. 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 Max. 1 x 16 2x6 1 x 10 2x6 1 x 10 2x6

120 120 80 15 Min. 1 x 2.5 1 x 2.5 1 x 2.5 3.5 Max. 1 x 25 2 x 10 1 x 25 2 x 10 1 x 25 2 x 10

120 120 80 19 Min. 1 x 2.5 1 x 2.5 1 x 2.5 4 Max. 1 x 35 2 x 25 1 x 35 2 x 16 1 x 35 2 x 16

Characteristics of early break and signalling contacts DF14 AM and DF22 AM


Rated insulation voltage (Ui) a.c. supply Conventional thermal current (Ith) for ambient air temperature y 40 C (1) Rated operational current Category AC-15 Category DC-13 Definition of rated characteristics Low load operating characteristics Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Minimum voltage Minimum current Cabling V mA V A 250 5 24 V 4 3 B300 10 30 Faston connectors (1) For use in an installation with ambient temperature > 20 C, apply a derating coefficient: Maximum temperature 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C Max. relative humidity 95 % 90 % 80 % 50 % 50 % 1 0.95 0.9 0.8 0.7 Current derating coefficient 48 V 4 1 127 V 3 0.2 240 V 2.5 0.1

A A

References: pages 4/29 and 4/30

Substitution: page 4/30

Dimensions: page 4/31

Schemes: page 4/31

4/28

References
DF221NV

Protection components
Fuse carriers

Fuse carriers (1)
Conventional thermal current (Ith) A 25 Size of cartridge fuse or link mm 8.5 x 31.5 Composition Sold Unit in reference lots of 1P N 1 P + N (2) 2P 3P 3 P + N (2) 1P N 1 P + N (2) 2P 3P 3 P + N (2) 1P N 1 P + N (2) 2P 3P 3 P + N (2) 1P N 1 P + N (2) 2P 3P 3 P + N (2) 12 12 6 6 4 3 12 12 6 6 4 3 6 6 3 3 2 1 6 6 3 3 2 1 DF8 1 DF10 N DF8 1N DF8 2 DF8 3 DF8 3N DF10 1 DF10 N DF10 1N DF10 2 DF10 3 DF10 3N DF14 1 DF14 N DF14 1N DF14 2 DF14 3C (3) DF14 3NC (3) DF22 1 DF22 N DF22 1N DF22 2 DF22 3C (3) DF22 3NC (3) Weight

kg 0.061 0.071 0.132 0.122 0.183 0.254 0.061 0.071 0.132 0.122 0.183 0.254 0.140 0.150 0.290 0.280 0.420 0.570 0.218 0.238 0.456 0.436 0.654 0.892

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

106786

106788

DF101
106793

DF103N

32

10 x 38

106795

50

14 x 51

DF141

DF143NC

106823

106825

125

22 x 58

DF221

DF223NC

Fuse carriers with blown fuse indicators (neon)


Conventional thermal current (Ith) A 25 Size of cartridge fuse or link mm 8.5 x 31.5

(1) (4)
Weight kg 0.064 0.135 0.125 0.186 0.257 0.064 0.135 0.125 0.186 0.257 0.143 0.293 0.283 0.423 0.573 0.221 0.459 0.439 0.657 0.895

Composition Sold Unit in reference lots of 1P 1 P + N (2) 2P 3P 3 P + N (2) 1P 1 P + N (2) 2P 3P 3 P + N (2) 1P 1 P + N (2) 2P 3P 3 P + N (2) 1P 1 P + N (2) 2P 3P 3 P + N (2) 12 6 6 4 3 12 6 6 4 3 6 3 3 2 1 6 3 3 2 1 DF8 1V DF8 1NV DF8 2V DF8 3V DF8 3NV DF10 1V DF10 1NV DF10 2V DF10 3V DF10 3NV DF14 1V DF14 1NV DF14 2V DF14 3VC (3) DF14 3NVC (3) DF22 1V DF22 1NV DF22 2V DF22 3VC (3) DF22 3NVC (3)

106791

DF101NV

106792

DF103V

32

10 x 38

106834

106822

50

14 x 51

DF141NV
106834 106835

DF143VC 125 22 x 58

DF221NV

DF223VC

(1) Each pole can be marked. A clip-in marker holder is provided for this purpose. Clip-in markers type AB1 Rp or AB1 Gp can also be used. (2) N: neutral pole fitted with a locked tubular link as standard. (3) A letter C in the reference indicates that the fuse carrier can be fitted with auxiliary early break, blown fuse signalling and fuse present signalling contacts. (4) Operational voltage of the blown fuse indicator: 110 V...690 V.


Characteristics: page 4/28 Substitution: page 4/30 Dimensions: page 4/31 Schemes: page 4/31

4/29

References (continued), substitution 

Protection components
4

Fuse carriers

Accessories

106836

1 2

Auxiliary early break and blown fuse signalling contacts (1)


Fuse carriers Size of cartridge to be equipped fuse or link 14 x 51 DF14 (3 P or 3 P + N) DF22 (3 P or 3 P + N) Fuse carriers to be assembled DF8 DF10 DF14 DF22 22 X 58 Number of contacts 1 2 1 2 Sold in lots of 1 1 1 1 Unit reference DF14 AM1 DF14 AM2 DF22 AM1 DF22 AM2 Unit reference DF10 AP DF14 AP DF22 AP Weight kg 0.025 0.029 0.032 0.035 Weight kg 0.001 0.003 0.003

DF14 AMp

Fuse carrier assembly kits (2)


Size of cartridge fuse or link 8.5 x 31.5 10 x 38 14 x 51 22 x 58 Composition Sold in lots of 1 pin, 2clips 1 pin, 3clips 1 pin, 3clips Marking 09 AZ 12 10 10

3 4
Detail of assembly clip and pin mounting

524196

Marking accessories
Description Composition Clip-in markers Strip of 10 identical numbers or letters Sold in lots of 25 25 Unit reference AB1 Rp (3) AB1 Gp (3) Weight kg 0.002 0.002

Substitution
Fuse carriers
Old range Reference DF6 AB08 DF6 AB10 DF6 N10 GK1 CC GK1 CD GK1 CF GK1 CH GK1 DC GK1 DD GK1 DF GK1 DH GK1 EB GK1 EN GK1 EC GK1 ED GK1 EF GK1 EH GK1 FB GK1 FN GK1 FC GK1 FD GK1 FF GK1 FH Old range Reference GK1 AP2 GK1 AP3 Size of cartridge fuse or link 8.5 x 31.5 10 x 38 8.5 x 31.5 or 10 x 38 8.5 x 31.5 8.5 x 31.5 8.5 x 31.5 8.5 x 31.5 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58

Composition 1P 1P 1N 1P+N 2P 3P 3P+N 1P+N 2P 3P 3P+N 1P 1N 1P+N 2P 3P 3P+N 1P 1N 1P+N 2P 3P 3P+N

5 6 7 8 9 10
Characteristics: page 4/28 Dimensions: page 4/31

New range Reference w/o indicator DF8 1 DF10 1 DF10 N DF8 1N DF8 2 DF8 3 DF8 3N DF10 1N DF10 2 DF10 3 DF10 3N DF14 1 DF14 N DF14 1N DF14 2 DF14 3C DF14 3NC DF22 1 DF22 N DF22 1N DF22 2 DF22 3C DF22 3NC

Reference with indicator DF8 1V DF10 1V DF8 1NV DF8 2V DF8 3V DF8 3NV DF10 1NV DF10 2V DF10 3V DF10 3NV DF14 1V DF14 1NV DF14 2V DF14 3VC DF14 3NVC DF22 1V DF22 1NV DF22 2V DF22 3CV DF22 3NVC

Fuse carrier assembly kits


New range Size of cartridge fuse or link Reference DF10 AP 8.5 x 31.5 or 10 x 38 DF10 AP 8.5 x 31.5 or 10 x 38 14 x 51 DF14 AP DF10 AP 8.5 x 31.5 or 10 x 38 GK1 AP4 22 x 58 DF22 AP 14 x 51 DF14 AP GK1 AP5 GK1 AP6 14 x 51 DF14 AP 22 x 58 DF22 AP 22 x 58 DF22 AP GK1 AP9 (1) These auxiliary contacts provide the following functions: early break, blown fuse